Download DB Tools for Oracle User`s Guide

™
DB Tools for Oracle 6.1
User's Guide
Supported database systems: Oracle 7.3, 8.0, 8i, 9i, 10g, and 11g
Copyright © SoftTree Technologies, Inc. 1997-2009
All rights reserved
This page has been intentionally left blank
Contents
Contents
About this guide .......................................................................................................................... 18
Intended Audience ................................................................................................................................18
Conventions used in this document.......................................................................................................18
Abbreviations and Product Reference Terms........................................................................................18
Trademarks ...........................................................................................................................................18
DB Tools Quick Start Menu ........................................................................................................ 19
Common Dialogs and Controls.................................................................................................. 21
Application Toolbar................................................................................................................................21
Status Bar..............................................................................................................................................21
Connect to Database Dialog..................................................................................................................21
Sort Dialog.............................................................................................................................................23
Crosstab Definition Dialog .....................................................................................................................24
Updating Crosstab Definition ...........................................................................................................24
Changing the names used for the columns and rows ......................................................................24
Filter Dialog ...........................................................................................................................................26
Modify Expression Dialog ......................................................................................................................27
Zoom Dialog ..........................................................................................................................................27
Search Dialog........................................................................................................................................28
Row Descriptor Control .........................................................................................................................28
Split Control...........................................................................................................................................28
Sampling Cycle .....................................................................................................................................29
Schema Names Cache..........................................................................................................................30
Schema Selection Dialog ......................................................................................................................30
Working with data and import/export .....................................................................................................30
Sorting .............................................................................................................................................30
Filtering............................................................................................................................................31
Navigating........................................................................................................................................31
Interrupting data retrieval.................................................................................................................31
Printing ............................................................................................................................................31
Selecting text in a modifiable field....................................................................................................32
Selecting fields, columns, rows in a datasheet ................................................................................32
Copying ...........................................................................................................................................33
Editing..............................................................................................................................................33
Saving..............................................................................................................................................34
Exporting data .................................................................................................................................34
Importing data..................................................................................................................................35
Searching ........................................................................................................................................35
Zooming in/out .................................................................................................................................36
Resizing columns and rows .............................................................................................................36
Navigation Buttons...........................................................................................................................36
Customizing DB Tools Interface ............................................................................................................36
Timer Options ..................................................................................................................................37
Database Operations Options .........................................................................................................37
Editor Options ..................................................................................................................................38
Print Options ....................................................................................................................................38
DDL Export Options.........................................................................................................................39
General Options...............................................................................................................................39
-3-
Contents
Printing ..................................................................................................................................................40
Print Options ....................................................................................................................................40
Window Menu Commands ....................................................................................................................41
Table painter and table/view graphical design.......................................................................................42
Working with objects in the Table Painter workspace......................................................................42
Opening a table.......................................................................................................................42
Graphically selecting data from a table ...................................................................................43
Moving objects ........................................................................................................................43
Resizing objects ......................................................................................................................43
System menu ..........................................................................................................................43
Object popup menu.................................................................................................................43
Modifying table properties .......................................................................................................45
Opening related tables ............................................................................................................45
Closing a table ........................................................................................................................45
Keyboard alternatives .............................................................................................................46
Select Table(s) dialog............................................................................................................................47
Table Design .........................................................................................................................................47
Overview..........................................................................................................................................47
Table Design dialog elements .........................................................................................................48
Primary Key Design .........................................................................................................................50
Foreign Key Browser .......................................................................................................................50
Foreign Key Dialog ..........................................................................................................................51
DDL Reverse-Engineering.....................................................................................................................51
DDL Reverse-Engineering Options..................................................................................................52
Reverse-engineering DDL Using Popup Menu................................................................................53
View Design Dialog..........................................................................................................................53
To create new database view .................................................................................................53
To alter existing database view ...............................................................................................53
Functions in Sort and Filter Expressions ...............................................................................................54
Functions by category......................................................................................................................54
Aggregate functions ................................................................................................................54
Crosstab functions ..................................................................................................................54
Data type checking and conversion functions .........................................................................55
Date and time functions ..........................................................................................................55
Miscellaneous functions ..........................................................................................................55
Numeric functions ...................................................................................................................56
String functions .......................................................................................................................56
Asc ..........................................................................................................................................56
Char ........................................................................................................................................57
Integer.....................................................................................................................................57
IsDate......................................................................................................................................57
IsNull .......................................................................................................................................57
IsNumber ................................................................................................................................58
IsTime .....................................................................................................................................58
Long ........................................................................................................................................58
Number ...................................................................................................................................59
GetRow ...................................................................................................................................59
IsRowModified.........................................................................................................................59
IsRowNew...............................................................................................................................59
Date ........................................................................................................................................59
Time ........................................................................................................................................60
DateTime ................................................................................................................................60
-4-
Contents
Day..........................................................................................................................................61
DayName ................................................................................................................................61
DayNumber .............................................................................................................................61
DaysAfter ................................................................................................................................61
Hour ........................................................................................................................................62
Minute .....................................................................................................................................62
Month ......................................................................................................................................62
Now.........................................................................................................................................62
RelativeDate ...........................................................................................................................63
RelativeTime ...........................................................................................................................63
Second....................................................................................................................................63
SecondsAfter...........................................................................................................................63
Today ......................................................................................................................................64
Year ........................................................................................................................................64
Case........................................................................................................................................64
If ..............................................................................................................................................65
ProfileInt ..................................................................................................................................65
ProfileString ............................................................................................................................66
RGB ........................................................................................................................................66
Abs..........................................................................................................................................67
Ceiling .....................................................................................................................................67
Cos..........................................................................................................................................67
Sin...........................................................................................................................................68
Exp..........................................................................................................................................68
Fact .........................................................................................................................................68
Int ............................................................................................................................................68
Log ..........................................................................................................................................69
LogTen....................................................................................................................................69
Mod .........................................................................................................................................69
Pi.............................................................................................................................................70
Rand .......................................................................................................................................70
Round .....................................................................................................................................70
Sign.........................................................................................................................................70
Sqrt .........................................................................................................................................71
Tan..........................................................................................................................................71
Truncate..................................................................................................................................71
Fill ...........................................................................................................................................72
Left ..........................................................................................................................................72
RightTrim ................................................................................................................................72
LeftTrim...................................................................................................................................72
Len ..........................................................................................................................................73
Lower ......................................................................................................................................73
Upper ......................................................................................................................................73
Match ......................................................................................................................................73
Mid ..........................................................................................................................................75
Pos..........................................................................................................................................76
Replace...................................................................................................................................76
Right........................................................................................................................................77
Space......................................................................................................................................77
String.......................................................................................................................................77
Format Symbols ......................................................................................................................78
Trim.........................................................................................................................................80
-5-
Contents
WordCap.................................................................................................................................80
CrosstabAvg ...........................................................................................................................80
CrosstabCount ........................................................................................................................81
CrosstabMax ...........................................................................................................................81
CrosstabMin ............................................................................................................................82
CrosstabSum ..........................................................................................................................82
Operators in Sort and Filter Expressions...............................................................................................83
Arithmetic operators.........................................................................................................................83
Relational and logical operators ......................................................................................................83
Concatenation operator ...................................................................................................................84
Operator precedence in expressions ...............................................................................................84
Hot Keys and Shortcuts.........................................................................................................................84
SQL Editor and DBA Notepad .........................................................................................................85
Installation and Uninstallation ................................................................................................... 87
Installation .............................................................................................................................................87
Uninstallation.........................................................................................................................................87
Front-end: ........................................................................................................................................87
Back-end: ........................................................................................................................................87
System Requirements ...........................................................................................................................87
Minimum Hardware Requirements..........................................................................................87
Software Requirements...........................................................................................................88
The Dynamic Performance Tables..........................................................................................88
Portability ................................................................................................................................88
Connecting to Oracle databases................................................................................................ 89
Required Oracle Client Software ...........................................................................................................89
What is SQL*Net?............................................................................................................................89
What you must install?.....................................................................................................................89
SQL*Net ..................................................................................................................................89
Network Adapter Layer ...........................................................................................................89
Testing Connection Outside of DB Tools ................................................................................89
How DB Tools Talks to Oracle ..............................................................................................................89
Overview..........................................................................................................................................89
Connect to Database Dialog............................................................................................................89
Common Problems ..........................................................................................................................90
Missing network module..........................................................................................................90
Path errors ..............................................................................................................................90
Missing Required Support Files ..............................................................................................90
Improperly Installed Required Support Files ...........................................................................90
Incorrect server parameter in transaction Object ....................................................................90
Debugging...............................................................................................................................90
Special Considerations with Oracle 7.3 ...........................................................................................90
Special Considerations with IPX / SPX............................................................................................90
Special Considerations for NT 4.0 or above ....................................................................................91
Common Error Messages......................................................................................................................91
Connecting to Oracle using Oracle ODBC Drivers ................................................................................92
Configure the ODBC Data Source ...................................................................................................92
Verify Your Oracle ODBC Connection .............................................................................................92
Common Connect Errors ........................................................................................................92
Creating ODBC data source for Oracle database .................................................................................92
DB Monitor Expert ....................................................................................................................... 94
Overview ...............................................................................................................................................94
-6-
Contents
Why you have to monitor your database regularly ................................................................................94
Active Desktop ......................................................................................................................................95
Performance Graphs (Graphs menu) ....................................................................................................95
Performance Summary Graphs .......................................................................................................95
Real-time Statistics Graphs.....................................................................................................95
Recent Statistics Graphs.........................................................................................................96
Historical Statistics Graphs .....................................................................................................96
Database Actions Graph..................................................................................................................96
SQL Activity Graph ..........................................................................................................................96
SGA Memory Usage Graph.............................................................................................................96
License/Users Logged On Graph ....................................................................................................96
Rollback Segment (Gets/Writes) Graph...........................................................................................96
Rollback Segment (Hits) Graph .......................................................................................................96
Rollback Segment Transactions Graph ...........................................................................................96
Redo Log Latch (Hits) Graph...........................................................................................................97
Redo Log Latch (Misses) Graph ......................................................................................................97
CPU Usage Graph...........................................................................................................................97
Memory Usage Graph .....................................................................................................................97
Buffer Cache Graph.........................................................................................................................97
Dictionary Cache Graph ..................................................................................................................97
Recursive Calls Graph.....................................................................................................................97
Sorts Graph .....................................................................................................................................97
Waits Graph.....................................................................................................................................97
File Input/Output (Hits) Graph..........................................................................................................97
File Input/Output (Blocks) Graph .....................................................................................................97
Custom Graph .................................................................................................................................98
Exporting Graphs ..................................................................................................................................99
Background Database Performance Statistics Collection Job...............................................................99
Monitor connections and resources (Monitor menu) ...........................................................................104
Connections...................................................................................................................................104
Open Cursors ................................................................................................................................104
SQL Area.......................................................................................................................................105
Object Access................................................................................................................................105
Cached Objects .............................................................................................................................105
Application Effectiveness...............................................................................................................105
File Input/Output ............................................................................................................................105
Rollback Segments........................................................................................................................105
Rollback Transactions ...................................................................................................................106
Buffer Cache..................................................................................................................................106
Dictionary Cache ...........................................................................................................................106
Redo Log Latches..........................................................................................................................106
Recursive Calls..............................................................................................................................106
Dispatcher Processes....................................................................................................................106
Sorts ..............................................................................................................................................106
Waits..............................................................................................................................................106
Locks .............................................................................................................................................107
SGA ...............................................................................................................................................107
Custom Monitors............................................................................................................................107
Using Thresholds in Custom Performance Monitors......................................................................109
Sending Messages to Pagers ...............................................................................................109
Sending E-Mail Messages ....................................................................................................111
Sending Messages to Beepers .............................................................................................112
-7-
Contents
Performance Library ............................................................................................................................112
Enhanced Explain Plan .......................................................................................................................112
Object analysis tools ...........................................................................................................................113
Table Analyzer...............................................................................................................................113
Index Analyzer ...............................................................................................................................114
Cluster Analyzer ............................................................................................................................115
Scheduler ............................................................................................................................................116
Scheduling a new job:....................................................................................................................116
Connecting scheduler to the database. .........................................................................................117
Locking DB Monitor Expert console when you are not around. .....................................................117
To Stop a Job: ...............................................................................................................................118
Connection Manager ...........................................................................................................................118
Index Histograms ................................................................................................................................119
Data Histograms..................................................................................................................................120
Reports................................................................................................................................................121
Objects Report ......................................................................................................................121
Tables Report........................................................................................................................121
Indexes Report......................................................................................................................121
Clusters Report .....................................................................................................................122
Tablespaces Report ..............................................................................................................122
Database Files Report ..........................................................................................................122
Sequences Report ................................................................................................................122
Snapshots Report .................................................................................................................122
Synonyms Report..................................................................................................................122
Database Links Report..........................................................................................................122
Users Report .........................................................................................................................122
Profiles Report ......................................................................................................................122
Table Privileges Report.........................................................................................................122
Triggers Report .....................................................................................................................122
Procedures, Functions And Packages Report ......................................................................123
Views Report.........................................................................................................................123
Fragmentation Report ...........................................................................................................123
SGA Report...........................................................................................................................123
Parameters Report................................................................................................................123
Version Report ......................................................................................................................123
Custom Reports.............................................................................................................................123
Choosing a presentation style ...............................................................................................125
Status Analyzer ...................................................................................................................................125
Dependencies Analyzer ......................................................................................................................126
DB Trends Expert ...................................................................................................................... 128
DB Trends - Installation/Uninstallation ................................................................................................128
Upgrading DB Trends package .....................................................................................................128
Disabling DB Trends data collections ............................................................................................128
Uninstalling DB Trends package....................................................................................................128
Historical Trends .................................................................................................................................129
Table Trends .................................................................................................................................129
Index Trends..................................................................................................................................130
Cluster Trends ...............................................................................................................................130
Schema Trends .............................................................................................................................130
Tablespace Trends ........................................................................................................................130
File Trends.....................................................................................................................................131
Rollback Segment Trends .............................................................................................................131
-8-
Contents
Database Trends ...........................................................................................................................131
Custom Trend Graph .....................................................................................................................132
Selecting Objects and Spaces for Automated Trend Data Collections ..........................................133
DB Difference Expert................................................................................................................. 134
Overview .............................................................................................................................................134
Before You Begin ................................................................................................................................134
Comparison Options............................................................................................................................134
How to Analyze ...................................................................................................................................135
Understanding and Using Comparison Results...................................................................................136
DB Index Expert ......................................................................................................................... 137
Overview .............................................................................................................................................137
Command Line Parameters.................................................................................................................137
Analysis Options..................................................................................................................................138
Analysis Options for Indexes .........................................................................................................138
Analysis Options for Schemas .......................................................................................................139
How to Analyze..............................................................................................................................140
Interactive mode....................................................................................................................140
Batch mode ...........................................................................................................................140
Reports................................................................................................................................................140
Index Analysis Report....................................................................................................................140
Referential Constraints Analysis Report ........................................................................................140
Library Cache Analysis Reports ....................................................................................................141
Full Table Scans Report........................................................................................................141
Used Indexes Report ............................................................................................................141
Detailed Library Cache Analysis Report................................................................................141
Report Formats..............................................................................................................................141
DB Tuning Expert ...................................................................................................................... 142
Overview .............................................................................................................................................142
What DB Tuning Expert Can Do For You ......................................................................................142
Before You Begin...........................................................................................................................142
How To Tune Your Database ..............................................................................................................142
Tuning methodology ......................................................................................................................143
Performance Analysis Options ......................................................................................................143
Report Output Formats ..................................................................................................................143
DB Space Expert........................................................................................................................ 145
Overview .............................................................................................................................................145
Using DB Space Expert's Interface .....................................................................................................145
Tablespace Navigator....................................................................................................................145
Starting Tablespace Navigator ..............................................................................................146
Navigator Views and Properties ............................................................................................146
Context Menus ......................................................................................................................147
Working with Tablespaces and Files ...................................................................................................147
Tablespace Maps ..........................................................................................................................147
Overview ...............................................................................................................................147
Using the Tablespace Map utility ..........................................................................................148
Creating New Tablespaces............................................................................................................148
Taking Tablespaces Off-line/On-line..............................................................................................150
Dropping Tablespaces...................................................................................................................151
Adding Files to Tablespaces..........................................................................................................151
Resizing Tablespaces....................................................................................................................152
-9-
Contents
Moving and Renaming Database Files ..........................................................................................152
Converting Tablespaces ................................................................................................................153
Modifying Default Storage Parameters ..........................................................................................154
Managing User Space Quotas and Defaults..................................................................................154
Coalescing Tablespace Free Space ..............................................................................................155
Estimating Total Unused Space in All Objects...............................................................................156
Freeing Unused Space in All Objects ............................................................................................156
Emptying Tablespace Recycle Bin ................................................................................................157
Reorganizing and Defragging Tablespaces...................................................................................157
Rebuilding Tablespaces ................................................................................................................157
Moving Tablespace Objects to Another Tablespace......................................................................158
Working with Schema Objects.............................................................................................................158
Estimating Table and Index Space Requirements .........................................................................158
Dropping Schema Objects.............................................................................................................159
Moving Schema Objects Between Tablespaces............................................................................159
Rebuilding Indexes ........................................................................................................................159
Freeing Object's Unused Space ....................................................................................................159
Fixing Chained Rows.....................................................................................................................160
Working with Partitions ........................................................................................................................160
Converting Regular Tables to Tables with Partitions .....................................................................160
Converting Partitioned Tables to Regular Tables ..........................................................................163
Renaming Partitions and Subpartitions..........................................................................................164
Splitting Partitions ..........................................................................................................................164
Merging Partitions..........................................................................................................................167
Exchanging Partition and Table Data ............................................................................................168
Rebuilding Index Partitions and Subpartition .................................................................................169
Rebuilding Unusable Indexes ........................................................................................................169
Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard.............................................................................................170
Top-level reorganization options....................................................................................................170
Batch Methods for Separating Objects of Different Types .............................................................171
Objects Defragging and Free Space Defragging Strategies. .........................................................172
Error Handling Methods.................................................................................................................172
Advanced Processing Options.......................................................................................................173
Reorganization Job Scheduling .....................................................................................................174
Rebuild Tablespace Wizard.................................................................................................................174
Top-level reorganization options....................................................................................................174
Error Handling Methods.................................................................................................................175
Advanced Processing Options.......................................................................................................176
Reorganization Job Scheduling .....................................................................................................176
Move Objects Wizard ..........................................................................................................................176
Using Move Objects Wizard ..........................................................................................................177
Reorganization Job Scheduling .....................................................................................................178
Fix Chained Rows Wizard ...................................................................................................................178
Using Fix Chained Rows Wizard ...................................................................................................179
Reorganization Job Scheduling .....................................................................................................180
Working with Database Recycle Bin....................................................................................................180
Running Space Reorganization Jobs ..................................................................................................181
Job Execution Methods .................................................................................................................181
Job Logging ...................................................................................................................................182
Advantages and disadvantages of different reorganization job types ............................................182
Monitoring and Managing Space Reorganization Jobs..................................................................182
Reports................................................................................................................................................184
-10-
Contents
DB Consumer Expert ................................................................................................................ 186
Overview .............................................................................................................................................186
Managing Database Users ..................................................................................................................186
User Properties..............................................................................................................................187
Enabling and Disabling User Accounts..........................................................................................188
Forcing Users to Change Their Passwords ...................................................................................188
Granting and Revoking Roles ........................................................................................................188
Granting and Revoking Consumer Groups....................................................................................189
Granting and Revoking System Privileges.....................................................................................190
Granting and Revoking Object Privileges ......................................................................................191
Creating New Database Users ......................................................................................................193
Deleting Database Users...............................................................................................................193
Managing Database Roles ..................................................................................................................193
Role Properties ..............................................................................................................................194
Granting and Revoking Roles to Users..........................................................................................195
Granting and Revoking Roles to Roles..........................................................................................195
Granting and Revoking Consumer Groups....................................................................................195
Granting and Revoking System Privileges.....................................................................................195
Granting and Revoking Object Privileges ......................................................................................195
Creating New Database Roles ......................................................................................................196
Deleting Database Roles ...............................................................................................................196
Managing Database Profiles ...............................................................................................................196
Profile Properties ...........................................................................................................................197
Working with Profiles .....................................................................................................................198
Managing Space Usage Quotas..........................................................................................................200
Managing Resource Usage Quotas ....................................................................................................201
Working with Resource Quotas and Profiles .................................................................................203
Resource Usage Limits..................................................................................................................203
Connect & Idle Time Limits ...................................................................................................203
CPU Usage Limits.................................................................................................................203
Input/Output Limits ................................................................................................................203
Memory Usage Limits ...........................................................................................................204
Composite LimitsError! Bookmark not defined.Error! Bookmark not defined.Error! Bookmark
not defined. ...........................................................................................................................204
Resource Usage Plans .........................................................................................................205
Managing Consumer Groups ..............................................................................................................205
Consumer Group Properties ..........................................................................................................206
Assigning Users and Sessions to Consumer Groups ....................................................................206
Static Assignments................................................................................................................207
Dynamic Assignments...........................................................................................................208
Creating New Consumer Groups...................................................................................................209
Deleting Consumer Groups ...........................................................................................................209
Managing Resource Usage Plans .......................................................................................................210
Resource Plan Properties..............................................................................................................210
Linking Consumer Groups to Resource Plans...............................................................................211
Assigning CPU Service Levels to Consumer Groups ....................................................................212
Limiting Resources Available to Consumer Groups.......................................................................214
Dynamic Switching Between Consumer Groups ...........................................................................215
Time-based Resource Plan Activation...........................................................................................216
Enabling/Disabling Database Resource Manager .........................................................................217
Creating New Resource Plans.......................................................................................................217
Deleting Resource Plans ...............................................................................................................217
-11-
Contents
Security Navigator ...............................................................................................................................217
Reports................................................................................................................................................218
Users Report .................................................................................................................................220
Profiles Report ...............................................................................................................................220
Space Usage by User Report ........................................................................................................220
Users Exhausting Space Quotas Report .......................................................................................220
Top 10 Users by Space Usage ......................................................................................................221
Top 10 Users by CPU Usage ........................................................................................................221
Top 10 Users by Memory Usage ...................................................................................................221
Top 10 Users by Disk I/O (Input/Output)........................................................................................221
Space Usage Trends .....................................................................................................................222
CPU Usage Trends........................................................................................................................222
Memory Usage Trends ..................................................................................................................222
I/O Usage Trends ..........................................................................................................................222
Application Resource Consumption Report ...................................................................................222
Application Performance and Trends Reports ...............................................................................223
Database Load Balancing Report ..................................................................................................223
Top 10 Applications by CPU Usage...............................................................................................223
Top 10 Applications by Memory Usage .........................................................................................224
Top 10 Applications by Sorts .........................................................................................................224
Top 10 Applications by Disk I/O (Input/Output)..............................................................................224
DB Security Expert .................................................................................................................... 225
Overview .............................................................................................................................................225
Analyzing Effective Security Settings ..................................................................................................225
Managing Database Users ..................................................................................................................226
User Properties..............................................................................................................................226
Enabling and Disabling User Accounts..........................................................................................227
Forcing Users to Change Their Passwords ...................................................................................228
Granting and Revoking Roles ........................................................................................................228
Granting and Revoking Consumer Groups....................................................................................229
Granting and Revoking System Privileges.....................................................................................229
Granting and Revoking Object Privileges ......................................................................................230
Creating New Database Users ......................................................................................................232
Deleting Database Users...............................................................................................................232
Managing Database Roles ..................................................................................................................232
Role Properties ..............................................................................................................................233
Granting and Revoking Roles to Users..........................................................................................234
Granting and Revoking Roles to Roles..........................................................................................234
Granting and Revoking Consumer Groups....................................................................................234
Granting and Revoking System Privileges.....................................................................................234
Granting and Revoking Object Privileges ......................................................................................234
Creating New Database Roles ......................................................................................................235
Deleting Database Roles ...............................................................................................................235
Managing Database Profiles ...............................................................................................................235
Profile Properties ...........................................................................................................................236
Working with Profiles .....................................................................................................................237
DB Log Expert............................................................................................................................ 240
Overview .............................................................................................................................................240
Redo Log Configuration and Status ....................................................................................................240
Redo Log Latches ...............................................................................................................................240
Database Load History Report ............................................................................................................240
-12-
Contents
Database Load Weekly Analysis – Day by Day Comparison ..............................................................241
Checkpoints Monitor............................................................................................................................241
Database Load Trends Report ............................................................................................................241
DB Alert Expert .......................................................................................................................... 242
Overview .............................................................................................................................................242
DB Alert Installation and Usage...........................................................................................................243
Configuring DB Alert............................................................................................................................243
Databases .............................................................................................................................244
Communication Methods ......................................................................................................245
Alert Actions ..........................................................................................................................246
Log Monitor Options..............................................................................................................247
Space Monitor Options..........................................................................................................247
Database Error Monitor Options............................................................................................248
Starting DB Alert on Computer Startup ...............................................................................................249
Monitoring Alert Log Files and Trace Files ..........................................................................................250
Monitoring Free Space in Tablespaces ...............................................................................................250
Monitoring Database Errors.................................................................................................................251
DB Audit Expert ......................................................................................................................... 252
Overview .............................................................................................................................................252
System Auditing Considerations..........................................................................................................252
Before You Begin System Auditing .....................................................................................................253
Archiving system audit trail to a table ..................................................................................................253
Archiving system audit trail to a file .....................................................................................................253
Purging system audit trail ....................................................................................................................253
System Audit Options ..........................................................................................................................253
Advanced System Auditing Options ....................................................................................................254
Automatic Audit Trail Space Management.....................................................................................254
Audit Method and Storage .............................................................................................................256
Auditing Privileged Users connected as SYSDBA or SYSOPER ..................................................257
Auditing Oracle Database Errors ...................................................................................................259
Data Change Auditing .........................................................................................................................261
Before You Begin Data Auditing ....................................................................................................261
Privileges required .........................................................................................................................261
Archiving data audit trail to a table.................................................................................................262
Archiving data trail to a file.............................................................................................................262
Purging data audit trail:..................................................................................................................262
Enabling Data Change Auditing.....................................................................................................262
Disabling Data Change Auditing ....................................................................................................263
DB Patch Expert......................................................................................................................... 264
Overview .............................................................................................................................................264
Patch Analysis and Reporting .............................................................................................................264
Patch Summary Report .................................................................................................................264
Installed Patches Report................................................................................................................265
Missing Critical Patches Report .....................................................................................................265
Missing Critical and High Severity Patches Report........................................................................265
Missing Critical, High, and Medium Severity Patches....................................................................266
All Missing Patches........................................................................................................................266
Automated Alerts and Notifications .....................................................................................................266
Patch Management Tasks...................................................................................................................267
DB Job Expert ............................................................................................................................ 268
-13-
Contents
Overview .............................................................................................................................................268
Job Scheduler Console .......................................................................................................................269
Navigation techniques ...................................................................................................................269
Creating a new job.........................................................................................................................269
Modifying properties of an existing job...........................................................................................270
Toggling job disabled/enable state ................................................................................................271
Changing job privileges .................................................................................................................271
Removing an existing job...............................................................................................................272
Running a job on demand..............................................................................................................272
Stopping a running job...................................................................................................................272
Retrieving job log and statistics .....................................................................................................272
Job Monitor Installation........................................................................................................................273
Job Performance Statistics and Job Monitor Options..........................................................................273
Job Performance Statistics ...................................................................................................273
Job Monitor Options ..............................................................................................................274
Job Profiler ..........................................................................................................................................274
Navigation Techniques..........................................................................................................275
Job Reports .........................................................................................................................................275
Viewing reports: .............................................................................................................................276
Printing reports: .............................................................................................................................276
Refreshing reports data: ................................................................................................................277
Job Forecast Report ......................................................................................................................277
Job Resource Consumption Report...............................................................................................277
Job Performance and Trends Reports...........................................................................................278
Job Timing and Conflicts Report....................................................................................................278
Database Load Balancing Report (Job Distribution) ......................................................................279
Database Load Balancing Report (CPU Load) ..............................................................................279
Top 10 Jobs by CPU Usage ..........................................................................................................280
Top 10 Jobs by Memory Usage .....................................................................................................280
Top 10 Jobs by Sorts.....................................................................................................................281
Top 10 Jobs by Disk I/O (Input/Output) .........................................................................................281
DB Application Expert............................................................................................................... 282
Overview .............................................................................................................................................282
Application Monitor Console................................................................................................................283
Application Monitor Installation............................................................................................................284
Application Performance Statistics and Application Monitor Options ..................................................284
Application Performance Statistics ................................................................................................284
Application Monitor Options ...........................................................................................................285
Application Performance Reports........................................................................................................286
Application Resource Consumption Report ...................................................................................287
Application Performance and Trends Reports ...............................................................................288
Application Locks and Conflicts Report .........................................................................................288
Database Load Balancing Report ..................................................................................................289
Top 10 Applications by CPU Usage...............................................................................................290
Top 10 Applications by Memory Usage .........................................................................................290
Top 10 Applications by Sorts .........................................................................................................291
Top 10 Applications by Disk I/O (Input/Output)..............................................................................291
Application Profiler Statistics (by Application)................................................................................292
Application Profiler Statistics (by User)..........................................................................................292
Application Profiler Statistics (by Terminal / Workstation)..............................................................292
Test Data Generator .................................................................................................................. 293
-14-
Contents
Test Data Generator Overview............................................................................................................293
Working With Data Generator .............................................................................................................293
Opening an Existing Project for Modifications ...............................................................................293
Creating a New Project..................................................................................................................293
Deleting an Existing Project...........................................................................................................295
Adding Tables to a Project.............................................................................................................295
Removing Tables from a Project ...................................................................................................295
Running Data Generation and Loading Process ...........................................................................296
Data Generation Methods and Options .........................................................................................296
Truncate Table ......................................................................................................................296
Disable Triggers ....................................................................................................................296
Number of rows.....................................................................................................................296
Load method .........................................................................................................................296
Considerations for choosing optimal loading method............................................................297
Column-level Options............................................................................................................297
Data Libraries ......................................................................................................................................299
How Random Are Generated Random Values?..................................................................................302
DB Benchmark Expert............................................................................................................... 304
Overview .............................................................................................................................................304
Running DB Benchmark Expert...........................................................................................................304
Before You Begin...........................................................................................................................304
DB Zip/Unzip Expert .................................................................................................................. 307
Overview .............................................................................................................................................307
Zipping Tables.....................................................................................................................................308
Unzipping Tables.................................................................................................................................309
Using DB Zip/Unzip for Quality Assurance and Development .............................................................310
DB Copy Expert ......................................................................................................................... 311
Overview .............................................................................................................................................311
Copying Objects and Schemas ...........................................................................................................311
Getting started ...............................................................................................................................311
Copying database tables ...............................................................................................................312
Copying other objects ....................................................................................................................314
Copying groups of objects .............................................................................................................314
Copying entire schemas ................................................................................................................315
Reports................................................................................................................................................315
Objects Report ......................................................................................................................315
Tables Report........................................................................................................................315
Indexes Report......................................................................................................................315
Clusters Report .....................................................................................................................316
Tablespaces Report ..............................................................................................................316
Database Files Report ..........................................................................................................316
Sequences Report ................................................................................................................316
Snapshots Report .................................................................................................................316
Synonyms Report..................................................................................................................316
Database Links Report..........................................................................................................316
Users Report .........................................................................................................................316
Table Privileges Report.........................................................................................................316
Triggers Report .....................................................................................................................316
Procedures, Functions And Packages Report ......................................................................316
Views Report.........................................................................................................................316
Parameters Report................................................................................................................317
-15-
Contents
Version Report ......................................................................................................................317
Custom Reports ....................................................................................................................317
Additional Tools...................................................................................................................................317
Analyzing object dependencies .....................................................................................................317
Searching objects in the database.................................................................................................317
Finding invalid objects ...................................................................................................................317
Recompiling invalid objects ...........................................................................................................317
Recompile invalid objects using Database Object Navigator screen.....................................317
Recompile invalid objects using Status Analyzer utility .........................................................318
Schema reverse-engineering.........................................................................................................318
SQL Editor and Debugger......................................................................................................... 319
Overview .............................................................................................................................................319
Creating new SQL script......................................................................................................................319
Opening previously saved SQL script .................................................................................................319
Using drag-and drop............................................................................................................................319
Importing text of an existing database stored procedure, function package, package body, type, type
body or trigger .....................................................................................................................................320
Comments ...........................................................................................................................................320
Variables .............................................................................................................................................320
Edit commands, search and replace commands, go to commands ....................................................321
Supported SQL*Plus commands.........................................................................................................321
Formatting commands.........................................................................................................................322
Entering SQL.......................................................................................................................................322
Statement terminator ...........................................................................................................................322
PL/SQL blocks support........................................................................................................................323
Visual Explain Plan..............................................................................................................................323
Executing SQL ....................................................................................................................................323
Tracing SQL and collecting performance statistics..............................................................................324
Debugging SQL...................................................................................................................................325
Database Object Navigator .................................................................................................................325
DBMS Output ......................................................................................................................................329
Schema Reverse-engineering .............................................................................................................329
SQL Navigator.....................................................................................................................................330
PL/SQL Debugger ...............................................................................................................................330
PL/SQL Debugger functions ..........................................................................................................331
Using the Debugger.......................................................................................................................331
Breakpoints....................................................................................................................................331
Debugger Views ............................................................................................................................332
Stepping Through Code.................................................................................................................332
Evaluating/Modifying Variables......................................................................................................333
Stopping the Debugger..................................................................................................................333
Hot Keys ........................................................................................................................................333
Compiling Objects for Debugging ..................................................................................................334
Version Specific Debugger Features .............................................................................................335
Using drag-and drop and quick schema browser ................................................................................336
Comparing contents of SQL, TXT and other flat files ..........................................................................337
Customizing DBA Notepad..................................................................................................................337
Table Relationships .............................................................................................................................338
Table Size Estimator ...........................................................................................................................338
Database Object Finder.......................................................................................................................339
SQL Profiler................................................................................................................................ 341
-16-
Contents
Overview .............................................................................................................................................341
Setting up PL/SQL Profiler ..................................................................................................................342
Requirements........................................................................................................................342
Working with PL/SQL Profiler Projects ................................................................................................343
To open a project...........................................................................................................................343
To start a new project ....................................................................................................................344
To modify a project ........................................................................................................................344
To delete a project .........................................................................................................................344
To start a new run .................................................................................................................345
To delete a run from project...........................................................................................................345
Profiling Applications and Analyzing Results.......................................................................................346
Analyzing results............................................................................................................................346
Java Editor ................................................................................................................................. 347
Overview .............................................................................................................................................347
Java Editor Interface ...........................................................................................................................347
Java Editor Functions ..........................................................................................................................348
Compiling and Loading Java Objects Into Database...........................................................................348
Compiling Java class on the Oracle server from a Java a source code.........................................348
Load a Java class already compiled on the client..........................................................................348
File Loader.................................................................................................................................. 349
Overview .............................................................................................................................................349
Loading Files Into Database................................................................................................................349
Loading files into existing tables ....................................................................................................349
Loading files into new tables:.........................................................................................................350
LOB Viewer and Loader ............................................................................................................ 351
Overview .............................................................................................................................................351
Open LOB Table for Browsing.............................................................................................................351
Browsing and Modifying LOB Tables ..................................................................................................352
Inserting a new record into a LOB table.........................................................................................353
Updating an existing record in a LOB table ...................................................................................354
Deleting an entire record from a LOB table ...................................................................................355
Deleting a document from a LOB table..........................................................................................355
Searching documents in a LOB table ............................................................................................355
Sorting and filtering documents in a LOB table..............................................................................355
Printing documents in a LOB table ................................................................................................355
DB Tools Upgrade Assistant .................................................................................................... 356
Miscellaneous Information ....................................................................................................... 357
Technical Support ...............................................................................................................................357
Technical Support Request Form ..................................................................................................357
-17-
DB Tools for Oracle 5.0
User's Guide
About this guide
This manual describes the features of the DB Tools for Oracle product, including how to use the graphical
user interface, available tools, functions and reports, how to install and configure optional back-end
components.
Intended Audience
This document is for Oracle Database Administrators, Database Managers, and Database Developers.
Conventions used in this document
This section describes the style conventions used in this document.
Italic
An italic font is used for filenames, URLs, emphasized text, and the first usage of technical terms.
Monospace
A monospaced font is used for code fragments and data elements.
Bold
A bold font is used for important messages, names of options, names of controls and menu items, and
keys.
User Input
Keys are rendered in bold to stand out from other text. Key combinations that are meant to be typed
simultaneously are rendered with "+" sign between the keys, such as:
CTRL F
Keys that are meant to be typed in sequence will be separated with commas, for example:
Alt+S, H
This would mean that the user is expected to type the Alt and S keys simultaneously and then to type the H
key.
Graphical symbols
- This symbol is used to indicate DBMS specific options and issues and to mark useful auditing tips.
- This symbol is used to indicate important notes.
Abbreviations and Product Reference Terms
DBMS – Database Management System
Oracle – This refers to all supported Oracle® database servers
The terms ‘DB Tools for Oracle’ and ‘DB Tools’ are used interchangeably in this document – they both refer
to the same product]
Trademarks
DB Tools for Oracle, DB Audit, DB Audit Expert, DB Mail for Oracle, 24x7 Automation Suite, 24x7
Scheduler, SoftTree SQL Assistant are trademarks of SoftTree Technologies, Inc.
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX is the registered trademark of the X/Open Consortium.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
All other trademarks appearing in this document are trademarks of their respective owners. All rights
reserved.
-18-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Tools Quick Start Menu
The Quick Start menu provides a quick and
convenient way to access most DB Tools graphical
components with just 2 mouse-clicks.
DB Tools Quick Start menu is normally started
automatically on the computer startup and it runs as
a small icon in the right-down corner of your screen.
To quickly access DB Tools components use any of
the following methods:
•
Right-click the icon and then selected in the
DB Tools popup menu specific component
you want to use.
•
Double-click on the icon to open DB Tools
Launch Pad. The Launch Pad screen
provides direct access to all available
components and also it provides quick
access to 20 most recently opened SQL
and Java files. To start a specific DB Tools
component double on that component
name or icon. To open a recent file switch
to the files view and double-click on the file
name. Double-clicking on a SQL file will
open that file in DB Tools SQL Editor and
Debugger. Double-clicking on a Java or
JSP file will open that file in DB Tools Java
Editor.
-19-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
-20-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Common Dialogs and Controls
Application Toolbar
The toolbar displays buttons that duplicate commands in the menus. The buttons provide quick and easy
access for commands.
Active toolbar items appear as 2D graphics until you move the mouse pointer over them. Disabled menu
items have a silhouetted, engraved appearance and do not respond to the mouse pointer.
Tip: To get help on the function of any toolbar button, rest the mouse pointer over the required button
for a moment. DB Monitor Expert will display a tool-tip describing this button function.
Status Bar
The status bar displays the following information:
•
Echo progress of work
•
Current cursor position in the DBA Notepad in row:column format.
•
Time left before first scheduled job run. "Off " indicates that there is when no jobs currently scheduled.
•
Current date and time.
Connect to Database Dialog
Use the Connect dialog box to establish connections to your Oracle database servers. The same dialog box
is used in all DB Tools components. The dialog can be displayed as a separate window or be embedded as
page in a graphical multi-step component wizard.
Based on the information entered into this dialog, DB Tools automatically creates new and updates existing
database profiles. The profile information is saved in the system registry. A database profile is a named set
of connection parameters stored in the system registry under DB Tools key. On consecutive runs of any DB
tools component you can pull the required profile name from the Profile drop-down list and then click the
Connect button to establish a connection to your database server.
Profile – Descriptive database connection name. Enter a descriptive name for a database you connect to,
for example Data Warehouse, Dept. DB, etc. The profile name can contain any text up to 50 characters
long, including spaces. If the profile already exists, select it from the Profile drop-down list: DB Tools will
automatically populate the rest of the connection dialog fields.
-21-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Client Type– Type of the Oracle
database client software installed on your
computer. DB Tools uses Oracle client
software to communicate with your
Oracle database servers. For more
information on this process read How DB
Tools Talks to Oracle topic.
Important Notes: Do not confuse
Oracle client software version
installed on your computer with the
Oracle database server version you
are connecting to. Always choose the
proper client version in the Client
Type drop-down box.
In case if you have multiple Oracle clients
installed and don't want DB Tools to
guess which one of them to use for the
connection use the Browse
button
to locate the correct client. You must select the BIN directory containing Oracle client files. Note that if you
use the Browse function and correctly locate your Oracle client BIN DB Tools will automatically determines
your Oracle client version and select the correct value in the Client Type drop-down list.
Depending on the selected client type DB Tools internally uses different database drivers for different Oracle
client versions.
For ODBC connections select ODBC value for the client Type. Please note that all ODBC drivers use the
same Oracle client software used by DB Tools native database drivers. For more information on how to
configure ODBC connections see Connecting to Oracle using Oracle ODBC driver topic.
Important Notes: ODBC connections are currently supported for backward compatibility with previous
DB Tools versions. ODBC connections are usually unreliable and should be avoided whenever possible. It is
highly recommended that you always use native database
Database – Choose the desired database server name from the server drop-down box. If you cannot find
your server name in the list, type it in the edit field. You should enter the same name that you enter in
SQL*Plus and in other Oracle tools. This name is often called Oracle TNS Name. You can optionally enter
the complete TNS string instead of the name. In the latest case the string must be entered as a single line.
Connect As – This parameter controls database connection mode. In most situations you should use
Normal connection mode. When connecting to Oracle 9i and up databases using SYS user account always
pick SYSDBA connection mode. Oracle will not allow you to connect as SYS in the Normal mode.
Important Notes:
• SYSDBA and SYSOPER connections are only available with the Oracle 9i and 10g client software.
You must have Oracle 9i or better client installed on your system in order to use this option.
• Because of the Oracle restrictions you cannot use Oracle client 10g or better to connect to old
Oracle database versions 8i and prior. To connect to and work with these databases you must
have an older version of the Oracle client software installed on your system. Fortunately to connect
to Oracle 8i database or prior version as SYS user you don't need to use the SYSDBA option. If
you wish you may have multiple Oracle clients installed on your computer. As mentioned earlier in
such situations use the Browse button to select the directory containing Oracle client software that
you want to use for the connection.
User – For non-trusted connections, provide the database user name for the server you are
connecting to. For trusted connections, do not enter anything in this field.
-22-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Password – For non-trusted connections, provide the password for the user or login name. For trusted
connections, do not enter anything in this field.
Remember my password – Use this option to allow DB Tools to remember your database password so
that next time you connect to the database you don't have to type it in again. If this option is checked, the
password is stored in the local system registry along with other profile information.
Note: This information is only as secure as the secured access to your computer. If you share this
computer with other non-privileged users, do not use this option as it compromises your system security.
Sort Dialog
For advanced sort, double-click the column from column list. The modify expression dialog box will appear.
See functions topic for help on functions syntax and usage.
-23-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Crosstab Definition Dialog
Updating Crosstab Definition
1.
2.
Use drag and drop to fill in the boxes for Columns, Rows, and Values.
Click OK button. DB Tools changes the definition of the crosstab.
Tip: When you define a crosstab with more than one column, the order of the columns in the Columns
box of the Crosstab Definition dialog box governs the way DB Tools group the columns. To let DB Tools
define the most effective expressions, make the column that contains the grouping values (for example,
year) the first column in the Columns box and the column that contains the values to be grouped (for
example, bytes) second.
Changing the names used for the columns and rows
Sometimes names of columns in the database are not very user-friendly and may not be meaningful. You
can change the names that are used to label rows and columns in Crosstab so you better understand the
data.
To change the names used in crosstabs:
1.
Double-click the name of the column in the Source Data box in the Crosstab definition dialog box.
The New Name dialog box displays.
-24-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2.
3.
User's Guide
Specify the name you want to be used to label the corresponding column. You can have multipleword labels by using underscores: underscores are replaced by spaces in the Preview tab and
during execution.
Click OK button. DB Tools changes the column name in the Source Data box and anywhere else
the column is used.
Notes:
• When DB Tools generates a Crosstab, the columns and rows are automatically totaled for you.
• There are five special functions you can use only in crosstabs: CrosstabAvg, CrosstabCount,
CrosstabMax, CrosstabMin, and CrosstabSum.
For advanced definition, double-click the column from the Columns, Values or Rows lists. The modify
expression dialog box will appear. See functions topic for help on functions syntax and usage.
-25-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Filter Dialog
To specify a filter:
1. Define the filter by entering text in the filter definition box and inserting the operators, symbols,
functions and column numbers where appropriate.
Tip: You can use the following syntax to reference the original value of a column in any
expression:
column.original - where column is the name of the column.
You can use column numbers instead of column names. Prefix column number with # symbol:
#2 - substitutes department_head_id column which goes second in select statement as
department.head_id
2.
Repeat the procedure until the complete filter expression is defined.
Tip: To verify the expression without saving it, click the Verify button. A message displays,
telling you whether the expression is valid.
3.
Click OK. The syntax is verified. If there is an error in the syntax, a message displays. If no errors
are found, the Filter Definition dialog box closes and DB Tools applies the filter.
-26-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Modify Expression Dialog
Build an expression using operators and embedded functions. You can paste column names and functions
from the Functions and Columns lists. To refer to the value of a column in a specific row:
Enter: columnname [integer] where columnname is the name of the column and integer indicates the current
row.
Tip: A negative integer indicates a previous row. An integer preceded by a plus sign (+) indicates a
successive row.
To verify the expression without closing the dialog box:
Click Verify. A message box displays indicating whether the expression is valid.
Example: if ( status = 'INVALID', -1, id )
Zoom Dialog
-27-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
See also:
Working with data and export
Search Dialog
See also:
Working with data and export
Row Descriptor Control
See also:
Navigation section from Working with data and export topic
Split Control
For your convenience DB Tools provides split control that you use to view two parts of a datasheet or report
simultaneously. The split handle is displayed in the lower left corner between the left edge and the horizontal
scroll bar.
To split the visible area into two panes with separate scrollbars, place mouse pointer over the split handle
and drag it to the right.
-28-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
See also:
Navigation section from Working with data and export topic
Sampling Cycle
All monitors and real-time graphs by default perform automatic sampling. To trigger sampling manually,
select File/New Refresh command (shortcut: CTRL N). To change sampling frequency (refresh rate), do the
following:
1
Select Tools/Options command or simply click the Options button on the toolbar
. An Option
dialog box will appear.
2
Click on the Timer tab page.
3
Select required monitor name from the Screen drop-down list.
4
Enter appropriate number of seconds in the Interval field. Note that you can set timer interval from 1
second to 2.7 hour (9999 seconds)
5
Click the OK button
Tip: To completely disable automatic sampling, enter 0 in the Interval field.
-29-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Schema Names Cache
For improving overall system performance DB Tools by default caches database schema names. This
means that DB Tools retrieves schema names only once. There are two kinds of schema caches. One is for
all database schemas and another is for schemas that own database tables. Schema name caching is
optional. You can turn on/off this feature in the program Options dialog.
Schema Selection Dialog
Schema selection dialog provides you with flexibility necessary when dealing with large Oracle databases.
You can select one or more schemas for which DB Monitor Expert will generate the chosen report or run the
requested analysis or search operation. In addition, schema selection dialog displays summary statistics for
each schema.
To select multiple schemas
Uncheck Report All checkbox. Hold down the CTRL key, and then click each schema you want to select.
To select range of schema, hold down the SHIFT key and then click on first and last schema from the range.
To select all schemas use shortcut CTRL +, to deselect all schemas use shortcut CTRL -.
Note: In order to select all schemas in the database you either selection of all schemas from the list or
check Report All checkbox. However maximum number of selected schemas from the list may not exceed
255, opposite to unlimited number when you check Report All checkbox.
To find a schema:
To quickly find the required schema, type schema name in search box. DB Monitor Expert will scroll to first
match that starts with typed text.
Working with data and import/export
Sorting
You can sort the rows of your datasheet by the data in one or more adjacent columns.
For simple sort by one column, click the header of the field you want to sort by. The arrow down appears
over the header indicating data sorted in ascending order. Click the header again to sort descending. The
arrow up appears over the header indicating data in descendant order.
-30-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
For complex sorts by two or more columns or even by expressions, click View/Sort menu. The sort dialog
box will appear. Drag and drop columns from the source data list box to the columns list box. Check the
ascending column (check box) next to the dragged column/expression to sort ascending or leave it blank to
sort descending. For advanced sort, double-click the column from column list. The modify expression dialog
box will appear. See functions topic for help on functions syntax and usage.
Filtering
You can limit the data you see in your datasheet by filtering it. To apply filter, click View/Filter menu. The
specify filter dialog box will appear. That dialog box is similar to the modify expression dialog box. See
modify expression dialog box for valid expression examples. See functions topic for help on functions syntax
and usage.
Navigating
To navigate trough data in a datasheet you can use standard keyboard navigation keys. For quick scrolling
to the required row, you can use either navigation buttons on the bottom side or click Edit/Go To Row
command in the menu.
For your convenience DB Tools provides split control that you use to view two parts of a datasheet
simultaneously. The split handle is displayed in the lower left corner between datasheet’s left edge and the
horizontal scroll bar. To split the visible area into two panes with separate scrollbars, place mouse pointer
over the split handle and drag it to the right.
The current row always has arrow symbol displayed over the row header.
.
To move between fields use TAB key (this is applicable only if the datasheet is modifiable).
Interrupting data retrieval
To interrupt the long running data-retrieval, use View/Stop Retrieving command (shortcut F9) or click the
Stop button on the application toolbar.
Printing
Any DB Tools screen can be printed. Use File/Print command or shortcut CTRL P. You can preview how it
will look when printed by choosing File/Print Preview.
-31-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
See: Print topic for information on print and print preview options.
Selecting text in a modifiable field
1
Selecting text in a modifiable field by using the mouse
•
Any amount of text - Drag over the text
•
A word - Double-click the word
2
Selecting text in a modifiable field by using shortcut keys
•
Select text by holding down SHIFT and pressing the key that moves the insertion point.
•
To extend a selection
Press
One character to the right
SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW
One character to the left
SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
To the end of a word
CTRL SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW
To the beginning of a word
CTRL SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
To the end of a line
SHIFT+END
To the beginning of a line
SHIFT+HOME
One line down
SHIFT+DOWN ARROW
One line up
SHIFT+UP ARROW
Selecting fields, columns, rows in a datasheet
Selected fields, columns and rows have black background and white text color. Data in selected areas can
be copied to the clipboard for sharing with other Windows programs.
Click on the column header while holding down the CTRL key to select the entire column. To select a row,
click on the row header. To select range of rows, first select first row, then hold down SHIFT key and click on
the last row in the range. You may have any combination of selected columns, rows and individual fields
Tip: To preserve existing selection and select additional rows, columns or fields, always remember to
hold down CTRL key before you click on column, field or row header.
To select all rows click Edit menu then Select all command.
-32-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Example datasheet with selected data
Copying
Use Edit/Copy (shortcut: CTRL C) command to copy selected data to the Windows Clipboard. Copied data
have tab-separated columns with a return at the end of each row.
Editing
You can edit data in your result datasheets and save them back to the database. However, not every
datasheet can be modifiable. All modifiable datasheets as well as all input fields have white background. All
not modifiable datasheets and input fields have gray background. When DB Tools executes your SELECT
query from the DBA notepad window and executing SQL commands or retrieves data from the selected
table (see Quick data view and data manipulation), it checks the following conditions:
•
The result set comes from a single table (Yes/No)
•
The table has primary key or unique constraint (Yes/No)
When both conditions evaluate to Yes DB Tools knows how to update the table if any changes will be made.
In that case, the result datasheet can be modified, otherwise DB Tools prevents making data changes in the
datasheet.
In non-modifiable datasheet, symbol
is displayed in the upper left corner.
You can use all standard Windows shortcuts for working with data, such as copy (CTRL C), paste (CTRL V),
cut (CTRL X), undo (CTRL Z), and redo (CTRL Y). DB Tools supports multi-level Undo/Redo operations.
Use the following techniques to manipulate rows of data:
Action
Select File/New Row command (shortcut: CTRL
N)
Select File/Delete Row command (shortcut:
CTRL D)
Right mouse click on any row causes context
menu appears. Select Insert Row from the menu
Right mouse click on any row causes context
menu appears. Select Delete Row from the menu
Result
Insert a new row before current row
Delete current row
Insert a new row before clicked row
Delete clicked row
For your convenience DB Tools displays row modification status over the row header. The following table
describes supported row statuses:
Picture
Row Status
Newly inserted blank row
Newly inserted and modified row
Retrieved and modified row
Save Action
[None]
INSERT
UPDATE
-33-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Example of a changed datasheet
Saving
Select File/Save (shortcut: CTRL S) to save made changes. If a database error occurs during the save
operation, DB Tools automatically executes the ROLLBACK command and displays the error message,
explaining the problem. If the save operations succeeds then the database COMMIT is automatically
executed.
Exporting data
You can export data from your result datasheets to a number of popular file formats (see table bellow). You
also can copy part or all of the contents of any datasheet (all reports are regular datasheets) and paste it
into another Windows application by way of the Windows Clipboard function. See previous topics Selecting
fields, columns, rows in a datasheet and Copying data.
File Extension
CSV
DBF
DBF
DIF
XLS
HTM
SQL
SLK
TXT
WKS
WK1
WMF
File Format
Comma-separated values
DBASE-II format
DBASE-III format
Data Interchange format
Microsoft Excel format
Text with HTML formatting (HTML table)
SQL syntax (insert statements)
Microsoft Multiplan format
Tab-separated columns with a return at the end of each row
Lotus 1-2-3 format
Lotus 1-2-3 format
Windows Metafile format
To Export to a File:
1.
Select File/Export (shortcut: ALT+F, R) from the menu. The standard Save dialog opens:
-34-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2.
3.
User's Guide
Specify the file name and choose file format by selecting one from the Save File as Type drop
down list.
Click the OK button to save the result set to the specified file format.
See also:
DBA notepad window and executing SQL commands
Quick data view and data manipulation
Importing data
You can import data to your result datasheets from a number of popular file formats (see table bellow).
File Extension
CSV
DBF
DBF
TXT
File Format
Comma-separated values
DBASE-II format
DBASE-III format
Tab-separated columns with a return at the end of each row
To Import from a File:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select File/Import (shortcut: ALT+F, I) from the menu. The standard Open File dialog opens:
Specify the file name and choose file format by selecting one from the Open File as Type drop
down list.
Click the OK button to import data to the active datasheet.
Select File/Save (shortcut: CTRL S) from the menu or simply click the Save
button to save
imported rows to the database.
Note: Number of columns in the import file must equal or less than number of columns in the
datasheet. You cannot save imported data in the database when the datasheet is not updateable, in other
words when the SELECT statement for the datasheet does not include all primary key columns.
See also:
Exporting Data
DBA notepad window and executing SQL commands
Quick data view and data manipulation
Searching
Full search:
1.
Select Edit/Find Text (shortcut: CTRL F) command from the menu or click the Find button on
the application toolbar.
A search dialog box will appear.
2.
Type in the text you want to search for.
3.
Choose the required search options
4.
Click the Find Next button to start searching. Note that the search is performed in all columns
of the active datasheet. The search is not case sensitive.
5.
If specified text is found, the search dialog box continues staying on top so you can review the
found text and continue searching if needed. The found text is highlighted on the report and
the report is automatically advanced to the page where the text is found. You can keep clicking
the Find Next button to continue searching for the next occurrences of the specified text,
otherwise click the Close button to stop search.
See metacharacters and sample patterns topic for help on valid search patterns.
-35-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Quick search: this search is performed only in one column.
1.
To run a quick search, right-click on the column in which you want to find something. A popup
menu will appear.
2.
Select the Quick Search command. The Quick Search dialog box will appear.
3.
Type in the text you want to search for.
4.
Click the OK button. Note that search will be performed in the clicked column only starting
forward from the clicked row.
Zooming in/out
You can "zoom in" to get a close-up view of your data or "zoom out" to see more of the page at a reduced
size. Click View/Zoom menu. A zoom dialog box will appear. Select appropriate magnification and click OK
button
Resizing columns and rows
To change column width, place mouse pointer over edge of column header and drag it to obtain required
width.
You can use the mouse to change the height of the rows. Place mouse pointer over row grid line and drag it
to obtain required height.
Navigation Buttons
Customizing DB Tools Interface
The application can be reconfigured to some extent. You can customize the following features:
•
Application toolbar. For help on this see application toolbar topic.
•
Timer interval for real-time monitors and graph as well as you can customize number of checkpoints for
real-time graphs (see timer section bellow).
•
How DB Tools performs various database operations (see database operations section bellow).
•
DBA Notepad font (see editor section bellow).
•
Printing (see print section bellow).
•
Debugging
-36-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Timer Options
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click the Timer tab.
From the Screen drop-down list box select
one of the available real-time monitors or
graphs you want to customize.
Specify required refresh rate in the Timer
Interval field. Note that 0 will stop the timer
of the selected screen.
Specify required number of checkpoint in
the Checkpoints field. Note that the
Checkpoints field is available only for realtime performance graphs.
Click the Apply button to save settings.
If you want to customize another screen,
repeat step 1 to 4.
Database Operations Options
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the Database tab.
Check asynchronous operation box to allow
DB Monitor Expert perform asynchronous
operations on your database. Note that not
all environments support asynchronous
operations.
Correct value in the blocking factor field.
The blocking factor determines the number
of rows that DB Monitor Expert report or
result datasheet can fetch from the
database at one time. Choosing right block
factor can improve performance when
accessing database.
Choose the check memory on retrieve
option to enable memory check. If the
check is enabled then DB Monitor Expert
will check free memory after each 10
retrieved rows. This process slows
performance, but ensures that there will not
be insufficient memory problem.
Enter appropriate for your system value in
the Lower Limit field. DB Monitor Expert
interrupts data retrieval when the memory
check option is enabled and amount of free
memory is less then specified in the Lower
Limit field.
Click the Apply button to save settings.
-37-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Editor Options
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the Editor tab.
To change font in the DBA Notepad click
the Change button. A standard Windows
font dialog box will appear.
Choose required font.
Click the OK to close font dialog.
Click the OK button to save settings.
Print Options
You may disable output for grid lines when printing
DB Monitor Expert reports, graphs, and datasheets.
1. Click the General tab.
2. Uncheck the print grid lines box to disable
printing of grid lines.
3. Check the auto-zoom box to allow DB
Tools automatically zoom out the
documents that do not fit across the page.
Note that this affects only print output.
4. By default, most graphs have black
background for improved on screen
viewing. Check the reverse graph colors
box if you want Tools print graphs on white
background.
5. Click the OK button to save settings.
See: Print topic for information on other print and
print preview options.
-38-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DDL Export Options
On this tab, you can set defaults for DDL (data
definition language) generated by Tools when
extracting shema, table, and view syntax.
1.
Click the DDL Export tab.
2.
Check required DDL options you want to
make default.
3.
Click the OK button to save settings.
General Options
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the General tab
Check the prompt on exit box if you want
DB Monitor Expert asks confirmation for
quitting.
Check the prompt for schema box if you
want DB Monitor Expert to display Select
Schema dialog for reports and tools.
Click the OK button to save settings.
-39-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Printing
Choose right printer
Select File/Print Setup command. A Printer Setup dialog box will appear. From printer list, select a printer
and click OK button.
Note: Most print setup options are accessible in print preview mode only (see next section). When you
use File/Print (shortcut: CTRL P) command print defaults are used. Each time when you print from the print
preview mode, print options dialog box appear. You can choose print options for the document, which is
being printed.
Preview a document before printing
To display each page as it looks when printed, choose Print Preview.
Prevent a document from flowing onto an additional printed page
If the screen page is too wide to fit on one printed page and only a small amount of text appears on the next
page, you may narrow column width for some columns. To narrow column put mouse pointer over right edge
of the column header and drag it to the left until it reaches required width. If the screen page is much wider
than printed page you can use Data/Zoom command to "zoom out" the document so you will see more of
the document at a reduced size on each page.
Print Options
Print Options Dialog
-40-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Print a range of pages or print specific pages only
Under Page Range, specify the portion of the document you want to print. Enter the page numbers or page
ranges you want to include, or both. You can separate by commas individual pages and page ranges. For
example, to print pages 1, 2, and 5 through 10, enter: "1,2, 5-10". The empty string means print all. From the
Range Include drop-down list box choose what pages to print within the required range. Values are: print
all, print all even pages; print all odd pages.
Print more than one copy at a time
•
Collate
- Whether printing is collated. Note that collating is usually slower since the print is
repeated to produce collated sets.
•
Copies
- The number of copies to be printed.
Print To File
When you print to a file, a standard select file name dialog box appears. Enter name of file or click Cancel
button to cancel printing. Later you can copy file to the required printer port.
Print Margins
•
Bottom - Width of the bottom margin on the printed page.
•
Left - Width of the left margin on the printed page.
•
Right - Width of the right margin on the printed page.
•
Top - Width of the top margin on the printed page.
Note: When you are in the print preview mode, you can use drag-and-drop to visually adjust page
margins. You must have rulers visible (keep the "ruler visible" option tuned on). Place mouse pointer over
resize arrows displayed on the rulers. Drag it to adjust margins as needed.
Print Preview - Margin Marks
Other Print Options
•
Orientation - Print orientation.
•
Paper Size - A size of the paper that will be used for the output.
•
Paper Source - The printer's bin that will be used as the paper source.
•
Print Quality - Indicating the quality of the output. Note that higher quality is usually slower.
•
Scale - An integer specifying the scale of the printed output as a percent. The scaling percentage is
passed to the print driver. If you have problems with scaling, you may be using a driver that does not
support scaling.
Window Menu Commands
The New Window command opens a new DB Monitor Expert frame window. So you can connect to a
different Oracle database and monitor two or more databases simultaneously.
The Cascade command layers sheet windows inside DB Monitor Expert frame window so each title bar is
visible. In addition, it arranges icons of minimized sheets across the bottom of the frame. To activate a sheet
click sheet's title bar or use hot key SHIFT TAB to move between sheets.
The Layer command layers the sheets that are not minimized so that each sheet completely covers the one
below it. In addition, it arranges icons of minimized sheets across the bottom of the frame. You can use hot
key SHIFT TAB to move between sheets.
-41-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The Tile Horizontally command arranges sheet windows inside DB Monitor Expert frame window
horizontally in equal sizes to fit on your screen. In addition, it arranges icons of minimized sheets across the
bottom of the frame. To activate a sheet, click sheet's title bar.
The Tile Vertically command arranges sheet windows inside DB Monitor Expert frame window vertically in
equal sizes to fit on your screen. In addition, it arranges icons of minimized sheets across the bottom of the
frame. To activate a sheet, click sheet's title bar.
The Arrange Icons command arranges icons of minimized sheet windows across the bottom of the DB
Monitor Expert frame window.
Table painter and table/view graphical design
To open Table painter select Tools/Table Painter command either in SQL Editor & Debugger or in DB
Monitor Expert components (shortcut: CTRL T)
Working with objects in the Table Painter workspace
In the Table painter, you can:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Graphically display tables and views in the database
Graphically display relationships diagrams
Open and close tables, including tables related to a selected table
Drop tables and views
Create, alter, and drop primary keys, foreign keys, and indexes
Alter tables and views
Add/modify comments for existing tables and views
Extract tables and views definitions to the system clipboard
Graphically select columns for data manipulation
Opening a table
When you first open the Table painter, the Select Tables dialog box displays listing all the tables and views
in the current database that you have access to. You can create a new table or view, open existing tables
and views or alter existing table or view.
To open a table or view:
1. Choose schema from Owner drop-down list.
2. Select one or more table/view names in the table list. To select multiple tables, hold down the
CTRL key, and then click each object you want to select. To select range of objects, hold down the
SHIFT key and then click on first and last object from the object list. To select all objects use
shortcut CTRL +, to deselect all objects use shortcut CTRL -.
3. Click OK button or press ENTER key.
To add more tables and views to already open Table painter select Objects/Table/Views... command from
the application menu or simply click
icon. The Select Tables dialog box will appear again. Repeat steps
from 1 to 3.
-42-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Graphically selecting data from a table
Select one or more columns in the table/view columns list and then click Objects/Data Manipulation...
command, or right-click the table. The table popup menu will appear. Select Data Manipulation...
command. DB Monitor Expert will create data grid for selected columns and retrieves data from the
database. See Working with data topic for details. Note that if the table has the primary key or unique
constraint then the result set will be updateable. The result set from a view never will be updateable.
Moving objects
You can move an object around the workspace by dragging it with the mouse. For example, to move a table,
press the left mouse button on the title bar for the table and drag the table, to move an index press the left
mouse button on the index icon and drag the icon.
Resizing objects
You can resize an object in the workspace by dragging one of its corners or alternatively select Size
command from the system menu of the object and use keyboard navigation keys to change object size.
System menu
To invoke objects system menu click on the icon in upper left corner of the table.
You can also select following menu items from the table system menu
Move command - use this command to move the object by using keyboard
Size command - use this command to resize the object by using keyboard
Close command - use this command to close the object and its child icons such as index and referential
integrity constraints.
Select All - use this command to select all columns in the table for data manipulation. See data
manipulation topic for details.
Deselect All - use this command to deselect all previously selected columns.
Object popup menu
When you point at the table/view name or index/key icon and press the right mouse button, you display the
popup menu for the object. The contents of this menu is different for different kind of objects
-43-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
•
•
•
User's Guide
Table popup menu
Command
Description
Table Design
Opens table design dialog
Drop Table
Drops table
Data Manipulation
Creates data grid for selected columns and retrieves data from the database.
See data manipulation topic for details. Note that if the table has the primary
key or unique constraint then the result set will be updateable.
Export Syntax To Log
Opens DDL export dialog and exports the specified table properties to the
specified file. The export is appended to the end of the file
Zoom
Opens zoom dialog
Close
Closes selected table
Help
Invokes program help
View popup menu
Command
Description
View Design
Opens view design dialog
Drop View
Drops view
Data Manipulation
Creates data grid for selected columns and retrieves data from the database.
See data manipulation topic for details. Note that the result set will not be
updateable.
Export Syntax To Clipboard
Opens DDL export dialog and exports specified view properties to the system
clipboard
Zoom
Opens zoom dialog
Close
Closes selected view
Help
Invokes program help
Referential key popup menu
Command
Description
Show Definition
Displays key definition in a message box.
Open Referenced Table (for
foreign keys only)
Opens and expand the primary key table.
Open Dependent Table(s) (for
primary keys only)
Opens and expands all tables in the database containing foreign keys that
reference the selected primary key.
-44-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
•
User's Guide
Drop Key
Drops key
Alter Key
Currently not supported
Help
Invokes program help
Index popup menu
Command
Description
Show Definition
Displays index definition in a message box.
Drop Index
Drops index
Alter Index
Currently not supported
Help
Invokes program help
Modifying table properties
You can modify the properties of the table that is selected in the workspace. Use right mouse click on the
table invoking table popup menu. From the menu select Table Design command. A table design dialog will
appear.
Opening related tables
When working with tables containing keys, you can easily open related tables.
To open the table that a particular foreign key references:
1.
2.
3.
Open and expand the table containing the foreign key.
Click the right mouse button on the icon representing the foreign key.
Select Open Referenced Table command from the popup menu. DB Monitor Expert will open and
expand the primary key table.
To open all tables referencing a particular primary key:
1.
2.
3.
Open and expand the table containing the primary key.
Click the right mouse button on the button representing the primary key.
Select Open Dependent Table(s) command from the popup menu. DB Monitor Expert will open
and expands all tables in the database containing foreign keys that reference the selected primary
key.
Closing a table
You can remove a table from the workspace. This action only removes the table graphical presentation from
the Table painter workspace. It does not drop the table from the database.
To close a table:
1.
2.
Use right-click on the table. DB Monitor Expert will display the popup menu.
Select Close command from the popup menu.
-45-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
or
1.
Double click on the icon in the table/view left upper corner.
2.
Click on the icon the table/view left upper corner. DB Monitor Expert will display objects system
menu.
Select Close command from the system menu.
or
3.
Keyboard alternatives
DB Monitor Expert provides keyboard alternatives to common workspace activities:
To
Do this
Select a table or view or key
Press TAB to move left to right among the opened
tables and views, or press SHIFT+TAB to move right
to left
Add new table or view to the Table painter
Press ALT+O, T
Browse an index or key
Press TAB or SHIFT+TAB to select the index or key
to browse and press ENTER
Scroll in the painter workspace
If you open more tables and views than can be
displayed in the Table painter workspace at one
time, you can scroll up or down to view all the tables
and views. To scroll up, press UP ARROW. To scroll
down, press DOWN ARROW. In addition you can
use PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys for fast
scrolling.
See also:
Table relationships
Quick data view and data manipulation
DDL Extraction
Table difference analyzer
Table space estimation
Data analysis - data histogram
Index analysis - index histogram
-46-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Select Table(s) dialog
This dialog used to select one or multiple tables, and whenever applicable views and synonyms and return
the selected to the previous screen. Current selection is always highlighted.
To quickly locate the required object choose object's owner name from the Owner drop-down list. This will
set a filter by the schema name and reduce the number of listed objects. You can also use the Search field
to locate the object. As you type object name in the field DB Tools will automatically scroll the list and
highlight the nearest match.
Tips:
• To select a single object single click the required object. Click the OK button to close the dialog and
return to the previous screen.
• To select a range of objects listed one after another click the first object, then while holding down
the SHIFT key click the last object. All objects in the selected range will become highlighted. If
necessary you can use the mouse to scroll the table list while or before holding down the SHIFT
key. Do not use the Owner and Search options at this time. Click the OK button to close the dialog
and return to the previous screen.
• To select non-consecutive objects hold down the click on the first object, then while holding down
the CTRL key click all required objects. All clicked objects will become highlighted. If necessary you
can use the mouse to scroll the table list while or before holding down the CTRL key. Do not use
the Owner and Search options at this time. Click the OK button to close the dialog and return to
the previous screen.
• To quickly select/unselect all objects in the list use CTRL + and CTRL – keyboard shortcuts. If you
have a filter set using the Owner drop-down the selected will apply to visible objects names only.
Table Design
Overview
Use the Table Design dialog to create and alter database tables by defining columns, column comments,
and table constraints. In addition, you can use that dialog to rename database tables. You can open Table
-47-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Design dialog window from Table painter.
Table Design dialog elements
•
Name: Type the name of the table you want to create or a new name for the opened table.
•
Owner: Select the owner for the table from the user names in the drop-down list. Note that you cannot
change the owner for already existing table.
•
Table definition grid: Each row of the table definition grid represents a column in the table you are
creating or altering. The grid contains the following columns:
Column Name
Enter the name of the column. Each column name must be unique within the table. The maximum
name length is limited to 30 characters.
Type
Click the Type column to select a valid Oracle data type from the drop down list. Type is the type of
data that will be placed in this column. For example, the data type NUMBER is used for a column in
which the data will always be numerical. The data type for an address column would be CHAR
because this will contain both numerical and alphabetical characters.
Size
Enter the number of characters or bytes necessary to hold your data. For NUMBER data types,
data size includes the total number of digits on both the left and right side of the decimal point.
Scale
For NUMBER data types, enter the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
Default
This is the default value for the column that should be entered in case none is specified. This
feature is useful if a column cannot be null.
Not Null
Check this box to specify if this column cannot be null.
Unique
Check this option if the column stores unique values only. DB Monitor Expert will create unique
constraint for this column.
Primary Key
A set of columns used to enforce uniqueness of rows. The combination of column values is unique
for each row in the table. The primary key is the most frequently used means of accessing rows.
This field is also used to sort your table and to keep you from duplicating records. Primary keys can
be made up of a single column or several columns and are used to locate specific rows of data. An
example of a primary key would be a column in a table for a product ID number as long as no two
products have the same ID number.
To graphically design the primary key, click on the Primary Key button to start Primary Key
Definition dialog. Note that order in which you check primary key columns is significant.
The number in the first field designates the position of this column in the primary key that uniquely
identifies a row in the table.
-48-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Foreign Key
Click Foreign Key button to start Foreign Key Browser from which you can select existing keys,
drop them or create new ones. Use the New button on Foreign Key Browser to open Foreign Key
Definition dialog
Check Condition
Enter a combination of one or more expressions and logical operators that evaluate to TRUE,
FALSE, or unknown. You can make entries here when creating a new table. However, once a table
has been created, you cannot edit the check condition of existing columns. An example of a check
condition statement follows:
ORDER_ID IS NOT NULL
ORDER_DATE < SYSDATE
TOTAL>=0
Comments
Enter any comments for this column.
•
Insert button: Click this button to insert new row before current in the definition grid. Note that this
button is available only for the new table that has not been created yet.
•
Add button: Click this button to add new row at the end of the definition grid. Note that this button is
available only for the table that has been created already.
•
Delete button: Click this button to remove the current row from the definition grid. However you may not
remove columns that have been created already.
•
Primary Key button: To graphically design the primary key, click on the Primary Key button to start
Primary Key Definition dialog. Note that order in which you check primary key columns is significant.
•
Foreign Key button: Click this button to start Foreign Key Browser from which you can select existing
keys, drop them or create new ones. Use the New button on Foreign Key Browser to open Foreign Key
Definition dialog.
•
OK button: Click this button to save changes in the database. This will attempt to create a new table or
alter existing table, which is being opened in the Table Design dialog.
•
Cancel button: Click this button to close the dialog and cancel all changes if any.
-49-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Primary Key Design
The number in the first field designates the position of this column in the primary key that uniquely identifies
a row in the table.
Foreign Key Browser
-50-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Foreign Key Dialog
The number in the first field of the primary key table designates the position of this column in the primary key
that uniquely identifies a row in the table.
The number in the first field of the foreign key table designates the position of this column in the foreign key
that must match position of matching column in the referenced primary key.
DDL Reverse-Engineering
Both SQL Editor and DB Monitor Expert can be used to reverse-engineer tables, views and most other
database objects. They support a number of alternative reverse-engineer methods. Don any of the following
to extract table or view definition:
1.
Open table or view you want to reverse-engineer in the Table painter.
2.
Select Objects/Export Syntax to Clipboard command
1.
Open Database Navigator tool using Tools/Database Navigator menu or simply by pressing F7
Shortcut.
2.
Navigate to schema and table you want to reverse-engineer. Click on the Code tab page. To
customize which options are included in the generated script use global system Options dialog
(Tools/Options menu); DDL Export Options Page. See Customization topic for detail.
or
-----------------or
1.
Open Database Navigator tool using Tools/Database Navigator menu or simply by pressing F7
Shortcut.
2.
Navigate to schema and table you want. Right-click the object and then select Generate and
Copy/CREATE command in the popup menu. Click on the Code tab page. To customize which
options are included in the generated script use global system Options dialog (Tools/Options
menu).
-51-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
-----------------or
1.
Open that table or view in the Table painter. Select Objects/Export Syntax to Clipboard
command (Shortcut: ALT O, S) from the program menu. Alternatively, you can right-click on the
table or view graphical presentation. DB Monitor Expert will display the popup menu from which
you can select Export Syntax To Clipboard command. The DDL Export Options dialog will
appear.
2.
Choose which options are included in the generated script. Note that the DDL Export Options
dialog options default to options specified in the program preferences. See Customization topic for
detail.
3.
Click OK button. The extracted DDL will be exported to the system clipboard and the clipboard
viewer will be launched. If you want you can paste the clipboard contents to the DBA Notepad or
another application.
DDL Reverse-Engineering Options
-52-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Reverse-engineering DDL Using Popup Menu
1.
2.
3.
In Database Object Navigator select the object you want to reverse-engineer.
Right-click the object icon or name displayed in the left-side tree-view.
From the Popup Menu select Generate & copy SQL/CREATE command. This will copy reverseengineered SQL commands required to create the selected object.
View Design Dialog
View design dialog is used for creation and/or alteration of the database views.
To create new database view
1.
To start View design dialog launch Table painter first. Select view owner from the Owner dropdown list. DB Monitor Expert will display list of available database tables and view. Click on the
New View button. New view dialog box will appear.
2.
Type name of the view in the Name field.
3.
Type or paste from the clipboard, SQL select statement for the view. Make sure that the SQL
statement does not end with a semicolon (;).
4.
Click Create button.
To alter existing database view
1.
To start View design dialog launch Table painter first. Select view owner from the Owner dropdown list. DB Monitor Expert will display list of available database tables and view. Highlight
required view in the Table/View list. Click on the Alter View button. Alter view dialog box will
appear.
2.
Type or paste from the clipboard, SQL select statement for the view. Make sure that the SQL
statement does not end with a semicolon (;).
3.
Click Alter button.
-53-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Functions in Sort and Filter Expressions
Functions by category
You can use the following functions in sort and filter expressions. The functions are organized in the
following categories.
Aggregate
Crosstab
Data type checking and conversion functions
Day, date, and time functions
Miscellaneous functions
Numeric functions
String functions
See also:
Operators
Aggregate functions
Do not use the following functions in sort and filter expressions. They are not supported in such expressions.
Avg
Count
CumulativePercent
CumulativeSum
First
Large
Last
Max
Median
Min
Mode
Percent
Small
StDev
StDevP
Sum
Var
VarP
See also:
Functions by category
Crosstab functions
You can use the following functions only in user-defined reports that have Crosstab presentation style.
CrosstabAvg
CrosstabCount
CrosstabMax
CrosstabMin
CrosstabSum
-54-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
See also:
Functions by category
Data type checking and conversion functions
Asc
Char
Date
DateTime
Integer
IsDate
IsNull
IsNumber
IsTime
Long
Number
String
Time
See also:
Functions by category
Date and time functions
Date
DateTime
Day
DayName
DayNumber
DaysAfter
Hour
Minute
Month
Now
RelativeDate
RelativeTime
Second
SecondsAfter
Time
Today
Year
See also:
Functions by category
Miscellaneous functions
Case
If
ProfileInt
ProfileString
RGB
-55-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
See also:
Functions by category
Numeric functions
Abs
Ceiling
Cos
Exp
Fact
Int
Log
LogTen
Mod
Pi
Rand
Round
Sign
Sin
Sqrt
Tan
Truncate
See also:
Functions by category
String functions
Fill
Left
LeftTrim
Len
Lower
Match
Mid
Pos
Replace
Right
RightTrim
Space
String
Trim
Upper
WordCap
See also:
Functions by category
Asc
Desription: Converts the first character of a string to its ASCII integer value.
Syntax: Asc ( string )
-56-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
Argument
Description
string
The string for which you want the ASCII value of the first character
User's Guide
Return value: Integer. Returns the ASCII value of the first character in string.
Usage: Use Asc to test the case of a character or manipulate text and letters. To find out the case of a
character, you can check whether its ASCII value is within the appropriate range.
Char
Description: Converts an integer to a character.
Syntax: Char ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The integer you want to convert to a character
Return value: String. Returns the character whose ASCII value is n.
Integer
Description: Converts the value of a string to an integer.
Syntax: Integer ( string )
Argument
Description
string
The string you want returned as an integer
Return value: Integer. Returns the contents of string as an integer if it succeeds and 0 if string is not a
number.
IsDate
Description: Tests whether a string value is a valid date.
Syntax: IsDate ( string )
Argument
Description
string
A string whose value you want to test to determine
whether it is a valid date
Return value: Boolean. Returns TRUE if datevalue is a valid date and FALSE if it is not.
IsNull
Description: Reports whether the value of a column or expression is NULL.
-57-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Syntax: IsNull ( any )
Argument
Description
any
A column or expression that you want to test to determine
whether its value is NULL
Return value: Boolean. Returns TRUE if any is NULL and FALSE if it is not.
Usage: Use IsNull to test whether a user-entered value or a value retrieved from the database is NULL.
IsNumber
Description: Reports whether the value of a string is a number.
Syntax: IsNumber ( string )
Argument
Description
string
A string whose value you want to test to determine
whether it is a valid number
Return value: Boolean. Returns TRUE if string is a valid number and FALSE if it is not.
IsTime
Description: Reports whether the value of a string is a valid time value.
Syntax: IsTime (timevalue)
Argument
Description
timevalue
A string whose value you want to test to determine
whether it is a valid time
Return value: Boolean. Returns TRUE if timevalue is a valid time and FALSE if it is not.
Long
Description: Converts the value of a string to a long.
Syntax: Long ( string )
Argument
Description
string
The string you want returned as a long
Return value: Long. Returns the contents of string as a long if it succeeds and 0 if string is not a valid
number.
-58-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Number
Description: Converts a string to a number.
Syntax: Number ( string )
Argument
Description
string
The string you want returned as a number
Return value: A numeric data type. Returns the contents of string as a number. If string is not a valid
number, Number returns 0.
GetRow
Description: Reports the number of a row in which processing is performed.
Syntax: GetRow ( )
Return value: Long. Returns the number of a row if it succeeds, 0 if no data has been retrieved or added,
and -1 if an error occurs.
IsRowModified
Description: Reports whether the row has been modified.
Syntax: IsRowModified ( )
Return value: Boolean. Returns TRUE if the row has been modified and FALSE if it has not.
Example: To filter out only modified rows, set filter expression as following:
IsRowModified ( )
IsRowNew
Description: Reports whether the row has been newly inserted after last save or retrieve.
Syntax: IsRowNew ( )
Return value: Returns TRUE if the row is new and FALSE if it was retrieved from the database.
Example: To filter out only newly inserted rows, set filter expression as following:
IsRowNew ( )
Date
Description: Converts a string whose value is a valid date to a value of data type date.
Syntax: Date ( string )
Argument
Description
string
A string containing a valid date (such as Jan 1, 1998, or
12-31-99) that you want returned as a date
-59-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Return value: Date. Returns the date in string as a date. If string does not contain a valid date, Date returns
NULL.
Usage: The value of the string must be a valid date.
Valid dates can include any combination of day (1-31), month (1-12 or the name or abbreviation of a month),
and year (two or four digits). Leading zeros are optional for month and day. If the month is a name or an
abbreviation, it can come before or after the day; if it is a number, it must be in the month location specified
in the Windows control panel. A four-digit number is assumed to be a year.
If the year is two digits, then program chooses the century, as follows. If the year is between 00 and 49,
program assumes 20 as the first two digits; if it is between 50 and 99, DB Monitor Expert assumes 19. If
your data includes dates before 1950, such as birth dates, always specify a four-digit year so that DB
Monitor Expert interprets the date as intended.
DB Tools handles years from 1000 to 3000 inclusive.
An expression has a more limited set of data types than the functions that can be part of the expression.
Although the Date function returns a date value, the whole expression is promoted to a DateTime value.
Therefore, if your expression consists of a single Date function, it will appear that Date returns the wrong
data type. To convert the date without the time, choose an appropriate convert format.
Time
Description: Converts a string to a time data type.
Syntax: Time ( string )
Argument
Description
string
A string containing a valid time (such as 8AM or 10:25)
that you want returned as a time data type. Only the hour
is required; you do not have to include the minutes,
seconds, or microseconds of the time or AM or PM. The
default value for minutes and seconds is 00 and for
microseconds is 000000. AM or PM is determined
automatically
Return value: Time. Returns the time in string as a time data type. If string does not contain a valid time,
Time returns 00:00:00.
DateTime
Description: Combines a date and a time value into a DateTime value.
Syntax: DateTime ( date {, time} )
Argument
Description
date
A valid date (such as Jan 1, 1998, or 12-31-99) or a blob
variable whose first value is a date that you want included
in the value returned by DateTime
time (optional)
(optional) A valid time (such as 8AM or 10:25:23:456799)
or a blob variable whose first value is a time that you want
included in the value returned by DateTime. If you include
a time, only the hour portion is required. If you omit the
minutes, seconds, or microseconds, they are assumed to
be 0s. If you omit AM or PM, the hour is determined
-60-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
according to the 24-hour clock
Return value: DateTime. Returns a DateTime value based on the values in date and optionally time. If time
is omitted, DateTime uses 00:00:00.000000 (midnight).
Usage: For information on valid dates, see Date function.
Day
Description: Obtains the day of the month in a date value.
Syntax: Day (date )
Argument
Description
date
The date from which you want the day
Return value: Integer. Returns an integer (1-31) representing the day of the month in date.
DayName
Description: Determines the day of the week in a date value and returns the weekday's name.
Syntax: DayName (date )
Argument
Description
date
The date for which you want the name of the day
Return value: String. Returns a string whose value is the name of the weekday (Sunday, Monday, and so
on) for date.
DayNumber
Description: Determines the day of the week of a date value and returns the number of the weekday.
Syntax: DayNumber (date )
Argument
Description
date
The date from which you want the number of the day of
the week
Return value: Integer. Returns an integer (1-7) representing the day of the week of date. Sunday is day 1,
Monday is day 2, and so on.
DaysAfter
Description: Determines the day of the week of a date value and returns the number of the weekday.
Syntax: DaysAfter ( date1, date2 )
-61-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
Argument
Description
date1
A date value that is the start date of the interval being
measured
date2e
A date value that is the end date of the interval
User's Guide
Return value: Long. Returns a long containing the number of days date2 occurs after date1. If date2 occurs
before date1, DaysAfter returns a negative number.
Hour
Description: Obtains the hour in a time value. The hour is based on a 24-hour clock.
Syntax: Hour ( time )
Argument
Description
time
The time value from which you want the hour
Return value: Integer. Returns an integer (00-23) containing the hour portion of time.
Minute
Description: Obtains the number of minutes in the minutes portion of a time value.
Syntax: Minute ( time )
Argument
Description
time
The time value from which you want the minutes
Return value: Integer. Returns the minutes portion of time (00 to 59).
Month
Description: Determines the month of a date value.
Syntax: Month ( date )
Argument
Description
date
The date from which you want the month
Return value: Integer. Returns an integer (1 to 12) whose value is the month portion of date.
Now
Description: Obtains the current time based on the system time of the client machine.
-62-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Syntax: Now ( )
Return value: Time. Returns the current time based on the system time of the client machine.
RelativeDate
Description: Obtains the date that occurs a specified number of days after or before another date.
Syntax: RelativeDate ( date, n )
Argument
Description
date
A date value
n
An integer indicating the number of days
Return value: Date. Returns the date that occurs n days after date if n is greater than 0. Returns the date
that occurs n days before date if n is less than 0.
RelativeTime
Description: Obtains the time that occurs a specified number of seconds after or before another time.
Syntax: RelativeTime ( time, n )
Argument
Description
time
A time value
n
A long number of seconds
Return value: Time. Returns the time that occurs n seconds after time if n is greater than 0. Returns the time
that occurs n seconds before time if n is less than 0. The maximum return value is 23:59:59.
Second
Description: Obtains the number of seconds in the seconds portion of a time value.
Syntax: Second ( time )
Argument
Description
time
The time value from which you want the seconds
Return value: Integer. Returns the seconds portion of time (00 to 59).
SecondsAfter
Description: Determines the number of seconds one time occurs after another.
Syntax: SecondsAfter ( time1, time2 )
-63-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
Argument
Description
time1
A time value that is the start time of the interval being
measured
time2
A time value that is the end time of the interval
User's Guide
Return value: Long. Returns the number of seconds time2 occurs after time1. If time2 occurs before time1,
SecondsAfter returns a negative number.
Today
Description: Obtains the system date and time.
Syntax: Today ( )
Return value: DateTime. Returns the current system date and time.
Year
Description: Determines the year of a date value.
Syntax: Year ( date )
Argument
Description
date
The date from which you want the year
Return value: Integer. Returns an integer whose value is a four-digit year adapted from the year portion of
date if it succeeds and 1900 if an error occurs.
If the year is two digits, then program chooses the century, as follows. If the year is between 00 to 49,
program assumes 20 as the first two digits; if it is between 50 and 99, program assumes 19.
Usage: Obtains the year portion of date. DB Monitor Expert handles years from 1000 to 3000 inclusive. If
your data includes dates before 1950, such as birth dates, always specify a 4-digit year so that Year function
(and other functions) interprets the date as intended.
Case
Description: Tests the values of a column or expression and returns values based on the results of the test.
Syntax:
Case ( column WHEN value1 THEN result1 { WHEN value2 THEN result2 { ...}} { ELSE resultelse} )
Argument
column
WHEN
valuen
Description
The column or expression whose values you want to test.
Column can be the column name or the column number
preceded by a pound sign (#). Column can also be an
expression that includes a reference to the column.
Column is compared to each valuen
Introduces a value-result pair. At least one WHEN is
required
One or more values that you want to compare to values of
column. A value can be:
-64-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
•
•
•
•
•
User's Guide
A single value
A list of values separated by commas (for example, 2,
4, 6, 8)
A TO clause (for example, 1 TO 20)
IS followed by a relational operator and comparison
value (for example, IS>5)
Any combination of the above with an implied OR
between expressions (for example, 1,3,5,7,9,27 TO
33, IS>42)
THEN
Introduces the result to be returned when column matches
the corresponding valuen
resultn
An expression whose value is returned by Case for the
corresponding valuen. All resultn must have the same
data type
ELSE (optional)
(optional) Specifies that for any values of column that
don't match the values of valuen already specified, Case
returns resultelse
resultelse
An expression whose value is returned by Case when the
value of column doesn't match any WHEN valuen
expression
Return value: The data type of resultn. Returns the result you specify in resultn.
Usage: If more than one WHEN clause matches column, Case returns the result of the first matching one.
Note:
Function Case is similar to the ORACLE's Decode function.
If
Description: Evaluates a condition and returns a value based on that condition.
Syntax: If ( boolean, truevalue, falsevalue )
Argument
Description
boolean
A boolean expression that evaluates to TRUE or FALSE
truevalue
A string containing the value you want returned if the
boolean expression is TRUE
falsevalue
A string containing the value you want returned if the
boolean expression is FALSE
Return value: The data type of truevalue or falsevalue. Returns truevalue if boolean is TRUE and falsevalue
if it is FALSE. Returns NULL if an error occurs.
ProfileInt
Description: Obtains the integer value of a setting in the specified profile file.
Syntax: ProfileInt ( filename, section, key, default )
Argument
Description
-65-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
filename
A string whose value is the name of the profile file. If you
do not specify a full path, ProfileInt uses the operating
system's standard file search order to find the file
section
A string whose value is the name of a group of related
values in the profile file. In the file, section names are in
square brackets. Do not include the brackets in section.
Section is not case-sensitive
key
A string whose value is the name of a group of related
values in the profile file. In the file, section names are in
square brackets. Do not include the brackets in section.
Section is not case-sensitive
default
An integer value that ProfileInt will return if filename is not
found, if section or key does not exist in filename, or if the
value of key cannot be converted to an integer
User's Guide
Return value: Integer. Returns default if filename is not found, section is not found in filename, or key is not
found in section, or the value of key is not an integer. Returns -1 if an error occurs.
Usage: Use ProfileInt or ProfileString to get configuration settings from a profile file.
ProfileString
Description: Obtains the string value of a setting in the specified profile file.
Syntax: ProfileInt ( filename, section, key, default )
Argument
Description
Filename
A string whose value is the name of the profile file. If you
do not specify a full path, ProfileString uses the operating
system's standard file search order to find the file
Section
A string whose value is the name of a group of related
values in the profile file. In the file, section names are in
square brackets. Do not include the brackets in section.
Section is not case-sensitive
Key
A string whose value is the name of a group of related
values in the profile file. In the file, section names are in
square brackets. Do not include the brackets in section.
Section is not case-sensitive
default
An string value that ProfileString will return if filename is
not found, if section or key does not exist in filename
Return value: String, with a maximum length of 4096 characters. Returns the string from key within section
within filename. If filename is not found, section is not found in filename, or key is not found in section,
ProfileString returns default. If an error occurs, it returns the empty string ("").
Usage: Use ProfileInt or ProfileString to get configuration settings from a profile file.
RGB
Description: Calculates the long value that represents the color specified by numeric values for the red,
green, and blue components of the color.
-66-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Syntax: RGB ( red, green, blue )
Argument
Description
red
The integer value of the red component of the required
color
green
The integer value of the green component of the required
color
blue
The integer value of the blue component of the required
color
Return value: Long. Returns the long that represents the color created by combining the values specified in
red, green, and blue. If an error occurs, RGB returns NULL.
Usage: The formula for combining the colors is:
Red + (256 * Green) + (65536 * Blue)
Use RGB to obtain the long value required to set the color for text and drawing objects. You can also set an
object's color to the long value that represents the color. The RGB function provides an easy way to
calculate that value. The value of a component color is an integer between 0 and 255
Abs
Description: Calculates the absolute value of a number.
Syntax: Abs ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The number for which you want the absolute value
Return value: The data type of n. Returns the absolute value of n.
Ceiling
Description: Determines the smallest whole number that is greater than or equal to a specified limit.
Syntax: Ceiling ( n )
Argument
Description
N
The number for which you want the smallest whole
number that is greater than or equal to it
Return value: The data type of n. Returns the smallest whole number that is greater than or equal to n.
Cos
Description: Calculates the cosine of an angle.
-67-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Syntax: Cos ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The angle (in radians) for which you want the cosine
Return value: Double. Returns the cosine of n.
Sin
Description: Calculates the sine of an angle.
Syntax: Sin ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The angle (in radians) for which you want the sine
Return value: Double. Returns the sine of n.
Exp
Description: Raises e to the specified power.
Syntax: Exp ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The power to which you want to raise e (2.71828)
Return value: Double. Returns e raised to the power n.
Fact
Description: Determines the factorial of a number.
Syntax: Fact ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The number for which you want the factorial
Return value: Double. Returns the factorial of n.
Int
Description: Determines the largest whole number less than or equal to a number.
Syntax: Int ( n )
-68-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
Argument
Description
n
The number for which you want the largest whole number
that is less than or equal to it
User's Guide
Return value: The data type of n. Returns the largest whole number less than or equal to n.
Log
Description: Determines the natural logarithm of a number.
Syntax: Log ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The number for which you want the natural logarithm
(base e). The value of n must be greater than 0
Return value: Double. Returns the natural logarithm of n. An execution error occurs if n is negative or zero.
Inverse: The inverse of the Log function is the Exp function.
LogTen
Description: Determines the base 10 logarithm of a number.
Syntax: LogTen ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The number for which you want the base 10 logarithm.
The value of n must not be negative
Return value: Double. Returns the decimal log of n.
Obtaining a number: The expression 10^n is the inverse for LogTen(n). To obtain n given number (nbr =
LogTen(n)), use n = 10^r.
Mod
Description: Obtains the remainder (modulus) of a division operation.
Syntax: Mod ( x, y )
Argument
Description
x
The number you want to divide by y
y
The number you want to divide into x
Return value: The data type of x or y, whichever data type is more precise.
-69-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Pi
Description: Multiplies pi by a specified number.
Syntax: Pi ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The number you want to multiply by pi
(3.14159265358979323...)
Return value: Double. Returns the result of multiplying n by pi if it succeeds and -1 if an error occurs.
Usage: Use Pi to convert angles to and from radians.
Rand
Description: Obtains a random whole number between 1 and a specified upper limit.
Syntax: Rand ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The upper limit of the range of random numbers you want
returned. The lower limit is always 1. The upper limit
cannot exceed 32,767
Return value: A numeric data type, the data type of n. Returns a random whole number between 1 and n.
Usage: The sequence of numbers generated by repeated calls to the Rand function is a computergenerated pseudo-random sequence.
Round
Description: Rounds a number to the specified number of decimal places.
Syntax: Round ( x, n )
Argument
Description
x
The number you want to round
n
The number of decimal places to which you want to round
x
Return value: Decimal. If n is positive, returns x rounded to the specified number of decimal places. If n is
negative, returns x rounded to (-n+1) places before the decimal point. Returns -1 if it fails.
Sign
Description: Determines the sign of a number. Sign reports whether a number is negative, zero, or positive.
Syntax: Sign ( n )
-70-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
Argument
Description
n
The number for which you want to determine the sign
User's Guide
Return value: Integer. Returns a number (-1, 0, or 1) indicating the sign of n.
Sqrt
Description: Calculates the square root of a number.
Syntax: Sqrt ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The number for which you want the square root
Return value: Double. Returns the square root of n.
Usage: Sqrt(n) is the same as n^.5.
Taking the square root of a negative number causes an execution error.
Tan
Description: Calculates the tangent of an angle.
Syntax: Tan ( n )
Argument
Description
n
The angle (in radians) for which you want the tangent
Return value: Double. Returns the tangent of n if it succeeds and -1 if an error occurs.
Truncate
Description: Truncates a number to the specified number of decimal places.
Syntax: Truncate ( x, n )
Argument
Description
x
The number you want to truncate
n
The number of decimal places to which you want to
truncate x
Return value: The data type of n. If n is positive, returns x truncated to the specified number of decimal
places. If n is negative, returns x truncated to (-n+1) places before the decimal point. Returns -1 if it fails.
-71-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Fill
Description: Builds a string of the specified length by repeating the specified characters until the result
string is long enough.
Syntax: Fill ( chars, n )
Argument
Description
chars
A string whose value will be repeated to fill the return
string
n
A long whose value is the length of the string you want
returned (from 0 to 60000)
Return value: String. Returns a string n characters long filled with repetitions of the characters in the
argument chars. If the argument chars has more than n characters, the first n characters of chars are used
to fill the return string. If the argument chars has fewer than n characters, the characters in chars are
repeated until the return string has n characters.
Left
Description: Obtains a specified number of characters from the beginning of a string.
Syntax: Left ( string, n )
Argument
Description
string
The string containing the characters you want
n
A long specifying the number of characters you want
Return value: String. Returns the leftmost n characters in string if it succeeds and the empty string ("") if an
error occurs. If n is greater than or equal to the length of the string, Left returns the entire string. It does not
add spaces to make the return value's length equal to n.
RightTrim
Description: Removes spaces from the end of a string.
Syntax: RightTrim ( string )
Argument
Description
string
The string you want returned with trailing blanks deleted
Return value: String. Returns a copy of string with trailing blanks deleted if it succeeds and the empty string
("") if an error occurs.
LeftTrim
Description: Removes leading spaces from the beginning of a string.
Syntax: LeftTrim ( string )
-72-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
Argument
Description
string
The string you want returned with leading blanks deleted
User's Guide
Return value: String. Returns a copy of string with leading blanks deleted if it succeeds and the empty string
("") if an error occurs.
Len
Description: Reports the length of a string.
Syntax: Len ( string )
Argument
Description
string
The string for which you want the length
Return value: Long. Returns a long containing the length of string if it succeeds and -1 if an error occurs.
Lower
Description: Converts all the characters in a string to lowercase.
Syntax: Lower ( string )
Argument
Description
string
The string you want to convert to lowercase letters
Return value: String. Returns string with uppercase letters changed to lowercase if it succeeds and the
empty string ("") if an error occurs.
Upper
Description: Converts all the characters in a string to uppercase.
Syntax: Upper ( string )
Argument
Description
String
The string you want to convert to uppercase letters
Return value: String. Returns string with lowercase letters changed to uppercase if it succeeds and the
empty string ("") if an error occurs.
Match
Description: Determines whether a string's value contains a particular pattern of characters.
Syntax: Match ( string, textpattern )
-73-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Argument
Description
string
The string in which you want to look for a pattern of
characters
textpattern
A string whose value is the text pattern
Return value: Boolean. Returns TRUE if string matches textpattern and FALSE if it does not. Match also
returns FALSE if either argument has not been assigned a value or the pattern is invalid.
Usage: Match enables you to evaluate whether a string contains a general pattern of characters. To find out
whether a string contains a specific substring, use the Pos function.
Textpattern is similar to a regular expression. It consists of metacharacters, which have special meaning,
and ordinary characters, which match themselves. You can specify that the string begin or end with one or
more characters from a set, or that it contains any characters except those in a set.
A text pattern consists of metacharacters, which have special meaning in the match string, and
nonmetacharacters, which match the characters themselves.
See also:
Metacharacters and sample patterns
Metacharacters
The following tables explain the meaning and use of the metacharacters:
Metacharacter
Meaning
Example
Caret (^)
Matches the beginning of a string
^C matches C at the beginning of
a string
Dollar sign ($)
Matches the end of a string
s$ matches s at the end of a
string
Period (.)
Matches any character
. . . matches three consecutive
characters
Backslash (\)
Removes the following
metacharacter's special
characteristics so that it matches
itself
\$ matches $
Character class
(a group of
characters
enclosed in
square brackets
([ ]))
Matches any of the enclosed
characters
[AEIOU] matches A, E, I, O, or
You can use hyphens to
abbreviate ranges of characters in
a character class. For example,
[A-Za-z] matches any letter
Complemented
character class
(first character
inside the
brackets is a
caret)
Matches any character not in the
group following the caret
[^0-9] matches any character
except a digit, and [^A-Za-z]
matches any character except a
letter
The metacharacters asterisk (*), plus (+), and question mark (?) are unary operators that are used to specify
repetitions in a regular expression:
-74-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Metacharacter
Meaning
Example
*
(asterisk)
Indicates zero or more
occurrences
A* matches zero or more As (no
As, A, AA, AAA, and so on)
+
(plus)
Indicates one or more
occurrences
A+ matches one A or more than
one A (A, AAA, and so on)
Indicates zero or one occurrence
A? matches an empty string ("")
or A
? (question
mark)
Sample patterns
The following table shows various text patterns and sample text that matches each pattern:
This pattern
Matches
AB
Any string that contains AB; for example, ABA, DEABC, graphAB_one
B*
Any string that contains 0 or more Bs; for example, AC, B, BB, BBB, ABBBC, and so on
AB*C
Any string containing the pattern AC or ABC or ABBC, and so on (0 or more Bs)
AB+C
Any string containing the pattern ABC or ABBC or ABBBC, and so on (1 or more Bs)
ABB*C
Any string containing the pattern ABC or ABBC or ABBBC, and so on (1 B plus 0 or more
Bs)
^AB
Any string starting with AB
AB?C
Any string containing the pattern AC or ABC (0 or 1 B)
^[ABC]
Any string starting with A, B, or C
[^ABC]
A string containing any characters other than A, B, or C
^[^abc]
A string that begins with any character except a, b, or c
^[^a-z]$
Any single-character string that is not a lowercase letter (^ and $ indicate the beginning and
end of the string)
[A-Z]+
Any string with one or more uppercase letters
^[0-9]+$
Any string consisting only of digits
^[0-9][0-9][0-9]$
Any string consisting of exactly three digits
^([0-9][0-9][09])$
Any consisting of exactly three digits enclosed in parentheses
See also:
Match function
Mid
Description: Obtains a specified number of characters from a specified position in a string.
Syntax: Mid ( string, start {, length} )
-75-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
Argument
Description
string
The string from which you want characters returned
start
A long specifying the position of the first character you
want returned. (The position of the first character of the
string is 1)
length (optional)
A long whose value is the number of characters you want
returned. If you do not enter length or if length is greater
than the number of characters to the right of start, Mid
returns the remaining characters in the string
User's Guide
Return value: String. Returns characters specified in length of string starting at character start. If start is
greater than the number of characters in string, the Mid function returns the empty string (""). If length is
greater than the number of characters remaining after the start character, Mid returns the remaining
characters. The return string is not filled with spaces to make it the specified length.
Pos
Description: Finds one string within another string.
Syntax: Pos ( string1, string2 {, start} )
Argument
Description
string1
The string in which you want to find string2
string2
The string you want to find in string1
start (optional)
A long indicating where the search will begin in string1.
The default is 1
Return value: Long. Returns a long whose value is the starting position of the first occurrence of string2 in
string1 after the position specified in start. If string2 is not found in string1 or if start is not within string1, Pos
returns 0.
Usage: The Pos function is case sensitive.
Replace
Description: Replaces a portion of one string with another.
Syntax: Replace ( string1, start, n, string2 )
Argument
Description
string1
The string in which you want to replace characters with
string2
start
A long whose value is the number of the first character
you want replaced. (The first character in the string is
number 1)
n
A long whose value is the number of characters you want
to replace
-76-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
string2
User's Guide
The string that will replace characters in string1. The
number of characters in string2 can be greater than, equal
to, or fewer than the number of characters you are
replacing
Return value: String. Returns the string with the characters replaced if it succeeds and the empty string ("") if
it fails.
Usage: If the start position is beyond the end of the string1, Replace appends string2 to string1. If there are
fewer characters after the start position than specified in n, Replace replaces all the characters to the right of
character start.
If n is zero, then in effect Replace inserts string2 into string1.
Right
Description: Obtains a specified number of characters from the end of a string.
Syntax: Right ( string, n )
Argument
Description
string
The string containing the characters you want
n
A long specifying the number of characters you want
Return value: String. Returns the rightmost n characters in string if it succeeds and the empty string ("") if an
error occurs. If n is greater than or equal to the length of the string, Right returns the entire string. It does not
add spaces to make the return value's length equal to n.
Space
Description: Builds a string of the specified length whose value consists of spaces.
Syntax: Space ( n )
Argument
Description
n
A long whose value is the length of the string you want
filled with spaces
Return value: String. Returns a string filled with n spaces if it succeeds and the empty string ("") if an error
occurs.
String
Description: Formats data as a string according to a specified format mask. You can convert and format
date, DateTime, numeric, and time data. You can also apply a format to a string.
Syntax: String ( data {, format} )
Argument
Description
Data
The data you want returned as a string with the specified
f
i
D
h
d
D Ti
i
-77-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
formatting. Data can have a date, DateTime, numeric,
time, or string data type
format (optional)
A string of the masks you want to use to format the data.
The masks consist of formatting information specific to the
data type of data. If data is type string, format is required.
The format string can consist of more than one mask,
depending on the data type of data. Each mask is
separated by a semicolon. See Usage for details on each
data type
Return value: String. Returns data in the specified format if it succeeds and the empty string ("") if the data
type of data does not match the type of mask specified or format is not a valid mask.
Usage: For date, DateTime, numeric, and time data, program uses the system's default format for the
returned string if you don't specify a format. For numeric data, the default format is the [General] format. For
string data, a format mask is required. (Otherwise, the function would have nothing to do.) The format can
consist of one or more masks:
•
Formats for date, DateTime, string, and time data can include one or two masks. The first mask is the
format for the data; the second mask is the format for a null value.
•
Formats for numeric data can have up to four masks. A format with a single mask handles both positive
and negative data. If there are additional masks, the first mask is for positive values, and the additional
masks are for negative, zero, and NULL values.
If the format doesn't match the data type, DB Monitor Expert will try to apply the mask, which can produce
unpredictable results.
See also:
Format symbols
Format Symbols
The following table lists the format symbols that can be used in a format string:
Format Symbol
Description
[General]
Outputs the number in General format.
0
Digit placeholder. If the number contains fewer digits than the format contains
placeholders, the number is padded with 0's. If there are more digits to the right of the
decimal than there are placeholders, the decimal portion is rounded to the number of
places specified by the placeholders. If there are more digits to the left of the decimal than
there are placeholders, the extra digits are retained.
#
Digit placeholder. This placeholder functions the same as the 0 placeholder except the
number is not padded with 0's if the number contains fewer digits than the format contains
placeholders.
?
Digit placeholder. This placeholder functions the same as the 0 placeholder except that
spaces are used to pad the digits.
. (period)
Decimal point. Determines how many digits (0's or #'s) are output on either side of the
decimal point. If the format contains only #'s left of the decimal point, numbers less than 1
begin with a decimal point. If the format contains 0’s left of the decimal point, numbers less
than 1 begin with a 0 left of the decimal point.
%
Outputs the number as a percentage. The number is multiplied by 100 and the % character
is appended.
, (comma)
Thousands separator. If the format contains commas separated by #'s or 0's, the number is
ih
i
h
d A
f ll i
l
h ld
l
h
-78-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
output with commas separating thousands. A comma following a placeholder scales the
number by a thousand. For Example, the format 0, scales the number by 1000 (e.g.,
10,000 would be converted as 10).
E- E+ e- e+
Outputs the number as scientific notation. If the format contains a scientific notation symbol
to the left of a 0 or # placeholder, the number is output in scientific notation and an E or an
e is added. The number of 0 and # placeholders to the right of the decimal determines the
number of digits in the exponent. E- and e- place a minus sign by negative exponents. E+
and e+ place a minus sign by negative exponents and a plus sign by positive exponents.
$ - + / ( ) : space
Outputs that character. To output a character other than those listed, precede the character
with a back slash (\) or enclose the character in double quotation marks (" "). You can also
use the slash (/) for fraction formats.
\
Outputs the next character. The backslash is not output. You can also output a character or
string of characters by surrounding the characters with double quotation marks (" ").
* (asterisk)
Repeats the next character until the width of the column is filled. You cannot have more
than one asterisk in each format section.
[]
Outputs hours greater than 24, or minutes or seconds greater than 60. Place the brackets
around the leftmost part of the time code; for Example, [h]:mm:ss would allow the output of
hours greater than 24.
"text"
Outputs the text inside the quotation marks.
@
Text placeholder. Text replaces the @ format character.
m
Month number. Outputs the month as digits without leading zeros (e.g., 1-12). Can also
represent minutes when used with h or hh formats.
mm
Month number. Outputs the month as digits with leading zeros (e.g., 01-12). Can also
represent minutes when used with the h or hh formats.
mmm
Month abbreviation. Outputs the month as an abbreviation (e.g., Jan-Dec).
mmmm
Month name. Outputs the month as a full name (e.g., January-December).
d
Day number. Outputs the day as digits with no leading zero (e.g., 1-9).
dd
Day number. Outputs the day as digits with leading zeros (e.g., 01-31).
ddd
Day abbreviation. Outputs the day as an abbreviation (e.g., Sun-Sat).
dddd
Day name. Outputs the day as a full name (e.g., Sunday-Saturday).
yy
Year number. Outputs the year as a two-digit number (e.g., 00-99).
yyyy
Year number. Outputs the year as a four-digit number (e.g., 1900-2078).
h
Hour number. Outputs the hour as a number without leading zeros (1-23). If the format
contains one of the AM or PM formats, the hour is based on a 12-hour clock. Otherwise, it
is based on a 24-hour clock.
hh
Hour number. Outputs the hour as a number with leading zeros (01-23). If the format
contains one of the AM or PM formats, the hour is based on a 12-hour clock. Otherwise, it
is based on a 24-hour clock.
m
Minute number. Outputs the minute as a number without leading zeros (0-59). The m
format must appear immediately after the h or hh symbol. Otherwise, it is interpreted as a
month number.
mm
Minute number. Outputs the minute as a number with leading zeros (00-59). The mm
format must appear immediately after the h or hh symbol. Otherwise, it is interpreted as a
month number.
s
Second number. Outputs the second as a number without leading zeros (0-59).
-79-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
ss
Second number. Outputs the second as a number with leading zeros (00-59).
AM/PM
am/pm
A/P
a/p
12-hour time. Outputs time using a 12-hour clock. Outputs AM, am, A, or a for times
between midnight and noon; outputs PM, pm, P, or p for times from noon until midnight.
Trim
Description: Removes leading and trailing spaces from a string.
Syntax: Trim ( string )
Argument
Description
string
The string you want returned with leading and trailing
spaces deleted
Return value: String. Returns a copy of string with all leading and trailing spaces deleted if it succeeds and
the empty string ("") if an error occurs.
WordCap
Description: Sets the first letter of each word in a string to a capital letter and all other letters to lowercase
(for example, ROBERT E. LEE would be Robert E. Lee).
Syntax: WordCap ( string )
Argument
Description
string
A string or expression that evaluates to a string with initial
capital letters (for example, Monday Morning)
Return value: String. Returns string with the first letter of each word set to uppercase and the remaining
letters lowercase if it succeeds and NULL if an error occurs.
CrosstabAvg
Description: Calculates the average of the values returned by an expression in the values list of the
crosstab. When the crosstab definition has more than one column, CrosstabAvg can also calculate averages
of the expression's values for groups of column values.
Syntax: CrosstabAvg ( n {, column, groupvalue} ))
Argument
Description
n
The number of the crosstab-values expression for which you want the average of the
returned values. The crosstab expression must be numeric.
column
The number of the crosstab column as it is listed in the Columns box of the Crosstab
Definition dialog box for which you want intermediate calculations.
groupvalue
A string whose value controls the grouping for the calculation. Groupvalue is usually a
-80-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
value from another column in the crosstab. To specify the current column value in a
dynamic crosstab, rather than a specific value, specify @ plus the column name, as a
quoted string.
Return value: Double. Returns the average of the crosstab values returned by expression n for all the
column values or, optionally, for a subset of column values.
Usage: You can use this function only in a crosstab report. This function is meaningful only for the average
of the values of the expression in a row in the crosstab. NULL values are ignored and are not included in the
average.
CrosstabCount
Description: Counts the number of values returned by an expression in the values list of the crosstab.
When the crosstab definition has more than one column, CrosstabCount can also count the number of the
expression's values for groups of column values.
Syntax: CrosstabCount ( n {, column, groupvalue} ))
Argument
Description
n
The number of the crosstab-values expression for which you want the total number of
returned values.
column
The number of the crosstab column as it is listed in the Columns box of the Crosstab
Definition dialog box for which you want intermediate calculations.
groupvalue
A string whose value controls the grouping for the calculation. Groupvalue is usually a
value from another column in the crosstab. To specify the current column value in a
dynamic crosstab, rather than a specific value, specify @ plus the column name, as a
quoted string.
Return value: Long. Returns the number of values returned by expression n for all the column values or,
optionally, for a subset of column values.
Usage: You can use this function only in a crosstab report. This function is meaningful only for the count of
the values of the expression in a row in the crosstab. NULL values are ignored and are not included in the
count.
CrosstabMax
Description: Calculates the maximum value returned by an expression in the values list of the crosstab.
When the crosstab definition has more than one column, CrosstabMax can also calculate the maximum of
the expression's values for groups of column values.
Syntax: CrosstabMax ( n {, column, groupvalue} ))
Argument
Description
n
The number of the crosstab-values expression for which you want the maximum
returned value. The expression's data type must be numeric.
column
The number of the crosstab column as it is listed in the Columns box of the Crosstab
Definition dialog box for which you want intermediate calculations.
groupvalue
A string whose value controls the grouping for the calculation. Groupvalue is usually a
value from another column in the crosstab. To specify the current column value in a
dynamic crosstab, rather than a specific value, specify @ plus the column name, as a
quoted string.
-81-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Return value: Double. Returns the maximum value returned by expression n for all the column values or,
optionally, for a subset of column values.
Usage: You can use this function only in a crosstab report. This function is meaningful only for the maximum
of the values of the expression in a row in the crosstab. NULL values are ignored and are not included in the
comparison.
CrosstabMin
Description: Calculaes the minimum value returned by an expression in the values list of the crosstab.
When the crosstab definition has more than one column, CrosstabMax can also calculate the minimum of
the expression's values for groups of column values.
Syntax: CrosstabMin ( n {, column, groupvalue} ))
Argument
Description
n
The number of the crosstab-values expression for which you want the minimum returned
value. The expression's data type must be numeric.
Column
The number of the crosstab column as it is listed in the Columns box of the Crosstab
Definition dialog box for which you want intermediate calculations.
Groupvalue
A string whose value controls the grouping for the calculation. Groupvalue is usually a
value from another column in the crosstab. To specify the current column value in a
dynamic crosstab, rather than a specific value, specify @ plus the column name, as a
quoted string.
Return value: Double. Returns the minimum value returned by expression n for all the column values or,
optionally, for a subset of column values.
Usage: You can use this function only in a crosstab report. This function is meaningful only for the minimum
of the values of the expression in a row in the crosstab. NULL values are ignored and are not included in the
comparison.
CrosstabSum
Description: Calculates the sum of the values returned by an expression in the values list of the crosstab.
When the crosstab definition has more than one column, CrosstabSum can also calculate the sum of the
expression's values for groups of column values.
Syntax: CrosstabSum ( n {, column, groupvalue} ))
Argument
Description
n
The number of the crosstab-values expression for which you want the sum of the
returned values. The expression's data type must be numeric.
Column
The number of the crosstab column as it is listed in the Columns box of the Crosstab
Definition dialog box for which you want intermediate calculations.
Groupvalue
A string whose value controls the grouping for the calculation. Groupvalue is usually a
value from another column in the crosstab. To specify the current column value in a
dynamic crosstab, rather than a specific value, specify @ plus the column name, as a
quoted string.
-82-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Return value: Double. Returns the total of values returned by expression n for all the column values or,
optionally, for a subset of column values.
Usage: You can use this function only in a crosstab report. This function is meaningful only for the sum of
the values of the expression in a row in the crosstab. NULL values are ignored and are not included in the
sum.
Operators in Sort and Filter Expressions
An operator is a symbol or word in an expression that performs an arithmetic calculation or logical operation;
compares numbers, text, or values; or manipulates text strings.
The database buffer supports the following types of operators:
•
Arithmetic for numeric data types
•
Relational for all data types
•
Logical for all data types
•
Concatenation for string data types
Arithmetic operators
These are the arithmetic operators:
Operator
Meaning
Example
+
Addition
SubTotal + Tax
-
Subtraction
Price - Discount
*
Multiplication
Quantity * Price
/
Division
Discount / Price
^
Exponentiation
Rating ^ 2.5
Relational and logical operators
Logical operators can join relational expressions to form more complex boolean expressions.
The result of evaluating a boolean expression is always TRUE or FALSE.
These are the relational and logical operators:
Operator
Meaning
Example
=
Equals
Price = 100
>
Greater than
Price > 100
<
Less than
Price < 100
<>
Not equal
Price <> 100
>=
Greater than or equal
Price >= 100
<=
Less than or equal
Price <= 100
NOT
Logical negation
NOT Price = 100
AND
Logical and
Tax > 3 AND Ship < 5
OR
Logical or
Tax >3 OR Ship < 5
IN
SQL SELECT IN condition
Status IN ('A', 'S', 'R')
-83-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
BETWEEN
SQL SELECT BETWEEN condition
Ship BETWEEN 3 AND 5
LIKE
SQL SELECT LIKE condition
Brand LIKE 'Micro%'
Do not use IS NULL and NOT IS NULL for NULL value checking, use embedded isNull()function instead.
Concatenation operator
The concatenation operator joins the contents of two string expressions to form a longer value. You can
concatenate strings only.
Operator
+
Meaning
Concatenate
Example
"cat " + "dog"
Operator precedence in expressions
To ensure predictable results, all operators in an expression are evaluated in a specific order of precedence.
When the operators have the same precedence, the database buffer evaluates them left to right.
The following table lists the operators in descending order of precedence:
Operator
Purpose
()
Grouping
^
Exponentiation
*, /
Multiplication and division
+, -
Addition and subtraction; string concatenation
IN, LIKE, BETWEEN
SQL SELECT statement conditions
NOT
Logical negation
=, >, <, <=, >=, <>
Relational operators
AND, OR
Logical AND and logical OR
Hot Keys and Shortcuts
Key
CTRL F4
ALT F4
CTRL N
CTRL D
CTRL O
CTRL SHIFT O
CTRL S
CTRL P
CTRL R
CTRL X
CTRL C
Action
Close active sheet
Close active dialog box, if no dialog active -close the application
Insert new row; Start new SQL file in DBA Notepad
Delete current row; Delete highlighted rows on Flow Dataview tab; Kill session in
Connection Manager; Drop active object on Table design and relationships window
Open file in DBA Notepad; Start analyzing table(s) process in Table Analyzer; Start
analyzing index(es) process in Index Analyzer, Start analyzing cluster(s) process in
Cluster Analyzer
Import code of stored procedure, function, trigger, or package into DBA Notepad
Save changes
Print active sheet
Execute statements in DBA Notepad
Cut selection
Copy selection
-84-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
CTRL V
CTRL A
CTRL Z
CTRL Y
CTRL F
F3
CTRL H
CTRL G
CTRL E
F4
F5
F7
CTRL +
CTRL -
CTRL T
CTRL K
TAB
SHIFT TAB
CTRL TAB
ALT TAB
ALT SPACE
ESC
F1
User's Guide
Paste text from clipboard into current column
Select all
Undo changes
Redo changes undid before
Start search
Repeat previous search in DBA Notepad
Replace text in DBA Notepad
Go to row on report/datasheet; Go to line in DBA Notepad
Start DBA Notepad
Open Filter Dialog
Open Sort Dialog
Start Database Object Navigator
Select all items (rows) in select table/index/schema/etc dialog boxes; Select all rows in
Table Analyzer; Index Analyzer; Cluster Analyzer for batch processing
Deselect all selected items (rows) in select table/index/schema/etc dialog boxes;
Deselect all selected rows in Table Analyzer; Index Analyzer; Cluster Analyzer for
batch processing
Start table/view design and data manipulation
Start Security Navigator
Move to next field on datasheet
Move to previous field on datasheet
Switch to next open sheet
Switch to another Windows application or to another DB Monitor Expert instance
Activate system menu for active window or object
Close active dialog (equivalent to Cancel button); Undo last changes in the field that is
being edited on result set datasheet
Get online help
SQL Editor and DBA Notepad
Key
CTRL + Left
CTRL + Right
CTRL + Up
CTRL + Down
Home
End
PageDown
PageUp
CTRL + Home
CTRL + End
CTRL + PageUp
CTRL +
PageDown
SHIFT
Insert
Delete
BackSpace
CTRL + R
CTRL + L
CTRL + U
CTRL + D
CTRL + Z
CTRL + Y
CTRL + X
CTRL + C
CTRL + V
CTRL + A
Action
one word left
one word right
to the beginning of paragraph
to the end of paragraph
to the beginning of the line
to the end of the line
page down
page up
to the beginning of the text
to the end of the text
to the beginning of the visible text
to the end of the visible text
when combined with all previous keys (including mouse) expands current selection
changes write mode
deletes one symbol (or clear selection)
deletes one symbol (or clear selection)
one word to right
one word to left
to the beginning of the visible text
to the end of the visible text
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Select All
-85-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
CTRL + F
CTRL + H
CTRL + G
CTRL + Ins
SHIFT + Ins
SHIFT + CTRL +
Ins
CTRL + Del
SHIFT + Del
CTRL +
BackSpace
SHIFT + CTRL +
BackSpace
F9
CTRL F4
User's Guide
Find
Replace
Go to Line Number
Copy
Paste
Duplicate
Clear
Cut
Undo
Redo
Cancel Retrieval Operation
Close active sheet
-86-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Installation and Uninstallation
Installation
The DB Tools Setup program provides very straightforward interface for DB Tools installation. Simply follow
the Installation Wizard instruction that will guide you through the entire installation process.
If you are going to use an ODBC interface for the database connection, configure required data sources
using the ODBC Administrator that can be found in the Windows Control Panel.
See also:
System Requirements
Uninstallation
Front-end:
The DB Tools supports standard uninstallation mechanism for removing program files from the computer.
To uninstall the DB Tools do the following:
1
Click Windows Start button, from the Start Menu select Settings, then Control Panel.
2
Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
3
Select the DB Tools item in the programs list, click Add/Remove button
4
Delete all left files from the DB Tools home directory. Delete the home directory.
Back-end:
1
Execute UNINSTALL.SQL script using DB Tools SQL Editor, SQL*Plus or any other tool of your
choice.
System Requirements
Minimum Hardware Requirements
1
2
3
4
Intel-based machine running one of the following operating system:
•
Windows NT 4.0 (server or workstation)
•
Windows 2000 (server or workstation)
•
Windows XP (server or workstation)
•
Windows 95
•
Windows 98
•
Windows Me
At least 128 MB RAM
35 MB disk space for full installation
VGA monitor or better
Recommended Configuration
1
Pentium class CPU 600 MHz or better
-87-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2
3
User's Guide
256 MB RAM or better
SVGA 256-color or better monitor
Software Requirements
Server:
1.
1Oracle Server version 7.3 and above
Client:
1
2
3
4
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0 or Windows XP
Required database client software: SQL*Net client software (Version 2 or 8 or 9 or 10); Required
Support Files (RSF)
ODBC (optional)
Remote Procedure Call (RPC) Service (installed by default)
The Dynamic Performance Tables
The Oracle Server contains a set of underlying "tables" that are maintained by the Server and accessible to
the Database Administrator (DBA) user SYS. These tables are called dynamic performance tables because
they are continuously updated while a database is open and in use, and their contents relate primarily to
performance. After installation, only “username” SYS has access to the dynamic performance tables.
However, access to these tables is required for any user who wants to run the DB Tools (all). The
UTLMONTR.SQL script can be run to grant access to PUBLIC on all of the dynamic performance tables.
See your installation or user's guide for details on running UTLMONTR.SQL.
SQL Debugger: DBMS_DEBUG package must be installed in the destination database
SQL Profiler: DBMS_PROFILER package must be installed in the destination database
Java Editor (Java code compilation options): Java Run-time must be installed and configured in the
database.
Note: In order to run DB Tools without problems you should have SELECT_CATALOG_ROLE
and EXECUTE_CATALOG_ROLE roles granted to you. Having SELECT ANY TABLE privilege is
highly recommended but not required. For certain types of operation supported by DB Tools you
may need other privileges such as AUDIT ANY, CREATE ANY TRIGGER, ANALYZE ANY, EXECUTE
ANY, ADMINISTER RESOURCE MANAGER and some other DBA-level privileges.
Portability
Oracle database software is ported to work under different operating systems and is the same on all
systems. The DB Tools can work with any Oracle database (version 7.3 and above) running on any
operating system.
See also:
Installation and Uninstallation
-88-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Connecting to Oracle databases
Required Oracle Client Software
What is SQL*Net?
SQL*Net is the Oracle product that provides connectivity between clients and Oracle servers. This product
was renamed to Net8 in the Oracle8 release, Net9 in the Oracle 9i release and then to Net10 in Oracle 10g
release. When this document refers to SQL*Net, it means SQL*Net for Oracle7 and Net for Oracle8 and
later.
You must install Oracle client software SQL*Net before attempting to connect using DB Tools.
When you install SQL*Net, be sure you install the product specific to your operation system. Remember that
Oracle distinguishes between Windows 95/98 and Windows NT/2000/XP/Vista.
Important: Make sure your Oracle client software home directory is added to the system PATH environment
variable
What you must install?
SQL*Net
DB Tools and Oracle will need this for connections.
Network Adapter Layer
The Oracle Network Adapter handles communication between the Oracle Call Interface and you network
protocol. For example, if you communicate with your Oracle server using the TCP/IP, you must install the
Oracle TCP/IP protocol adapter. If you use different protocols at different times, you can install more than
one protocol adapter.
Testing Connection Outside of DB Tools
Before attempting to connect from DB Tools, you should verify that you can connect from SQL*Plus. If you
cannot connect from SQL*Plus, you have no hope of connecting through DB Tools.
How DB Tools Talks to Oracle
Overview
DB Tools communicates with Oracle through the Oracle Call Interface (OCI). This interface is not used by
SQL*Plus. You must be careful as to what conclusions you can draw when something works in SQL*Plus
but not in DB Tools.
DB Tools determines the network interface DLL based on the first three characters of your DBMS
specification.
* Oracle 7 interfaces are also supported with Required Support Files (RSF) included with Net8
Connect to Database Dialog
The same dialog box for establishing new database connections is used in all DB Tools components. The
dialog can be displayed as a separate window or be embedded as page in a graphical multi-step wizard
dialog.
For more information about the Connect dialog, available controls and connection options see Connect To
Database Dialog topic in the Common Dialogs and Controls Chapter.
-89-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Common Problems
Missing network module
If you select a DBMS driver for an interface that you have not installed, you will get a connect error indicating
that your DBMS is not supported.
Path errors
When DB Tools connects to Oracle, the DB Tools module attempts to load the corresponding OCI module.
This load is no different from any other load in that the module must be in your <windows>\system directory
or in a directory on your path. If the path does not include your <Oracle home>/bin directory, the DLL will not
be found and an error will occur during connect. The error will indicate that your DBMS is not supported.
Missing Required Support Files
In order to connect from DB Tools, you must have installed the Oracle Required Support Files that
correspond to your DBMS value. For example, if you specify O73 as your DBMS driver value, you must
have installed Required Support Files version 7.3.x.
Improperly Installed Required Support Files
Required Support Files should be installed using the Oracle Installer. If you copy files from one location or
system to another, you may run into problems. If you install SQL*Net on a Local Area Network where it will
be accessed by multiple users, make sure you have followed procedures provided by Oracle for Network
Installation. It is not as easy as installing from a single client and letting everyone access the resulting files.
If you have installed Net8 and then install another product that includes Oracle Required Support Files, you
may encounter a problem loading OCIW32.DLL. To remedy the situation, re-install the 8.0.x Required
Support Files.
Incorrect server parameter in transaction Object
Because of changes in the Oracle OCI interface, the format of server parameter may differ between various
releases of SQL*Net. If the Oracle service name as specified in your TNSNAMES.ORA file was
orasrvr1.world, the server parameter for a DB Tools connection is shown in the following table:
DBMS
Server Value
O73
@orasrvr1.world
OR8 and later orasrvr1.world
Debugging
When DB Tools connects to Oracle, DB Tools simply calls a function in the Oracle OCI layer. If you are
having a problem connecting, it may be useful to run a SQL*Net "Admin" level trace. This trace will show
much of the SQL*Net activity during the failed connects. There may be Oracle error messages that are more
useful than the message echoed back to DB Tools.
Special Considerations with Oracle 7.3
In general, SQL*Net 2.x is backward compatible. For example, If you upgraded your Server to SQL*Net 2.2
and still have SQL*Net 2.1 on your client, you will still be able to communicate. There is, however, one
exception. If you are running SQL*Net 2.3 on the server, you should also run 2.3 or above on the client.
There was a problem with the 2.2 SQL*Net software that was discovered after SQL*Net 2.3 was released.
Rather than going back and fixing 2.2, they suggest an upgrade to 2.3. The problem will not prevent a
connection. It will, however, cause other connection-related problems while running DB Tools.
Special Considerations with IPX / SPX
The following table shows the versions of SQL*Net required on 32 bit platforms. Netware Client32 is the only
supported IPX stack. NWLink from Microsoft is not supported.
Platform
SQL Net Version
Windows 95/98
SQL*Net 2.3.2.1.4 or higher
NT 4.0 and later
SQL*Net 2.2 or higher
-90-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Special Considerations for NT 4.0 or above
You must be running SQL*Net 2.3.2.1.4 or above.
Common Error Messages
DBMS <DBMS name> not supported in your current installation
DB Tools native driver DLL is missing or not in path.
Oracle DLL loaded from PBxxx060.DLL missing or not in path.
Oracle Required Support Files needed by DB Tools DLL are not installed.
Dynamic Link Library <dll name> could not be found in the specified path
DLL missing
Directory containing the DLL not in path
If the DLL is ORA803.DLL, check to see if the file is on your system. If it is, it should be on your path. If the
file is not there, either you have not installed Net8 or when you installed Net8, you did not install the Oracle
8.0.x Required Support Files.
Error while trying to retrieve text for error ORA_nnnnn
Occurs during connection if there is no Oracle registry entry in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE
Occurs when the NET20 registry entry in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Oracle is incorrect.
Initialization of the dynamic link library <Oracle_home\bin\OCIW32.DLL path> failed. The process is
terminating abnormally.
Oracle DLL ORA73.DLL does not exist or is not in path.
ORA-03121: No interface driver connected - function not performed
(DBMS O73) The server name in the database profile was not in the format @<service name> or the
SQL*Net software was not installed properly. Probably missing the "@" sign preceding the service name.
ORA-12154: TNS:could not resolve service name
(DBMS O73) The tnsnames.ora file was not found in Oracle_HOME\NETWORK\ADMIN directory.
(DBMS OR8) The tnsnames.ora file was not found in Oracle_HOME\NET80\ADMIN directory.
(Oracle 7.x) No matching service name in tnsnames.ora file. Be sure to include the complete name
(including the domain) as it appears in the tnsnames.ora file. For example, if the entry is orsrvr.world in the
tnsnames.ora entry, the server specified in the database profile would be @orsrvr.world. This is true even if
the service name specified in SQL*Plus was orsrvr.
(DBMS OR8)If the service name contains a preceding "@" or "@TNS:", this error will occur. If the specified
service name was not found in the tnsnames.ora, this error will occur.
ORA-12203: TNS:Unable to connect to destination
The tnsnames.ora file does not exist or cannot be located by the Oracle DLLs.
The network adapter layer was not installed.
ORA-12224 TNS: No listener
(DBMS OR8)The host pointed to by the host entry in your tnsnames.ora file did not have a listener running
on the specified port. The host, the port or both were incorrectly specified or the listener has stopped running
on the server.
ORA-12505 TNS: Listener could not resolve SID given in connect descriptor
(DBMS OR8) The server and listener were found, but the SID in the tnsnames.ora file was incorrect.
ORA-12545: Connect failed because target host or object does not exist
(DBMS OR8) The host entry in your tnsnames.ora file points to a non-existent server.
Unable to load the requested database interface
Make sure that the DB Tools network module associated with your specified DBMS is installed and on your
path.
-91-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Connecting to Oracle using Oracle ODBC Drivers
Configure the ODBC Data Source
You can create a new data source by running the ODBC administrator.
The Connect String in the data source is the service name as found in your tnsnames.ora file.
Note for Personal Oracle: The connection to Personal Oracle bypasses SQL*Net. The SQL*Net Connect
string is "2:<SID>" where <SID> is the instance ID. The default SID is "ORCL".
Refer to the Oracle On-Line help for assistance when setting up the data source.
Verify Your Oracle ODBC Connection
Connecting to your database from SQL*Plus verifies that your Oracle client software was installed and
configured correctly. If there is a problem with the installation or configuration of your Oracle client software,
you will not be able to connect using DB Tools. If you can connect using SQL*Plus, then attempt to connect
with another ODBC tool using the data source you created. Oracle ships an ODBC utility with SQL*Net 2.3.x
called Oracle ODBC Test. You can use this utility to test the data source connection. Some other common
tools are MS Query and MS test. Connecting with another tool makes sure that ODBC is correctly installed
and the data source is configured properly. You should verify your ODBC connection outside of DB Tools
before calling Technical support for assistance.
Common Connect Errors
DBMS ODBC not supported in your current installation
ODBC32.DLL not found (Windows 95). PBODB60.DLL not found in path.
IM002 - Data Source name not found and no default driver specified
The data source in the connect string is not valid.
IM003 - Specified driver could not be loaded
The driver specified in the ODBC data source could not be loaded. This happens if the driver was moved or
deleted after the data source was created. This error will also occur if the Required Support Files are not
installed or are not in the path.
ORA-12154:TNS:could not resolve service name
The tnsnames.ora file was not found in Oracle_HOME\NETWORK\ADMIN directory. This error also occurs
id if the service name (either from the server in the data source or the DBQ value in the connect string) is not
found in the tnsnames.ora file. Remember that there should be no "@" or "@tns:" in this value.
File Error - Cannot find ODBC32.DLL
ODBC32.DLL missing or not in path
Creating ODBC data source for Oracle database
To add a data source:
1.
2.
3.
From the installed ODBC drivers list, select the name of the Oracle driver that the data source will
use.
Choose the OK button.
The Oracle ODBC Driver dialog box is displayed. Enter information about the data source:
-92-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
4.
User's Guide
Field
Meaning
Data Source Name
A name by which you will identify the data source. For example,
"Personnel Data"
Description
A description of the data in the data source. For example, "Hire date,
salary history, and current review of all employees."
SQL*Net Connect
String
An Oracle connect string that specifies the location of the copy of Oracle
RDBMS from which the driver will retrieve data.
Choose the OK button.
-93-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Monitor Expert
Overview
As Oracle customers migrate from large, centralized mainframe systems to smaller distributed systems,
administration tasks become increasingly difficult. The Oracle database administrator (DBA) is often
responsible for managing a highly diverse combination of local and remote systems and discovering new
and more complex administration issues.
Databases are also getting much larger, more complex, and more in need of tuning, creating the need for
powerful management and monitoring tools capable of performing many tasks in real-time. Large, mission
critical databases need highly effective backup tools, good performance tuning tools and a host of online
diagnostic tools.
In order to properly manage such mission critical databases the DBAs must have sufficient information
about their database. Only regular database monitoring allows DBA gather enough information about
database, identify technical problems in early stage and finally make the database easy to maintain, not
fragmented, fast, cost-effective in terms of reducing downtime and avoiding user frustrations.
DB Monitor Expert and other components included in the DB Tools package provide Oracle DBAs and
application developers with a powerful set of sophisticated tools for monitoring, tuning, exploring, managing,
auditing, coding and benchmarking Oracle databases. By using these tools, Oracle DBAs and application
developers can make significant gains in productivity and manageability.
Why you have to monitor your database regularly
As Oracle customers migrate from large, centralized mainframe systems to smaller distributed systems,
administration tasks become increasingly difficult. The Oracle database administrator (DBA) is often
responsible for managing a highly diverse combination of local and remote systems and discovering new
and more complex administration issues.
Databases are also getting much larger, more complex, and more in need of tuning, creating the need for
powerful management and monitoring tools capable of performing many tasks in real-time. Large, mission
critical databases need highly effective backup tools, good performance tuning tools and a host of online
diagnostic tools.
In order to properly manage such mission critical databases DBA must have sufficient information about
them. Only regular database monitoring allows DBA gather enough information about database, identify
technical problems in early stage and finally make the database easy to maintain, not fragmented, fast, costeffective in terms of reducing downtime and avoiding user frustrations.
DB Monitor Expert provides DBA with easy-to-use effective tools that help monitor and administer distributed
Oracle databases from a single console.
In addition, DB Monitor Expert provides the application developers with easy-to-use effective tools that help
tune application SQL queries. According to Oracle: 70 to 80% of all Oracle server performance problems are
remedied by tuning the SQL statements.
See also:
Oracle database architecture
Oracle database memory structures and processes
Oracle database security
-94-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Active Desktop
The Active Desktop allows you to create customized graphical views of your Oracle databases. You can
create and modify graphical presentations of the databases. Each of these presentations consists of two
elements: a database icon and a label combining database location, Oracle server name and the database
name.
When you double-click on the database icon, DB Monitor Expert connects to the activated database. Use
dragging to move already created presentations to required location. On right mouse click, DB Monitor
Expert displays context-sensitive pop-up menu. Use that menu to create new database presentations,
modify or delete existing ones. The Active Desktop can be hidden or shown by selecting correspondingly
Show Desktop/Hide Desktop command from the menu.
You can change default bitmap used as a background for the Active Desktop. See Options topic for details.
For example, you can use a map presenting your city or state as the Active Desktop background picture. For
example, the DBA who is responsible for the databases in New York offices can attach a New York City
map. The developer who is working with several Oracle database department servers running on different
floors can create a view of the company building.
You can determine at a glance the connection status of a database on the Active Desktop. An icon
representing the database that DB Monitor Expert is currently connected to has a small green traffic light
displayed next to it
. All other database icons have red light next to them
.
If you want to save Active Desktop configuration so that it will be available next time you run DB Monitor
Expert, use right mouse click anywhere on the Active Desktop. A popup menu will appear. Choose Save
Desktop command from the menu.
If you do not want to use the Active Desktop, you can disable it in the Program Options.
Performance Graphs (Graphs menu)
DB Monitor Expert provides quick comprehension of system status by presenting information graphically. All
DB Monitor Expert graphs found under Graph menu are recent-past and real-time graphs. They represent
different views of data you get using capabilities of real-time monitors found under Monitor menu. Most
graphs show "short-term" historical statistic, which you may use for in-depth analysis of database
applications activity. For all real-time graphs you can customize refresh rate and number of checkpoints for
the graph. Note that total time interval covered by the graph is number of checkpoints times refresh rate for
that graph. To customize refresh rate and number of checkpoint, click the Options button on the toolbar
. An Option dialog box will appear.
Note that the number of checkpoints has no effect for Database Actions, SQL Activity graphs and some
other graph types. You can also right-click any graph to get some additional features accessible from a
popup menu that appears in response to the click.
Performance Summary Graphs
Real-time Statistics Graphs
This graph displays this graph displays comprehensive real-time summaries of various aspects of your
database performance on a single screen, including Buffer Cache Hit, Dictionary Cache Hit, Shared Pool
Hit, Memory Sorts Hit, Recursive Calls Ratio, Non-index Lookup Ratio, User activity, Number of active
Cursors and Locks, File I/O Throughout, and Rollback Segment I/O Throughout
-95-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Recent Statistics Graphs
This graph displays this graph displays summaries of various aspects of your database performance as a
function of time. By default all line graphs are drawn for the last 10 hours. You can customize that interval
using the "graph scale" control displayed on the top of the graph window. Recent Statistics Graphs include
Number of Active Sessions, Buffer Cache Misses, CPU Usage, Memory Usage, and File I/O Throughout.
The information displayed by this monitor is collected by the Background Database Performance Statistics
Collection procedure, which must be installed in the database in order to run Recent Statistics Graphs.
Historical Statistics Graphs
This graph displays this graph displays summaries of various aspects of your database performance as a
function of time. By default all line graphs are drawn for the last 90 days. You can customize that interval
using the "graph scale" control displayed on the top of the graph window. Historical Statistics Graphs include
Number of Active Sessions, Buffer Cache Misses, CPU Usage, Memory Usage, and File I/O Throughout.
The information displayed by this monitor is collected by the Background Database Performance Statistics
Collection procedure, which must be installed in the database in order to run Historical Statistics Graphs.
Database Actions Graph
This graph displays summary statistic for database activity. It shows percent of different types of SQL
statements executed by the database.
SQL Activity Graph
This graph displays SQL Area usage and helps to pinpoint not tuned database applications that send
offensive SQL statements to the database. Such SQL statements have hit ratio (buffer gets vs. disk reads)
significantly above average.
SGA Memory Usage Graph
This graph displays SGA memory distribution between database buffers, redo buffers, fixed memory size,
and variable memory size. Both Percents and Mbytes are displayed. The graph also shows variable memory
distribution between shared pool, java pool, large pool and other objects.
License/Users Logged On Graph
This graph displays number of active database sessions as a function of time. By default the horizontal
dotted green line shows high water mark for the number of sessions since this graphical monitor started.
Use this graph to monitor whether the number of database sessions violates your seat-based license and if
not how close you are. You can also use to monitor picks of user activity.
Rollback Segment (Gets/Writes) Graph
This graph displays disk gets and disk writes for all rollback segments; helps to examine work load for
rollback segments.
Rollback Segment (Hits) Graph
This graph displays disk gets and disk writes performance for all rollback segments; helps to examine
performance for rollback segments.
Rollback Segment Transactions Graph
This graph displays number of active database transactions by rollback segment. This is also a good
indicator of the overall database activity.
-96-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Redo Log Latch (Hits) Graph
This graph displays gets and immediate gets for different types of redo log latches; helps to examine
performance for redo logs and buffers.
Redo Log Latch (Misses) Graph
This graph displays misses and immediate misses for different types of redo log latches; helps to examine
performance for redo logs and buffers.
CPU Usage Graph
This graph displays total CPU time allocated to all user sessions as a function of time
Memory Usage Graph
This graph displays total memory size in Mbytes allocated for all user sessions as a function of time
Buffer Cache Graph
This graph displays logical and physical reads performance; helps to find not tuned database applications
that cause decreasing effectiveness of the cache.
Dictionary Cache Graph
This graph displays changes of dictionary hit ratio; helps to find database applications that need bigger
dictionary cache.
Recursive Calls Graph
This graph displays frequency of recursive calls; helps to identify not tuned SQL statements and database
applications.
Sorts Graph
This graph displays performance of the database sort operations.
Waits Graph
This graph displays various database waits. Run this graph together with the Rollback Segment graphs
and/or Redo Latch graphs to detect whether rollback segments or redo logs cause any waits.
File Input/Output (Hits) Graph
This graph displays reads and writes performance for all database files; helps to resolve I/O bottlenecks.
File Input/Output (Blocks) Graph
This graph displays block reads and writes performance for all database files; helps to resolve I/O
bottlenecks and balance distribution of I/O.
-97-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Custom Graph
In addition to a variety of predefined recent-past graphs available in DB Monitor Expert, you can also define
your own graphs. User-defined graphs can address your database specific requirements. Using custom
graphs, you can also automate problem detection and correction, and optionally execute a job to fix the
problem and generate alarm message that may be sent via E-mail, pager or beeper to you or other people.
To create a new graph:
1.
Select Graph/Custom Graph menu. DB Monitor Expert will open the Custom Graph dialog. The
dialog window will display all already created custom graphs.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Enter valid name in the Name field on the Properties tab. Note that name may consist spaces.
4.
Specify appropriate timer interval in the Interval field. The number must be in range from 1 to
32767 seconds.
5.
Specify the number of graphed data-points in the Checkpoints field. The number must be in range
from 3 to 99.
6.
Type valid SQL SELECT statement in the Select field. Alternatively, you can paste SQL from the
clipboard. To do this, use keyboard shortcut CTRL V or use right mouse click on the Select field
then from popup menu choose Paste command. Also, you can click on the Open File
button
to paste SQL from the file. This SQL statement will be used to gather statistics to be displayed in
the monitor you are defining. Make sure that the SQL statement does not end with a semicolon (;).
To avoid unclear column names in the graph syntax always use aliases in the select statement
(see examples).
7.
Click on the Preview tab to customize display properties of the graph.
8.
Select column from the Value drop-down list. That column will be graphed. Note that you can pick
column hits from the Value list then instead of column's absolute value DB Monitor Expert will
graph changes per second for that column.
9.
If you want to display multiple graphs (series of characteristics) simultaneously, use the Series
drop-down list to select column that will be used for series. For display of single value leave Series
field blank or select <None> from the list.
10. Select required graph style.
11. Click on the Threshold tab to customize new monitor behavior. If required, enter threshold
condition that the monitor will verify every time a new sampling will occur.
12. If you wish, you can specify fixit job, which the monitor performs when the threshold condition is
detected. In the SQL File field type SQL file name where fixit job specified. Alternatively, you can
click Open File
button to browse and paste the SQL file name. For example, you can have
the monitor for monitoring the tablespace TEMP in the database SALES and generate an alert if
the tablespace runs out of free space. You can also have a data-file automatically added to the
tablespace if this event occurs.
13. To generate alert message, fill all fields in the Action box. Following methods are presently
supported: E-mail, Pager, and Beeper. Note that the Beeper method is provided so that you can
send messages to “Numeric Only” pagers. It does not use the TAP protocol. DB Tools simply
takes the phone line off-hook, dials the beeper or pager phone number, waits x number of seconds,
touch tones the digits to be displayed on the pager and hangs up.
14. Click the Save button to save the new graph definition. The graph can be used again later on.
15. Click the Run button to start the graph you have defined. Note that you can run the graph without
doing save first, but by default DB Monitor Expert does not save the graph definition for you until
you click the Save button. So that if you do not save the definition you will not be able to reuse this
graph later.
16. Now you can build another graph or click the Exit button to close Custom Graph dialog.
The following 3 examples of user-defined graph are included in the standard installation package:
-98-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
1. Active Sessions
select count(distinct sid) active_sessions
from v$session
where type = 'USER'
2. Executions By Segment Type
select sum(executions) executions,
type segment_type
from v$db_object_cache
where type not in ('NON-EXISTENT', 'NOT LOADED')
group by type
*
3. SQL Net Hits
select sum(v.value) bytes_sent_received,
n.name
from v$statname n,
v$sesstat v
where v.statistic# = n.statistic# and
n.name in ('bytes sent via SQL*Net to client',
'bytes received via SQL*Net from client')
group by n.name
See also:
Monitor connections and resources
Historical trends
Reports
Data manipulation and data export
Customization
Exporting Graphs
Use File/Export menu in DB Monitor Expert to save screenshots of open graphical monitors to various file
formats. Saved files can be then archived or emailed as any other file type. You can use your favorite image
editor or web browser to open previously saved graphic files for viewing.
DB Tools currently supports JPG, BMP and WMF file formats.
Background Database Performance Statistics Collection
Job
DB Tools allows you to setup an automated procedure for periodically capturing various database
dynamic performance statistics and saving them in ORA_MONITOR.DB_WATCH table. Captured
statistics can provide invaluable help in troubleshooting database performance issues, monitoring
service availability for mission critical applications as well as it can aid in database capacity planning
and analysis. All collected statistics are consolidated and saved in a single table as historical database
and application performance snapshots. This information can be easily queried, analyzed and reported
using any tool of your choice. Several DB tools reports also use the collected data.
The Background Database Statistics Collection job can be installed using DB Tools Database Setup
utility.
-99-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
By default the installed job will run every 15 minutes. As the job will run it will automatically save
average numbers for every hour creating in total 24 records every day (which is just 8760 records a
year).
Captured statistics include all major database performance metrics as well as statistics for top 5 wait
events, top 5 active users and top 5 applications causing waits and affecting the overall database
performance. The following table describes columns of the ORA_MONITOR.DB_WATCH table.
Column Name
TIMESTAMP
Data Type
DATE
STAT_TYPE
CHAR(1)
BUFFER_MISSES
NUMBER
BUFFER_HITS
NUMBER
DICT_MISSES
NUMBER
DICT_HITS
NUMBER
LIBRARY_MISSES
NUMBER
LIBRARY_HITS
NUMBER
SORT_MISSES
NUMBER
SORT_HITS
NUMBER
RECUSRIVE_CALLS
NUMBER
OTHER_CALLS
NUMBER
LONG_SCANS
NUMBER
OTHER_SCANS
NUMBER
FILE_READS
NUMBER
FILE_WRITES
NUMBER
FILE_THROUGHOUT
NUMBER
ROLLBACK_GETS
NUMBER
Description
Time when statistics were collected or consolidated
for the past hour
The value in this column could be either C or H.
•
C – means CURRENT – represent
statistics for the current hour
•
H – means HOURLY – represent past
hourly statistics
Percent of Db buffer misses (sum of values in
BUFFER_MISSES and BUFFER_HITS columns
should be always equal to 1)
Percent of Db Buffer hits (sum of values in
BUFFER_MISSES and BUFFER_HITS columns
should be always equal to 1)
Percent of Dictionary Cache misses (sum of values
in DICT_MISSES and DICT_HITS columns should
be always equal to 1)
Percent Dictionary Cache hits (sum of values in
DICT_MISSES and DICT_HITS columns should be
always equal to 1)
Percent of Library Cache misses (sum of values in
LIBRARY_MISSES and LIBRARY_HITS columns
should be always equal to 1)
Percent of Library Cache hits (sum of values in
LIBRARY_MISSES and LIBRARY_HITS columns
should be always equal to 1)
Percent of in memory sorts misses (sorts requiring
disk I/O) (sum of values in SORT_MISSES and
SORT_HITS columns should be always equal to 1)
Percent of in memory sorts hits (sorts not requiring
disk I/O) (sum of values in SORT_MISSES and
SORT_HITS columns should be always equal to 1)
Percent of recursive calls (sum of values in
RECURSIVE_CALLS and OTHER_CALLS columns
should be always equal to 1)
Percent of non-recursive calls (sum of values in
RECURSIVE_CALLS and OTHER_CALLS columns
should be always equal to 1)
Percent of long table scans (sum of values
LONG_SCANS and OTHER_SCANS should be
always equal to 1)
Percent of short table scans (sum of values
LONG_SCANS and OTHER_SCANS columns
should be always equal to 1)
Total physically file reads in Kbytes performed since
the database instance startup
Total physically file writes in Kbytes performed since
the database instance startup
I/O throughout Kbytes/sec. This value is calculated
as the total number of Kbytes red/written from/to all
database files between 2 statistics collection job
runs divided by the number of seconds between job
runs.
Total number of rollback gets since the database
-100-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
ROLLBACK_WRITES
NUMBER
USER_SESSIONS
NUMBER
SES_IDLE
NUMBER
SES_ACTIVE
NUMBER
SES_WAITING
SES_LOCKS
SES_OPEN_CURSORS
SES_DB_GETS
NUMBER
NUMBER
NUMBER
NUMBER
SES_CPU
NUMBER
SES_CPU_USED
NUMBER
SES_MEMORY
NUMBER
WAIT_EVENT1_NAME
VARCHAR2(30)
WAIT_EVENT1
NUMBER
WAIT_EVENT2_NAME
VARCHAR2(30)
WAIT_EVENT2
NUMBER
WAIT_EVENT3_NAME
VARCHAR2(30)
WAIT_EVENT3
NUMBER
WAIT_EVENT4_NAME
VARCHAR2(30)
WAIT_EVENT4
NUMBER
WAIT_EVENT5_NAME
VARCHAR2(30)
WAIT_EVENT5
NUMBER
WAIT_SEG1_NAME
VARCHAR2(171)
WAIT_SEG1
NUMBER
WAIT_SEG2_NAME
VARCHAR2(171)
instance startup
Total number of rollback writes since the database
instance startup
Maximum number of user sessions logged on (sum
of values in SES_IDLE and SES_ACTIVE columns
should always match the value in the
USER_SESSIONS column)
Maximum number of user sessions logged on but
inactive (not executing database commands)
Maximum number of user sessions logged on and
active (executing database commands)
Maximum number of user sessions waiting for locks
Maximum number of locks
Maximum number of open cursors
Total number of all db block gets for all user
sessions since the database instance startup
Total time in centiseconds (1/100 of seconds) spend
by the database executing user commands since
the database instance startup
Total time in centiseconds (1/100 of seconds) spend
by the database executing user commands since
the previous statistics collection job run.
Total amount of SGA memory allocated to user
sessions
Name of the first of top 5 wait events detected at the
time of statistics collection job run.
Average wait time in centiseconds (1/100 of
seconds) for the first of top 5 wait events detected at
the time of statistics collection job run.
Name of the second of top 5 wait events detected at
the time of statistics collection job run.
Average wait time in centiseconds (1/100 of
seconds) for the second of top 5 wait events
detected at the time of statistics collection job run.
Name of the third of top 5 wait events detected at
the time of statistics collection job run.
Average wait time in centiseconds (1/100 of
seconds) for the third of top 5 wait events detected
at the time of statistics collection job run.
Name of the fourth of top 5 wait events detected at
the time of statistics collection job run.
Average wait time in centiseconds (1/100 of
seconds) for the fourth of top 5 wait events detected
at the time of statistics collection job run.
Name of the fifth of top 5 wait events detected at the
time of statistics collection job run.
Average wait time in centiseconds (1/100 of
seconds) for the fifth of top 5 wait events detected at
the time of statistics collection job run.
Name of the first of top 5 objects experiencing I/O
contention (buffer busy waits) detected at the time of
statistics collection job run. Name is reported in
"owner.object (partition)" format for partitioned
objects and in "owner.object" format for nopartitioned objects.
Maximum wait time in seconds for the first of top 5
objects experiencing I/O contention (buffer busy
waits) detected at the time of statistics collection job
run.
Name of the second of top 5 objects experiencing
I/O contention (buffer busy waits) detected at the
-101-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
WAIT_SEG2
NUMBER
WAIT_SEG3_NAME
VARCHAR2(171)
WAIT_SEG3
NUMBER
WAIT_SEG4_NAME
VARCHAR2(171)
WAIT_SEG4
NUMBER
WAIT_SEG5_NAME
VARCHAR2(171)
WAIT_SEG5
NUMBER
IO_APPL1
VARCHAR2(30)
IO_APPL1_COUNT
NUMBER
IO_DB_GETS1
NUMBER
IO_APPL2
VARCHAR2(30)
IO_APPL2_COUNT
NUMBER
IO_DB_GETS2
NUMBER
IO_APPL3
VARCHAR2(30)
IO_APPL3_COUNT
NUMBER
time of statistics collection job run. Name is reported
in "owner.object (partition)" format for partitioned
objects and in "owner.object" format for nopartitioned objects.
Maximum wait time in seconds for the second of top
5 objects experiencing I/O contention (buffer busy
waits) detected at the time of statistics collection job
run.
Name of the third of top 5 objects experiencing I/O
contention (buffer busy waits) detected at the time of
statistics collection job run. Name is reported in
"owner.object (partition)" format for partitioned
objects and in "owner.object" format for nopartitioned objects.
Maximum wait time in seconds for the third of top 5
objects experiencing I/O contention (buffer busy
waits) detected at the time of statistics collection job
run.
Name of the fourth of top 5 objects experiencing I/O
contention (buffer busy waits) detected at the time of
statistics collection job run. Name is reported in
"owner.object (partition)" format for partitioned
objects and in "owner.object" format for nopartitioned objects.
Maximum wait time in seconds for the fourth of top 5
objects experiencing I/O contention (buffer busy
waits) detected at the time of statistics collection job
run.
Name of the fifth of top 5 objects experiencing I/O
contention (buffer busy waits) detected at the time of
statistics collection job run. Name is reported in
"owner.object (partition)" format for partitioned
objects and in "owner.object" format for nopartitioned objects.
Maximum wait time in seconds for the fifth of top 5
objects experiencing I/O contention (buffer busy
waits) detected at the time of statistics collection job
run.
Name of the first of top 5 applications causing lots of
db buffer gets detected at the time of statistics
collection job run.
Number of running instances of the first of top 5
applications causing lots of db buffer gets detected
at the time of statistics collection job run.
Total number of all db buffer gets for the first of top 5
applications causing lots of db buffer gets (all
running instances).
Name of the second of top 5 applications causing
lots of db buffer gets detected at the time of
statistics collection job run.
Number of running instances of the second of top 5
applications causing lots of db buffer gets detected
at the time of statistics collection job run.
Total number of all db buffer gets for the second of
top 5 applications causing lots of db buffer gets (all
running instances)
Name of the third of top 5 applications causing lots
of db buffer gets detected at the time of statistics
collection job run.
Number of running instances of the third of top 5
applications causing lots of db buffer gets detected
-102-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
IO_DB_GETS3
NUMBER
IO_APPL4
VARCHAR2(30)
IO_APPL4_COUNT
NUMBER
IO_DB_GETS4
NUMBER
IO_APPL5
VARCHAR2(30)
IO_APPL5_COUNT
NUMBER
IO_DB_GETS5
NUMBER
CPU_APPL1
VARCHAR2(30)
CPU_APPL1_COUNT
NUMBER
CPU_USED1
NUMBER
CPU_APPL2
VARCHAR2(30)
CPU_APPL2_COUNT
NUMBER
CPU_USED2
NUMBER
CPU_APPL3
VARCHAR2(30)
CPU_APPL3_COUNT
NUMBER
CPU_USED3
NUMBER
CPU_APPL4
VARCHAR2(30)
CPU_APPL4_COUNT
NUMBER
CPU_USED4
NUMBER
CPU_APPL5
VARCHAR2(30)
at the time of statistics collection job run.
Total number of all db buffer gets for the third of top
5 applications causing lots of db buffer gets (all
running instances).
Name of the fourth of top 5 applications causing lots
of db buffer gets detected at the time of statistics
collection job run.
Number of running instances of the fourth of top 5
applications causing lots of db buffer gets detected
at the time of statistics collection job run.
Total number of all db buffer gets for the fourth of
top 5 applications causing lots of db buffer gets (all
running instances).
Name of the fifth of top 5 applications causing lots of
db buffer gets detected at the time of statistics
collection job run.
Number of running instances of the fifth of top 5
applications causing lots of db buffer gets detected
at the time of statistics collection job run.
Total number of all db buffer gets for the fifth of top 5
applications causing lots of db buffer gets (all
running instances).
Name of the first of top 5 applications taking most
CPU resources detected at the time of statistics
collection job run.
Number of running instances of the first of top 5
applications taking most CPU resources detected at
the time of statistics collection job run.
Total number of all db buffer gets for the first of top 5
applications taking most CPU resources (all running
instances).
Name of the second of top 5 applications taking
most CPU resources detected at the time of
statistics collection job run.
Number of running instances of the second of top 5
applications taking most CPU resources detected at
the time of statistics collection job run.
Total number of all db buffer gets for the second of
top 5 applications taking most CPU resources (all
running instances)
Name of the third of top 5 applications taking most
CPU resources detected at the time of statistics
collection job run.
Number of running instances of the third of top 5
applications taking most CPU resources detected at
the time of statistics collection job run.
Total number of all db buffer gets for the third of top
5 applications taking most CPU resources (all
running instances).
Name of the fourth of top 5 applications taking most
CPU resources detected at the time of statistics
collection job run.
Number of running instances of the fourth of top 5
applications taking most CPU resources detected at
the time of statistics collection job run.
Total number of all db buffer gets for the fourth of
top 5 applications taking most CPU resources (all
running instances).
Name of the fifth of top 5 applications taking most
CPU resources detected at the time of statistics
collection job run.
-103-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
CPU_APPL5_COUNT
NUMBER
CPU_USED5
NUMBER
LAST_SCN
NUMBER
LAST_SCN_ARCHIVED
NUMBER
SCH_ARCHIVE_RATE
NUMBER
Number of running instances of the fifth of top 5
applications taking most CPU resources detected at
the time of statistics collection job run.
Total number of all db buffer gets for the fifth of top 5
applications taking most CPU resources (all running
instances).
Last system change number (SCN) recorded before
statistics collection job run. Note: Oracle increments
SCN every time a transaction is committed.
Last archived system change number (SCN) before
statistics collection job run. Note: Oracle increments
SCN every time a transaction is committed. The
archived SCN represents number of last transaction
archived in archive log files.
System archival rate (transactions/hour) - number of
archived transactions between 2 statistics collection
job runs.
Monitor connections and resources (Monitor menu)
You can use monitors to gather lots of database characteristics in a real-time. All monitors query dynamic
performance tables in combination with data dictionary tables and views.
To customize monitors behavior such as sampling cycle (refresh rate), select Tools/Options command or
simple click the Options button on the toolbar
. An Option dialog box will appear. For your convenience,
active monitor properties will be preloaded so you can quickly change them. DB Monitor Expert allows you
easily change sorting and filtering by clicking on monitor column headers and selecting commands from
View menu. You can also right-click any monitor to get some additional features accessible from a popup
menu that appears in response to the click.
DB Monitor Expert provides the following real-time monitors:
Connections
Use this monitor to track individual user processes and process parameters. This monitor displays
cumulative information about user connections including connection (session) status, the application and
terminal from which the connection was established.
To drill-down user activity:
•
Select File/Memory and CPU Usage to track current and top session memory.
•
Select File/Query text to see last SQL statement executed by the session.
•
Select required session on the Connections tab then click on the Session Details tab to see in depth
all session parameters.
•
Select the SQL tab to see session's SQL statements. SQL tab on refresh automatically calculates
timing, affected data and other statistics for the displayed SQL statements. Keep this tab page open to
allow persistent SQL tracking. New SQL statements appear at the end of the view. Note that the
monitor is discreet in time. It cannot catch SQL statements that were executed during sampling cycle.
Specify fast refresh interval to improve accuracy of the SQL view.
Open Cursors
A cursor is a handle for the memory associated with a specific statement. ORACLE logs all statements that
are being executed. Looking at open cursors display you can find out what your database is doing now and
find out user that initiated executed statements. Open cursors monitor also helps to trace system-wide SQL
activity. Note that only first 60 characters of each SQL statement are displayed. To find out full text of
executed statements use the SQL Area monitor.
-104-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
SQL Area
SQL Area is a part of the shared pool that holds shared SQL and PL/SQL statements (referred as the library
cache), dictionary cache, and information on sessions against the database. You control the size of the
shared pool by setting SHARED_POOL_SIZE parameter in INIT.ORA. SQL statements are placed in the
shared pool and flushed according to an LRU (least recently used) algorithm.
By monitoring SQL Area, you can see what statements are sitting there. Knowing what statements are
already there assists you in coding SQL that matches.
Look at reloads column to find out number of misses. If the ration of reloads to executions is greater than
1%, consider adding memory to the shared SQL pool. Also, look at the offensive statements that have high
percent of disk reads and/or buffer gets. They appear in red.
From SQL Area monitor you can invoke an Explain Plan for any SELECT statement. Do the following:
1 Highlight the statement for which you want to get plan explanation (click on the first line of the sell
containing SQL text or on any other sell in the same row). The highlighted sell has black background.
2 Select File/Explain Plan command or simply click the Explain Plan button on the toolbar
.
3 DB Monitor Expert will retrieve enhanced Explain Plan.
Object Access
The object access monitor shows tables, procedures, views, etc that are in use and the users and programs
accessing them. You can use filtering and sorting facilities for limiting display to specific session, user or
program.
Cached Objects
Use cached objects display for monitoring library cache. You can use filtering and sorting facilities for easy
finding most popular objects that were loaded/executed. For instance, you can do descendant sort by loads
and filter out objects that have type='TABLE'. This will tell you most frequently accessed tables.
Application Effectiveness
By looking at the table scans (short tables) and table scans (long tables) rows, you can determine how many
full table scans your database is doing. A full table scan occurs when ORACLE does not have an
appropriate index to use, and it is forced to read every row in a table. If you intend to process the majority of
records, then using a full table scan is faster. In most environments, though, expect to see the majority of the
access being done via indexes. So, look at non-index lookups ratio to determine if there is a problem.
File Input/Output
Use file I/O to observe both cumulative physical reads and writes activity by file. By analyzing this
information, you can pinpoint which files are used most heavily, making sure that they are on separate disks
and separate disk controllers. Detect files that have an uneven work load and try to balance a distribution of
I/O by doing following:
•
Move one or more database files to another disk to balance the load.
•
When a frequently accessed table shares space in a data-file with other tables, take the busy table out
of the shared data-file and put it in its own data-file on another drive.
Rollback Segments
Examine rollback segments display to determine if there is contention for rollback segments. If rollback
segment waits/gets percent for any segment (number of header waits divided by number of header gets) is
-105-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
greater than 10%, additional rollback segments may be required, especially if the number of active
transactions is significant for this rollback segment. To examine rollback segment activity you can use
Rollback Transaction monitor (see next section). To examine rollback waits statistic use the Waits monitor.
Rollback Transactions
This monitor simply displays active rollback segment transaction and processes that own those transactions.
Buffer Cache
Database buffers of the SGA store the most recently used blocks of database data. Remember that all data
must pass through this cache before they can be accessed by ORACLE. Use buffer cache monitor to track
cumulative physical and logical reads from buffer cache. Look at hit ratio that measures effectiveness of the
cache. Usually a healthy database has hit ratio between 90% and 95%. You can set DB_BLOCK_BUFFERS
parameter in INIT.ORA to adjust size of the buffer cache.
Dictionary Cache
Dictionary cache monitor tracks total misses vs. gets ratio for database dictionary cache. Usually that ratio
falls below 7%. If it is greater than 7% consider increase of SHARED_POOL_SIZE parameter in INIT.ORA.
A poorly tuned dictionary cache can degrade performance by 50% or even more.
Redo Log Latches
Latches are low-level locks on Oracle shared internal structures. The redo log latches monitor displays redo
log latch activity statistics for processes of the database instance.
Recursive Calls
Recursive calls are reads of data dictionary information from disk that is not in the SGA. Recursive calls ratio
is calculated as average number of recursive calls per number of opened cursors. Recursive calls ratio is
usually between 7.0 and 10.0 for tuned production systems and might be as high as 10.0 - 14.5 for tuned
development systems. Also, look at parse count ratio calculated as average number of parses per number of
opened cursors. Parse count ratio usually falls between 1.15 and 1.45. If it is higher then it is usually a sign
of not optimized SQL queries.
Dispatcher Processes
The Dispatcher monitor displays summary information about dispatcher processes. All processes are
grouped by network protocol.
Sorts
The sorts (disk) row tells you how many times you had to sort to disk; that is size that could not be handled
by the size of SORT_AREA_SIZE parameter in INIT.ORA. The sorts (memory) row tells you how many
times you were able to complete the sort using just memory. Usually 90% or higher of all sorts should be
done in memory.
Waits
Use waits monitor to find out all waits for resources. A majority of waits usually related with rollback
segments activity. If your waiting is high, try to add more rollback segments. On other hand, if your waiting
was due to data blocks, you need to modify your freelist settings for most busy tables.
-106-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Locks
Oracle establishes different forms of locking to insure consistency, concurrency and integrity of its data. In
addition, locks can be issued "manually" during database application operations. Use locks monitor to detect
abnormal or unnecessary locking situations and requests. Sort locks by objects for easy finding dead locks
and resolving sessions blocked by locks.
SGA
Use this display to get picture of SGA (System global Area) memory distribution. Compare total memory
allocated by SGA to the amount of memory available on the server. Keep in mind, that SGA should never
take over 50% of the available memory, otherwise the low memory impact will slow down the entire system.
Custom Monitors
In addition to the variety of predefined monitors and customizing features that DB Monitor Expert provides,
you can also define your own monitors. User-defined monitors can address your database specific
requirements. Using custom monitors, you can also automate problem detection and correction, and
optionally execute a job to fix the problem and generate alarm message that may be sent via E-mail, pager
or beeper to you or other people.
To create a new monitor:
1.
Select Monitor/Custom Monitor menu. DB Monitor Expert will open the Custom Monitors dialog.
The dialog window will display all already created custom monitors.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Enter valid name in the Name field on the Properties tab. Note that name may consist spaces.
4.
Specify appropriate timer interval in the Interval field. The number must be in range from 1 to
32767 seconds.
5.
Type valid SQL SELECT statement in the Select field. Alternatively, you can paste SQL from the
clipboard. To do this, use keyboard shortcut CTRL V or use right mouse click on the Select field
then from popup menu choose the Paste command. Also, you can click on the Open File
button to paste SQL from the file. This SQL statement will be used to gather statistics to be
displayed in the monitor you are defining. Make sure that the SQL statement does not end with a
semicolon (;). To avoid unclear column names in the monitor syntax always use aliases in the
select statement (see examples).
6.
Click on the Preview tab to customize display properties of the monitor. You can resize columns,
set filter and additional sort order. See filtering and sorting topics for details. Note that if later
change the SELECT statement you will need to re-apply design changes again.
7.
Click the Filter button to specify additional Filter that DB Monitor Expert will apply after retrieving
data for the monitor.
8.
Click the Sort button to change data order after DB Monitor Expert retrieve data for the monitor.
9.
Click on the Threshold tab to customize new monitor behavior. If required, enter threshold
condition that the monitor will verify every time a new sampling will occur.
10. If you wish, you can specify fixit job, which the monitor performs when the threshold condition is
detected. In the SQL File field type SQL file name where fixit job specified. Alternatively, you can
click Open File
button to browse and paste the SQL file name. For example, you can have
the monitor for monitoring the tablespace TEMP in the database SALES and generate an alert if
the tablespace runs out of free space. You can also have a data-file automatically added to the
tablespace if this event occurs.
11. To generate alert message, fill all fields in the Action box. Following methods are presently
supported: E-mail, Pager, and Beeper. Note that the Beeper method is provided so that you can
send messages to “Numeric Only” pagers. It does not use the TAP protocol. DB Monitor Expert
simply takes the phone line off-hook, dials the pager phone number, waits x number of seconds,
touch tones the digits to be displayed on the pager and hangs up. It is recommended that
-107-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
whenever possible you use other described methods to send alert messages, because of their
reliability.
12. Click the Save button to save the new monitor definition. The monitor can be used again later on.
13. Click the Run button to start the monitor you have defined. Note that you can run the monitor
without doing save first, but by default DB Monitor Expert does not save the monitor definition for
you until you click the Save button. So that if you do not save the definition you will not be able to
reuse this monitor later.
14. Now you can build another monitor or click the Exit button to close Custom Monitor dialog.
The following example of user-defined monitor is included in the standard installation package:
Free space monitor
SELECT seg.owner,
seg.segment_name,
seg.segment_type,
seg.tablespace_name,
to_char(seg.max_extents, '999,999,999') next_extent
FROM sys.dba_segments seg
WHERE seg.extents = seg.max_extents
UNION ALL
SELECT seg.owner,
seg.segment_name,
seg.segment_type,
seg.tablespace_name,
to_char(t.next_extent, '999,999,999')
FROM sys.dba_segments seg,
sys.dba_tables t
WHERE seg.segment_type = 'TABLE'
AND seg.segment_name = t.table_name
AND seg.owner = t.owner
AND NOT EXISTS (SELECT tablespace_name
FROM dba_free_space free
WHERE free.tablespace_name = t.tablespace_name
AND free.bytes >= t.next_extent
)
UNION ALL
SELECT seg.owner,
seg.segment_name,
seg.segment_type,
seg.tablespace_name,
to_char(i.next_extent, '999,999,999')
FROM sys.dba_segments seg,
sys.dba_indexes i
WHERE seg.segment_type = 'INDEX'
AND seg.segment_name = i.index_name
AND seg.owner = i.owner
AND NOT EXISTS (SELECT tablespace_name
FROM dba_free_space free
WHERE free.tablespace_name = i.tablespace_name
AND free.bytes >= i.next_extent
)
UNION ALL
SELECT seg.owner,
seg.segment_name,
seg.segment_type,
seg.tablespace_name,
to_char(c.next_extent, '999,999,999')
FROM sys.dba_segments seg,
sys.dba_clusters c
WHERE seg.segment_type = 'CLUSTER'
AND seg.segment_name = c.cluster_name
AND seg.owner = c.owner
-108-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
AND NOT EXISTS (SELECT tablespace_name
FROM dba_free_space free
WHERE free.tablespace_name = c.tablespace_name
AND free.bytes >= c.next_extent
)
UNION ALL
SELECT seg.owner,
seg.segment_name,
seg.segment_type,
seg.tablespace_name,
to_char(r.next_extent, '999,999,999')
FROM sys.dba_segments seg,
sys.dba_rollback_segs r
WHERE seg.segment_type = 'ROLLBACK'
AND seg.segment_name = r.segment_name
AND seg.owner = r.owner
AND NOT EXISTS (SELECT tablespace_name
FROM dba_free_space free
WHERE free.tablespace_name = r.tablespace_name
AND free.bytes >= r.next_extent
)
See also:
Historical trends - database performance
Graph - dynamic statistic
Reports
Data manipulation and data export
Customization
Using Thresholds in Custom Performance Monitors
Normally threshold values in custom graphical performance monitors should be used with one or more
communications options. Using these options you can configure DB Monitor Expert to notify you whenever
the specified threshold value is reached.
Important Notes: In order to detect a threshold-reached event value DB Monitor Expert must be
running at that time and the graphical monitor must open on the screen. Although graphical custom monitors
with threshold values are very easy to build they are applicable as a solution to full time performance
monitoring! Use them as a quick way to monitor things while developing new applications or making
database changes. As a long-term solution for building always-on performance monitors use custom
procedures running on the back-end and using DB Alert Expert to communicate to you using email, pager or
other communication methods.
The following 3 communication methods are supported in custom performance monitors:
1. Sending Messages To Alpha-numeric Pagers
2. Sending Email Messages
3. Sending Messages to Alpha-numeric and Numeric Beepers
Sending Messages to Pagers
Note: Before attempting to send a direct page, please check with the intended recipient to make sure
they have registered their pager with CompuServe or other similar service.
There is no principal difference in sending E-mail messages and sending messages to a pager. The only
difference is that when you send a message to a pager you must use a special addressing format. For
example, the address format for the CompuServe is:
[email protected]
-109-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
For example, if the account number (CompuServe ID) is 79999,9999, recipient could receive wireless e-mail
by using the address "[email protected]". Note that period must be used in place of
comma.
Tip: In the case of an alphanumeric message, the number of characters received by the recipient
depends on how they set up their pager preferences. Keeping your message short and concise helps to
ensure that the recipient gets the most out of your message.
See E-mail topic for detail on sending email messages.
Pager Services FAQ
Note: You need CompuServe or similar account in order to use paging services.
Q1. Who are the Partner Carriers?
A1. The Partner Carriers are:
. Air Media
. MobileComm
. PageMart
. PageNet
. SkyTel
Q2. How do I register my pager with CompuServe?
A2. To register your pager, you can select GO PAGER
and select "Register My Pager". There is a one-time
fee of $5.00 to register your pager with CompuServe.
Q3. How do I validate my pager?
A3. When you receive a validation message on your pager,
it will include a validation number. Once you have
the number, follow these steps to complete
registration:
1. Select GO PAGER
2. Click on "Register My Pager"
3. Click on "Devices/Preferences"
4. Click on "Validate Device"
Q4. Is there a pager registration support number?
A4. YES, the support number, 1-800-560-0750, can be used
to get initial Pager registration support. They are
very helpful with validation and pager modem numbers.
Q5. How do I change my pager options/preferences?
A5. GO PAGER and select "Change Current Pager Preferences",
"Device/Preferences", "Review/Change Preference". You
may set the number of pages to receive per day/month,
the number of characters per message, subject, or originator
area.
Q6. How does someone address messages from within CompuServe to
be sent to my pager?
A6. Messages originating from another CompuServe member simply
need a "mobile" prefix to your existing CompuServe address.
For example, if your CompuServe address is "79999,999" your
pager address will be "mobile:79999.999" ( Note: you must
change the comma to a period). Personal Addresses also
take the same "mobile:" prefix (i.e. mobile:johndoe).
Q7. How does someone on the Internet address messages to go to
my pager?
-110-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
A7. Messages originating from the Internet need to include
"mobile" as a prefix to the CompuServe domain name. For
example, if your CompuServe address is "79999,999" your
pager address will be "[email protected]"
( Note: you must change the comma to a period). Personal
Addresses also take the same "mobile" prefix -i.e. [email protected]
Q8. Why did my messages/scores/quotes suddenly stop going to
my pager?
A8. You may have reached your daily or monthly limit of
messages set in your pager options. To check your status,
select GO PAGER, "Change Current Pager Preferences",
"Devices/Preferences" and then "Device Status".
Q9. How do I disconnect my pager from CompuServe?
A9. Enter the GO PAGER command. Click "Register my Pager on
CompuServe." Click on "Devices/Preferences." Click on
"Remove Device." NOTICE: If you select Remove Device
and then register your pager again at a later time, you
will be charged the $5.00 registration fee for each time
you select to register your pager.
Q10. What safeguards are in place?
A10. Several security measures are built into the pager
registration process. These safeguards protect against
sending and receiving messages to the wrong pager and
supplement the standard security provided by your account
password:
* First, when you register a pager, the required
information includes the pager number (which is
printed on the back of the pager itself). This
number is hard-coded into the circuitry of the
pager, and it serves as a PIN number similar to
one you would use in an ATM transaction.
* Next you receive a validation message with a
randomly-generated number.
* Then you use the GO PAGER command to enter the
number from the validation message.
Sending E-Mail Messages
DB Monitor Expert supports only Messaging Application Program Interface (MAPI). Before attempting to
send a message, please make sure you e-mail system is MAPI complaint.
You need to create a user-defined monitor before you can specify an event that must be detected by that
monitor and alert message is generated. Once you created such monitor, you should fill out the following
fields on the Threshold tab in order to send e-mail message:
Field
Meaning
Method
Communication method. Select E-mail from drop-down list.
User ID
A string whose value is the mail system user profile name. For example "Exchange
Settings".
Password
A string whose value is the mail system password.
Recipient
A string whose value is the recipient's mail address. Note that your mail system may
support comma-separated list of recipients.
Message
A string whose value is the actual message.
-111-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Sending Messages to Beepers
You must have a modem in order to send numeric messages to a beeper. You need to create a userdefined monitor before you can specify an event that must be detected by that monitor and alert message is
generated. Once you created such monitor, you should fill out the following fields on the Threshold tab in
order to send numeric message to a beeper:
Field
Method
Number
Message
Meaning
Communication method. Select Beeper from drop-down list.
A number whose value is the recipient's beeper number. Note that your can use spaces,
parenthesis, and commas in the number. A comma causes modem to pause when
dialing the number.
A number whose value is the actual message. Note that alphanumeric messages
are not supported in this version of the DB Monitor Expert.
Warning: You have to specify your modem properties on the Modem page in the system Options before
you can send a message.
Performance Library
About the Performance Library
The Performance Library is a collection of over 50 pre-built ready-to-use monitors, graphs, and reports that
can be found in the DB Monitor Expert library of user-defined objects.
To access Performance Library objects use the following commands from the DB Monitor Expert menu:
•
Monitor/Custom Monitor
•
Graph/Custom Graph
•
Trends/Custom Trend Graph
•
Reports/Custom Reports
Using DB Monitor Expert menus you can also add to the Performance Library your own monitors, graphs,
and reports. For details on how to create custom objects in the Performance Library see Custom Monitor,
Custom Graph, Custom Trend Graph, and Custom Report topics.
Enhanced Explain Plan
Both SQL Editor and DB Monitor Expert include visual Explain Plan utility, which provides SQL execution
plan in a user-friendly graphical format. Explain Plan is an important tool for analyzing the efficiency of
access paths used in your queries. To get execution plan in the DBA Notepad window type SQL statement
for which you want to get explanation of the execution strategy and select File/Explain Plan command or
simply click the Plan button on the toolbar.
The output shows how DBMS will execute the analyzed SQL statement, including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
What database operations are being performed in order to execute the statement
Which, if any, indexes are being used
Whether or not the proper set of columns are included in your indexes
How many rows exist in the affected tables
Whether or not the affected tables and clusters have chained rows
Whether or not the affected objects have been analyzed so that the object statistics are available to the
Oracle Query Optimizer.
For detailed information on the specific meaning Explain Plan output, consult the Oracle documentation.
-112-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
In order to archive better plan you can use various tips and techniques fully described in the Oracle
documentation.
Object analysis tools
DB Monitor Expert provides one-step method for object analysis. To perform batch analyses select one or
more objects (tables/indexes/cluster) you want to analyze and choose File/Analyze command). Regularly
performed analyzes help the database optimizer to choose right execution plan for the SQL statements to
the database from all database application. Use tables/indexes/cluster analyze to improve performance of
your application especially after significant changes were made in the table data or structure.
In order to analyze a table, index or cluster, it must belong to your schema or you must have ANALYZE
ANY privileges.
Tip: Pressing hot key CTRL + will select all available objects for analysis. Pressing CTRL - will deselect
all previously selected objects.
See also:
Table Analyzer
Index Analyzer
Cluster Analyzer
Table Analyzer
DB Monitor Expert allows you to analyze one or more tables to compute or estimate statistics stored in the
Oracle data dictionary. In addition you can validate the structure of the table(s) and its indexes and identify
chained rows of the table(s).
In order to analyze a table, it must belong to your schema or you must have ANALYZE ANY privileges.
Analysis Type
Compute Statistics
Explanation
Computes exact statistics about the table for use by the optimizer
then stores them in the system catalog.
-113-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
Estimate Statistics For First
<percent> of rows
Estimate Statistics For First
<number> of rows
Validate Structure
Cascade Indexes
Analyze and Fix Chained Rows
User's Guide
Estimates statistics about the table for use by the optimizer and
stores them in the system catalog. The statistics is based on
specified percent of rows as a sample. Estimate statistics method is
a faster but less thorough alternative to computing statistics.
Estimates statistics about the table for use by the optimizer and
stores them in the system catalog. The statistics is based on
specified number of rows as a sample. Estimate statistics method is
a faster but less thorough alternative to computing statistics.
Validates the structure of the table. If you choose the Cascade
option, then it also validates the table’s indexes.
Validates the structure of the table and the table’s indexes.
Identifies any migrated or chained rows of data in the table. The
result information is placed into CHAINED_ROWS table. If the table
does not exist then DB Tools asks your permissions to create one.
In case if chained rows are found, DB Monitor Expert can fix them
by moving chained rows into a temporary table then deleting and
reinserting these rows into the table being analyzed.
To analyze a table:
1.
Select Tools/Table Analyzer command. Select Schema dialog will appear.
2.
Select schemas for which you want tables to be analyzed.
3.
Highlight one or more tables to be analyzed and select File/Analyze command (shortcut: CTRL O)
The Analyze dialog will open.
4.
Specify the analysis type. Click the OK button.
Note: For large tables, Analyze operation may take very long time. To reduce that time choose
Estimate Statistics For First <number> of rows.
See also:
Index Analyzer
Cluster Analyzer
Index Analyzer
DB Monitor Expert allows you to analyze one or more table indexes to compute or estimate statistics stored
in the Oracle data dictionary. In addition, you can validate the structure of indexes.
In order to analyze an index, it must belong to your schema or you must have ANALYZE ANY privileges.
Analysis Type
Compute Statistics
Estimate Statistics For First
<percent> of rows
Estimate Statistics For First
<number> of rows
Validate Structure
Explanation
Computes exact statistics about the index for use by the optimizer
then stores it in the system catalog.
Estimates statistics about the index for use by the optimizer and
stores them in the system catalog. The statistics is based on
specified percent of rows as a sample. Estimate statistics method is
a faster but less thorough alternative to computing statistics.
Estimates statistics about the index for use by the optimizer and
stores them in the system catalog. The statistics is based on
specified number of rows as a sample. Estimate statistics method is
a faster but less thorough alternative to computing statistics.
Validates the structure of the index.
To analyze an index
1.
Select Tools/Index Analyzer command. Select Schema dialog will appear.
2.
Select schemas for which you want indexes to be analyzed.
-114-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
3.
Highlight one or more indexes to be analyzed and select File/Analyze command (shortcut: CTRL
O) The Analyze dialog will opens.
4.
Specify the analysis type. Click the OK button.
Note: For large tables, Analyze operation may take very long time. To reduce that time choose
Estimate Statistics For First <number> of rows.
See also:
Table Analyzer
Cluster Analyzer
Cluster Analyzer
DB Monitor Expert allows you to analyze one or more clusters to compute or estimate statistics stored in the
Oracle data dictionary. In addition you can validate the structure of the cluster(s) and its indexes and identify
chained rows of the cluster table(s).
In order to analyze a cluster, it must belong to your schema or you must have ANALYZE ANY privileges.
Analysis Type
Compute Statistics
Estimate Statistics For First
<percent> of rows
Estimate Statistics For First
<number> of rows
Validate Structure
Cascade Indexes
Analyze and Fix Chained Rows
Explanation
Computes exact statistics about the cluster for use by the optimizer
then stores it in the system catalog.
Estimates statistics about the cluster for use by the optimizer and
stores them in the system catalog. The statistics is based on
specified percent of rows as a sample. Estimate statistics method is
a faster but less thorough alternative to computing statistics.
Estimates statistics about the cluster for use by the optimizer and
stores them in the system catalog. The statistics is based on
specified number of rows as a sample. Estimate statistics method is
a faster but less thorough alternative to computing statistics.
Validates the structure of the cluster. If you choose the Cascade
option, then Oracle will also validates indexes of cluster.
Validates the structure of the table and the table indexes.
Identifies any migrated or chained rows of data in the cluster. The
result information is placed into CHAINED_ROWS table. If the table
does not exist then DB Monitor Expert asks your permissions to
create one. In case if chained rows are found, DB Monitor Expert
can fix them by moving chained rows into a temporary table then
deleting and reinserting these rows into the table being analyzed.
To analyze a cluster
1.
Select Tools/Cluster Analyzer command. Select Schema dialog will appear.
2.
Select schemas for which you want clusters to be analyzed.
3.
Highlight one or more clusters to be analyzed and select File/Analyze command (shortcut: CTRL
O) The Analyze dialog opens.
4.
Specify the analysis type. Click the OK button.
Note: For large tables, Analyze operation may take very long time. To reduce that time choose
Estimate Statistics For First <number> of rows.
See also:
Table Analyzer
Index Analyzer
-115-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Scheduler
To open the Scheduler graphical interface select Tools/Scheduler command, or alternatively click
on the application toolbar.
Scheduler button
Do not confuse the scheduler available in DB monitor Expert with the DB Job Expert component!
The Scheduler supports both client side and server side jobs. For details on server side jobs see description
of the DBMS_JOB package in the Oracle Administration Guide. To use server side scheduling and job
execution you must have sufficient authority to access SYS.DBMS_JOB package. Contact your Oracle DBA
if have not enough authority.
Scheduling a new job:
1
Run the Scheduler by clicking on the Scheduler icon (see instructions above)
2
You can schedule simultaneously one SQL script, one report, and one external program.
•
To schedule SQL script: Type the date and time when you want to run the job in the Start field of
the SQL script section. You may use scroll bars to adjust start date and time. Note that adjustment
is performed to the current section (where cursor is) of the date-time field. Scrolling insures that you
do not enter invalid date or time such as February 30. Press Tab to move to the next field. Type in
the name of the SQL file in the SQL script edit field. Use the Browse button
to access the
standard Browse facility to search for and select a file. Note that file existence is not verified when
you schedule the job. DB Monitor Expert checks file when time to run the job comes. This flexibility
allows you to produce/modify file from another program from time to time.
The SQL script may have one or more SQL statements in. If the script features SELECT
statements and you wish to print their result sets, check Print results box.
To repeatedly run scheduled SQL script, scroll the Repeat every field until you find appropriate
time interval. If you do not wish to repeat the SQL script, make sure you have [None] in Repeat
script every field.
•
To schedule report: Type the date and time when you want to run the job in the Start field of the
Report section. You may use scroll bars to adjust start date and time. Note that adjustment is
performed to the current section (where cursor is) of the date-time field. Scrolling insures that you
do not enter invalid date or time such as February 30. Press Tab to move to the next field. Select
from drop down list report name you wish to run. Note that report names are transparent to name of
commands under application Monitor and Graph menus. You also can schedule custom monitors,
graphs, and reports you created using Monitor/Custom Monitor, Graph/Custom Graph, and
Report/Custom Report commands. For more details see Custom Monitor, Custom Graph, and
Custom Report topics. You must use unique names for your custom objects, otherwise the
Scheduler finds first matching name and submits the job.
Click properties button
to specify custom filter and sort criteria for the scheduled report. You
are not allowed to specify another filter or sort for user-defined reports, monitors and graphs,
modify your custom object definition instead.
To repeatedly run scheduled report, scroll Repeat every field until you find appropriate time
interval. If you do not wish to repeat the report, make sure you have [None] in Repeat report
every field.
•
To schedule external program: Type the date and time when you want to run the job in the Start
field of the External program section. You may use scroll bars to adjust start date and time. Note
that adjustment is performed to the current section (where cursor is) of the date-time field. Scrolling
-116-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
insures that you do not enter invalid date or time such as February 30. Press Tab to move to the
next field. Type in the name of the program file in the Program Name edit field. Use the Browse
button
to access the standard Browse facility to search for and select a program file. Note
that file existence is not verified when you schedule the job. DB Monitor Expert checks file when
time to run the job comes. This flexibility allows you to produce/modify file from another program
from time to time.
To repeatedly run scheduled program, scroll Repeat every field until you find appropriate time
interval. If you do not wish to repeat the program, make sure you have [None] in the Repeat every
field.
Connecting scheduler to the database.
If you schedule a long waiting task and do not want to keep connection to the database until time to run
scheduled task, check Auto-connect/disconnect box. You must be connected to the database at the
time when you set scheduler for auto-connect options, because the scheduler picks up from connection
context all necessary connection properties. When it is time to run SQL script or report the schedule will
establish connection to the database, run scheduled job, then disconnect from the database.
Locking DB Monitor Expert console when you are not around.
If you schedule a long waiting task and you do not want anybody to use DB Monitor Expert, you can
check Lock console box to lock the program after you finish scheduling. To unlock the program, hit any
key. Enter user name and password dialog will appear. Enter the same name and password you use
to establish connection to the database. Click the OK button.
You can have DB Monitor Expert quit automatically after all scheduled jobs are done.
You should not schedule repeatable jobs in this case; otherwise, it will never stop.
•
Notes:
You can schedule simultaneously any combination of SQL script, report and external program.
However, when their execution times are equal DB Monitor Expert executes scheduled SQL script first,
then scheduled report and last - external program.
•
If "skip expired jobs" option is specified and execution of jobs that have higher priority takes longer than
specified allowed delay, DB Monitor Expert does not execute expired jobs.
•
The scheduler displays on the status bar the countdown time for the next scheduled job.
•
If any of scheduled jobs fail, all other pending jobs will be suspended.
-117-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To Stop a Job:
1
2
•
•
•
3
Run the Scheduler by clicking on the Scheduler icon (see above)
Either enter zero start time (00/00/00 00:00) or remove job from job field.
To remove SQL script: empty SQL script file field.
To remove report: select blank name from the Reports drop down list box.
To remove external program: empty program file field.
When you are finished, click the OK button.
Connection Manager
DB Monitor Expert includes a basic process monitor to assist you in managing server activity. To access the
Connection Manager select Tools/Connection Manager (shortcut: ALT T, M) from the application menu.
The Connection Manager's window consists of the following three tab pages:
Connections - Displays all database sessions. All active sessions have session status ACTIVE in red. All
inactive sessions have INACTIVE status in black. Choose Show inactive only option on top of the
Connection Manager window to filter inactive sessions only. Choose Show active only option on
top of the Connection Manager window to filter active sessions only.
-118-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Waiting Processes - Displays all database sessions that are locked by other sessions and waiting for locks
to be released.
Lock Tree - Displays for all database locks, including pending locks in the tree-view style structure. Hold
locks appear on a first level and have yellow hand icon. Locks that are pending and waiting for
other locks to be released first appear as second level leafs (white hand icon). Detected deadlocks
have red hand icon and bold text.
To change refresh rate:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Tools/Options command or click Options button on the toolbar.
An Option dialog box will
appear.
From the Screen drop-down list box select Connection Manager item.
Correct refresh rate in the Timer Interval field. Note that 0 will stop the timer, but you can still use
manual refresh after that.
Click the OK button.
To force screen refresh:
1.
Select File/New Refresh command (shortcut: CTRL N).
To kill running processes:
1.
2.
3.
Highlight the process you want to terminate.
Select File/Delete command (shortcut: CTRL D) to issue a kill command for that process. You will be
prompted with a warning, asking you to confirm the operation.
Click the OK button if you are sure.
Index Histograms
1.
2.
3.
4.
To perform in-depth analysis for an index, select Tools/Index Analysis (Histogram) command
from application menu. The select index dialog will appear.
Select index schema from the Schema drop-down list box.
Select the required index from index list.
Click the OK button. DB Monitor Expert will issue the analyze command. After database executes
the command, a detailed index report will be created.
-119-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
5.
Data Histograms
DB Monitor Expert provides very useful and yet simple tool for quick data analysis. To perform in-depth
analysis use DB Monitor Expert facilities to export data into external files (see Data manipulation and data
export topic) then use more sophisticated tools. In case if you have an index on the data that you want to
analyze, you can use Index Histogram tool instead.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To perform analysis for a table data select Tools/Data Analysis (Histogram) command from
application menu. The select table dialog will appear.
Select table schema from the schema drop-down list box.
Select the required table from the index list.
Select column from which you want to take data for the histogram.
Click the OK button. DB Monitor Expert will execute all the necessary SQL commands, and creates
data histogram report. Note that the time required for data analysis heavily depends on amount of
data stored in the column.
-120-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Reports
You can use reporting facilities to gather general and detailed information about your database physical and
logical structure as well as database security information. We encourage you to use these reports as part of
your database documentation. Besides simple printing, you can export report data to numerous file formats
as well as select and copy report data to the Windows clipboard for sharing with other applications. See
Working with data and export topic for help on how to export, copy, filter and sort report data. You can also
right -click on any report to get some additional features accessible from a popup menu that appears in
response to the click.
For most reports, DB Monitor Expert displays Select Schema dialog before retrieving the report. You can
check either Report All checkbox for all schemas, or select one or more schemas you want to add to the
chosen reports.
Objects Report
Reports summary data for different types of database objects.
Tables Report
Reports detailed information about all database tables. This report queries database repository table SYS.DBA_TABLES. Oracle updates table statistic in the repository when you analyze tables. To refresh
table statistic select Tools/Table Analyzer and perform analyzes for tables that haven't been analyzed for a
while.
Indexes Report
Reports detailed information about all database indexes. This report queries database repository table SYS.DBA_INDEXES. Oracle updates table statistic in the repository when you analyze indexes. To refresh
-121-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
index statistic select Tools/Index Analyzer and perform analyzes for indexes that haven't been analyzed for
a while. Alternatively, you can analyze tables and/or clusters with cascade indexes option turned on.
Clusters Report
Reports detailed information about all database clusters. This report queries database repository table SYS.DBA_CLUSTERS. Oracle updates cluster statistic in the repository when you analyze cluster. To
refresh cluster statistic select Tools/Cluster Analyzer and perform analyzes for clusters that haven't been
analyzed for a while.
Tablespaces Report
Reports space allocation information for tablespaces; displays free space in red for tablespaces that have
less that 10% of free space. A bar graph is provided for easy comparison of free and allocated space.
Database Files Report
Reports database files, their sizes and statuses; for each file reports tablespaces, it consists of, as well as
tablespace sizes and statuses.
Sequences Report
Reports detailed information about all database sequences.
Snapshots Report
Reports detailed information about all database snapshots, including query text for each snapshot.
Synonyms Report
Reports detailed information about all database synonyms.
Database Links Report
Reports detailed information about all database links.
Users Report
Reports detailed information about all database users, including their encrypted passwords.
Profiles Report
Reports detailed information about all database profiles, including associated password security settings and
resource usage limits.
Table Privileges Report
Reports all granted table privileges. For your convenience, the report is broken on four groups:
•
Group by grantor
•
Subgroup by grantee
•
Subgroup by scheme
•
Subgroup by object
Triggers Report
Reports detailed information about all database triggers, including trigger definitions.
-122-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Procedures, Functions And Packages Report
Reports detailed information about all database function and packages, including their code.
Views Report
Reports detailed information about all database views, including view definitions.
Fragmentation Report
Reports all fragmented database objects that have four or more extents. For your convenience, the report
data is grouped:
•
Group by scheme
•
Subgroup by object (segment)
SGA Report
Reports summary information for the System Global Area.
Parameters Report
Reports parameters of the running Oracle instance.
Version Report
Reports versions of the running Oracle server modules.
Custom Reports
In addition to the variety of predefined reports that DB Monitor Expert provides, you can also define your
own reports. User-defined reports can address your database specific requirements.
To create a new report:
1.
Select Report/Custom Report command. DB Monitor Expert will open custom report dialog. The
dialog window displays all already created custom reports.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Enter valid name in the Name field on the Properties tab. Note that name may consist spaces.
4.
Select presentation style from Style drop-down list. See Choosing a presentation style topic for
description of available styles.
5.
Optionally check Title, Run Date, and Page n of m options
6.
Type SQL SELECT statement in the Select field. Alternatively, you can paste SQL from the
clipboard. To do this, use keyboard shortcut CTRL V or use right mouse click on the Select field
then from popup menu choose Paste command. Also, you can click on the Open File
button
to paste SQL from the file. This SQL statement will be used to retrieve data for the report you are
defining. Make sure that the SQL statement does not end with a semicolon (;). To avoid unclear
column names in the report syntax always use aliases in the select statement (see examples).
7.
Click Filter button to specify additional client-side filter a newly created report.
8.
Click Sort button to change client-side sort for a newly created report.
9.
Click on the Preview tab to customize print properties of the report. Click on the
button to
bring up Print Options dialog for more options. For Crosstab reports, you must click on the
Crosstab button to complete Crosstab definition of the report.
10. Click on the Design tab to customize display properties of the report. Note that you may not
-123-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
customize display properties for reports that have Crosstab presentation style due to dynamic
nature of these reports. The tab page is divided into two parts:
•
The "Report visual syntax" pane
•
The "Object attributes" pane
You can change the size of the panes. When you make any pane larger, the adjacent pane
becomes smaller. To resize panes:
1)
Move the mouse pointer in between of the panes until you see a black line with two arrows.
2)
Drag the edge of the pane until the pane is the size you want.
To customize properties of report visual objects:
1)
2)
Click on the object in the "Report visual syntax" pane. Use pane scrollbars if needed. The
object color and background colors get reversed. DB Monitor Expert displays all available
properties for the selected object in the "Object attributes" pane
Modify required attributes for the object.
11. Click the Save button to save the new report definition. The report can be used again later on.
12. Click on the Run button to start the graph you have defined. Note that you can run the graph
without doing save first, but by default DB Monitor Expert does not save the graph definition for you
until you click the Save button. So that if you do not save the definition you will not be able to reuse
this graph later.
13. Now you can build another report or click Exit button to close Custom Report dialog.
The following two examples of user-defined reports are included in the standard installation package:
1. Free Space in Tablespace Report
select tablespace_name,
max_blocks,
count_blocks,
sum_free_blocks,
100*sum_free_blocks/sum_alloc_blocks pct_free
from
(select tablespace_name,
sum(blocks) sum_alloc_blocks
from dba_data_files
group by tablespace_name
),
(select tablespace_name free_space_tablespace_name,
max(blocks) max_blocks,
count(blocks) count_blocks,
sum(blocks) sum_free_blocks
from dba_free_space
group by tablespace_name
)
where tablespace_name = free_space_tablespace_name
2. Segment sizes by tablespace, owner and segment type
select tablespace_name,
segment_type,
owner,
segment_name,
sum(blocks) blocks,
sum(bytes) bytes
from sys.dba_extents
group by tablespace_name, segment_type, owner, segment_name
order by tablespace_name, owner, segment_type
See also:
Monitor connections and resources
-124-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Historical trends - database flow
Graph - dynamic statistic
Working with data and data export
Customization
Choosing a presentation style
Tabular style
The Tabular presentation style presents data with the data columns going across the page and headers
above each column. As many rows from the database will display at one time as can fit in the report page.
Form style
The Form style presents data with the data columns going down the page and labels next to each column.
Grid style
The Grid style presents data in a row-and-column format with grid lines separating rows and columns.
Everything you place in a grid style report must fit in one cell in the grid. You can reorder and resize columns
with the mouse in a grid report during execution. Most Oracle monitor predefined reports have Grid
presentation style.
Newspaper style
This style like a Tabular presentation style presents data with the data columns going across the page and
headers above each column, then data going across the page in multiple columns, such as in a phone list.
For purposes of page fitting, the whole report is considered a single column. You can specify the number of
newspaper-style columns in the Columns field of the Custom report dialog.
Rich Text style
The Rich Text style presents data with the data columns going down the page and labels next to each
column. This style gives you the ability to copy report data during execution to the system Clipboard in the
RTF format.
See also: User-defined Reports
Status Analyzer
Status Analyzer is a simple utility for exploring Oracle database integrity. With a single click, you can find all
the database space, objects, and integrity constraints that have one of the following statuses: NOT
AVAILABLE, INVALID, OFF LINE, DISABLED. Using that utility, you can get a hierarchical display of such
information presented in easy understandable format.
Navigating
To navigate the Status Analyzer use standard tree-view navigation techniques that you use when working
with Windows Explorer and other applications. For quick expanding or collapsing of multiple items use right
mouse button clicks to invoke the popup menu. Use the following commands available in the popup menu to
quickly expand or collapse multiple items:
•
Expand Branch
•
Collapse Branch
•
Expand All
•
Collapse All
-125-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Which items are displayed?
Status Analyzer displays only context sensitive items. For example if there is no off line rollback segments,
the Status Analyzer will not show the Rollback Segments category.
Compile Invalid Objects
You can this tool easily recompile individual objects, group of invalid objects or all invalid objects in the
database. Select any invalid objects and choose the appropriate action from the File/Recompile menu. The
Status analyzer view is automatically refreshed after the re-compilation is complete.
Zooming
You can use zoom feature (select View/Zoom command) to zoom in/out security information.
Printing
You can print information displayed in the Status Analyzer panes by choosing File/Print command (shortcut:
CTRL P). You can preview how it will look when printed by choosing File/Print Preview. See: Print topic for
information on print and print preview options.
Dependencies Analyzer
The definitions of certain objects, such as views and procedures, reference other objects, such as tables.
Therefore, some objects are dependent on the objects referenced in their definitions. An object that
references another object as part of its definition is called a dependent object, while the object being
referenced is a referenced object. Oracle defines the following types of dependent and referenced objects.
Dependent Objects
View
Procedure
Function
Package Specification
Package Body
Type
Type Body
Trigger
Referenced Objects
Table
View
Sequence
Synonym
Procedure
Function
Package Specification
Type specification
Operator
In addition to types specified in the table above, Dependencies Analyzer tracks logical dependencies such
as data references indicated by foreign keys.
Dependencies Analyzer creates multi-level hierarchical display of both physical and logical dependencies
information presented in easy understandable format.
To run Dependencies Analyzer select Tools menu then Dependencies Analyzer command. DB Monitor
Expert will display Select Object dialog box. You use that dialog to select root object for which you want to
find dependents or referenced objects.
-126-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
1.
Select object schema from the Owner drop-down list.
2.
Select object type from the Type drop-down list. DB Monitor Expert will populate list of objects of
specified type for specified schema.
3.
Select object name from the Object list.
4.
Select what kind of references you are looking for in the Direction drop-down list. Choose "Down"
to find all objects (dependents) that refer to the object you select in the Object List or choose "Up"
to find all objects that the selected object refers to.
5.
Check Drill-Down Dependents checkbox if you want Dependencies Analyzer automatically find
and expand dependents for dependents. Note that in that case existence of foreign key for selfreferenced tables may cause a dead loop.
Navigating
To navigate the Dependencies Analyzer use standard tree-view navigation techniques that you use when
working with Windows Explorer and other applications. For quick expanding or collapsing of multiple items
use right mouse button clicks to invoke the popup menu. Use the following commands available in the
popup menu to quickly expand or collapse multiple items:
•
Expand Branch
•
Collapse Branch
•
Expand All
•
Collapse All
Zooming
You can use zoom feature (select View/Zoom command) to zoom in/out security information.
Printing
You can print information displayed in the Dependencies Analyzer panes by choosing File/Print command
(shortcut: CTRL P). You can preview how it will look when printed by choosing File/Print Preview. See:
Print topic for information on print and print preview options.
-127-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Trends Expert
The DB Trends package is designed to simplify and automate tedious database monitoring and
maintenance tasks that every Oracle DBA has to perform everyday.
Data captured by DB Trends can be used for proactive database monitoring and capacity planning. DB
Trends is tightly integrated with DB Monitor Expert and DB Tuning Expert. Other components like DB Space
Expert also use the collected data for predicting various database problems before they occur.
The package definition can be found in the TRENDS_INSTALL.SQL file located in the DB Monitor Expert
Installation directory. This file includes complete description of DB Trends business functions and usage.
See Installation/Uninstallation topic for instructions on installing/uninstalling DB Trends.
DB Trends - Installation/Uninstallation
DB Trends package can be installed using graphical Database Setup utility provided with the DB Tools. DB
Trends can be also installed using the TRENDS_INSTALL.SQL script that can be found in DB Tools
installation directory
To create this package using graphical Database Setup utility launch the utility and answer several
questions asked by the Setup Wizard.
To create the package manually:
1. Start DB Monitor Expert.
2. Connect to database as SYS.
3. Open TRENDS_INSTALL.SQL file in the DBA Notepad
4. Use interface variables that can be found in the beginning of the file to customize package
behavior. See comments in the script for additional information.
5. Execute the script.
6. Use the Trends Selection tool (Trends/Trends Selection menu) to select/deselect objects and
spaces that you want to include for the automated analysis and trend data collection process.
Tip: It is highly recommended to schedule DB_TRENDS.COLLECT procedure to run on a regular basis.
You may want to use the standard DBMS_JOB package for this task. Use DB Monitor Expert Trends tools
to analyze, display, and graph the collected trend data.
Upgrading DB Trends package
If you have previous installed DB Trends version 1.x you need to run TRENDUPG.SQL script to upgrade the
package to version 2.0. This script file can be found in the DB Monitor Expert Installation directory.
Disabling DB Trends data collections
Use DB Job Expert to disable DB Trends Data Collection job
Uninstalling DB Trends package
1.
Drop the following tables:
ORA_MONITOR.FLOW_TABLE
-128-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2.
User's Guide
ORA_MONITOR.OBJECT_WATCH
ORA_MONITOR.INSTANCE_WATCH
Drop ORA_MONITOR.DB_TRENDS package
Important Note: The DB Trends installation script creates ORA_MONITOR user identified by
IMONITOR password. The DB Difference Expert, DB Monitor Expert, and DB Audit Expert tools also create
repository objects in the ORA_MONITOR schema. You should drop this schema only in case if you are
completely uninstalling/removing DB Tools from your system.
Historical Trends
DB Trends Expert can collect and store hundreds different statistics for historical trends analysis. Most
statistics are stored in the FLOW_TABLE. We encourage you to use this repository table for your own
reporting.
When you select any Trends command from the DB Monitor Expert Trends menu for a first time, DB
Monitor Expert will create the ORA_MONITOR schema (if it does not exist yet) and the FLOW_TABLE in
that schema. You must have CREATE TABLE privilege in order to continue. The FLOW_TABLE table
serves as a repository table in which both DB Monitor Expert and DB Trends Expert save trend data.
Every time when you open any trend report DB Monitor Expert, a new data collection is performed by
default. Newly collected data is added to the repository table. All users, who will use trend reports and
graphs, must have INSERT/UPDATE privilege for the FLOW_TABLE.
If for any object or group of related objects, the trend data collection is performed first time the trends graph
is unavailable, because of insufficient information yet to build the trends graph.
For your convenience, all trend reports are grouped by categories such as Table, Index, etc...
•
•
Notes:
Remember that all trend reports heavily depend on data in the Oracle system catalog tables. Oracle
updates these tables when you execute table, index, and cluster analyze commands.
Analyze database object often to get precise trends reports. See the following help sections for
instructions on collecting and graphing database trends.
Table Trends
1.
Select Trends/Table Trends command. A table trends dialog will appear.
2.
Select schema from the schema drop-down list box
3.
Select table to be reported from the table list. Note that active selection has blue background for
the entire row. To add more tables, hold down CTRL key and click on tables you want to add to the
batch. To select a range of tables, hold down SHIFT key and click on the last table that you want to
add. All tables between the last selected and the clicked one will be highlighted.
4.
Uncheck Update box to disable collection of the new information for the report.
5.
You may want to limit new report in time. Enter start and end dates in corresponding fields to
specify trends interval. To disable time restrictions and create new report for the all-available data
stored in the repository, check No limit box.
6.
Press OK button. DB Monitor Expert will start the new data collection. After completion of the new
collection, trend reports for the last selected table will be created.
-129-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Index Trends
1.
Select Trends/Index Trends command. An index trends dialog will appear.
2.
Select schema from the schema drop-down list box
3.
Select index to be reported from the index list. Note that active selection has blue background for
the entire row. To add more indexes, hold down CTRL key and click on indexes you want to add to
the batch. To select a range of indexes, hold down SHIFT key and click on the last index that you
want to add. All indexes between the last selected and the clicked one will be highlighted.
4.
Uncheck Update box to disable collection of the new information for the report.
5.
You may want to limit new report in time. Enter start and end dates in corresponding fields to
specify trends interval. To disable time restrictions and create new report for the all-available data
stored in the repository, check No limit box.
6.
Press OK button. DB Monitor Expert will start new data collection. After completion of the new
collection, trend reports for last selected index will be created.
Cluster Trends
1.
Select Trends/Cluster Trends command. A cluster trends dialog will appear.
2.
Select schema from the schema drop-down list box
3.
Select cluster to be reported from the cluster list. Note that active selection has blue background
for the entire row. To add more clusters, hold down CTRL key and click on clusters you want to add
to the batch. To select a range of clusters, hold down SHIFT key and click on the last cluster that
you want to add. All clusters between the last selected and the clicked one will be highlighted.
4.
Uncheck Update box to disable collection of the new information for the report.
5.
You may want to limit new report in time. Enter start and end dates in corresponding fields to
specify trends interval. To disable time restrictions and create new report for the all-available data
stored in the repository, check No limit box.
6.
To include in batch all cluster tables and indexes, check Cascade Tables & Indexes box.
7.
Press OK button. DB Monitor Expert will start new data collection. After completion of the new
collection, trend reports for last selected cluster will be created.
Schema Trends
1.
Select Trends/Schema Trends command. A schema trends dialog will appear.
2.
Select schema from the schema drop-down list box
3.
Uncheck Update box to disable collection of the new information for the report.
4.
You may want to limit new report in time. Enter start and end dates in corresponding fields to
specify trends interval. To disable time restrictions and create new report for the all-available data
stored in the repository, check No limit box.
5.
To include in batch all tables and indexes for that schema check Cascade Tables & Indexes box.
6.
Press OK button. DB Monitor Expert will start new data collection. After completion of the new
collection, trend reports for the chosen schema will be created.
Tablespace Trends
1.
Select Trends/Tablespace Trends command. A tablespace trends dialog will appear.
2.
Select the tablespace to be reported from the tablespace list. Note that active selection has blue
background for the entire row. To add more tablespaces, hold down CTRL key and click on
tablespaces you want to add to the batch. To select a range of tablespaces, hold down SHIFT key
-130-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
and click on the last tablespace that you want to add. All tablespaces between the last selected and
the clicked one will be highlighted.
3.
Uncheck Update box to disable collection of the new information for the report.
4.
You may want to limit new report in time. Enter start and end dates in corresponding fields to
specify trends interval. To disable time restrictions and create new report for the all-available data
stored in the repository, check No limit box.
5.
To include in batch all tables and indexes that are placed in selected tablespaces, check Cascade
Tables & Indexes box.
6.
Press OK button. DB Monitor Expert will start new data collection. After completion of the new
collection, trend reports for last selected tablespace will be created.
File Trends
1.
Select Trends/File Trends command. A file trends dialog will appear.
2.
Select file to be reported from the tablespace list. Note that active selection has blue background
for the entire row. To add more files, hold down CTRL key and click on files you want to add to the
batch. To select a range of files, hold down SHIFT key and click on the last file that you want to
add. All files between the last selected and the clicked one will be highlighted.
3.
Uncheck Update box to disable collection of the new information for the report.
4.
You may want to limit new report in time. Enter start and end dates in corresponding fields to
specify trends interval. To disable time restrictions and create new report for the all-available data
stored in the repository, check No limit box.
5.
To include in batch all tables and indexes that are placed in selected files, check Cascade Tables
& Indexes box.
6.
Press OK button. DB Monitor Expert will start new data collection. After completion of the new
collection, trend reports for last selected file will be created.
Rollback Segment Trends
1.
Select Trends/Rollback Segments Trends command. A rollback segment trends dialog will
appear.
2.
Select rollback segment to be reported from the rollback segments list. Note that active selection
has blue background for the entire row. To add more segments, hold down CTRL key and click on
segments you want to add to the batch. To select a range of segments, hold down SHIFT key and
click on the last segment that you want to add. All segments between the last selected and the
clicked one will be highlighted.
3.
Uncheck Update box to disable collection of the new information for the report.
4.
You may want to limit new report in time. Enter start and end dates in corresponding fields to
specify trends interval. To disable time restrictions and create new report for the all-available data
stored in the repository, check No limit box.
5.
Press OK button. DB Monitor Expert will start new data collection. After completion of the new
collection, trend reports for last selected rollback segment will be created.
Database Trends
1.
Select Trends/Database Trends command. A database trends dialog will appear.
2.
Uncheck Update box to disable collection of the new information for the report.
3.
You may want to limit new report in time. Enter start and end dates in corresponding fields to
specify trends interval. To disable time restrictions and create new report for the all-available data
stored in the repository, check No limit box.
-131-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
4.
To include in batch all database tables and indexes, check Cascade Tables & Indexes box.
5.
Press OK button. DB Monitor Expert will start new data collection. After completion of the new
collection, trend reports for the database will be created.
Custom Trend Graph
In addition to the variety of predefined trend graphs that DB Monitor Expert provides, you can also define
your own graphs. User-defined trend graphs can address your database specific requirements. Using
custom graphs, you can also automate problem detection and correction.
To create a new trend graph:
1.
Select Trends/Custom Trend Graph command. DB Monitor Expert will open custom trend graph
dialog. The dialog window displays all already created custom trend graphs.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Enter valid name in the Name field on the Properties tab. Note that name may consist spaces.
4.
Type SQL SELECT statement in the Select field. Alternatively, you can paste SQL from the
clipboard. To do this, use keyboard shortcut CTRL V or use right mouse click on the Select field
then from popup menu choose Paste command. Also, you can click on the Open File
button
to paste SQL from the file. This SQL statement will be used to gather statistics to be displayed in
the monitor you are defining. Make sure that the SQL statement does not end with a semicolon (;).
To avoid unclear column names in the graph syntax always use aliases in the select statement
(see examples). Important: make sure to include timestamp column in the SELECT list. DB
Monitor Expert uses this column for the trend graph X-axis.
5.
Click on the Preview tab to customize display properties of the graph.
6.
Select column from the Value drop-down list. That column will be graphed.
7.
If you want to display multiple graphs (series of characteristics) simultaneously, use the Series
drop-down list to select column that will be used for series. For display of single value leave Series
field blank or select <None> from the list.
8.
Click Save button to save the new trend graph definition. The graph can be used again later on.
9.
Click Run button to start the graph you have defined. Note that you can run the graph without doing
save first, but by default DB Monitor Expert does not save the graph definition for you until you click
the Save button. So that if you do not save the definition you will not be able to reuse this graph
later.
10. Now you can build another trend graph or click Exit button to close Custom Trend Graph dialog.
Notes:
•
You can clean up the repository table if it stores too many records for the reported period (the report
takes too long to complete). To remove unnecessary data select the Dataview tab on the trends report,
highlight rows you want to remove and then elect the File/Delete command (shortcut: CTRL D). Select
File/Save command (shortcut: CTRL S) to save changes.
•
A data collection and report generation time depend on the three following factors:
1.
Database load (busy rate)
2.
Number of objects/spaces selected for the new data collection
3.
Volume of trend data available for the selected object
-132-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Selecting Objects and Spaces for Automated Trend Data
Collections
If you are using or planning to use the IDH_DBTRENDS package supplied with the DB Monitor Expert you
can use Trends/Trends Selection menu in DB Monitor Expert component to select objects and spaces for
automated trend data collections. You must login as ORA_MONITOR (or use matching login in case if you
have customized the DB_TREND package) in order to use the Trends Selection tool. The Trends
Selection dialog presents graphically information stored in the ORA_MONITOR.OBJECT_WACTH table.
See comments in TRENDS_INSTALL.SQL file for detailed table description.
After the Trends Selection dialog appears:
1
Expand the required section
2
Double-click on the required objects and spaces to submit them for automated monitoring and trend
data collections. Note that the second double-click on the previously select object or space deselects it
and removes from the list of objects and spaces to be processed by the DB Trends package. To select
all objects/spaces in a section, highlight the required section then click Select All button. To deselect all
objects/spaces in a section, highlight the required section then click Deselect All button.
3
Click OK button.
Note: Selected objects and spaces feature
symbol in front of their icons.
-133-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Difference Expert
Overview
You can use DB Difference Expert to compare entire Oracle databases as well as database schemas and
even individual objects. Compared databases, schemas, or objects can reside on one or different Oracle
servers. DB Difference Expert creates and uses the central repository tables for definitions of compared
items. Whenever you compare databases, schemas or objects, DB Difference Expert adds their definition to
the repository. That's why DB Difference Expert allows also tracking object and database changes over a
period of time. It is also capable to compare different versions of objects previously saved in the repository.
Before You Begin
You must configure the DB Difference Expert repository before you start using DB Difference Expert. When
you start DB Difference Expert first time, it prompts to create the repository. You use the Repository Options
dialog to customize the repository. You can drop or update the repository at any time by selecting File/Drop
Repository and File/Update Repository commands from the DB Difference Expert menu. If you drop the
repository and attempt to start new comparison, DB Difference Expert will prompt you to recreate the
repository. This way you can move the repository to a different Oracle server if there is a need to do so.
DB Difference Expert also provides you with graphical repository browser to that you can use to manually
browse and clean up the repository similar to how you use File Explorer to browse files on your computer.
To open the repository Browser, select File/Browse Repository command.
The repository must be created in the ORA_MONITOR schema. If this schema does not exist DB Difference
Expert attempts to create it at the time of repository creation. Good repository configuration is one of the
important factors contributing to the performance of various comparison operations. It is highly
recommended, that you choose different devices when specifying tablespaces for the repository tables and
indexes.
You must have CREATE TABLE, CREATE USER privileges in order to create the DB Difference Expert
repository.
You must have SELECT TABLE privilege on the system catalog tables to be able to perform schema and
object comparison. You must have SELECT ANY TABLE privileges to be able to compare entire databases.
If you do not have sufficient authority to use DB Difference Expert, contact your database administrator.
Comparison Options
When to use and when not to use the "Compare constraints and indexes by definition only, ignore
object names" option?
By default, Oracle generates unique names for table indexes and constraints in SYS_xxxxx format unless
you specifically supply the required names. In most cases, the actual name is not important so when
compare two tables you are interested in verifying that both tables have the same index by definition.
Therefore, "Compare constraints and indexes by definition only, ignore object names" option instructs
DB Difference Expert to ignore their names when comparing one or more tables and/or clusters.
If in your application you are referencing particular indexes and constraints by name, then you should
choose "Compare constraints and indexes by definition only and by object names" instead. This
ensures that DB Difference Expert will report as identical only these objects that exactly match each other
including their names.
-134-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
How to Analyze
1.
To start new difference analysis, select File/New Analysis command from the DB Difference
Expert menu. The Difference Wizard will appear.
2.
Select analysis scope (one of the following):
•
Two databases
•
Two schemas
•
Two tables
•
Current database data model vs. repository version
•
Current schema definition vs. repository version
•
Current table definition vs. repository version
•
Two code objects (source code comparison)
3.
Select appropriate items for comparisons. Note that DB Difference Expert enables only these items
that are valid for the previously selected analysis scope.
4.
Select additional comparison options:
•
Compare constraints and indexes by definition only, ignore object names
•
Compare constraints and indexes by definition only and by object names
5.
Click the Next button
6.
Specify database connection information then click the Next button again
7.
If you are analyzing schemas or table select the required schema names from the drop-down lists
8.
If you are analyzing tables, also select the required table names from the drop-down lists.
9.
Click the Next button, review the analysis execution plan and if satisfied click the Start button.
-135-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Understanding and Using Comparison Results
The DB Difference Expert provides you with three different views for the analysis results:
•
Tree-view style expandable/collapsible difference navigators
•
SQL scripts
•
Comparison Report
When comparing large number of objects the difference navigators are by far the most effective and easily
readable presentation style for presenting comparison results. Note that "different" objects are displayed in
bold. The difference navigators provide you with the easy-to-use drill-down capabilities.
You can use the generated SQL scripts as templates in case if you need to synchronize the compared
items. You should always verify these scripts. Because the generated SQL scripts are not guaranteed to be
error-free, you execute them at your own risk. SoftTree Technologies does not guarantee 100% accuracy.
These SQL scripts are intended to help you avoid time-consuming tasks as the database such as reverseengineering.
Difference navigator trees and SQL scripts are optimized for the screen. If you wish you can print them using
File/Print command. Please keep in mind that the Comparison report is primarily optimized for the printing
and should be accordingly.
-136-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Index Expert
Overview
How DB Index Expert Can Help
DB Index Expert can help DBAs and developers to optimize and monitor existing databases. In general, it
can help in answering the following questions:
•
What are new indexes that can improve your application/database performance?
•
Are there unneeded indexes that cause your application to run slowly?
•
What are optimal physical and logical parameters for a specific index?
•
Is it the time when a specific index will benefit from being rebuilt?
In addition, DB Index Expert can help you automate some routine database maintenance tasks such as
periodical index and table statistical analyses that help Oracle optimizer to choose best execution plans for
your database queries.
Before You Begin
You must have SELECT privileges on the system catalog tables in order to use DB Index Expert. In addition,
you need access to Oracle dynamic performance tables. If you do not have sufficient authority to use DB
Index Expert, ask your database administrator to grant you 'SELECT ANY TABLE' privileges or grant you
access to following tables: ALL_TAB_COLUMNS, ALL_IND_COLUMNS, ALL_CONS_COLUMNS,
ALL_INDEXES, ALL_TABLES, ALL_CONSTRAINTS, SYS.INDEX_STATS, SYS.INDEX_HISTOGRAM,
SYS.DBA_EXTENTS, SYS.DBA_SEGMENTS, V$SQLAREA, V$VERSION.
It is also highly recommended to have the ANALYZE ANY privilege so you can experience all the features of
the DB Index Expert.
Oracle8 users may need grants to use DBMS_SQL package.
Command Line Parameters
Refer to the following table for command line parameters supported by DB Index Expert:
Parameter
Description
Example
/?
Display command line parameters help screen
/?
/O
Connection Driver name. Valid names are: ODBC, O73,
/OODBC
O84, O90
/C
Oracle server connect string that to be used to log on to the
/Coraserv
server
/U
The user ID that to be used to log on to the server
/Uscott
/P
The password to be used to log on to the server
/Ptiger
/V
Oracle version identifier
/V7.2
/S
Name of the database schema to analyze. If this option is
/Sscott
not specified then all schemas will be analyzed
/I
Name of the index to analyze. Use short index names
/Iindx_emploee_ssn
without schema name prefixes. Use /S option to specify
schema names.
/A
Turn off printing of generated analysis reports
/A
/H
Output report to HTML file. The file "index.htm" will be
/H
created in the DB Index Expert installation directory. This
option does not affect report printing. To suppress the
printing use option /A
/R
Output report to RTF file. The file "index.rtf" will be created
/R
-137-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
/F
User's Guide
in the DB Index Expert installation directory. This option
does not affect report printing. To suppress the printing use
option /A
Name of the parameters file. This file must be a standard flat
text INI. The file should have at least one section named
"Options"
Following INI file keys can be used as substitutes for
command line parameters:
DBMS
- /O
Server
- /C
UID
- /U
Password
- /P
Version
- /V
Schema
- /S
Index
- /I
Print
- /A
Text
- /R
HTML
- /H
[Options]
DBMS=O84
Server=OraServ
UID=SCOTT
Password=TIGGER
Schema=INVENTORY
The /F parameter can be specified along with other
command line parameter. DB Index Expert processes
parameter file like if the options specified in the file were
specified on the command line.
Example:
db_tools.exe /index /Oo84 /Cmyserver /Uscott /Ptigger /Sscott
This line will start DB Index Expert in command line mode and instruct it to connect to the Oracle 8 database
using myserver host string as user scott using tiger password. DB Index Expert will analyze all indexes
and tables in the scott schema.
Analysis Options
Refer to the following 2 tables for analysis options:
Analysis Options for Indexes
Options
Analyze and Validate Index
Structure
Analyze Indexed Table
Description
Send "ANALYZE INDEX" command to the database.
Command parameters depend on the options chosen using "Analysis
Method" dialog:
•
Compute statistics for all rows
•
Estimate statistics for first <n> rows
•
Estimate statistics for first <m> % of rows
•
Select best method based on the object size - this instructs DB
Index Expert to automatically choose the method using the
following rule: if an index size is less than 1MB then use "Compute
statistics for all rows", otherwise use "Estimate statistics for first
<m> % of rows" where <m> is calculated as percent of 1MB
compared to the index size but not less than 1%.
Send "ANALYZE TABLE" command to the database.
The command is issued for the table the analyzed index belongs to. If
this option is not specified, DB Index Expert counts rows in the table
and queries SYS.DBA_SEGMENTS and SYS.DBA_EXTENTS tables
as opposite to retrieving information from ALL_TABLES table after table
analysis is completed. Note that DB Index Expert analyzes a table only
once for all table indexes.
-138-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
Validate Index Placement
Validate Table Size
Analyze Index Cardinality
Analyze Index Balance
Analyze Index Columns
Analyze Data Distribution
Analyze Clustering Factor
Analyze Index Efficiency
Search Non-unique Index for
Uniqueness
Check Non-unique Index for
Uniqueness
Search Intersecting Indexes
Analyze Index Space
Fragmentation
User's Guide
Command parameters depend on the options chosen using "Analysis
Method" dialog:
•
Compute statistics for all rows
•
Estimate statistics for first <n> rows
•
Estimate statistics for first <m> % of rows
•
Select best method based on the object size - this instructs DB
Index Expert to automatically choose the method using the
following rule: if a table size is less than 1MB then use "Compute
statistics for all rows", otherwise use "Estimate statistics for first
<m> % of rows" where <m> is calculated as percent of 1MB
compared to the table size but not less than 1%.
Check proper tablespace separation for the index and the indexed
table.
Identify small lookup tables. An index is not efficient when full table
scan takes less number of I/Os operations then number of I/Os needed
for accessing index root node and retrieving the requested data.
Analyze index keys cardinality (count distinct keys).
Create index histogram (non-unique indexes only).
Validate that index type is properly chosen.
Analyze index splitting and spawning and detect out-of-balance
indexes.
Splitting occurs when an index node is filled with the keys and a new
node is created at the same level as the full node. Splitting widens a btree horizontally. Spawning occurs when a new level is added to an
index. A newly created index is one level index. As keys are added, a
spawning takes place, and the first-level node reconfigures itself to
have pointers to lower-level nodes. An index may become out-ofbalance after a large number of insert and delete operations.
Analyze index columns and verify proper order of columns in the key.
Check efficiency of the column data types.
Count distinct values in all index columns.
Build data distribution histogram for each column.
Analyze clustering factor and index balance.
Analyze overall index efficiency.
Verify index type, search non-unique indexes that can be converted to
unique.
A unique index usually provides better performance may be achieved
as well as some additional index space recovered comparing to nonunique index.
Verify index type, search non-unique indexes that can be converted to
unique.
A unique index usually provides better performance may be achieved
as well as some additional index space recovered comparing to nonunique index.
Search indexes that share all its columns with other indexes.
Some of these indexes may be dropped as unnecessary. This will
improve performance of insert, delete, update operations and recover
additional index space.
Analyze space fragmentation.
Analysis Options for Schemas
Options
Search Referential Constraints
for Missing Indexes
Analyze SQL from Library Cache
for Full Table Scans and Used
Indexes
Description
Search foreign keys that do not have an index created on the constraint
columns.
Analyze SQL from database Library Cache and use embedded
EXPLAIN PLAN to detect performed full table scans and find out
indexes being used for the SQL.
-139-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Report offending SQL statements.
How to Analyze
Interactive mode
DB Index Expert has easy-to-use standard "wizard" style interface. Perform following steps to use DB Index
Expert in interactive mode.
•
Start DB Index Expert by double clicking on the Analyzer icon in the DB Tools program group.
•
Choose required analysis options. Click "Next" button.
•
Select additional analysis and report generation options. Click "Next" button.
•
Enter connect information required for establishing a new database connection. Click "Next" button
again.
•
Select one or more schemas to be analyzed. You can use "Select All", "Deselect All" buttons to quickly
select / deselect all listed schemas. Click "Next" button.
•
Select one or more indexes to be analyzed. You can use "Select All", "Deselect All" buttons to quickly
select / deselect all listed indexes. Click "Next" button. DB Index Expert will process all chosen indexes
and generate analysis reports. If needed, click "Stop" button to interrupt the process.
•
After reviewing and/or printing generated reports close Analysis Reports window and click "Done"
button on the DB Index Expert window to exit or click "Back" button to choose new options and/or
schemas/indexes for analysis.
Note: you can click "Back" button at any time to return to the previous options dialog.
Batch mode
DB Index Expert provides alternative command line interface that makes it suitable for unattended batch
mode jobs. For instance, a large index can take a long time to analyze and a DBA can carefully choose the
right time for analysis and schedule this task.
Read Command Line Parameters topic for details.
Reports
Depending on the chosen analysis options DB Index Expert can generate 3 different report types whose
description follows.
Index Analysis Report
Index Analysis Report is a detail report generated for each analyzed index. This reports physical and logical
index parameters, including detailed information on indexed columns and table. The reports may include
index improvement suggestions generated by embedded Intelligent Expert Module.
Referential Constraints Analysis Report
This report finds displays all analyzed foreign keys that do not have matching indexes.
-140-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Library Cache Analysis Reports
Full Table Scans Report
This report displays tables that caused Full Table Scans. The report also includes summary execution
characteristics for SQL statements causing full table scans for these tables. Use this report to pinpoint
missing indexes.
Used Indexes Report
This report displays indexes that were by SQL queries found in the database library cache. The report
also includes summary of execution characteristics for SQL statements using these indexes. Use this
report to verify that Oracle optimizer chooses indexes as you expected. This report also can help you
pinpoint unneeded indexes – ones that you don't want Oracle to use in some cases.
Detailed Library Cache Analysis Report
This report provides detailed information on SQL statements for both Full Table Scans and Used
Indexes reports.
Report Formats
All reports can be generated in the following formats:
•
Print Preview
•
Enhanced hypertext mark-up language (HTML) file format. You need a Web browser that supports
frames in order to view and print reports. We recommend Netscape Navigator 3.x and above or
Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.x and above. The reports are created as a set of HTML files in the DB
Index Expert installation directory. After report generation, DB Index Expert automatically launches
your default Web browser.
•
ASCII text-format file that can be read in Windows Notepad and any other word-processors. The
report is created in the DB Index Expert installation directory.
-141-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Tuning Expert
Overview
The Oracle Server is highly tunable. You can enhance database performance by adjusting database
applications, the database itself, and the operating system. Proper tuning of Oracle provides the best
possible database performance for your specific application and hardware configuration.
What DB Tuning Expert Can Do For You
DB Tuning Expert is a great aid for those who are responsible for the operation, maintenance, and
performance of an Oracle Server. If you are one of them then DB Tuning Expert can help you identify
quickly many database performance problems. With a few mouse clicks can run robust database
performance and organization diagnostic tests and get a comprehensive report on the existing performance
problems along with the expert recommendations for solving all found problems and avoiding them in the
future. DB Tuning Expert can analyze databases in the following areas:
•
Configuration and statistics for Oracle database instance; database physical and logical models.
•
Various statistics for schema objects, including fragmentation, design, placement and more...
•
Performance of SQL statements from the Library Cache.
•
Database trends using data collected by the DB Trends package.
Before You Begin
You must have SELECT privileges on the system catalog tables and dynamic performance views. If you do
not have sufficient authority to use DB Tuning Expert, ask your database administrator to grant you
'SELECT ANY TABLE'.
Oracle8 users may need grants to use DBMS_SQL package.
How To Tune Your Database
The Oracle Server is a highly tunable software product. Its flexibility allows you to make small adjustments
that affect database performance. By tuning your system, you can tailor its performance to best meet your
needs. However, tuning is usually a series of trade-offs. Once you have determined the bottlenecks, you
may have to sacrifice some other areas to achieve the required results. For example, if I/O is a problem, you
may need to purchase more memory or more disks. If a purchase is not possible, you may have to limit the
concurrency of the system to achieve the required performance. If you have clearly defined goals for
performance, the decision on what to trade for higher performance is simpler because you have identified
the most important areas.
DB Tuning Expert findings and recommendations can help you determined the current bottlenecks, however
they cannot be 100% accurate because of the following reasons:
•
DB Tuning Expert does not have much historical data and therefore does not analyze the history of the
database performance over time
•
DB Tuning Expert does not (and has no way) analyze the performance of the Operation System and the
hardware on the machine where your Oracle Server resides
•
DB Tuning Expert recommendations are not guaranteed to match your performance goals
•
DB Tuning Expert does not attempt to generate balanced solutions, it simply reports found problematic
areas
-142-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Still, DB Tuning Expert can provide you with a comprehensive performance analysis reports that you can
use in tuning database on day-to-day basis. Only everyday performance monitoring and tuning helps you to
maintain a well-tuned system. Keeping a history of the database performance over time enables you to
make useful comparisons. By comparing multiple resource consumption reports generated by DB Tuning
Expert over a period of time, you can conduct objective scalability studies and from these predict the
resource requirements for load volumes you may anticipate in the future.
Tuning methodology
There no single database tuning methodology is optimal or complete for every Oracle Server configuration.
One of the common tuning approaches to accomplish the greatest increase in performance with the least
amount of effort consists of the following four phases:
1.
Checking/tuning the initialization parameters (INIT.ORA). You can use DB Tuning Expert for this
purpose.
2.
Running and recording benchmarks. You can use DB Benchmark Expert for this purpose.
3.
Monitoring and archiving performance data. You can use DB Monitor Expert and DB Trends for this
purpose.
4.
Optimizing end user SQL and schema objects. You can use such powerful tools (from DB Monitor
Expert package) as DBA Notepad, Explain Plan, SQL Area monitor, Connections monitor,
Connection Manager, and Dead Lock Analyzer for this purpose. You can also use DB Index Expert
and DB Tuning Expert for this purpose.
Performance Analysis Options
Refer to the following tables for analysis options:
Options
Analyze instance parameters and
database configuration
Description
•
•
Analyze statistics from Oracle dynamic performance tables
Analyze database logical and physical models including number of
files, tablespaces, rollback segments, tablespace fragmentation,
and many other
Analyze schema objects
•
•
•
Analyze object space allocation and storage parameters
Analyze object fragmentation
Analyze object logical design
Analyze offensive SQL from the
Library Cache
•
Search the Library Cache for offensive SQL queries (SQL causing
most buffer gets and physical I/Os
•
Analyze found offensive queries for better execution plans
•
Analyze historical trend data collected by DB Trends.
Analyze database trends (data by
DB Trends is required)
Report Output Formats
The resulting performance analysis report can be generated in one of the following formats:
•
Print Preview
•
Enhanced hypertext mark-up language (HTML) file format. You need a Web browser that supports
frames in order to view and print reports. We recommend Netscape Navigator 3.x and above or
-143-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.x and above. After report generation, Tuning Expert automatically
launches your default Web browser.
•
ASCII text-format file that can be read in Windows Notepad and any other word-processors. The report
is created in the DB Tuning Expert installation directory.
-144-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Space Expert
Overview
DB Space Expert can be used to reorganize, optimize, partition and consolidate objects within databases
while the database applications remain up and running and fully available to users. DB Space Expert can be
used to quickly identify objects that would benefit most from space reorganization and then reorganize them
either in a real-time or schedule reorganization jobs for those objects or even entire tablespaces. By
optimizing object storages, defragging tablespaces and files, and reclaiming wasted disk space, DB Space
Expert reduces the need for additional storage requirements and helps to avoid expensive storage
upgrades.
It does not matter how small or big your database is, how complex your environment is or how many user
you have. DB Space Expert can always help you keep your database running at peak performance.
Important Note: DB Space Expert can be used with any Oracle database version 7.3 and up. However
some functions, such as partitioning, advanced scheduling, and space recycling are not available in old
database versions.
Using DB Space Expert's Interface
Tablespace Navigator
The Tablespace Navigator appears as both a tablespace browser tool and as an entry point to most other
tools. The Table Navigator displays your database organization from a space usage point of view and allows
drill-down from tablespaces to storage objects and their properties.
The Tablespace Navigator window is divided into two parts:
•
The "Navigator" - left pane
•
The "Object Properties" - right pane
You can change the size of the panes. When you make any pane larger, the adjacent pane becomes
smaller. To resize panes:
1.
Move the mouse pointer in between of the panes until you see a black line with two arrows.
-145-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2.
User's Guide
Drag the edge of the pane until the pane is the size you want.
Right-clicking on an item in the Navigator pane brings up the context popup menu with most common
functions available for the type of the clicked object, for example, move object to another tablespace, split
partition, deallocate unused space and so on…
Right-clicking on the properties page, graph or report displayed in Object Properties pane brings up the
context popup menu with most common functions available for the clicked document type, for example,
print, zoom, export, filter and so on…
Starting Tablespace Navigator
The DB Space Expert automatically opens the Tablespace Navigator after a database connection is
established. If you managed to close the Tablespace Navigator window use Space/Tablespace Navigator
menu (shortcut F7) to reopen it.
Navigator Views and Properties
Database
Database item is always the top-level item in the navigator tree-view. The following views are available when
the database item is selected:
•
Tablespaces – displays free/used space allocated chart for by tablespace and summary allocation
table. Tablespaces having less then 10 % of free space highlighted in red.
•
Properties – displays general database properties and version information
•
Files – displays list all database files and their properties, including name, status, size, autoextensible status, increment size and tablespace name
•
Total Space – displays overall database space usage chart grouped by different types of files and
free space
Tablespace
Tablespaces are displayed on the second level of the Navigator tree-view as "children" of the top-level
database item. The following views are available when a tablespace item is selected:
•
Properties – displays tablespace properties. This page different for different Oracle versions. More
recent versions have more properties then older versions. See your Oracle documentation for
detailed description of tablespace properties.
•
Files – displays list all files the selected tablespace consists of and their properties, including name,
status, size, auto-extensible status, increment size and tablespace name
•
Objects – displays all databases objects stored in the selected tablespace, including their types,
names, extents, sizes and parent objects.
•
Total Space – displays overall database space usage chart grouped by different types of files and
free space
Schema Object
Schema objects are displayed on the third level of the Navigator tree-view as "children" of the selected
tablespace item. Different icons are used to represent different types of schema object such as tables,
overflow tables, IOT tables, nested tables, IOT mapping tables, snapshots, snapshot logs, materialized
views, materialized view logs, table partitions, indexes, index partitions, LOB indexes, LOB segments (LOB
columns, Java classes, Java resources, other), LOB partitions, clusters.
-146-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The following views are available when a schema object-item is selected:
•
Properties – displays object properties. Properties differ for different object types and Oracle
versions.
•
Extents – displays information about all extents the selected object consists of, including file
names, extent sizes, and extent IDs
•
Objects – displays all databases objects stored in the selected tablespace, including their types,
names, extents, sizes and parent objects.
•
Total Space – displays overall database space usage chart grouped by different types of files and
free space
Context Menus
DB Space Expert's top-level Space and Partitions menus are sensitive to the type of an item currently
selected in the Tablespace Navigator. Depending on the selected item type such DB Space Expert enables
or disables different commands in these menus.
Similarly, the Navigator's right-click popup menu reacts differently to different item types.
Try clicking on different items to see how it works.
Working with Tablespaces and Files
Tablespace Maps
Overview
You need to continually inform yourself of tables in your database that are overextended or are reaching
their maximum extents limit or have high degree of fragmentation. The Tablespace Map utility helps to bring
this information to your attention now before extent problem occurs and helps to keep your database tuned.
It lets you view a graphical layout regarding the physical placement of every object inside a selected
tablespace as well as pockets of free unallocated space.
-147-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The Tablespace Map utility also helps you identify fragmentation problems for the entire tablespace.
In the Objects and Files section the Tablespace Map utility displays the complete interactive list of all
tablespace segments and files with detailed information about every file and object's storage properties.
The Tablespace Statistic section presents summary tablespace information including tablespaces
fragmentation status, total size, most fragmented object and so on.
A separate Fragmentation Status box presents additional comments about tablespace fragmentation
status and whether any action is recommended at this time.
A sample screenshot of the Tablespace Map is present above.
Using the Tablespace Map utility
1.
Start Tablespace Map utility from Reports/Tablespace Map menu (shortcut CTRL N) or simply click
the Map
2.
button on the application toolbar. The tablespace map window will open.
Choose the required tablespace from the Tablespace drop-down list box.
3. When painting of space allocation for the tablespace is complete, you can pick an object in the object
list or pick a tablespace file in the file list for which you want to know its extents allocation within the
tablespace. The selected object or file will become highlighted on the map.
4. To change the level of details presented on the tablespace map use Map size dropdown. If you have
large tablespaces with relatively small number of objects pick Small size; otherwise pick Large or Medium
size.
Tip: For your convenience the Tablespace Map utility provides several buttons with one click access to
commonly used tablespace reorganization functions and wizards.
Creating New Tablespaces
Click Space/Create New Tablespace menu to open New Tablespace dialog. Alternatively, you can click
button on the application toolbar.
the Create
-148-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The New Tablespace dialog consists of several tab pages. Different tab page are used with different
versions of Oracle databases.
The first page labeled General (7.3+) is a common page available in all databases. If your database version
is after 7.3 then one more page becomes enabled in addition to the General page. This page contains your
database version specific properties. The following example presents the Oracle 10g page.
-149-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
By default all properties are preset to Oracle defaults. You must fill in at least 2 properties on the General
page in order to create a new tablespace, which are tablespace name and file size.
Note: As you type new tablespace name DB Space Expert atomically suggests new file name for the
tablespace so that you don't have to type it. However you can modify the suggested file name as needed
and also add additional files using the Insert Row
Row
button. To delete mistakenly added file use the Delete
button.
Tip: See Oracle documentation for detailed description of tablespace properties and usage modes.
Taking Tablespaces Off-line/On-line
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace whose off-line/on-line state you want to toggle.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Take Off-line/Place On-line command to toggle status of the
selected tablespace. Alternatively, you can click the Offline
button on the application toolbar. If you
are taking tablespace off-line a message prompt will appear asking to confirm this action. If you are sure
click the YES button to take selected tablespace off-line.
-150-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Dropping Tablespaces
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace you want to drop.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Drop Tablespace command. Alternatively, you can click the
Drop
button on the application toolbar. This will display the Drop Tablespace dialog.
Tip: DB Space Expert automatically checks tablespace dependencies and if warns you if the
tablespace is still used. It displays in red any critical warnings. You can choose to ignore them if you are
sure or you can cancel the Drop Tablespace dialog and perform corrective actions first.
3.
For your own protection you must check all free checkboxes displayed on the dialog:
•
•
•
4.
This is the tablespace I want to drop
I am connected to the right database
I have full tablespace backup or export and if needed I can restore this tablespace from a
backup.
Click the Drop button to drop the selected tablespace.
Adding Files to Tablespaces
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace you want to add files to.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Add File To Tablespace command. Alternatively, you can
click the Add
button on the application toolbar. This will display the Add New File dialog.
3.
Enter new file name and size parameters. If you don't want to use the auto-extend option, uncheck the
Autoextensible option
4.
Click the Add File button to create a new file, pre-allocate specified file space and add this new file to
the selected tablespace.
-151-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Resizing Tablespaces
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace whose files you want to resize.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Resize Tablespace command. Alternatively, you can click the
Resize
button on the application toolbar. This will display the Resize Tablespace File dialog.
3.
If the tablespace consists of multiple files, select the file you want to resize
4.
Enter new file size parameters. In case if you want Oracle to automatically expand this file when it runs
out of space check the Autoextensible option and specify increment size for new file chunks.
5.
Click the Resize File button to modify file properties.
Note: You can both increate and decrease file sizes. When decreasing sizes make sure that the new file
size is big enough to fit all current objects stored in that file and the size change delta value is not bigger
then the size of the ending free space extent. You can use the Tablespace Map utility to figure out how
much free space is available database tablespaces and files.
Moving and Renaming Database Files
1.
First of all make sure you have a full database backup that you can use to restore the tablespace if the
file move or rename operation fails for whatever reason.
2.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace whose files you want to move or rename.
3.
Click the Space menu and then click the Move/Rename Tablespace File(s) command. Alternatively,
you can click the Move
Files dialog.
button on the application toolbar. This will display the Move Tablespace
-152-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
4.
Click the Offline button to take the tablespace offline. Note that I this operation is successful the Offline
buttons becomes disabled and the Online button becomes enabled.
5.
If the tablespace consists of multiple files, select the file you want to move or rename
6.
Using any appropriate operation system commands to physically rename or move the selected file to a
different location. Do not rename/move multiple files at once! You must rename/move one file at a
time. In case if you want to rename or move multiple files, complete the following steps 7, 8 and 9 and
then repeat steps from 4 to 9 for another file.
7.
Enter new file name in to the New File Name edit field.
8.
Click the Online button to bring the tablespace online.
9.
Click the Backup button to backup the updated control files..
Note: The backup button does NOT backup your database files and it does not write your existing
database backups to a tape or some other place. It simply creates updated copies of the database
control files that Oracle can use later to startup the database in case if the main control files become
corrupted.
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 for other files in the same tables otherwise click the Close button to close this
dialog.
Important Note: The Move Tablespace Files dialog cannot be used to move or rename files for the
SYSTEM tablespace.
Converting Tablespaces
Starting with version 8.1.5 Oracle supports "locally managed tablespace" that can manage extent allocation
within the tablespace without using data dictionary tables. These tablespaces maintain a bitmap in each
datafile to keep track of the freed or used status of blocks in that datafile. Each bit in the bitmap corresponds
to a block or a group of blocks. When an extent is allocated or freed for reuse, Oracle changes the bitmap
values to show the new status of the blocks. As opposite to the data dictionary managed tablespaces these
changes do not generate rollback information because they do not update tables in the data dictionary
(except for special cases such as tablespace quota information). Oracle supports both types of tablespaces,
however Oracle recommends using locally managed tablespaces because they are more efficient.
If you have upgraded your database from version 8.0 or prior you may want to convert existing data
dictionary tablespaces to locally managed tablespaces. DB Space Expert provides and automated tool for
that purpose. To perform the conversion doe the following:
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select data dictionary managed tablespace which you want to convert to
locally managed tablespace.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Convert To Locally Managed command. This will display a
prompt to confirm the operation.
3.
Click OK button if you are sure. DB Space Expert will convert the selected tablespace.
Important Notes:
• The tablespace being converted cannot be used during conversion processing. This applies to all
objects contained in the tablespace.
• You cannot use this method to convert the SYSTEM tablespace.
• You cannot also use it for tablespaces that contain active rollback segments.
• You cannot also use it for tablespaces having TEMPORARY tablespace type.
-153-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Modifying Default Storage Parameters
To modify default storage parameters for new objects that will be created in the selected tablespace without
specific storage clauses or partial storage clauses do the following:
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace whose default storage parameters you want to
modify.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Edit Default Storage Parameters command. This will display
the Edit Tablespace Storage Parameters dialog.
3.
Modify parameters as required. The Edit Tablespace Storage Parameters dialog displays detailed
descriptions of all parameters and also helpful tips and notes.
4.
Click the OK button to modify tablespace properties.
Note: Changing tablespace default storage parameters does NOT affect existing objects nor it affects
new objects in a tablespaces having uniform space allocation type. It only affects how space is managed for
new objects (created after this change) in tablespaces with non-uniform extent allocation types.
Managing User Space Quotas and Defaults
To view or modify user space quotas click Space then select Edit Space Usage Quotas menu or click the
Space Quota
button on the application toolbar. The Tablespace Quotas dialog will appear.
This dialog consists of two tab pages each providing a different view to the current database configuration:
• The first tab page Space Quotas by User displays space quotas grouped by user, in other words,
for every user it shows all granted tablespaces and space quotas.
• The second tab page Space Quotas by Tablespace displays space quotas grouped by
tablespace name, in other words, for every tablespace it shows all users who has been granted
space in the tablespace space and their quotas.
You can pick and modify any view you want. Use whatever is more convenient to you. The end result will be
the same.
To modify an existing user space quota:
1.
Activate Space Quotas by User tab page.
2.
Click on the user whose tablespace quotas you want to modify in the left hand side tree-view
3.
On the right hand side of the screen in the table-like grid control modify existing quotas.
or
button on any existing line. A new row will appear above
To add another tablespace click the Insert
the clicked button. In the Tablespace Name column select required tablespace name in the drop-down
list. Enter the required quota in the Space Quota column. The quota must be either a valid number or
one of the following values: [DEFAULT], [UNLIMITED].
or
To completely revoke an existing tablespace quota use the Delete
whose quota you want to revoke from the user.
button on the tablespace line
-154-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Tip: The UNLIMITED quota means to Oracle that the user can allocate as much space as much
free space is available in the tablespace. If the tablespace files have AUTOEXTENT option turned on
and the user requests more space then available Oracle automatically increases size of tablespace files
to accommodate the new space requirements. The DEFAULT quota means to Oracle that the database
server can decide how much space it can make available to the user.
4.
Click the Apply button to save all changes.
Coalescing Tablespace Free Space
If you have free space fragmentation, you can use the Coalesce Free Space utility to consolidate free space
extents into larger chunks of free space.
Background Information: Free space fragmentation is a situation that develops in a tablespace, where
"holes" appear in the tablespace. These holes are made up of free blocks, but no objects attempt to use
them when they need to extend. They are created as a result of adding and deleting extents from the objects
in the tablespace, where these objects have deferent initial and/or next extent sizes. Having the object or the
tablespace use a non-zero PCTINCREASE value is also a great way to cause this problem as well. There is
no known need to have the PCTINCREASE setting anything other than zero if you are running Oracle
version 8.0 or later and have set maximum extent number for all objects to UNLIMITED value. However, if
you haven't done that and experience free space fragmentation, do the following to coalesce adjacent free
space extents:
-155-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace you want to coalesce.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Coalesce Tablespace's Free Space command. Alternatively,
you can click the Coalesce
button on the application toolbar. DB Space Expert will coalesce free
space and display a status message when done.
Tips:
• Coalesce Free Space utility is only able to coalesce adjacent free extents. This operation does not
affect any existing objects and is very fast
• To coalesce non-adjacent free extents (e.g. "holes" of free space appearing in the middle of the
tablespace) use the Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard utility.
• The Tablespace Map utility provides graphical display of tablespace space allocation that shows
free space fragmentation in an convenient easy-to-understand format
Estimating Total Unused Space in All Objects
Background Information: Oracle automatically allocates new extents for an object when the objects
requires more storage space. However, Oracle does not automatically release (deallocate) extents when an
objects space requirements fall as a result of data deletion, index reorganization and so on. As a result a
significant amount of unused space can be developed.
DB Space Expert provides a method to deallocate unused space in all tablespace objects in a single
operation, in other words to reclaim tablespace unused.
In case if you want to estimate how much free space can be deallocated without actually running the Free
Unused Space utility do the following:
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace you want to analyze.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Estimate Total Unused Space in All Objects command. DB
Space Expert will check all tablespace objects, estimate unused space in each object and then display
a status message with the estimated summary results.
Freeing Unused Space in All Objects
Background Information: Oracle automatically allocates new extents for an object when the object
requires more storage space. However, Oracle does not automatically release (deallocate) extents when
object's space requirements fall as a result of data deletion, index reorganization and so on. As a result a
significant amount of unused space can be developed.
DB Space Expert provides a method to deallocate unused space in all tablespace objects in a single
operation, in other words to reclaim tablespace unused space.
In case if you want to estimate how much free space can be deallocated without actually running the Free
Unused Space utility do the following:
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace you want to reorganize.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Free Unused Space in All Objects command. Alternatively,
button on the application toolbar. DB Space Expert will check all
you can click the Free Unused
tablespace objects and then free unused space in all objects having significant amount of unused
space. On completion DB Space Expert will display a status message with the summary results
describing total amount of tablespace space it was able to reclaim.
Tips:
-156-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
•
In case if want to estimate how much space can be reclaimed and whether it is worth to processed with
the Free Unused Space option, use the Estimate Total Unused Space in All Objects option.
•
In tablespaces with uniform extent size allocation methods you can have a situation when unused
space cannot be released because of the freed space having non-uniform extent size. Even though the
"Estimate" will report a significant amount of unused space you will not be able to reclaim it.
•
You can use the Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard utility to coalesce free space extents released
as a result of this processing.
Emptying Tablespace Recycle Bin
By default Oracle 10g databases and up use the flush-back feature to register dropped and modified objects
in the database Recycle Bin area without actually freeing the allocated disk space so that such objects can
be restored later. To free the Recycle Bin for a particular tablespace and reclaim the free space do the
following:
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace whose objects you want to permanently remove from
the database recycle bin.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Empty Tablespace Recycle Bin command. DB Space Expert
will permanently delete all recycled objects and free their space for other objects in the selected
tablespace.
Tips:
•
You can use the Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard utility to coalesce free space extents released
as a result of this processing.
•
You can use the Explore Recycle Bin utility to browse contents of the database Recycle Bin and purge
individual objects or groups of objects.
Reorganizing and Defragging Tablespaces
To reorganize space allocation on-line, defrag segments and free space extents in a particular tablespace
do the following:
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace you want to reorganize.
2.
Click Tools menu and then click Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard command. Alternatively you
button on the application toolbar. This will start the Reorganize / Defrag
can click the Reorganize
Tablespace Wizard utility and automatically enter the selected tablespace as the operation target.
Follow instructions provided by the Wizard to complete the operation. For more information and usage
instructions read Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard topic.
Rebuilding Tablespaces
To rebuild an existing tablespace on-line using different storage parameters, files or location do the
following:
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the tablespace you want to rebuild.
-157-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2.
User's Guide
Click Tools menu and then click Rebuild Tablespace Wizard command. Alternatively you can click
button on the application toolbar. This will start the Rebuild Tablespace Wizard utility
the Rebuild
and automatically enter the selected tablespace as the operation target. Follow instructions provided by
the Wizard to complete the operation. For more information and usage instructions read Rebuild
Tablespace Wizard topic.
Moving Tablespace Objects to Another Tablespace
DB Space Expert supports easy graphical methods for moving objects between tablespaces.
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the object you want to move.
2.
Click Tools menu and then click Move Objects Wizard command. Alternatively you can click the Move
button on the application toolbar. This will start the Move Objects Wizard utility and
Object
automatically enter the selected objects as the operation target. Follow instructions provided by the
Wizard to complete the operation. For more information and usage instructions read Move Objects
Wizard topic.
Working with Schema Objects
Estimating Table and Index Space Requirements
Use the Table Size Estimator utility to project how much space will be required for storing certain number
of records an a specific table, partition or index.
To access this utility use
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the object whose space your want to project.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Table Size Estimator command. DB Space Expert will
display the Table Size Estimator dialog. Alternatively you can click the Estimate
button on the
application toolbar. Note that in case if an index or partition is selected in the Tablespace
Navigator, the Table Size Estimator automatically finds the parent table and displays this table
name on the dialog.
3.
Enter projected row count in the Number of Rows to Estimate field.
4.
Click the OK button. DB Space Expert will perform table analysis and space estimation. After that,
a message box will appear where you will see space estimation results for the table data and each
index separately as well as the total amount of estimated space.
-158-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Dropping Schema Objects
To drop an object from the database:
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the object you want to drop.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Drop Object command. DB Space Expert will ask you to
confirm that the right object is selected for deletion and if confirmed it will drop that object.
Moving Schema Objects Between Tablespaces
DB Space Expert supports easy graphical methods for moving objects between tablespaces.
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the object you want to move.
2.
Click Tools menu and then click Move Objects Wizard command. Alternatively you can click the Move
Object
button on the application toolbar. This will start the Move Objects Wizard utility and
automatically enter the selected objects as the operation target. Follow instructions provided by the
Wizard to complete the operation. For more information and usage instructions read Move Objects
Wizard topic.
Rebuilding Indexes
To rebuild all indexes index for a particular table or table partition:
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the object whose indexes you want to rebuild.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Rebuild Indexes command. DB Space Expert will find and
rebuild all object indexes using Oracle's standard ALETER INDEX…REBUILD command.
Freeing Object's Unused Space
Background Information: Oracle automatically allocates new extents for an object when the object
requires more storage space. However, Oracle does not automatically release (deallocate) extents when
object's space requirements fall as a result of data deletion, index reorganization and so on. As a result a
significant amount of unused space can be developed.
DB Space Expert provides a method to deallocate unused space and free for use in other objects.
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select the object you want to reorganize.
2.
Click the Space menu and then click the Free Unused Space command. DB Space Expert will free
unused space in the selected object. On completion DB Space Expert will display a status message
with the summary results describing total amount of space it was able to reclaim.
Tips:
•
In tablespaces with uniform extent size allocation methods you can have a situation when unused
space cannot be released because of the freed space having non-uniform extent size.
•
You can use the Free Unused Space in All Objects utility to free unused space in all tablespace objects
in a single operation.
-159-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Fixing Chained Rows
Row Chaining and Migration are common problems in Oracle database tables. Row migration is caused by
rows whose data grows in length over time and at some point it can no longer fit into its original Oracle block
(block allocated for the original row data). As a result Oracle has to allocate additional blocks to fit the rest of
the row and during I/O operations read/write more data blocks. Row chaining is not about the growth of rows
data, but is the result of rows data starting out too big.
If your tables developed such problems you can fix them using Fix Chained Rows Wizard. Use Tools/Fix
Chained Rows Wizard menu to start this Wizard. Alternatively you can click the Fix Chains
the application toolbar.
button on
See Fix Chained Rows Wizard topic for more information and usage instructions.
Working with Partitions
DB Space Expert provides a complete set of graphical tools for managing table partitions. These tools can
be used to partition and unpartition tables, split and merge partitions, rename and move them, rebuild and
exchange data with standalone tables.
Note: Because of the Oracle 7 lack of support for partitions, DB Space Experts partitioning tools are
only enabled when connected to Oracle 8.0 databases and later.
To following topics describe in detail how to use these tools.
Converting Regular Tables to Tables with Partitions
Note: Tables with LONG and LONG RAW columns, index-organized tables and nested tables cannot be
partitioned.
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select an existing table you want to reorganize and convert to partitioned
table.
2.
Click the Partitions menu and then click the Partition Table command. Alternatively you can click the
button on the application toolbar. This will open the Convert Regular Table To
Partition
Partitioned Table dialog. An example screenshot of the dialog follows.
-160-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
3.
Select Partition Type option. Note that partition By Range option is available in all Oracle databases
(8.0 and up); By Hash is available in Oracle 8i and up; By List is enabled in Oracle 9i and up.
4.
Enter Number of Partitions value. You can type in the required number or you can use arrows up and
down to increment/decrement the value as much as needed.
5.
Enter Partition Key Column(s), in other words names of table columns whose values define where
partitions start and end.
Note: If you are planning to use a single column for the key you can select its name from the dropdown list, otherwise you must enter column names as a comma-separated list. In the latest case make
sure you enter valid column names in the proper order. If you select By List partitioning type you must
use single column as a partition key
6.
Enter partition names, storage parameters and partition range/list specification into Partitions grid.
Note that the dialog shows different partition properties for different partition types.
If By Range partition type is chosen then ranges are used for partitioning table data. Ranges must be
defined for each partition using the values less than (value) clause, and the value specified in the
cannot include a volatile data operation, such as calls to non-standard functions. String and date values
must be enclosed in single quotes, as you would use them in other SQL expressions.
-161-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
4.1.
Enter partition names and expressions for less than (value) clause. Partition names must
conform to Oracle object naming standards. To avoid partitioning problems the last
partition value is automatically entered for you as MAXVALUE keyword, which means
"catch-all" partition for all key values that are not in ranges entered for other partitions.
4.2.
Select partition locations using the Tablespace drop-down list.
4.3.
Enter partition storage parameters in case if you do not want to use tablespace defaults.
To edit storage parameters click the Storage
button. You can select different
tablespaces and storage parameters for different partitions.
Note: Entered storage parameters will be ignored if the selected tablespace is a
locally managed tablespace with automatic extent management.
If By Hash partition type is chosen then Oracle automatically calculates data ranges for data
partitioning and you only enter partition names, locations and storage parameters.
6.1.
Enter partition names. Partition names must conform to Oracle object naming standards.
6.2.
Select partition locations using the Tablespace drop-down list
6.3.
Enter partition storage parameters in case if you do not want to use tablespace defaults.
To edit storage parameters click the Storage
button. You can select different
tablespaces and storage parameters for different partitions.
Note: Entered storage parameters will be ignored if the selected tablespace is a
locally managed tablespace with automatic extent management.
If By List partition type is chosen then you must enter list of key values for each selected partition.
6.1.
Enter partition names and list values. Partition names must conform to Oracle object
naming standards. To avoid partitioning problems the last partition value is automatically
entered for you as DEFAULT keyword, which means "catch-all" partition for all key values
that are not listed in other partitions.
6.2.
Select partition locations using the Tablespace drop-down list
6.3.
Enter partition storage parameters in case if you do not want to use tablespace defaults.
To edit storage parameters click the Storage
button. You can select different
-162-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
tablespaces and storage parameters for different partitions.
Note: Entered storage parameters will be ignored if the selected tablespace is a
locally managed tablespace with automatic extent management.
7.
In the Processing Options box select advanced processing options for the conversion operation
8.
To start the conversion operation immediately on the front-end script, click the Convert Now button. To
schedule this operation for a later run, perhaps off-hours, or to start it immediately but set it to run in the
background click the Schedule button and select appropriate schedule type and settings. If the
processing is scheduled for a later run you can use either DB Job Expert or DB Space Expert's built-in
Job Monitoring utility to monitor and if necessary cancel scheduled jobs or kill already running jobs.
Tips: Like many other utilities found in DB Space Expert the partition reorganization job can run in the
foreground and in the background. For information on supported job and schedule types, advantages and
disadvantages of different methods, job logging and auditing see Running Space Reorganization Jobs topic.
Converting Partitioned Tables to Regular Tables
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select any partition of an existing partitioned table you want to convert
back to regular non-partitioned table.
2.
Click the Partitions menu and then click the Unpartition Table command. Alternatively you can click
the Unpartition
button on the application toolbar. This will open the Convert Partitioned Table to
Regular Table dialog. An example screenshot of the dialog follows.
3.
If you want to create the converted table in a different tablespace select new tablespace name and
storage parameters. To edit storage parameters click the Storage
button.
-163-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
4.
User's Guide
To start the conversion operation immediately on the front-end script, click the Convert Now button. To
schedule this operation for a later run, perhaps off-hours, or to start it immediately but set it to run in the
background click the Schedule button and select appropriate schedule type and settings. If the
processing is scheduled for a later run you can use either DB Job Expert or DB Space Expert's built-in
Job Monitoring utility to monitor and if necessary cancel scheduled jobs or kill already running jobs.
Tips: Like many other utilities found in DB Space Expert the partition reorganization job can run in the
foreground and in the background. For information on supported job and schedule types, advantages and
disadvantages of different methods, job logging and auditing see Running Space Reorganization Jobs topic.
Renaming Partitions and Subpartitions
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select table or index partition or subpartition you want to rename.
2.
Click the Partitions menu and then click the Rename command. Alternatively you can click the
Rename
button on the application toolbar. This will open the Rename Partition / Subpartition
dialog. An example screenshot of the dialog follows.
3.
Enter new name. This name must conform to Oracle object naming standards.
4.
Check the Recompile Dependencies checkbox if you want DB Space Expert to automatically
recompile all table dependencies after the change. Click the Rename button to start the processing.
Splitting Partitions
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select table partition you want to split to 2 or more smaller partitions.
2.
Click the Partitions menu and then click the Split command. Alternatively you can click the Split
button on the application toolbar. This will open the Split Partition dialog. An example screenshot of
the dialog follows.
-164-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
3.
Enter Number of New Partitions value. You can type in the required number or you can use arrows up
and down to increment/decrement the value as much as needed. The entered number must be greater
or equal 2.
4.
Enter partition names, storage parameters and partition range/list specification into Partitions grid.
Note that the dialog shows different partition properties for different partition types.
If By Range partition type is used then ranges are used for partitioning table data. Ranges must be
defined for each partition using the values less than (value) clause, and the value specified in the
cannot include a volatile data operation, such as calls to non-standard functions. String and date values
must be enclosed in single quotes, as you would use them in other SQL expressions.
4.1.
Enter partition names and expressions for less than (value) clause. Partition names must
conform to Oracle object naming standards.
4.2.
Select partition locations using the Tablespace drop-down list.
4.3.
Enter partition storage parameters in case if you do not want to use tablespace defaults.
button. You can select different
To edit storage parameters click the Storage
tablespaces and storage parameters for different partitions.
-165-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Note: Entered storage parameters will be ignored if the selected tablespace is a
locally managed tablespace with automatic extent management.
If By Hash partition type is chosen then Oracle automatically calculates data ranges for data
partitioning and you only enter partition names, locations and storage parameters.
4.1.
Enter partition names. Partition names must conform to Oracle object naming standards.
4.2.
Select partition locations using the Tablespace drop-down list
4.3.
Enter partition storage parameters in case if you do not want to use tablespace defaults.
To edit storage parameters click the Storage
button. You can select different
tablespaces and storage parameters for different partitions.
Note: Entered storage parameters will be ignored if the selected tablespace is a
locally managed tablespace with automatic extent management.
If By List partition type is chosen then you must enter list of key values for each selected partition.
4.1.
Enter partition names and list values. Partition names must conform to Oracle object
naming standards.
4.2.
Select partition locations using the Tablespace drop-down list.
4.3.
Enter partition storage parameters in case if you do not want to use tablespace defaults.
button. You can select different
To edit storage parameters click the Storage
tablespaces and storage parameters for different partitions.
Note: Entered storage parameters will be ignored if the selected tablespace is a
locally managed tablespace with automatic extent management.
5.
In the Processing Options box select advanced processing options for the conversion operation.
6.
To start the splitting operation immediately on the front-end script, click the Merge Now button. To
schedule this operation for a later run, perhaps off-hours, or to start it immediately but set it to run in the
background click the Schedule button and select appropriate schedule type and settings. If the
processing is scheduled for a later run you can use either DB Job Expert or DB Space Expert's built-in
Job Monitoring utility to monitor and if necessary cancel scheduled jobs or kill already running jobs.
Tips: Like many other utilities found in DB Space Expert the partition reorganization job can run in the
foreground and in the background. For information on supported job and schedule types, advantages and
disadvantages of different methods, job logging and auditing see Running Space Reorganization Jobs topic.
-166-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Merging Partitions
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select table partition of you want to merge with one or more other partitions
creating a bigger partition.
2.
Click the Partitions menu and then click the Merge command. Alternatively you can click the Split
button on the application toolbar. This will open the Merge Partition dialog. An example screenshot of
the dialog follows.
3.
Enter new partition name into the Partition field.
4.
Use the Tablespace drop-down box to choose tablespace for the new merged partition. If you don't
change the partition tablespace, by default the merged partition is created in the same tablespace and
with the same storage parameters as the selected tablespace.
5.
In the Select Partitions to Merge grid place a checkmark into the left most column for all partitions that
you want to merge together. Note the partition selected in the Tablespace Navigator is checked by
default.
Important Note: Only adjacent partitions can be merged.
6.
In the Processing Options box select advanced processing options for the merge operation.
7.
To start the merging operation immediately on the front-end script, click the Merge Now button. To
schedule this operation for a later run, perhaps off-hours, or to start it immediately but set it to run in the
background click the Schedule button and select appropriate schedule type and settings. If the
processing is scheduled for a later run you can use either DB Job Expert or DB Space Expert's built-in
Job Monitoring utility to monitor and if necessary cancel scheduled jobs or kill already running jobs.
-167-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Tips: Like many other utilities found in DB Space Expert the partition reorganization job can run in the
foreground and in the background. For information on supported job and schedule types, advantages and
disadvantages of different methods, job logging and auditing see Running Space Reorganization Jobs topic.
Exchanging Partition and Table Data
Background Information: You can convert data in a partition into a non-partitioned table and also
convert a non-partitioned table into a partition of a partitioned table by exchanging their data (and index)
segments. Exchanging table partitions is most useful when you have an application using non-partitioned
tables, which you want to convert to partitions of a partitioned table. For example, you may already have
partition views that you wish to migrate into partitioned tables. This type of operation is much more efficient
then INSER…SELECT/DELETE method using intermediate table because the entire operation is performed
on the segment level by updating references in the data dictionary tables.
Tip: Do not confuse this type of data exchange operation with table and partition conversion utilities:
Converting Regular Tables to Tables with Partitions and Converting Partitioned Tables to Regular Tables
Do the following steps to exchange partition data:
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select table partition you want to exchange.
2.
Click the Partitions menu and then click the Exchange command. Alternatively you can click the
Exchange
button on the application toolbar. This will open the Exchange Partition dialog. An
example screenshot of the dialog follows.
3.
In the Table box select Schema name of the table to exchange partition data with.
4.
In the Table box select Table name of the table to exchange partition data with.
5.
If you want to validate table data in order to ensure it matches the partition range/list clause and will not
create any problems later check the Validate table data checkbox
6.
If you want to automatically exchange table and partition indexes check the Include indexes checkbox.
If you do not check that option affected table and partition indexes will be marked UNUSABLE.
-168-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
7.
Check the Recompile dependent code objects option if you want DB Space Expert to automatically
recompile all table and partition dependencies after the exchange operation is complete.
8.
Click the Exchange button to start the processing.
Rebuilding Index Partitions and Subpartition
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select index partition you want to rebuild.
2.
Click the Partitions menu and then click the Rebuild command. Alternatively you can click the Rebuild
button on the application toolbar. This will open the Rebuild Partition dialog. An example
screenshot of the dialog follows.
3.
Fill in New Storage Parameters for the selected partition. Description of each parameter and
recommendations are provided directly on the dialog.
4.
In the Processing Options box select advanced processing options for the rebuild operation.
5.
Click the Rebuild button to start the rebuild operation.
Rebuilding Unusable Indexes
1.
In the Tablespace Navigator select table partition whose local unusable indexes you want to fix.
2.
Click the Partitions menu and then click the Rebuild Unusable Indexes command. DB Space Expert
will start rebuilding unusable indexes.
-169-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
3.
User's Guide
A status message will be displayed as soon as the processing is complete.
Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard
DB Space Expert supports a number of different tablespace reorganization, optimization and defragging
options. All supported option use on-line reorganization methods using standard Oracle commands and
can be performed in the background transparently to running database applications. In certain cases you
may experience measurable performance impact when rebuilding large indexes and tables. To simply the
reorganization DB Space supports flexible scheduling methods that allow scheduling the reorganization
process to run during off-peak times.
To access these reorganization options use the Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard. This Wizard can
be started using Tools/Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard menu or alternatively by clicking on the
Reorg
button on the application toolbar.
Top-level reorganization options
The following table describes supported top-level reorganization options and their usage instructions
Option
Description
Reorganization Options
Coalesce objects having
lots of extents
Use this option to reorganize tablespace objects whose number of extents
exceeds certain threshold. DB Space Expert can rebuild such objects with
new optimized storage parameters ensuring the rebuilt object consists of no
more then few extents. When calculating new storage parameters DB Space
Expert takes into account tablespace storage parameters as well as average
sizes of other objects. In non-uniform size tablespaces it calculates uniform
size extents that can be easily reused by other objects in case if the
reorganized object is dropped or moved to another tablespace.
Reorganize objects
having non-uniform extent
In order to eliminate tablespace fragmentation caused by different extent
sizes DB Space Expert can reorganize existing objects and modify their
-170-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
sizes
extent sizes making all extents uniform or proportional to the uniform size. In
tablespaces with non-uniform extent allocation methods it calculates average
objects sizes to figure out most common extent size and then finds nearest
common extent size value proportional to the size of the database data block.
Relocate objects of
certain types to other
tablespaces
Use option to quickly move all tables or all LOBs or all indexes or any
combination of these objects to different tablespaces. You can pick up to 3
different tablespaces at a time.
For example, you can use this option to quickly separate tables and table
indexes into separate tablespaces as well as to separate LOB columns
containing movies, graphics or large documents of other types.
Recover free space
This option allows you to reclaim free tablespace space. Use the following
Free Space Recovery Options to choose which space recovery methods to
employ during the reorganization process.
Coalesce free space
(merge adjacent free
extents)
This option is automatic and used internally by the Wizard after each
reorganization step. For more information about free space coalesce process
see Coalescing Tablespace Free Space topic.
Defrag free space
Use this option to merge non-adjacent free space extents. DB Space Expert
supports several methods for performing this type reorganization. See the
following paragraphs for more details
Free Space Recovery Options
Shrink rollback segments
to optimal size
Check this option to allow DB Space Expert to shrink large rollback segments
to their optimal sizes. Please note that rollback segment optimal sizes are
calculated by the Oracle database. DB Space Expert simply executes the
appropriate ALTER ROLLBACK SEGMENT commands.
Drop columns marked
UNUSED
Check this option to allow DB Space Expert to permanently drop unused
table columns, in other words columns marked by users as unneeded.
Note: This option is only enabled in Oracle databases version 8i and up.
Deallocate unused space
in objects having 5 or
more unused blocks.
Check this option to allow DB Space Expert to run the Deallocate Unused
Space operation as part of the reorganization process.
Empty recycle bin
Check this option to allow DB Space Expert to automatically empty the
tablespace Recycle Bin.
Note: This option is only enabled in Oracle databases version 10g and
up.
Compact indexes (rebuild
out-of-balance indexes)
Check this option to allow DB Space Expert to find out-of-balance indexes
and rebuild them.
Batch Methods for Separating Objects of Different Types
If you choose the Relocate objects of certain types option on the first dialog screen of the Reorganize /
Defrag Tablespace Wizard, on the second step you will be then presented with another dialog screen that
you can use to select which types you want to relocate and their target tablespaces.
Separate set of options is available for the following 3 groups of object types:
• Tables, table partitions and subpartitions
• Indexes, index partitions and subpartitions
• LOBs, LOB partitions and subpartitions.
-171-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Note: LOB option applies to all types of LOBs. LOB indexes are always relocated together with LOBs
segments. Oracle currently does not support storing LOB segments and indexes in different tablespaces.
For each group of objects you can pick either Leave or Relocate option. If you pick the Leave option, DB
Space Expert will do noting to that group of objects, in terms of the object relocation.
Objects Defragging and Free Space Defragging Strategies.
The Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard currently supports 3 defragging strategies that can be
employed to defrag fragmented objects and free space extents. In all cases to implement the on-line
application-transparent reorganization DB Space Expert uses some other tablespaces as scratch pad to
move database segments from and to the tablespace being reorganized. It can use either an existing
tablespace or create new tablespace, which it will automatically drop after the reorganization processing is
successfully completed.
Important Notes:
•
If you choose to use an existing tablespace as a scratch pad make sure to pick a PERMANENT
type tablespaces. If you pick a TEMPORARY tablespace and the database is shutdown in a middle
of the reorganization process you may loose affected tablespace objects and data.
•
Because all reorganizations are performed within the database using a scratch tablespace, the
selected scratch tablespace must have sufficient free space to hold all the objects being
reorganized. If the selected scratch tablespace has sufficient free space but AUTOEXTENSIBLE
option turned on for the tablespace files, Oracle will automatically expand this database as needed.
However after the reorganization is completed such tablespace will not be shrunk back to its prereorganization size. That's why it is highly recommended to allow DB Space Expert temporarily
create a new scratch tablespace that it can drop after the processing. DB Space Expert by default
uses DEFRAG as the new scratch tablespace name.
The following table describes supported defragging strategies.
Strategy
Description
Automatic
Choose object's processing order based on the analysis of the free space allocation
within the tablespace and the type and number of tablespace segments and extents.
Reorganize free space by moving out objects separating chunks of free space, then
merging adjacent free extents and then defragging other objects which will fill the
coalesced free space. Last, move back previously moved out objects.
Tip: This strategy might be unavailable in situations when a number of different
reorganization options have been selected on the first page. In such situations DB
Space Expert could be unable to make correct prognosis of space allocation in the
tablespace and calculate the best defragging path.
Small objects first
First, free space in the tablespace by moving out small objects then defrag large
objects and then move back small objects filling any remaining gaps.
Large objects first
First, free space in the tablespace by moving out largest objects then coalesce free
space, rebuild and defrag small objects, and then move back previously moved
large objects.
Error Handling Methods
The following 3 methods are supported:
-172-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Method
Description
Abort after error
This method can be used with both foreground and background reorganization jobs.
This method instructs DB Space Expert to abort the processing after any error.
Ignore errors
This method can be used with both foreground and background reorganization jobs.
This method instructs DB Space Expert to ignore processing error and continue with
the next object.
It is usually safe to use this method. In large tablespaces with lots of objects and
method some kind of a minor error or warning is quite likely. In all cases all
processing errors are logged to the screen or to the
ORA_MONITOR.DB_SPACE_LOG log table
Prompt me what to
do
This method can be used with foreground reorganization jobs only. This method
instructs DB Space Expert to pause the processing after any error, display an
interactive message containing the error details and name of the affected object or
storage structure. You can then choose to ignore the error and continue, abort the
processing completely or retry the last step and continue. In the latest case you can
correct the error cause and pick the retry to Retry.
Tip: If an error occurs in background space reorganization job, DB Space Expert will attempt to use DB
Alert Expert to email or page the error. If DB Alert Expert is not installed in the database or DB Alert Console
is not running at the time of the error, the email/page notification will fail and DB Space Expert will continue
ignoring this failure.
Advanced Processing Options
DB Space Expert supports a number of options that allow you to get maximum possible performance out of
your tablespace reorganization jobs and ensure that objects and storage structures being reorganized do
not affect existing database application.
Important Notes: These processing options are applied for each object during or immediately after that
object processing to ensure that existing database applications persistently remain in a usable state with as
little impact on the running applications as possible.
-173-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Reorganization Job Scheduling
Like many other utilities found in DB Space Expert the Reorganize / Defrag Tablespace Wizard can run
tablespace reorganization jobs in the foreground and in the background. For information on supported job
and schedule types, advantages and disadvantages of different methods, job logging and auditing see
Running Space Reorganization Jobs topic.
Rebuild Tablespace Wizard
Rebuilding tablespace is bar the fastest and most efficient method to defragment a tablespace as well as fix
many other space allocation issues. DB Space Expert provides special utility Rebuild Tablespace Wizard
that can be used to rebuild and clone tablespaces. This utility allows you with just a few mouse clicks to
build a new tablespace with the same or different storage parameters as the tablespace being rebuilt and
then move all existing tablespace objects to the new tablespace. Because all objects are moved
sequentially and created with uniform extent sizes and zero PCT_INCREASE the new tablespace has
zero fragmentation and ensures that free space and object fragmentation don't became in issue
again some time later.
This Wizard can be started using Tools/Rebuild Tablespace Wizard menu or alternatively by clicking on
the Rebuild
button on the application toolbar.
Top-level reorganization options
The following table describes supported top-level tablespace rebuild options and their usage instructions
Create tablespace Options
Option
Description
Create tablespace options
Create new tablespace as
a clone (same storage
Use this option to clone the selected tablespace. The new tablespace will be
created with the same number of files in the same directory as the existing
-174-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
same location)
tablespace. You also need to specify new tablespace name.
To ensure uniqueness of new file names DB Space will generate new file
names as copies of old file names with the date suffix inserted before the file
extension.
Let me choose
parameters and location
of the new tablespace.
Use this option if you want to specify new tablespace location, file names and
storage parameters.
If the option is selected the Wizard will popup the Create Tablespace dialog,
which you can use to create the new tablespace.
Tablespace Reorganization Options
Reorganize objects
having non-uniform extent
sizes
Use this option if you are building new tablespace without using Oracle
automatic extent management features (Oracle 8i and up). If this option is
selected DB Space Expert will migrate all objects to the new tablespace and
reorganize their storage parameters to enforce uniform extent sizing. This will
prevent future fragmentation problems in the new tablespace.
Recover free space
This option allows you to reorganize existing objects by freeing their unused
space, which in turn will reduce space requirements for the new tablespace.
Use the following Free Space Recovery Options to choose which space
recovery methods to employ during the reorganization process.
Free space recovery options
Drop columns marked
UNUSED
Check this option to allow DB Space Expert to permanently drop unused
table columns, in other words columns marked by users as unneeded.
Note: This option is only enabled in Oracle databases version 8i and up.
Deallocate unused space
in objects having 5 or
more unused blocks.
Check this option to allow DB Space Expert to run the Deallocate Unused
Space operation as part of the reorganization process.
Empty recycle bin
Check this option to allow DB Space Expert to automatically empty the
tablespace Recycle Bin.
Note: This option is only enabled in Oracle databases version 10g and
up.
Error Handling Methods
The following 3 methods are supported:
Method
Description
Abort after error
This method can be used with both foreground and background reorganization jobs.
This method instructs DB Space Expert to abort the processing after any error.
Ignore errors
This method can be used with both foreground and background reorganization jobs.
This method instructs DB Space Expert to ignore processing error and continue with
the next object.
It is usually safe to use this method. In large tablespaces with lots of objects and
method some kind of a minor error or warning is quite likely. In all cases all
processing errors are logged to the screen or to the
ORA_MONITOR.DB_SPACE_LOG log table
Prompt me what to
do
This method can be used with foreground reorganization jobs only. This method
instructs DB Space Expert to pause the processing after any error, display an
interactive message containing the error details and name of the affected object or
-175-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
storage structure. You can then choose to ignore the error and continue, abort the
processing completely or retry the last step and continue. In the latest case you can
correct the error cause and pick the retry to Retry.
Tip: If an error occurs in background space reorganization job, DB Space Expert will attempt to use DB
Alert Expert to email or page the error. If DB Alert Expert is not installed in the database or DB Alert Console
is not running at the time of the error, the email/page notification will fail and DB Space Expert will continue
ignoring this failure.
Advanced Processing Options
DB Space Expert supports a number of options that allow you to get maximum possible performance out of
your tablespace reorganization jobs and ensure that objects and storage structures being reorganized do
not affect existing database application.
Important Notes: These processing options are applied for each object during or immediately after that
object processing to ensure that existing database applications persistently remain in a usable state with as
little impact on the running applications as possible.
Reorganization Job Scheduling
Like many other utilities found in DB Space Expert the Rebuild Tablespace Wizard can run tablespace
reorganization jobs in the foreground and in the background. For information on supported job and schedule
types, advantages and disadvantages of different methods, job logging and auditing see Running Space
Reorganization Jobs topic.
Move Objects Wizard
The Move Objects Wizard can be used to move single or multiple objects between tablespaces.
This Wizard can be started using Tools/Move Objects Wizard menu or alternatively by clicking on the
Move Object
button on the application toolbar. It can be also started using right-click menu in the
-176-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Tablespace Navigator. In the latest case the Wizard will automatically load optimal settings and name of the
schema selected in the Tablespace Navigator.
Using Move Objects Wizard
On the first screen of the Move Objects Wizard you can select one or more objects that you want to move.
This can be accomplished in 2 steps:
1. In the Schema drop-down list select name of the schema whose objects you are going to move. The
Move Objects Wizard will populate the Objects grid with all storage objects from the selected schema.
2. Using common DB Tools shortcuts select all required objects. The description of supported shortcuts is
available in the Select Tables topic. Click the Next button to advance to the next screen.
3.
Select destination tables from the Tablespace drop-down list.
4. Choose storage parameters for target objects. Please note if you are moving multiple objects the
selected parameters will be applied to all objects. Click the Next button to advance to the next screen.
-177-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
5.
User's Guide
Specify advanced processing options. Note that DB Space Expert supports a number of options that
allow you to get maximum possible performance out of your object reorganization jobs and ensure that
objects and storage structures being reorganized do not affect existing database application.
Important Notes: These processing options are applied for each object during or immediately after
that object processing to ensure that existing database applications persistently remain in a usable state
with as little impact on the running applications as possible.
6. Choose how and when you want to run this object reorganization job. You can choose to run it
immediately as a foreground script or schedule it for background processing.
Reorganization Job Scheduling
Like many other utilities found in DB Space Expert the Move Objects Wizard can run object reorganization
jobs in the foreground and in the background. For information on supported job and schedule types,
advantages and disadvantages of different methods, job logging and auditing see Running Space
Reorganization Jobs topic.
Fix Chained Rows Wizard
The Fix Chained Rows Wizard utility can be used correct space allocation problems caused by chained
and migrated rows problems. Best of all you can use this utility to correct all chained rows in any number of
tables with just a few mouse clicks.
This Wizard can be started using Tools/Fix Chained Rows Wizard menu or alternatively by clicking on the
Move Fix Chains
button on the application toolbar.
-178-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Using Fix Chained Rows Wizard
1.
On the first screen the Fix Chained Rows Wizard lists all database tables, partitions and subpartitions
currently experiencing chained rows problem.
Select one or more objects that you want to fix. Use common DB Tools shortcuts to select multiple
objects. The description of supported shortcuts is available in the Select Tables topic. Click the Next
button to advance to the next screen.
2.
Specify advanced processing options. Note that DB Space Expert supports a number of options that
allow you to get maximum possible performance out of your object reorganization jobs and ensure that
objects and storage structures being reorganized do not affect existing database application.
Important Notes: These processing options are applied for each object during or immediately after
that object processing to ensure that existing database applications persistently remain in a usable state
with as little impact on the running applications as possible.
3.
Choose how and when you want to run this object reorganization job. You can choose to run it
immediately as a foreground script or schedule it for background processing.
-179-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Reorganization Job Scheduling
Like many other utilities found in DB Space Expert the Fix Chained Rows Wizard can run object
reorganization jobs in the foreground and in the background. For information on supported job and schedule
types, advantages and disadvantages of different methods, job logging and auditing see Running Space
Reorganization Jobs topic.
Working with Database Recycle Bin
Oracle 10g features special storage area in every tablespace called the Recycle Bin where dropped objects
are retained until the object is either recovered via a Flashback Drop operation, or until the object is purged
from the Recycle Bin. DB Space Expert includes the Recycle Bin Explorer utility that can be used to
visually browse database recycle bin contents and purge recycled objects as needed.
To start the Recycle Bin Explorer use Tools/Explore Recycle Bin menu or click the Recycle Bin
button on the application toolbar.
For your convenience the Recycle Bin Explorer presents all dropped objects in a tree like structure
presenting object "drop" dependencies.
This presentation method is self-explaining. You can easily see, for example, that the trigger
HR.TR_BRIU_APPLICANTS was dropped when its parent table HR.APPLICANTS was dropped.
The Recycle Bin Explorer also displays other useful information including dropped objects name, tablespace
name, object size in Kbytes, time object has been created and also time object has been dropped.
To purge objects from the recycle bin and as a result permanently delete them from the database and free
their space use any of the following methods:
To purge a single particular object:
1.
Select the object you want to purge.
2.
Select File/Purge Selection menu. DB Space Expert will purge the selected object.
To purge a group of objects:
1.
Use common DB Tools shortcuts to select multiple objects. The description of supported shortcuts is
available in the Select Tables topic.
2.
Select File/Purge Selection menu. DB Space Expert will purge all selected objects.
-180-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To purge a group of objects:
1.
Select File/Purge All menu. DB Space Expert will purge all objects in the database recycle bin.
Running Space Reorganization Jobs
Job Execution Methods
DB Space Expert supports 3 different methods of executing various space reorganization jobs. You can pick
different method in different situation or stick with a single method and uses for all reorganizations.
1.
Foreground Jobs – These jobs are executed on the front-end running DB Space Expert graphical
Interface. DB Space Expert executes job script command-by-command. After each command it
evaluation the command completion status and based on the returned value decides what to do next.
As the job progresses DB Space Expert displays job progress of work messages on the console. Only
one foreground job can run at a time. However you can open multiple DB Space Expert instances to run
multiple foreground jobs simultaneously.
2.
Background Immediate Job - These jobs are executed on the back-end using Oracle native
scheduling API available in the DBMS_JOB package. If the reorganization script is small (less then
2000) bytes DB Space Expert submits it as a simple job. If the script is large it creates one or more
temporary procedures and schedules the entry-point procedure starting immediately after job
submission. The created procedures are then automatically deleted at the end of the processing.
The Background Immediate Jobs use DBMS_PIPE package to communicate with the DB Space Expert
front-end console and report their progress of work messages and errors. For every immediate job DB
Space Expert opens a separate graphical log window, which displays job progress of work messages
and errors sent using DBMS_PIPE package functions. All displayed messages are sorted by processing
time. You can change the default sorting if required. You can also filter, print, zoom and resize logs as
needed. Note that for your convenience all error messages are displayed in red. Multiple background
immediate jobs can be started and monitored simultaneously.
Important Notes: DB Space Experts console cannot be closed until all background immediate jobs
complete. Restarting your computer or forcibly terminating DB Space Expert using Windows Task
Manager while background immediate jobs are in progress can cause background jobs to hand while
communicating with the non-existing console.
Background Scheduled Jobs - These jobs are executed on the back-end using Oracle native scheduling
API available in the DBMS_JOB package. If the reorganization script is small (less then 2000) bytes DB
Space Expert submits it as a simple job. If the script is large it creates one or more temporary procedures
and schedules the entry-point procedure starting at the user-specified time. The created procedures are
then automatically deleted at the end of the processing.
If an error occurs in the Background Scheduled Job, job scripts will attempt to use DB Alert Expert interface
to notify you about the error. If DB Alert Expert is not installed in the database or DB Alert Console is not
running at the time of the error, the email/page notification will fail without affecting the rest of the job script.
Similarly on the job successful completion the job will attempt to notify you will attempt to use DB Alert
Expert interface to notify you about job completion status.
Important Notes: The Background Scheduled Jobs use ORA_MONITOR.DB_SPACE_LOG table to log
their progress of work messages. If the ORA_MONITOR user or DB_SPACE_LOG table do not exist DB
Space Expert will automatically create them with your permission. You can use DB Tools SQL Editor or any
other tool of your choice to periodically poll messages in the ORA_MONITOR.DB_SPACE_LOG table.
-181-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Job Logging
Job logging is automatic and always on. You do not need to do anything to enable this feature.
Different types of reorganization job use different logging methods. Read the previous topic for more
information about different jobs types and the implementation of their logging methods.
Advantages and disadvantages of different reorganization job
types
The main 2 advantages of the Foreground Job type are:
• The option to use interactive error handling method. In case of an error an interactive message is
displayed on the screen giving you a choice to ignore the error and continue processing, to abort
the processing or to intervene and then restart the processing from the last failed operation.
• The processing can be easily interrupted or paused at any time by simply clicking on the Cancel
button.
The main disadvantages of the Foreground Job type are
• The DB Space Expert graphical interface cannot be closed while the job is running and cannot be
used for other tasks.
The main advantages of the Background Immediate Job type are:
• Multiple jobs can be started and run on the server simultaneously.
• Easy to read graphical interface is available for job logging. Progress of work messages appear on
the screen in a real-time.
The main disadvantages of the Background Immediate Job type are:
• The DB Space Expert graphical interface cannot be closed while such jobs are running. However
the interface can be used for other tasks.
• Background jobs cannot be paused or interacted with. The only way to stop such job is to kill it
using DB Space Expert's built in job monitoring and management utility or using DB Job Expert
component.
The main advantages of the Background Scheduled Job type are:
• Multiple jobs can be started and run on the server simultaneously.
The main disadvantages of the Background Immediate Job type are:
• Background jobs cannot be paused or interacted with. The only way to stop such job is to kill it
using DB Space Expert's built in job monitoring and management utility or using DB Job Expert
component.
• This job requires existence of the ORA_MONITOR.DB_SPACE_LOG table
Monitoring and Managing Space Reorganization Jobs
DB Space Expert features a built-in scheduling interface that is optimized specifically for the space
reorganization jobs. This scheduling interface uses Oracle DBMS_JOB package to submit and modify
reorganization jobs as well as monitor their statuses.
Here is a sample screenshot of the built-in scheduling interface.
-182-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To monitor already submitted jobs and reschedule, disable, delete or kill running jobs use Scheduled
Background Jobs dialog that can be started from the Tools/Scheduled Background Jobs menu or
alternately clicking the Jobs
button on the application toolbar
The following controls are available on this dialog
Control
Description
Scheduled Jobs grid
This control displays all pending and running space reorganization
jobs scheduled by you and by other users.
Refresh button
Use this button to refreshes contents of the Scheduled Jobs grid.
Start Date edit field, Start Time
edit field and Reschedule button
These 3 controls can be used to reschedule a pending job to run at a
different time. The action applies to the currently selected job in the
Scheduled Jobs grid.
Reorganization Script display
control
This read-only control displays the definition of the reorganization job
selected in the Scheduled Jobs grid. In most cases you will only see
the a call to the "entry-point" reorganization procedure and the error
handling block attempting to invoke DB Alert Expert's procedure for
email notification in case of a job error and on successful job
completions.
Disable/Enable button
This control can be used to toggle enabled state of a pending job. The
action applies to the currently selected job in the Scheduled Jobs
-183-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
grid.
Tips:
•
You can use this button temporarily disable jobs in order to
prevent their running. You can enable jobs when it is
necessary to you or delete them if you don't need them
anymore.
•
Disabling already running jobs does not stop them. Use the
Kill button instead and then disable them.
Delete button
Use this button to delete a pending job. This button cannot be used to
stop a running job. The action applies to the currently selected job in
the Scheduled Jobs grid.
Kill button
Use this button to kill the database session of the running job. The
action applies to the currently selected job in the Scheduled Jobs
grid.
Important Notes: Killing a job is a dangerous operation which
should be used as a last resort only. Killing a job will leave you with an
incomplete object and/or space reorganization changes and also
possible leave in the database a bunch of intermediate procedures
generated by DB Space Expert for the reorganization job.
Close button
This button simply closes the dialog. Closing the dialog does not affect
any scheduled jobs.
Reports
Tablespace Space Usage
This report displays printable graph of tablespace free and used space allocation and other important
tablespace statistics.
Database Files
This report displays all database files and their properties
Object Summary
This report displays summary counts for different types of database objects.
Fragmentation
This reports displays all fragmented database objects that have four or more extents. For your convenience,
the report data is grouped:
•
Group by scheme
•
Subgroup by object (segment)
-184-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Tablespace Trends
This report displays various trend graphs and data for a given tablespace. Most interesting are space
allocation and fragmentation trending graphs that can provide with a clear idea of were your tablespaces are
heading and help you with planning your future space requirements as well as help you to predict future
problems proactively.
Important Notes: This report uses historical trend data collected by the DB Trends Expert component.
The DB Trends weekly statistics collection job must be setup in the database and running for at least a few
weeks before you can obtain any meaningful trend information.
Database Trends
This report displays various trend graphs and data for the entire database. Most interesting are space
allocation and fragmentation trending graphs that can provide with a clear idea of were your database is
heading and help you with planning your future space requirements as well as help you to predict future
problems proactively.
Important Notes: This report uses historical trend data collected by the DB Trends Expert component.
The DB Trends weekly statistics collection job must be setup in the database and running for at least a few
weeks before you can obtain any meaningful trend information.
-185-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Consumer Expert
Overview
DB Consumer Expert is a one-stop solution for managing your Oracle database users, security settings,
database resource quotas and resource usage and priority plans.
It provides easy to use graphical interface to the Oracle Database Resource Manager that allows Oracle
DBA to manage database server resources effectively. Resources can be managed and distributed
differently to different users and user groups as well as they can be adjusted differently during different
resource-demand periods.
DB Consumer Expert also extends Oracle's native resource usage functions found in the Database
Resource Manager with custom extensions that greatly expand the resource usage scheduling options.
In additional it provides a large set of analytical reports for exploring database usage patterns and trends by
database users and database applications. Using these reports you can easily pinpoint who is consuming
most of your database resources and which applications are used. You can then use the available DB
Consumer Expert's resource management functions to adjust database resource quotas and priories thus
ensuring that most critical business applications get what they need while other applications continue to
operate with acceptable response time levels.
Important Note: Resource-management parts of DB Consumer Expert require Oracle database version
8i or later. User, Role, Space Quota, Security management parts can be used with any Oracle database
version 7.3 and up.
For your information:
Oracle Database Resource Manager is an obscure tool that became available in Oracle 8i. However, it
received little attention because the resource management interface requires deep knowledge of the Oracle
database and complex instructions for interacting with the Database Resource Manager. Normally adding a
simple directive to an existing resource usage plan requires executing a number of stored procedures, which
can be hardly done without any programming. DB Consumer Expert closes that gap by providing simple and
easy to use graphical interface where all functions can be performed with just a few mouse clicks.
Oracle Database Resource Manager consists of 3 basic components:
Resource Consumer Groups - A resource consumer group is a collection of users with similar requirements
for resource consumption. Users can be assigned to more than one resource consumer group, but each
user's active session can only be assigned to one resource consumer group at a time. For example, different
consumer groups can be setup for OLTP users, for DSS users and for ad hoc queries.
Resource Plans - A resource plan describes the resources allocated to one or more resource consumer
group(s). For example, the amount of CPU utilization permitted for a group of users, the total amount of
undo space allowed for the use by the entire group, and so on.
Resource Plan Directives - Resource plan directives allocate resources among the resource consumer
groups in the resource plan. Essentially, directives connect resource consumer groups to their resource
plans. Resource plan directives use resource allocation methods to determine how the Database Resource
Manager will allocate resources to a resource consumer group or resource plan.
Managing Database Users
To start the User Manager click Manage/Manage Users menu or click the Users
application toolbar. The User Manager dialog will appear.
button on the
-186-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The User Manager dialog consists of 2 parts: The left hand side is used to list all database users and their
properties in a single table-like list. The right hand side is used to display and edit user properties assign
roles and assign various system-level and object-level privileges. The settings and properties displayed on
the right hand side are associated with the user whose name is selected in the user list on the left hand side.
You can use standard DB Tools list sorting options to rearrange how user names or properties appear in the
list. For more information about supported sorting options read the Sorting topic.
User Properties
Different Oracle database versions support different sets of user properties. On the General tab page DB
Consumer Expert displays only options supported in the database you are connected to.
User – Specify Oracle user account name.
Lock Date – Date and time when the user account was created. This property is automatic and cannot be
changed.
Password – Specify user password. Use this property when creating Oracle users identified locally by the
database, in other words, to indicate that the user must specify password to log on to the database
External Name – Specify External Name to create an external user. Such a user must be authenticated by
an external service, such as an operating system or a third-party service. In this case, Oracle database
relies on the login authentication of the operating system to ensure that a specific operating system user has
access to a specific database user.
Important Note: Oracle strongly recommends that you do not use external authentication with
operating systems that have inherently weak login security. For more information, see Oracle
Database Administrator's Guide.
Default Tablespace – Specify the default tablespace for objects that the user creates. If you omit this
property, then the user's objects are stored in the database default tablespace. If no default tablespace has
been specified for the database, then the user's objects are stored in the SYSTEM tablespace.
-187-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Restrictions: You cannot specify a locally managed tablespace, including an undo tablespace,
or a dictionary-managed temporary tablespace as a user's default tablespace.
Temporary Tablespace – Specify the tablespace for the user's temporary segments. If you omit this
property, then the user's temporary segments are stored in the database default temporary tablespace or, if
none has been specified, in the SYSTEM tablespace.
Restrictions: The specified tablespace must be a temporary tablespace and must have a
standard block size. The tablespace cannot be an undo tablespace or a tablespace with automatic
segment-space management
Account Status – Specify user account status, one of the following:
• OPEN – user account is active and enabled
• LOCKED – user account is inactive and disabled.
• EXPIRED – user account is enabled but the password is expired; user must change his/her
password on the next logon to the database
• EXPIRED & LOCKED – user account is inactive and disabled; in addition user password is
expired. If the account status later changes to OPEN the password expiry status remains in
affect.
Expiry Date – Date and time when the user password expired last time (expired accounts) or will expire
(open accounts).
Lock Date – Date and time when the user account was locked last time. This property is automatic and
cannot be changed.
Profile – Specify the default profile you want to assign to the user. The profile limits the amount of database
resources the user can use. If you omit this property, then Oracle database assigns the DEFAULT profile to
the user.
Consumer Group – Specify the default consumer group you want to assign to the user. If Oracle Database
Resource Manager is not activated this property has no effect.
See your Oracle documentation for additional information about user account properties and how to use
them.
Enabling and Disabling User Accounts
You can use the General page to change user account status. Select LOCKED or EXPIRED & LOCKED
status from Account Status drop-down list to disable the user account. Select OPEN status to re-enable the
user account. When you click the Apply button all of your changes including changes on other pages are
applied at once.
Forcing Users to Change Their Passwords
You can use the General page to change user account status. Select EXPIRED status from Account
Status drop-down list to expire user password. When you click the Apply button all of your changes
including changes on other pages are applied at once.
Granting and Revoking Roles
The Roles tab page on the User Manager dialog can be used to control which roles are assigned to the
selected user.
-188-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many roles as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including changes on other pages are applied at once.
To grant a role to the selected user place a checkmark in the left-most column. To revoke a role from the
selected user, clear the corresponding checkmark.
Checking the Admin Option box enables the user to grant this role to someone else. Checking the Default
Role option instructs Oracle to automatically give the selected user access to the role during on connect
even if the role is password-protected and normally requires the user to executing SET ROLE command in
order to enable such role for the current session.
The total field shows how many roles are checked on the screen.
Granting and Revoking Consumer Groups
The Groups tab page on the User Manager dialog can be used to control which consumer groups are
enabled for the selected user, in other words which groups are granted to the selected user.
-189-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many groups as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including changes on other pages are applied at once.
To grant a group to the selected user place a checkmark in the left-most column. To revoke a group from the
selected user, clear the corresponding checkmark.
Tip: An assigning consumer group to a user is not the same as using it. It simply grants the user
privileges to switch to and use the assigned group whenever that user wants. Keep in mind that every
database session can be switched to only one consumer group at a time. Yet there exists a number of
reasons why may want to assign multiple groups to a single user. For example, you may want to allow the
user (or database applications running under that user account) to switch to different groups and to use
different resource usage plans during different times, use "LOW" usage plans for daily report processing and
as opposite use "HIGH" usage plans for other mission critical business processing.
The total field shows how many groups are checked on the screen.
Granting and Revoking System Privileges
The System Privileges tab page on the User Manager dialog can be used to control which system
privileges are enabled for the selected user, in other words which privileges are granted to the selected user.
-190-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many privileges as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including changes on other pages are applied at once.
For your convenience all system privileged are grouped and sorted by category and comments explaining
each privilege displayed in the right-most column.
To grant a privilege to the selected user place a checkmark in the left-most column. To revoke a privilege
from the selected user, clear the corresponding checkmark.
The total field shows how many privileges are checked on the screen.
Granting and Revoking Object Privileges
The Object Privileges tab page on the User Manager dialog can be used to control which database object
access privileges are enabled for the selected user, in other words which privileges are granted to the
selected user.
-191-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many privileges as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including changes on other pages are applied at once.
The Object Privileges tab page is split into 2 logically separate parts. The top part - Select Objects and
Privileges is used to grant new privileges. The bottom part - Granted Privileges displays all object-level
privileges that have been already granted to the selected user and it can be also used to revoke these
privileges.
To grant a privilege to the selected user:
1.
Select object's owner name (schema name) in the Owner drop-down list. DB Consumer Expert will
populate the Objects list will all grantable objects in specified schema name.
2.
Select the object you want to grant to the user in the Objects list. If you select a table or view DB
Consumer Expert will populate the Table/View Columns list displayed on the right hand side with
names of all columns available in the selected object. It will also enabled/disable "grant" buttons
displayed in the middle of the screen accordingly to what privileges can be granted for the selected
object type.
3.
if necessary check the Admin Option box. Checking the Admin Option box enables the user to grant
the given privilege to someone else.
4.
Click the appropriate "grant" buttons (SELECT, INSERT, and so on) to grant specific privileges to the
user. These privileges will be automatically appended to the end of the Granted Privileges grid. In
case if you made a mistake simple uncheck the left-most column in the grid for the wrong privilege.
For UPDATE, INSERT and REFERENCES operations if required you can restrict user's access to
specific table/view columns only. Select all required columns in the column list then click UPDATE or
INSERT or REFERENCES button once. To select multiple columns hold down the CTRL key while
clicking on column names. DB Consumer Expert grants all-columns access to the user when no
columns are selected in the column list.
To revoke a privilege from the selected user, clear the corresponding checkmark on the Granted Privileges
grid.
-192-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Creating New Database Users
1.
Open User Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Users menu.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Fill in new user properties on the General tab page.
4.
Enter additional options and grant permissions using other tab pages. For detailed information on how
to use other tab pages read previous topics in this chapter.
5.
Click the Apply button to save changes.
Tip: After you have the new user created use Space Usage Quotas and Resource Usage Quotas tools
to complete the user setup.
Deleting Database Users
1.
Open User Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Users menu.
2.
On the left hand side of the dialog select name of the user you want to delete.
3.
Click the Drop button. The Confirm Delete message will appear. Click the YES button if you are sure
that the right user is chosen for deletion.
Important Note: DB Consumer Expert will automatically delete all user objects associated with the user
schema as well as drop all referential constraints if there are any. This operation cannot be undone without
restoring the user account, objects and data from a database backup.
Managing Database Roles
To start the Role Manager click Manage/Manage Roles menu or click the Roles
application toolbar. The Role Manager dialog will appear.
button on the
-193-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The Role Manager dialog consists of 2 parts: The left hand side is used to list all database roles and their
properties in a single table-like list. The right hand side is used to display and edit role properties assign
roles to users and also assign various system-level and object-level privileges to roles. The settings and
properties displayed on the right hand side are associated with the role whose name is selected in the role
list on the left hand side.
You can use standard DB Tools list sorting options to rearrange how user names or properties appear in the
list. For more information about supported sorting options read the Sorting topic.
Role Properties
Different Oracle database versions support different sets of role properties. On the General tab page DB
Consumer Expert displays only options supported in the database you are connected to.
Role – Specify role name.
Password Authentication – Use these options to specify role password authentication.
Not Required – Choose this option to indicate that this role is authorized by the database and that
no password is required to enable the role.
Identified by Password – Choose this option to create a local role and indicate that the user must
specify the password to the database when enabling the role. The password can contain only
single-byte characters from your database character set regardless of whether this character set
also contains multi-byte characters.
Identified Externally – Choose this option to indicate that a user must be authenticated by an
external service and then the user must use SET ROLE statement in order to enable this role.
Identified Globally – Choose this option to indicate that a user must be authenticated by a global
enterprise directory service and then the user must use SET ROLE statement in order to enable
this role.
-194-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
See your Oracle documentation for more information about role properties and how to use them.
Granting and Revoking Roles to Users
The Users tab page on the Role Manager dialog can be used to control which users have been granted the
selected role. This page is similar in functionality to the Granting and Revoking Roles page on the User
Manager dialog, it is just features the opposite view of "Users granted the selected role" vs. "Roles granted
to the selected user." Read Granting and Revoking Roles topic for instructions on how to use this screen.
Granting and Revoking Roles to Roles
The Roles tab page on the Role Manager dialog can be used to control which roles in effect have been
granted the selected role. This page is similar in functionality to the Granting and Revoking Roles page on
the User Manager dialog. Read Granting and Revoking Roles topic for instructions on how to use this
screen.
Granting and Revoking Consumer Groups
The Groups tab page on the Role Manager dialog can be used to control which consumer groups are
enabled for the selected role, in other words which groups are granted to the selected role.
This page is similar in functionality to the Granting and Revoking Consumer Groups page on the User
Manager dialog." Read Granting and Revoking Consume Groups topic for instructions on how to use this
screen.
Tips: An assigning of consumer group to a role is not the same as using it. It simply grants a
privilege to switch to and use the assigned group whenever a user wants. Keep in mind that every
database session can be switched to only one consumer group at a time. Yet there exists a number
of reasons why may want to assign multiple groups to a single user. For example, you may want to
allow the user (or database applications running under that user account) to switch to different
groups and to use different resource usage plans during different times, use "LOW" usage plans for
daily report processing and as opposite use "HIGH" usage plans for other mission critical business
processing.
Granting and Revoking System Privileges
The System Privileges tab page on the Role Manager dialog can be used to control which system
privileges are enabled for the selected role, in other words which privileges are granted to the selected role.
This page is similar in functionality to the Granting and Revoking System Privileges page on the User
Manager dialog." Read Granting and Revoking System Privileges topic for instructions on how to use this
screen.
Granting and Revoking Object Privileges
The Object Privileges tab page on the Role Manager dialog can be used to control which object-level
privileges are enabled for the selected role, in other words which privileges are granted to the selected role.
-195-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This page is similar in functionality to the Granting and Revoking Object Privileges page on the User
Manager dialog." Read Granting and Revoking Object Privileges topic for instructions on how to use this
screen.
Creating New Database Roles
1.
Open Role Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Roles menu.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Fill in new role properties on the General tab page.
4.
Enter additional options and grant permissions using other tab pages. For detailed information on how
to use other tab pages read previous topics in this chapter.
5.
Click the Apply button to save changes.
Deleting Database Roles
1.
Open Role Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Roles menu.
2.
On the left hand side of the dialog select name of the role you want to delete.
3.
Click the Drop button. The Confirm Delete message will appear. Click the YES button if you are sure
that the right role is chosen for deletion.
Important Note: All database users who have been assigned this role will automatically loose all
privileges associated with this role.
Managing Database Profiles
To start the Profile Manager click Manage/Manage Profiles menu or click the Profiles
application toolbar. The Profile Manager dialog will appear.
button on the
-196-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The Profile Manager dialog consists of 2 parts: The list box on the left hand side lists all database profiles.
The right hand side of the dialog screen is used to display and edit profile properties and also used to assign
profiles to users. The settings and properties displayed on the right hand side are associated with the profile
whose name is selected in the profile list on the left hand side.
You can use standard DB Tools list sorting options to rearrange how profile names appear in the list. For
more information about supported sorting options read the Sorting topic.
Tips:
•
Only security related settings are displayed in profile properties. To manage resource usagerelated properties use Resource Usage Quotas dialog.
•
Different profile properties are supported in different Oracle versions. DB Consumer Expert
displays only properties supported in the database you are connected to.
•
Consult your Oracle documentation for detailed information about supported profile properties and
their values.
Profile Properties
Database Security
FAILED_LOGIN_ATTEMPTS - Specify the number of failed attempts to log in to the user account
before the account is locked.
-197-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Password Security
Parameters that set lengths of time are interpreted in number of days. For testing purposes you can
specify minutes or even seconds as a decimal number. For example, to specify 5 minutes enter
0.003472 (this value was calculated 1/24/60*5).
PASSWORD_LIFE_TIME- Specify the number of days the same password can be used for
authentication. If you also set a value for PASSWORD_GRACE_TIME, the password expires if it is
not changed within the grace period, and further connections are rejected. If you do not set a value
for PASSWORD_GRACE_TIME, its default of UNLIMITED will cause the database to issue a
warning but let the user continue to connect indefinitely.
ASSWORD_REUSE_TIME and PASSWORD_REUSE_MAX - These two parameters must be set
in conjunction with each other. PASSWORD_REUSE_TIME specifies the number of days before
which a password cannot be reused. PASSWORD_REUSE_MAX specifies the number of
password changes required before the current password can be reused. For these parameter to
have any effect, you must specify an integer for both of them.
If you specify an integer for both of these parameters, then the user cannot reuse a password until
the password has been changed the password the number of times specified for
PASSWORD_REUSE_MAX during the number of days specified for PASSWORD_REUSE_TIME.
For example, if you specify PASSWORD_REUSE_TIME to 30 and PASSWORD_REUSE_MAX to
10, then the user can reuse the password after 30 days if the password has already been changed
10 times.
If you specify an integer for either of these parameters and specify UNLIMITED for the other, then
the user can never reuse a password.
If you specify DEFAULT for either parameter, then Oracle Database uses the value defined in the
DEFAULT profile. By default, all parameters are set to UNLIMITED in the DEFAULT profile. If you
have not changed the default setting of UNLIMITED in the DEFAULT profile, then the database
treats the value for that parameter as UNLIMITED.
If you set both of these parameters to UNLIMITED, then the database ignores both of them.
PASSWORD_LOCK_TIME - Specify the number of days an account will be locked after the
specified number of consecutive failed login attempts.
PASSWORD_GRACE_TIME - Specify the number of days after the grace period begins during
which a warning is issued and login is allowed. If the password is not changed during the grace
period, the password expires.
PASSWORD_VERIFY_FUNCTION - Specify the name of the password complexity verification
routine. Oracle database provides a default script, but you can create your own routine instead.
Specify NULL to indicate that no password verification is performed.
Tip: PASSWORD_VERIFY_FUNCTION is only used to verify password
complexity at the time of the user account creation or password change. It is NOT USED
for the user authentication at the time of user logon to the database.
Working with Profiles
To modify an existing profile:
1.
Start the Profile Manager.
2.
Select the required profile in the profile list.
3.
On the General tab page modify profile properties as needed
4.
On the Users tab page modify user assignments as needed.
-198-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many users as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including all changes on General page are applied at once.
5.
To assign a user to the selected profile place a checkmark in the left-most column. To undo the
assignement clear the corresponding checkmark.
Note: User is automatically reverted to the DEFAULT profile if the previous profile assignment is
cleared.
6.
Click the Apply button to save changes.
To delete an existing profile:
1.
Start the Profile Manager.
2.
In the profile list select name of the profile you want to delete.
3.
Click the Drop button. The Confirm Delete message will appear. Click the YES button if you are sure
that the right profile is chosen for deletion.
Important Note: The DEFAULT profile may not be deleted!
To create a new profile:
1.
Start the Profile Manager.
2.
Click the New button
3.
On the General tab page modify profile properties as needed.
4.
On the Users tab page assign users to the new profile as needed.
5.
Click the Apply button to save changes.
-199-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Managing Space Usage Quotas
To view or modify user space quotas, click Manage/Edit Space Usage Quotas menu or click the Space
Quota
button on the application toolbar. The Tablespace Quotas dialog will appear.
This dialog consists of two tab pages each providing a different view to the current database configuration:
• The first tab page Space Quotas by User displays space quotas grouped by user, in other words,
for every user it shows all granted tablespaces and space quotas.
• The second tab page Space Quotas by Tablespace displays space quotas grouped by
tablespace name, in other words, for every tablespace it shows all users who has been granted
space in the tablespace space and their quotas.
You can modify settings using either By User or By Tablespace view, whichever is find more convenient to
you. The end-results should be the same.
To modify an existing user space quota:
1.
Activate Space Quotas by User tab page.
2.
Click on the user whose tablespace quotas you want to modify in the left hand side tree-view
3.
On the right hand side of the screen in the table-like grid control modify existing quotas.
or
button on any existing line. A new row will appear above
To add another tablespace click the Insert
the clicked button. In the Tablespace Name column select required tablespace name in the drop-down
list. Enter the required quota in the Space Quota column. The quota must be either a valid number or
one of the following values: [DEFAULT], [UNLIMITED].
or
To completely revoke an existing tablespace quota use the Delete
whose quota you want to revoke from the user.
button on the tablespace line
-200-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Tip: The UNLIMITED quota means to Oracle that the user can allocate as much space as much
free space is available in the tablespace. If the tablespace files have AUTOEXTENT option turned on
and the user requests more space then available Oracle automatically increases size of tablespace files
to accommodate the new space requirements. The DEFAULT quota means to Oracle that the database
server can decide how much space it can make available to the user.
4.
Click the Apply button to save all changes.
Managing Resource Usage Quotas
To view or modify user resource quotas click Manage/Edit Resource Usage Quotas menu or click the
Resource Quota
button on the application toolbar. The Resource Quotas dialog will appear.
-201-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This dialog consists of several parts:
•
The left top part contains table-like grid control listing all database users, their database profiles
and profile resource usage limits.
•
The left bottom part shows resource usage comparison chart for all database users. The chart
changes according to the tab page selection on the right hand side of the dialog. In case if the
Connect & Idle Time tab is selected then the chart shows comparison between actual user
session timing statistics and configured user session time limits; in case if the Input/Output (I/O)
Limits tab is selected then the chart changes to show comparison between actual user I/O
statistics and configured I/O limits; and so on.
Tip: Use Actual vs. Limits comparison charts to make intelligent decisions on which resource
usage limits needs to be set for different database users and what would be their optimal values.
Important Note: The "actual usage" statistics are collected by the background statistics
collection package APP_MONITOR, which is part of DB Application Monitor. You will not be able to
use the resource usage comparison charts if the mentioned package is not installed in the
database or the background statistics collection job is not running.
•
The right hand side of the dialog contains 6 different tables that can be used to setup different
types of resource limits. These 6 tabs are described in detail in following paragraphs.
You can use standard DB Tools list sorting options to rearrange how user names or profile properties
appear in the list. For more information about supported sorting options read the Sorting topic.
-202-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Working with Resource Quotas and Profiles
The left top part of the Resource Quotas dialog lists all database users, their database profiles and profile
resource usage limits. Changes you make on the Resource Quotas dialog apply to the selected profile and
not directly to the selected user. Because multiple users can be assigned the same database profile your
changes made for a single profile can indirectly affect multiple users. To make it convenient for you to setup
different resource usage limits for different users, without first creating a bunch of different profiles and
assigning them to database users, the Resource Quotas dialog exposes 2 different methods for applying
profile changes. Use the Update Profile button to save changes in the selected profile affecting all users
assigned to that profile. Use the Personalize button to save changes as a brand new profile and
automatically assign this new profile to the selected user only. In the last case DB Consumer Express
automatically generates unique profile name in the USERNAME_nnn format, where USERNAME prefix is
replaced with the selected user name and nnn suffix is replaced with a unique number.
You can use the Profile Manager tool to delete outdated profiles and change user/profile assignment
Resource Usage Limits
You can use 3 types of values for resource usage limits:
1. UNLIMITED - When specified with a resource parameter, UNLIMITED indicates that a user
assigned the selected profile can use an unlimited amount of this resource.
2. DEFAULT - Specify DEFAULT if you want to omit a limit for this resource in this profile. A user
assigned this profile is subject to the limit for this resource specified in the DEFAULT profile.
The DEFAULT profile initially defines unlimited resources but you can change them if required.
3. A numeric value – Specify a number to indicate the maximum amount of this resource
allowed for users assigned the selected profile.
Connect & Idle Time Limits
Maximum Connect Time - Specify the total elapsed time limit for a session, expressed in minutes.
Maximum Idle Time - Specify the permitted periods of continuous inactive time during a session,
expressed in minutes.
Important Note: Long-running queries and other operations are not subject to this
limit.
CPU Usage Limits
Maximum CPU Time (Per Session) - Specify the CPU time limit for a session, expressed in
seconds.
Maximum CPU Time (Per Call) - Specify the CPU time limit for a call (a parse, execute, or fetch
operation), expressed in seconds.
Maximum Concurrent Sessions - Specify the number of concurrent sessions to which you want
to limit the users assigned the selected profile
Input/Output Limits
Maximum I/O (Per Session) - Specify the permitted number of Mbytes read in a session, including
data read from memory and disk.
Maximum I/O (Per Call) - Specify the permitted number of Mbytes read for a call to process a SQL
statement (a parse, execute, or fetch).
-203-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Tip: Oracle database internally stores values of I/O limits expressed in the number of database
blocks. DB Consumer Expert uses your database default block size to convert I/O limits from the
number of data blocks to Mbytes.
Memory Usage Limits
Maximum Session Private Memory in SGA - Specify the amount of private space a session can
allocate in the shared pool of the system global area (SGA), expressed in Kbytes.
Tip: This limit applies only if you are using shared server architecture. The private space for a
session in the SGA includes private SQL and PL/SQL areas, but not shared SQL and PL/SQL
areas.
Composite LimitsError! Bookmark not defined.Error! Bookmark not defined.Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Total resource cost - Specify the total resource cost for a session, expressed in service units.
Oracle calculates the total service units as a weighted sum of CPU_PER_SESSION,
CONNECT_TIME, LOGICAL_READS_PER_SESSION, and PRIVATE_SGA.
Important Notes:
•
Initially weights for all resources are set to 0. Until you modify the initial setup the
Composite Limits will not work. To modify resource weights click Modify Unit Weights
button that will open up the Composite Cost Limit Formula dialog.
Use this dialog to specify new resource weights.
-204-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
•
To exclude any particular resource type from the composite formula, enter 0 for that type.
For example, if you assign a weight of 0 to the Connect Time resource, this resource no
longer will affect the composite limit.
•
To disable the composite formula completely, enter zeroes for all resource types.
•
Weights of units entered in the Composite Cost Limit Formula apply to all database
profiles having composite resource limit set to a value other then UNLIMITED. Oracle
currently does not support using different formulas with different profiles.
Resource Usage Plans
Default Consumer Group - Specify the default consumer group you want to assign to the selected
profile. All users assigned to this profile who have not been explicitly assigned a default consumer
group will be affected by this change.
Tips:
•
Resource usage limits set in profile properties affect all users assigned to the selected
profile individually. Resource usage limits set for a consumer group affect all users as a
group. That's it. All active users of a consumer group are subject to the collective limits set
for that group.
•
Use Consumer Group Manager and Resource Plan Manager tools to mange consumer
groups and resource usage plans in the database.
Managing Consumer Groups
The Consumer Group Manager is only supported with Oracle 8i and up. Also note the Consumer Group
Manager supports some options for Oracle 10g that are not available for Oracle 8i and 9i.
To start the Consumer Group Manager click Manage/Consumer Groups menu or click the Groups
button on the application toolbar. The Consumer Group Manager dialog will appear.
-205-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The Consumer Group Manager dialog consists of 2 parts: The left hand side is used to list all consumer
groups and their properties in a single table-like list. The right hand side is used to display and edit group
properties and user mapping settings. The settings and properties displayed on the right hand side are
associated with the consumer group whose name is selected in the list on the left hand side.
You can use standard DB Tools list sorting options to rearrange how consumer group names or properties
appear in the list. For more information about supported sorting options read the Sorting topic.
Consumer Group Properties
Consumer Group – Name of the consumer group
Active – Group status, either ACTIVE or PENDING. Normally the status should display ACTIVE all the time.
You can encounter another status when somebody is trying to manipulate resource groups or plans
manually by executing individual SQL commands in the database and the current setup is incomplete.
Comments – Description of the consumer group.
CPU Allocation Method– The allocation method for distributing CPU among sessions in the consumer
group:
•
The default is ROUND_ROBIN method, which uses a round-robin scheduler to ensure that
sessions are fairly executed.
•
RUN_TO_COMPLETION method specifies that sessions with the largest active time are scheduled
ahead of other sessions. This method is not available in Oracle 8i and 9i.
Assigning Users and Sessions to Consumer Groups
Resource consumer groups are groups of users, or sessions, that are grouped together based on their
processing needs. Users can be assigned to more than one resource consumer group, but each user's
-206-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
session can only be assigned to one resource consumer group at a time. For example, different consumer
groups can be setup for OLTP users, for DSS users and for ad hoc queries. The same user can switch to
different groups when running different database applications.
By default all users are assigned to the DEFAULT_CONSUMER_GROUP consumer group. Based on your
requirements you can statically assign your users to specific groups using user name as a mapping method.
For more information on static assignment methods see the following Static Assignment topic. You can also
dynamically assign user sessions to different consumer groups based on some other parameters, for
example, using application name or network user name as a mapping method. This way you can have the
same user JOHN dynamically assigned to consumer group OLTP_USERS when John runs his daily
transaction aggregation procedures and have him dynamically assigned to consumer group
DECISION_SUPPORT when John runs his end-of-day summary reports. For more information on dynamic
assignment methods see the following Dynamic Assignment topic.
Static Assignments
To have the same consumer group assigned to all database sessions for the same user, use the static
assignment method. This method requires 2 simple steps: granting to the user "switch" privilege for the
consumer group and then setting that consumer group as the user's initial consumer group. Here is how you
can do that using the Consumer Group Manager tool.
1.
On the Consumer Group Manager screen activate Static User Mapping tab page.
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many users as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including changes on other pages are applied at once.
2.
Grant users the privilege to use the selected consumer group. To grant user such privilege, place a
checkmark in the left-most column. To revoke that privilege, clear the corresponding checkmark.
-207-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Checking the Grant Option box enables the selected user to grant this consumer group to someone
else.
3.
Check the Initial Group box to statically assign a user to the selected group.
Tip: This option instructs Oracle to automatically treat all sessions for selected user as members of
the selected consumer group.
Note: The total field shows how many users are checked on the screen.
Dynamic Assignments
Resource consumer groups are groups of users, or sessions, that are grouped together based on their
processing needs. Because some users can run multiple database applications with different processing
needs you may want in different situations assign different groups to same user based on the name of the
running application or some other parameters. This is called dynamic group assignment. The Database
Resource Manager in Oracle 10g and up provides built-in native functions for dynamic session assignment.
In Oracle 8i and 9i such functions don't exist that's why for Oracle 8i and 9i DB Consumer Expert provides
an alternative solution using ON LOGON database triggers to dynamically switching consumer groups for
new database sessions.
Tip: This type of consumer group switching is completely dynamic and pertains to current sessions only;
it is not persistent and also does not change the initial consumer groups for users.
Here is how you can use the Consumer Group Manager tool to configure both methods:
1.
On the Consumer Group Manager screen activate Dynamic User Mapping tab page.
-208-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
If you are running Oracle 10g or later use the top port of the screen labeled Oracle 10g and up.
Although you can use the 8i/9i compatible method with Oracle 10g databases you should probably stick
with the native method, as there are no advantages in using the other.
If you are running Oracle 8i or 9i use the bottom part of the screen labeled Oracle 8i/9i and up
2.
Click the Insert
3.
In the Session Attribute column select the type of session attribute you want to use for matching
database sessions to the selected consumer group.
4.
In the Value column type the attribute value or alternatively click the Lookup
currently active database sessions and pick up a value from the Lookup list.
button to add a new line to the mapping table.
button to browse
Tip: DB Consumer Expert displays different lookup lists for different attribute types. If, for example,
you choose Program Name for the attribute type, DB Consumer Expert will display a list of all programs
currently connected to the database. To make sure the program you are looking for does appear in the
Lookup list ask somebody to run it for you while you are setting up the dynamic session assignment.
5.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other attributes or values. Use the Delete
assignments.
button to delete unnecessary
Important Note: It is highly recommended that in Oracle 8i and 9i you grant the "switch" privilege for all
"dynamic" consumer groups to PUBLIC in order to avoid a situation when a new session gets switched to a
consumer group for which the session user doesn't have the switch privilege. Such session would then miss
the required consumer group.
Creating New Consumer Groups
1.
Open Consumer Group Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Consumer Groups menu.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Fill in new group properties on the General tab page.
4.
Enter additional options and setup user/group assignments using other tab pages. For detailed
information on how to use other tab pages read previous topics in this chapter.
5.
Click the Apply button to save changes.
Deleting Consumer Groups
1.
Open Consumer Group Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Consumer Groups menu.
2.
On the left hand side of the dialog select name of the consumer group you want to delete.
3.
Click the Drop button. The Confirm Delete message will appear. Click the YES button if you are sure
that the right group is chosen for deletion.
Important Notes:
•
Any existing user that has the deleted group set as the default group will be automatically
reassigned to the DEFAULT_CONSUMER_GROUP.
•
Certain consumer groups cannot be deleted. They include
DEFAULT_CONSUMER_GROUP, SYS_GROUP and OTHER_GROUPS.
-209-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Managing Resource Usage Plans
The Resource Plan Manager is only supported with Oracle 8i and up. Also note the Resource Usage Plan
Manager supports some options for Oracle 10g that are not available for Oracle 8i and 9i.
To start the Resource Usage Plan Manager click Manage/Resource Plans menu or click the Plans
button on the application toolbar. The Resource Plan Manager dialog will appear.
The Resource Plan Manager dialog consists of 2 parts: The left hand side is used to list all resource usage
plans and their properties in a single table-like list. The right hand side is used to display and edit plan
properties and consumer group assignments. The settings and properties displayed on the right hand side
are associated with the resource usage plan whose name is selected in the list on the left hand side.
You can use standard DB Tools list sorting options to rearrange how consumer group names or properties
appear in the list. For more information about supported sorting options read the Sorting topic.
Resource Plan Properties
Resource Plan – Name of the resource usage plan.
Active – Plan status, either ACTIVE or PENDING. Normally the status should display ACTIVE all the time.
You can encounter another status when somebody is trying to manipulate resource groups or plans
manually by executing individual SQL commands in the database and the current setup is incomplete.
Comments – Description of the resource plan.
CPU Allocation Method – The allocation method for distributing CPU among consumer groups.
-210-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Tip: Do not confuse this property with the CPU allocation method within consumer groups. CPU
allocation method within consumer group controls in which order database sessions get CPU time,
while CPU allocation method for the plan controls how much of a share of total CPU time is given to
different consumer groups. These shares are often called "service levels." Eight (8) levels are supported
by the Oracle Database Resource Manager and their numbering ranges from 1 (highest level) to 8
(lowest level). Consumer groups assigned to levels with higher numbers get more CPU time then
groups assigned to lower levels. Multiple consumer groups can be assigned to the same or different
level as well as one consumer group can be assigned to multiple levels in the same plan.
For example, if both consumer groups A and B are assigned to level 2 they will get equal share of CPU
time, however if group A consists of 2 database sessions and group B consists of 10 database sessions
and both groups use the same ROUND-ROBIN method for CPU allocation between sessions then
obviously each session in group A will get 5 times more CPU then any session in group B
•
The default is EMPHASIS method, which should be used for multilevel plans that use percentages
to specify how CPU is distributed among consumer groups.
•
RATIO is for single-level plans that use ratios to specify how CPU is distributed. This method is not
available in Oracle 8i and 9i.
Active Session Pool Resource Allocation Method – Limits the number of active sessions. All other
sessions are inactive and wait in a queue to be activated. ACTIVE_SESS_POOL_ABSOLUTE is the default
and only method available in Oracle 8i, 9i and 10g.
Degree of Parallelism Allocation Method – Limits the degree of parallelism of any operation.
PARALLEL_DEGREE_LIMIT_ABSOLUTE is the default and only method available in Oracle 8i, 9i and 10g.
Session Queuing Allocation Method – Controls order in which queued inactive sessions will execute.
FIFO_TIMEOUT is the default and only method available.
Top Resource Allocation Plan – Controls which plan is the top plan. Only one top plan exists at any
moment in time. If no top plan is selected the Oracle Database Resource Manager effectively becomes
disabled.
Tip: The Top Resource Allocation Plan property applies to the Database Resource Manager
as a whole rather then to the selected resource plan. This option is displayed together with the
resource plan properties for your convenience only.
Linking Consumer Groups to Resource Plans
Before you can assign consumer groups to different services levels or specify any resource usage limits you
must specify which consumer groups will participate in the resource usage plan. Use the Consumer
Groups tab page available on the Resource Plan Manager dialog to link groups and plans.
-211-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many groups as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including changes on other pages are applied at once.
To link a group to the selected resource plan, place a checkmark in the left-most column. To unlink that
group, clear the corresponding checkmark.
Important Notes: The OTHER_GROUPS consumer group must be linked to every resource plan. This
ensures that a session which is not part of any of the consumer groups included in the currently active plan
is allocated resources (as specified by the OTHER_GROUPS).
Note: The total field shows how many groups are checked on the screen.
Assigning CPU Service Levels to Consumer Groups
Use the CPU Usage by Group tab on the Resource Plan Manager dialog to allocate CPU time to linked
consumer groups. Note that only groups linked to the selected plan appear in the CPU Service Levels
table. To add or remove groups use the Consumer Groups tab page whose usage is described in the
previous topic.
-212-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
For every listed consumer group enter percent of CPU time allocated in the group in one or more service
levels. The number must be between 0 and 100 but the horizontal sum for every group must be a positive
number. Note that each group can be assigned to one or more levels. In case if you are going to assign all
groups to the same level, in other words, use single-level plan, you can then use RATIO for the CPU
allocation method on the General page.
The totals on the bottom of the CPU Service Levels table show total CPU allocation for each level. This
number may not exceed 100%.
After making CPU allocation changes do not forget to click the Apply button to save your changes including
changes on other pages, which are all applied at once.
Example of a single-level CPU allocation plan
Example of a multi-level CPU allocation plan with shared levels
-213-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Limiting Resources Available to Consumer Groups
Use the Advanced Options tab on the Resource Plan Manager dialog if you want to setup advanced
resource allocation limits for each consumer group linked to the selected resource plan. Note that only
groups linked to the selected plan appear in the Advanced Options table. To add or remove groups use the
Consumer Groups tab page whose usage is described in the previous topic.
The complete description of each available parameter is provided directly on the Advanced Options tab
page above the "resource usage limits by group" table.
After setting new resource limits do not forget to click the Apply button to save your changes including
changes on other pages, which are all applied at once.
-214-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Dynamic Switching Between Consumer Groups
Note: Options described in this topic are not available in Oracle 8i and prior.
Database sessions can be dynamically switched between different resource consumer groups in the event
they exceed certain resource limits. For example, instead of killing a session of a user who is using
excessive CPU, the Database Resource Manager can instead change that user's consumer group to one
that is allowed less CPU. This kind of resource-usage based consumer group switching can be enforced
automatically by the Oracle Database Resource Manager.
Do not confuse this type of session switching with the initial dynamic session assignment to
different consumer groups which is based on the session connection properties such as database
program name, network user name, module name, and so on.
Tip: The resource-usage based consumer group switching is completely dynamic and pertains to
current sessions only; it is not persistent and also does not change the initial consumer groups for users.
Use the Group Switching tab on the Resource Plan Manager dialog to setup dynamic upgrades and
downgrades of running user sessions between consumer groups and in the end between service levels.
Note that only groups linked to the selected plan appear in the Advanced Options table. To add or remove
groups use the Consumer Groups tab page whose usage is described in the previous topic.
The complete description of each available parameter and option is provided directly on the Group
Switching tab page above the "group switching rules" table.
After setting new consumer group switching rules do not forget to click the Apply button to save your
changes including changes on other pages, which are all applied at once.
-215-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Note: Cancel SQL and Kill Session options are not available in Oracle 9i.
Time-based Resource Plan Activation
Only one resource usage plan can be active per Oracle database instance at any moment. Because not
always "one size fits all" you may want to activate different plans in different scenarios. For example, you
can define many different resource plans—one for daytime operations, one for nighttime operations, one for
peak time processing and so on.
Use the Plan Timing tab on the Resource Plan Manager dialog to schedule resource plan automatic
switching. Note that at least 2 different plans must be setup with different switch times in order for the plan
switching to work correctly.
The Plan Timing tab page provides limited interface to the DB Job Expert, which allows you schedule
resource usage plan switching with just a few mouse clicks.
Select appropriate schedule type and options and then click the Schedule Job button to schedule a new
job.
To remove previously scheduled job, click the Delete Job button.
Notes:
•
Deleting an existing resource plan switch job only removes that job definition from the job queue. It
does not change the active resource plan and does not delete the affected plan from the database.
•
Job scheduling and deletion have take immediate effect. You do not need to click the Apply button
to apply the schedule. However, if you are scheduling a job for a new plan you must click the Apply
button to save your changes.
-216-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Enabling/Disabling Database Resource Manager
Because only one resource usage plan can be active per Oracle database instance at any moment you can
easily enable and disable the Database Resource Manager by selecting any existing plan as a top plan or
selecting no plans at all. To select /deselect a resource plan use the Top Resource Allocation Plan
checkbox available on the General page of the Resource Plan Manager dialog. See Resource Plan
Properties topic for more information about Top Resource Allocation Plan option.
Important Note: Make sure to delete all automated resource plan switch jobs if your intent is to
completely disable the Database Resource Manager.
Creating New Resource Plans
1.
Open Resource Plan Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Resource Plans menu.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Fill in new plan properties on the General tab page.
4.
Activate Consumer Groups page and choose which groups can participate in the new plan.
5.
Enter additional options and settings using other tab pages. For detailed information on how to use
other tab pages read previous topics in this chapter.
6.
Click the Apply button to save changes.
Deleting Resource Plans
1.
Open Resource Plan Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Resource Plans menu.
2.
On the left hand side of the dialog select name of the resource plan you want to delete.
3.
Click the Drop button. The Confirm Delete message will appear. Click the YES button if you are sure
that the right plan is chosen for deletion.
Important Notes: Certain resource plans cannot be deleted. They include SYSTEM_PLAN and plans
whose name begins with "INTERNAL_" prefix..
Security Navigator
The Security Navigator is a comprehensive utility for exploring Oracle database security. Using that utility
you can get a hierarchical display of security information presented in a convenient, easy understandable
format. You can interactively browse grants made and received by all database users including cascading
and recursive grants received from other users and roles.
Use the Security Navigator to discover security holes in your database.
The Security Navigator window is divided into two parts presented by 2 separate tab pages:
•
The "Users, Grants, Objects" tab
•
The "Roles, Grants" tab
-217-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To start the Security Navigator select Manage/Security Navigator menu or alternatively click the Security
button on the application toolbar.
Navigating
To navigate the Security Navigator use standard tree-view navigation techniques that you use when working
with Windows Explorer and other applications. For quick expanding or collapsing of multiple items use right
mouse button clicks to invoke the popup menu. Use the following commands available in the popup menu to
quickly expand or collapse multiple items:
•
Expand Branch
•
Collapse Branch
•
Expand All
•
Collapse All
Note: Avoid using Expand All command for the entire database if your database is large because
adding all your objects and security settings to the Security Navigator tree-view could take a long time and
the expanded tree could be slow to navigate.
Which items are displayed?
Security Navigator displays only context sensitive items. For example, Security Navigator will display Grants
Made folder for the expanded user only if that user has granted something to other users or roles. When
expanded the Grants Made folder will display all grants made by the mentioned user.
Which items are not displayed?
Security Navigator displays only context sensitive items. For example, Security Navigator will not display
Grants Made folder for the expanded user if that user has granted nothing to other users or roles.
Zooming
You can use zoom feature (select View/Zoom command) to zoom in/out security information. Note that new
zoom will be applied to the active tab.
Printing
You can print information displayed in the Security Navigator tabs by choosing File/Print command (shortcut:
CTRL P). You can preview how it will look when printed by choosing File/Print Preview. Note that print and
print preview commands will be applied to the active tab. See Print topic for information on print and print
preview options.
Reports
DB Consumer Expert provides a large number of resource usage allocation and usage trends reports. Each
report can be viewed and printed from the Report window. Many of these reports are based on the
application performance statistics collected by the Application Monitor package.
The following reports are available:
General
Users
Profiles
-218-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Space Usage by User
Space Usage By User
User Exhausting Space Quota
Resource Usage Summary by User
Top 10 Users by Space Usage
Top 10 Users by CPU Usage
Top 10 Users by Memory Usage
Top 10 Users by Disk I/O
Space and Resource Usage Trends by User
Space Usage Trends
CPU Usage Trends
Memory Usage Trends
I/O Usage Trends
Resource Usage Summary by Application
Top 10 Applications by CPU Usage
Top 10 Applications by Memory Usage
Top 10 Applications by Sorts
Top 10 Applications by Disk I/O
Resource Usage Trends by Application
Application Resource Consumption
Application Performance & Trends
Database Load Balancing
You can use them to analyze database resource usage by applications and users, spot application trends,
tune and troubleshoot applications and consumer groups, tune database resource plans and improve
overalls database resource usage. The group of trend reports can be also used for gathering information
required for proper database capacity planning.
Click on a report name in the list above for more information.
Tips:
•
Most reports use application performance data for application processing analysis. This data is not
available automatically. To allow application performance data collection you must install the back-end
Application Monitor package and job. Do not run summary and trends repots immediately after you
install these back-end components. Wait as long as necessary for each application to run at least 4-5
times. This will allow the Application Monitor to gather sufficient volume of application performance data
for an accurate application analysis. Do not force/trigger applications manually for the purpose of
performance data collection, as it will lead to inaccurate reports. The accuracy of reports is proportional
to the volume of gathered data. Longer you wait, more applications run, and more valuable application
performance data can be gathered.
•
Application performance data is stored in the ORA_MONITOR.APP_STAT table. If for some reasons
you cannot find a pre-built application report that fits your needs, feel free to create your own reports
using the Performance Library tools. For description and usage of Application Monitor repository tables
see source code for the Application Monitor package provided with DB Tools.
Viewing reports:
1
From the Report menu, choose the type of report you want. The report window will appear.
-219-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
2
If the selected report analyses historical performance data, you will be prompted to choose time
interval for the analysis. Select the required interval from the drop-down list and click OK.
3
You can use the Zoom feature to zoom in and out. You can either select one of the predefined
values in the zoom drop-down box or type in the value you want then press the Enter key.
Printing reports:
1
Run report as described above.
2
When the report is ready, click the Print
main menu
toolbar button or select File/Print command from the
Users Report
This reports displays detailed information about all database users and their properties.
Profiles Report
This report displays detailed information about all database profiles, including associated password security
settings and resource usage limits.
Space Usage by User Report
This report shows summary usage statistics for each database user, including actual space usage, user
space quotas by tablespace and percentage of that space used.
Users Exhausting Space Quotas Report
This report shows summary usage statistics for each database user who may soon run out of space. The
report analyses users having 90% or more of their space used. It displays actual space usage by user,
space quotas by tablespace and percentage of that space used.
-220-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Top 10 Users by Space Usage
This report displays summary pie chart for top-10 users by space allocated for various database objects.
You can use this report to identify top 10 users consuming most of the database space.
Top 10 Users by CPU Usage
This report provides several different views focusing on top 10 users whose sessions consumed most CPU
time during the chosen report period. This report is based on statistical analysis of application performance
data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report to identify top 10 CPU consuming users. This information can help you in setting up
consumer groups and dynamic or static session mapping to consumer groups.
This report is similar to Top 10 Applications by CPU Usage report whose data is analyzed and grouped by
application rather then by user name
See Top 10 Applications by CPU Usage topic in the DB Application Expert chapter for more information
about this report and usage instructions.
Top 10 Users by Memory Usage
This report calculates memory usage chart focusing on top 10 users whose sessions consumed most SGA
private memory during the chosen report period. It shows both maximum and average memory usage
numbers. This report is based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the
Application Monitor.
You can use this report to identify top 10 memory consuming users. This information can help you in setting
up consumer groups and dynamic or static session mapping to consumer groups.
This report is similar to Top 10 Applications by Memory Usage report whose data is analyzed and grouped
by application rather then by user name
See Top 10 Applications by Memory Usage topic in the DB Application Expert chapter for more information
about this report and usage instructions.
Top 10 Users by Disk I/O (Input/Output)
This report calculates 2 charts focusing on top 10 users whose sessions caused most I/O during the chosen
report period. This report is based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the
Application Monitor.
You can use this report to identify top 10 resource consuming users. This information can help you in setting
up consumer groups and dynamic or static session mapping to consumer groups.
This report is similar to Top 10 Applications by Disk I/O report whose data is analyzed and grouped by
application rather then by user name
-221-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
See Top 10 Applications by Disk I/O topic in the DB Application Expert chapter for more information about
this report and usage instructions.
Space Usage Trends
This report shows trend line chart for the database space allocation by all users during the selected report
period. This report is based on statistical data collected by DB Trends Expert.
You can use this report to identify database space usage trends and use this information for database
capacity planning.
CPU Usage Trends
This report shows trend chart for the total system load created by all user sessions that ran during the
selected report period and also shows the system load created by individual users. This report is based on
statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report to identify database CPU usage trends and use this information for database
capacity planning.
Memory Usage Trends
This report shows trend chart for the total memory allocations for all user sessions that ran during the
selected report period and also shows the summary memory requirements for individual users. This report is
based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report to identify database memory usage trends and use this information for database
capacity planning.
I/O Usage Trends
This report shows trend chart for the total I/O generated by all user sessions that ran during the selected
report period and also shows the summary I/O numbers generated by individual users. This report is based
on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report to identify database I/O usage trends and use this information for database capacity
planning.
Application Resource Consumption Report
This report shows trend chart for the total system load created by all applications that ran during the
selected report period and also shows the system load created by individual applications. This report is
based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
To identify applications consuming lots of system resources.
2
To evenly distribute your system load between different applications so that the resource intensive
-222-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
applications do not run at the same time. This information can help you in improving the overall system
performance, improving application response times and meeting required service levels.
See Application Resource Consumption Report topic in the DB Application Expert chapter for detailed
description of this report and usage instructions.
Application Performance and Trends Reports
This report presents trend-line charts for top 20 applications whose average run-time duration have changed
during the selected report period. This report is based on statistical analysis of application performance data
collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
Identifying applications whose run-time duration significantly changed from run-to-run during the chosen
report period.
2
Identifying application duration trends (i.e., how quickly the duration changes over time) and thus you
can use this information to forecast future durations.
See Application Performance and Trends Report topic in the DB Application Expert chapter for detailed
description of this report and usage instructions.
Database Load Balancing Report
The Database Load Balancing Report can help you identify time windows of high and low server utilization
and setup new or modify existing applications to run during low utilization times. This report is based on
statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
The report contains two system load charts: the "load by day of week" chart and the "load by time of day"
chart. Both charts display summary database utilization (% of CPU time) for all applications executed during
the chosen report period.
See Database Load Balancing Report topic in the DB Application Expert chapter for detailed description of
this report and usage instructions.
Top 10 Applications by CPU Usage
This report provides several different views focusing on top 10 applications that consumed most CPU time
during the chosen report period. This report is based on statistical analysis of application performance data
collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report to identify top 10 CPU consuming applications. This information can help you in
setting up consumer groups and dynamic or static session mapping to consumer groups.
See Top 10 Applications by CPU Usage topic in the DB Application Expert chapter for detailed description of
this report and usage instructions.
-223-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Top 10 Applications by Memory Usage
This report calculates memory usage chart for applications that ran during the chosen report period. This
report is based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report to identify top 10 memory consuming applications. This information can help you in
setting up consumer groups and dynamic or static session mapping to consumer groups.
See Top 10 Applications by Memory Usage topic in the DB Application Expert chapter for detailed
description of this report and usage instructions.
Top 10 Applications by Sorts
This report calculates 2 charts for applications that have run during the chosen report period. This report is
based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report to identify top 10 resource consuming applications. This information can help you in
setting up consumer groups and dynamic or static session mapping to consumer groups.
See Top 10 Applications by Sorts topic in the DB Application Expert chapter for detailed description of this
report and usage instructions.
Top 10 Applications by Disk I/O (Input/Output)
This report calculates 2 charts for applications that have run during the chosen report period. This report is
based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report to identify top 10 resource consuming applications. This information can help you in
setting up consumer groups and dynamic or static session mapping to consumer groups.
See Top 10 Applications by Disk I/O topic in the DB Application Expert chapter for detailed description of
this report and usage instructions.
-224-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Security Expert
Overview
DB Security Expert provides innovative approach to analyzing and managing database security. Most native
Oracle database utilities and commercial security solutions present database security settings simply as a
bunch of users, roles and their privileged granted directly to them. In really the database security is
interdependent multi-layered system. Actual permissions and access level available to a database user may
be inherited recursively from roles granted to roles, permissions granted to roles, permissions granted to
access views, executed procedures which in turn allow users to access the data. The core of the DB
Security Expert is Effective Security Settings Wizard allowing you to analyze these multi-layered effective
security settings and assess the true state of data access privileges. In addition, the DB Security Expert
provides tools for managing Oracle database users, roles, profiles and other security objects and settings in
Oracle databases.
Analyzing Effective Security Settings
Using the Effective Security Settings utility, you can:
•
Analyze effective access rights for any given user, table or an entire schema
•
Find out how users gained rights to a particular database table or objects within a particular
database schema. Whether they can access them directly or indirectly via assigned roles, group
membership, even via database views
•
Analyze effective access rights granted to the PUBLIC role.
•
Analyze who has access rights to standard database procedures that can be used for accessing
Operation System files outside of the database.
•
Use the results to ensure enforcement of the security policies
To launch Effective Security Wizard:
1.
Click Tools/Effective Security menu. The following dialog will appear
2.
In the Select Goal step, select the goal for security settings analysis. Click the Next button to
advance to the next step
-225-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
3.
In the Select Target step, select the target database, schema, object or user whose security
settings or access you want to check. Click the Next button to advance to the next step
4.
In the Select Analysis Options step, select the required analysis options.
Click the Next button to start the analysis.
To save analysis results to an external text file:
1.
Click the File/Save menu or Save icon on the toolbar. The Select Output File dialog will appear.
2.
Choose the output file name and location and click the OK button on the Select File dialog
Managing Database Users
To start the User Manager click Manage/Manage Users menu or click the Users
application toolbar. The User Manager dialog will appear.
button on the
The User Manager dialog consists of 2 parts: The left hand side is used to list all database users and their
properties in a single table-like list. The right hand side is used to display and edit user properties assign
roles and assign various system-level and object-level privileges. The settings and properties displayed on
the right hand side are associated with the user whose name is selected in the user list on the left hand side.
You can use standard DB Tools list sorting options to rearrange how user names or properties appear in the
list. For more information about supported sorting options read the Sorting topic.
User Properties
Different Oracle database versions support different sets of user properties. On the General tab page DB
Security Expert displays only options supported in the database you are connected to.
-226-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
User – Specify Oracle user account name.
Lock Date – Date and time when the user account was created. This property is automatic and cannot be
changed.
Password – Specify user password. Use this property when creating Oracle users identified locally by the
database, in other words, to indicate that the user must specify password to log on to the database
External Name – Specify External Name to create an external user. Such a user must be authenticated by
an external service, such as an operating system or a third-party service. In this case, Oracle database
relies on the login authentication of the operating system to ensure that a specific operating system user has
access to a specific database user.
Important Note: Oracle strongly recommends that you do not use external authentication with
operating systems that have inherently weak login security. For more information, see Oracle
Database Administrator's Guide.
Default Tablespace – Specify the default tablespace for objects that the user creates. If you omit this
property, then the user's objects are stored in the database default tablespace. If no default tablespace has
been specified for the database, then the user's objects are stored in the SYSTEM tablespace.
Restrictions: You cannot specify a locally managed tablespace, including an undo tablespace,
or a dictionary-managed temporary tablespace as a user's default tablespace.
Temporary Tablespace – Specify the tablespace for the user's temporary segments. If you omit this
property, then the user's temporary segments are stored in the database default temporary tablespace or, if
none has been specified, in the SYSTEM tablespace.
Restrictions: The specified tablespace must be a temporary tablespace and must have a
standard block size. The tablespace cannot be an undo tablespace or a tablespace with automatic
segment-space management
Account Status – Specify user account status, one of the following:
• OPEN – user account is active and enabled
• LOCKED – user account is inactive and disabled.
• EXPIRED – user account is enabled but the password is expired; user must change his/her
password on the next logon to the database
• EXPIRED & LOCKED – user account is inactive and disabled; in addition user password is
expired. If the account status later changes to OPEN the password expiry status remains in
affect.
Expiry Date – Date and time when the user password expired last time (expired accounts) or will expire
(open accounts).
Lock Date – Date and time when the user account was locked last time. This property is automatic and
cannot be changed.
Profile – Specify the default profile you want to assign to the user. The profile limits the amount of database
resources the user can use. If you omit this property, then Oracle database assigns the DEFAULT profile to
the user.
Consumer Group – Specify the default consumer group you want to assign to the user. If Oracle Database
Resource Manager is not activated this property has no effect.
See your Oracle documentation for additional information about user account properties and how to use
them.
Enabling and Disabling User Accounts
You can use the General page to change user account status. Select LOCKED or EXPIRED & LOCKED
status from Account Status drop-down list to disable the user account. Select OPEN status to re-enable the
user account. When you click the Apply button all of your changes including changes on other pages are
applied at once.
-227-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Forcing Users to Change Their Passwords
You can use the General page to change user account status. Select EXPIRED status from Account
Status drop-down list to expire user password. When you click the Apply button all of your changes
including changes on other pages are applied at once.
Granting and Revoking Roles
The Roles tab page on the User Manager dialog can be used to control which roles are assigned to the
selected user.
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many roles as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including changes on other pages are applied at once.
To grant a role to the selected user place a checkmark in the left-most column. To revoke a role from the
selected user, clear the corresponding checkmark.
Checking the Admin Option box enables the user to grant this role to someone else. Checking the Default
Role option instructs Oracle to automatically give the selected user access to the role during on connect
even if the role is password-protected and normally requires the user to executing SET ROLE command in
order to enable such role for the current session.
The total field shows how many roles are checked on the screen.
-228-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Granting and Revoking Consumer Groups
The Groups tab page on the User Manager dialog can be used to control which consumer groups are
enabled for the selected user, in other words which groups are granted to the selected user.
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many groups as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including changes on other pages are applied at once.
To grant a group to the selected user place a checkmark in the left-most column. To revoke a group from the
selected user, clear the corresponding checkmark.
Tip: An assigning consumer group to a user is not the same as using it. It simply grants the user
privileges to switch to and use the assigned group whenever that user wants. Keep in mind that every
database session can be switched to only one consumer group at a time. Yet there exists a number of
reasons why may want to assign multiple groups to a single user. For example, you may want to allow the
user (or database applications running under that user account) to switch to different groups and to use
different resource usage plans during different times, use "LOW" usage plans for daily report processing and
as opposite use "HIGH" usage plans for other mission critical business processing.
The total field shows how many groups are checked on the screen.
Granting and Revoking System Privileges
The System Privileges tab page on the User Manager dialog can be used to control which system
privileges are enabled for the selected user, in other words which privileges are granted to the selected user.
-229-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many privileges as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including changes on other pages are applied at once.
For your convenience all system privileged are grouped and sorted by category and comments explaining
each privilege displayed in the right-most column.
To grant a privilege to the selected user place a checkmark in the left-most column. To revoke a privilege
from the selected user, clear the corresponding checkmark.
The total field shows how many privileges are checked on the screen.
Granting and Revoking Object Privileges
The Object Privileges tab page on the User Manager dialog can be used to control which database object
access privileges are enabled for the selected user, in other words which privileges are granted to the
selected user.
-230-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many privileges as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including changes on other pages are applied at once.
The Object Privileges tab page is split into 2 logically separate parts. The top part - Select Objects and
Privileges is used to grant new privileges. The bottom part - Granted Privileges displays all object-level
privileges that have been already granted to the selected user and it can be also used to revoke these
privileges.
To grant a privilege to the selected user:
1.
Select object's owner name (schema name) in the Owner drop-down list. DB Security Expert will
populate the Objects list will all grantable objects in specified schema name.
2.
Select the object you want to grant to the user in the Objects list. If you select a table or view DB
Security Expert will populate the Table/View Columns list displayed on the right hand side with names
of all columns available in the selected object. It will also enabled/disable "grant" buttons displayed in
the middle of the screen accordingly to what privileges can be granted for the selected object type.
3.
if necessary check the Admin Option box. Checking the Admin Option box enables the user to grant
the given privilege to someone else.
4.
Click the appropriate "grant" buttons (SELECT, INSERT, and so on) to grant specific privileges to the
user. These privileges will be automatically appended to the end of the Granted Privileges grid. In
case if you made a mistake simple uncheck the left-most column in the grid for the wrong privilege.
For UPDATE, INSERT and REFERENCES operations if required you can restrict user's access to
specific table/view columns only. Select all required columns in the column list then click UPDATE or
INSERT or REFERENCES button once. To select multiple columns hold down the CTRL key while
clicking on column names. DB Security Expert grants all-columns access to the user when no columns
are selected in the column list.
To revoke a privilege from the selected user, clear the corresponding checkmark on the Granted Privileges
grid.
-231-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Creating New Database Users
1.
Open User Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Users menu.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Fill in new user properties on the General tab page.
4.
Enter additional options and grant permissions using other tab pages. For detailed information on how
to use other tab pages read previous topics in this chapter.
5.
Click the Apply button to save changes.
Tip: After you have the new user created use Space Usage Quotas and Resource Usage Quotas tools
to complete the user setup.
Deleting Database Users
1.
Open User Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Users menu.
2.
On the left hand side of the dialog select name of the user you want to delete.
3.
Click the Drop button. The Confirm Delete message will appear. Click the YES button if you are sure
that the right user is chosen for deletion.
Important Note: DB Security Expert will automatically delete all user objects associated with the user
schema as well as drop all referential constraints if there are any. This operation cannot be undone without
restoring the user account, objects and data from a database backup.
Managing Database Roles
To start the Role Manager click Manage/Manage Roles menu or click the Roles
application toolbar. The Role Manager dialog will appear.
button on the
-232-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The Role Manager dialog consists of 2 parts: The left hand side is used to list all database roles and their
properties in a single table-like list. The right hand side is used to display and edit role properties assign
roles to users and also assign various system-level and object-level privileges to roles. The settings and
properties displayed on the right hand side are associated with the role whose name is selected in the role
list on the left hand side.
You can use standard DB Tools list sorting options to rearrange how user names or properties appear in the
list. For more information about supported sorting options read the Sorting topic.
Role Properties
Different Oracle database versions support different sets of role properties. On the General tab page DB
Security Expert displays only options supported in the database you are connected to.
Role – Specify role name.
Password Authentication – Use these options to specify role password authentication.
Not Required – Choose this option to indicate that this role is authorized by the database and that
no password is required to enable the role.
Identified by Password – Choose this option to create a local role and indicate that the user must
specify the password to the database when enabling the role. The password can contain only
single-byte characters from your database character set regardless of whether this character set
also contains multi-byte characters.
Identified Externally – Choose this option to indicate that a user must be authenticated by an
external service and then the user must use SET ROLE statement in order to enable this role.
Identified Globally – Choose this option to indicate that a user must be authenticated by a global
enterprise directory service and then the user must use SET ROLE statement in order to enable
this role.
-233-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
See your Oracle documentation for more information about role properties and how to use them.
Granting and Revoking Roles to Users
The Users tab page on the Role Manager dialog can be used to control which users have been granted the
selected role. This page is similar in functionality to the Granting and Revoking Roles page on the User
Manager dialog, it is just features the opposite view of "Users granted the selected role" vs. "Roles granted
to the selected user." Read Granting and Revoking Roles topic for instructions on how to use this screen.
Granting and Revoking Roles to Roles
The Roles tab page on the Role Manager dialog can be used to control which roles in effect have been
granted the selected role. This page is similar in functionality to the Granting and Revoking Roles page on
the User Manager dialog. Read Granting and Revoking Roles topic for instructions on how to use this
screen.
Granting and Revoking Consumer Groups
The Groups tab page on the Role Manager dialog can be used to control which consumer groups are
enabled for the selected role, in other words which groups are granted to the selected role.
This page is similar in functionality to the Granting and Revoking Consumer Groups page on the User
Manager dialog." Read Granting and Revoking Consume Groups topic for instructions on how to use this
screen.
Tips: An assigning of consumer group to a role is not the same as using it. It simply grants a
privilege to switch to and use the assigned group whenever a user wants. Keep in mind that every
database session can be switched to only one consumer group at a time. Yet there exists a number
of reasons why may want to assign multiple groups to a single user. For example, you may want to
allow the user (or database applications running under that user account) to switch to different
groups and to use different resource usage plans during different times, use "LOW" usage plans for
daily report processing and as opposite use "HIGH" usage plans for other mission critical business
processing.
Granting and Revoking System Privileges
The System Privileges tab page on the Role Manager dialog can be used to control which system
privileges are enabled for the selected role, in other words which privileges are granted to the selected role.
This page is similar in functionality to the Granting and Revoking System Privileges page on the User
Manager dialog." Read Granting and Revoking System Privileges topic for instructions on how to use this
screen.
Granting and Revoking Object Privileges
The Object Privileges tab page on the Role Manager dialog can be used to control which object-level
privileges are enabled for the selected role, in other words which privileges are granted to the selected role.
-234-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This page is similar in functionality to the Granting and Revoking Object Privileges page on the User
Manager dialog." Read Granting and Revoking Object Privileges topic for instructions on how to use this
screen.
Creating New Database Roles
1.
Open Role Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Roles menu.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Fill in new role properties on the General tab page.
4.
Enter additional options and grant permissions using other tab pages. For detailed information on how
to use other tab pages read previous topics in this chapter.
5.
Click the Apply button to save changes.
Deleting Database Roles
1.
Open Role Manager dialog using Manage/Manage Roles menu.
2.
On the left hand side of the dialog select name of the role you want to delete.
3.
Click the Drop button. The Confirm Delete message will appear. Click the YES button if you are sure
that the right role is chosen for deletion.
Important Note: All database users who have been assigned this role will automatically loose all
privileges associated with this role.
Managing Database Profiles
To start the Profile Manager click Manage/Manage Profiles menu or click the Profiles
application toolbar. The Profile Manager dialog will appear.
button on the
-235-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The Profile Manager dialog consists of 2 parts: The list box on the left hand side lists all database profiles.
The right hand side of the dialog screen is used to display and edit profile properties and also used to assign
profiles to users. The settings and properties displayed on the right hand side are associated with the profile
whose name is selected in the profile list on the left hand side.
You can use standard DB Tools list sorting options to rearrange how profile names appear in the list. For
more information about supported sorting options read the Sorting topic.
Tips:
•
Only security related settings are displayed in profile properties. To manage resource usagerelated properties use Resource Usage Quotas dialog.
•
Different profile properties are supported in different Oracle versions. DB Security Expert displays
only properties supported in the database you are connected to.
•
Consult your Oracle documentation for detailed information about supported profile properties and
their values.
Profile Properties
Database Security
FAILED_LOGIN_ATTEMPTS - Specify the number of failed attempts to log in to the user account
before the account is locked.
-236-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Password Security
Parameters that set lengths of time are interpreted in number of days. For testing purposes you can
specify minutes or even seconds as a decimal number. For example, to specify 5 minutes enter
0.003472 (this value was calculated 1/24/60*5).
PASSWORD_LIFE_TIME- Specify the number of days the same password can be used for
authentication. If you also set a value for PASSWORD_GRACE_TIME, the password expires if it is
not changed within the grace period, and further connections are rejected. If you do not set a value
for PASSWORD_GRACE_TIME, its default of UNLIMITED will cause the database to issue a
warning but let the user continue to connect indefinitely.
ASSWORD_REUSE_TIME and PASSWORD_REUSE_MAX - These two parameters must be set
in conjunction with each other. PASSWORD_REUSE_TIME specifies the number of days before
which a password cannot be reused. PASSWORD_REUSE_MAX specifies the number of
password changes required before the current password can be reused. For these parameter to
have any effect, you must specify an integer for both of them.
If you specify an integer for both of these parameters, then the user cannot reuse a password until
the password has been changed the password the number of times specified for
PASSWORD_REUSE_MAX during the number of days specified for PASSWORD_REUSE_TIME.
For example, if you specify PASSWORD_REUSE_TIME to 30 and PASSWORD_REUSE_MAX to
10, then the user can reuse the password after 30 days if the password has already been changed
10 times.
If you specify an integer for either of these parameters and specify UNLIMITED for the other, then
the user can never reuse a password.
If you specify DEFAULT for either parameter, then Oracle Database uses the value defined in the
DEFAULT profile. By default, all parameters are set to UNLIMITED in the DEFAULT profile. If you
have not changed the default setting of UNLIMITED in the DEFAULT profile, then the database
treats the value for that parameter as UNLIMITED.
If you set both of these parameters to UNLIMITED, then the database ignores both of them.
PASSWORD_LOCK_TIME - Specify the number of days an account will be locked after the
specified number of consecutive failed login attempts.
PASSWORD_GRACE_TIME - Specify the number of days after the grace period begins during
which a warning is issued and login is allowed. If the password is not changed during the grace
period, the password expires.
PASSWORD_VERIFY_FUNCTION - Specify the name of the password complexity verification
routine. Oracle database provides a default script, but you can create your own routine instead.
Specify NULL to indicate that no password verification is performed.
Tip: PASSWORD_VERIFY_FUNCTION is only used to verify password
complexity at the time of the user account creation or password change. It is NOT USED
for the user authentication at the time of user logon to the database.
Working with Profiles
To modify an existing profile:
1.
Start the Profile Manager.
2.
Select the required profile in the profile list.
3.
On the General tab page modify profile properties as needed
4.
On the Users tab page modify user assignments as needed.
-237-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
This is a multiple-choice screen. You can select as many users as you want. When you click the Apply
button all of your changes including all changes on General page are applied at once.
5.
To assign a user to the selected profile place a checkmark in the left-most column. To undo the
assignement clear the corresponding checkmark.
Note: User is automatically reverted to the DEFAULT profile if the previous profile assignment is
cleared.
6.
Click the Apply button to save changes.
To delete an existing profile:
1.
Start the Profile Manager.
2.
In the profile list select name of the profile you want to delete.
3.
Click the Drop button. The Confirm Delete message will appear. Click the YES button if you are sure
that the right profile is chosen for deletion.
Important Note: The DEFAULT profile may not be deleted!
To create a new profile:
1.
Start the Profile Manager.
2.
Click the Add button
3.
On the General tab page modify profile properties as needed.
4.
On the Users tab page assign users to the new profile as needed.
5.
Click the Apply button to save changes.
-238-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
-239-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Log Expert
Overview
How DB Log Analyzer Can Help
DB Log Expert can help DBAs and developers in monitoring existing databases and balancing database
loads. In addition, it provides graphical views of the current redo-log configuration, including statuses and
usage information for all redo-log members and redo-log files. By presenting information graphically, DB Log
Expert allows DBA to quickly identify overall database problems and recognize patterns of the database
workload.
Before You Begin
You must have SELECT privileges on the Oracle dynamic performance tables. If you do not have sufficient
authority to use DB Log Expert, contact your database administrator.
Oracle8 users also need permissions to use DBMS_SQL package.
Redo Log Configuration and Status
This report shows current database configuration of Redo Log Groups and its Members. Note that all
members of the same redo log group are displayed on the same line. You should see as many lines as
many redo log groups are configured in the database.
What you can do:
•
Click on the Refresh button to refresh report data.
•
Click on the Print button to print the graph.
•
Click on the Archive Now button to force immediate archiving of all redo logs. You must have sufficient
authority to perform archival operation.
•
Click on the Switch Log button to switch current redo log. You must have sufficient authority to perform
this operation.
Redo Log Latches
This report analyzes and displays redo log performance statistics. If redo latches are detected, the report
provides expert advise on how to avoid them
What you can do:
•
Click on the Refresh button to refresh report data.
•
Click on the Print button to print the report.
Database Load History Report
This report shows yearly and monthly database load statistics based on the number of database changes
recorded in the Redo Log Files
-240-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
What you can do:
•
Use Year drop-down list box to change the report year.
•
Use Month drop-down list box to change report month of the year chosen in the Year drop-down list
box. Alternatively, to change the selected month, you can double-click on the required month bar
(column) in the Year statistics graph.
•
Click on the Print button to print the Monthly graph.
Database Load Weekly Analysis – Day by Day
Comparison
This report shows your database load by day of week and time. For your convenience statistics are grouped
by hour and date. Daily tables are displayed side by side so you can easily see load patterns and trends.
What you can do:
•
Click on the Refresh button to refresh report data.
•
Click on the Print button to print the graph.
Checkpoints Monitor
This is the real-time monitor for tracking database checkpoints as they occur.
What you can do:
•
Use the Interval field to set required timer interval (refresh rate). To turn off automatic refresh enter
zero.
•
Click on the Refresh button to manually trigger new refresh.
•
Click on the Print button to print the graph.
•
Click on the Checkpoint button to force new database checkpoint. You must have sufficient authority to
perform this operation.
Database Load Trends Report
This report allows you to explore historical patterns of the changes made in your database. DB Log Expert
currently provides two report views:
1. Activity Level by Day of Week
2. Activity Level by Time (Hourly)
What you can do:
•
Use Scale drop-down list box to change Trends graph scale.
•
Select from the Start Year drop-down list box start year for the analysis.
•
Select from the Start Month drop-down list box start month for the analysis.
•
Click on the Print button to print the graph.
-241-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Alert Expert
Overview
DB Alert Expert provides a way to send various information messages from your Oracle databases. DB Alert
Expert is targeted primarily to Oracle DBAs and developers.
Oracle DBAs can use DB Alert to implement advanced database monitoring solutions. Whenever database
requires some attention it can use DB Alert functions to alert DBAs, operators, and other people using email,
network messages, or pager. For example, a database deadlock monitoring job can automatically send an
email alert to DBA notifying about the problem. Another good example is a database free space monitoring
job, which can notify DBAs when a tablespace is low of space and a new file is needed for that tablespace.
This can save a lot of DBA time as he/she/ won't be required anymore to manually run various scripts to
check critical database parameters on a regular bases.
With the help of DB Alert Oracle developers can easily add messaging functions to their homegrown
applications. For example, an application can automatically alert sales people when the inventory drops
below the critical level, or an office management application can send an alert message to all users
reminding them to submit their attendance timesheets.
DB Alert automatically logs all messages passed from your databases. Therefore, it can also serve as a
valuable troubleshooting tool for developing, setting up and testing new applications. This option is
especially helpful when developing and testing back-end applications that have no user interface.
DB Alert comes with two ready to use monitoring packages that you can install using DB Tools Database
Setup utility:
•
•
Log Monitor – The primary purpose of this package is to enable automated monitoring of
Oracle Alert Log files. It can be also used to monitor other files such as trace files and log files
produced by various batch jobs running on the same server or shared drive/device. For more
information about the Log Monitor see Monitoring Alert Log Files and Trace Files topic.
Space Monitor - The purpose of this package is to automate free-space monitoring in
tablespaces and alert DBA if the amount of free space falls below the specified threshold.
Each tablespace may have its own threshold set to an appropriate level. For more information
about the Space Monitor see Monitoring Tablespaces topic.
Tip: You can easily email-enable your own back-end monitoring functions by simply calling DB_ALERT
function with the required message parameters.
DB Alert Expert supports the following communication methods:
•
Email using Windows Messaging Application Interface (MAPI)
•
Email using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
•
Email using Lotus Notes
•
Sending network messages using NET command
•
Paging to alphanumeric pager using email-to-pager service (not provided with DB Alert)
DB Alert is a powerful multi-threaded application that can be configured to simultaneously serve multiple
Oracle databases residing on the same or different computers that are connected to the same network.
Because DB Alert uses SQL*Net for all database connections, it can connect to any Oracle database
system running on any platform.
DB Alert runs a separate daemon process for every configured database system. In the event if one
database goes down, it does not stop/prevent DB Alert from serving other databases. That daemon process
instantly checks for 'DB_ALERT' messages sent using DBMS_PIPE procedure. When a message is found in
-242-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
the pipe, the daemon removes that message from the pipe, writes it to the log and then optionally emails or
pages it to the recipients specified in DB Alert options.
DB Alert Installation and Usage
You can use default DB_ALERT function provided with DB Tools (use the graphical Database Setup utility)
or code your own function or method to write 'DB_ALERT' messages to the database pipe.
The graphical Database Setup utility will create ORA_MONITOR schema and DB_ALERT function that can
be used to send messages to DB Alert. Note that both DB_ALERT function and DB Alert daemon processes
use DBMS_PIPE package to communicate. You can also create and use DB_ALERT or similar function in
your own schema. Here is the code for such function.
CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION db_alert( severity VARCHAR2, message VARCHAR2 )
return NUMBER
IS
-- severity must be one of the following: 'INFO', 'WARNING', 'ERROR'
-- message can be any string up to 2000 characters long
-- return code is the value returned by dbms_pipe.send_message() function
-- for suppoted return codes please see Oracle PL/SQL Guide for
-- dbms_pipe.send_message function
BEGIN
dbms_pipe.pack_message(severity);
dbms_pipe.pack_message(message);
RETURN dbms_pipe.send_message('DB_ALERT');
END;
The following example demonstrates how to send a message via DB Alert:
This can be done in both SQL and PL/SQL code
SELECT db_alert( 'WARNIING', 'Low of space in tablespace TOOLS' ) FROM dual;
Example fragment of PL/SQL code
DECLARE
number rc;
BEGIN
-- . . . some PL/SQL code here . . .
rc := db_alert( 'INFO, 'Please do not forget to submit your ' ||
'weekly timesheet before 5:00 PM today' );
-- . . . some PL/SQL code here . . .
END;
See also:
Configuring DB Alert ExpertStarting DB Alert Expert on Computer Startup
Configuring DB Alert
Before you can use DB Alert you need to configure at least three DB Alert areas: database connections,
messaging interface and properties, and alert processing methods. If you have installed Alert Log Monitor
and Free Space Monitor packages you can also use DB Alert Options screen to configure settings for these
packages. To open DB Alert Options dialog select File/Options in the DB Alert menu. A tab page on the DB
Alert Options dialog presents each group of settings.
-243-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Databases
Here you specify database connections for DB Alert. Before you add new database connection, make sure
you have already created DB_ALERT or similar function in that database. To create this function you can
use the graphical Database Setup utility provided with DB Tools or code your own method. See the DB Alert
Overview topic for details and examples for coding and using such functions.
Make sure that user whose ID you use to connect DB Alert to the database, has EXECUTE permissions on
the standard DBMS_PIPE package.
Use Delete and Insert buttons to add and delete database profiles
For details on setting up database connection parameters see How to Conect to Your Database topic.
-244-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Communication Methods
DB Alert supports three different email interfaces: standard Windows MAPI (Messaging Application
Programming Interface) interface, SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol), and Lotus Notes interface utilizing
Lotus Notes API. DB Alert uses the selected interface when sending various alert messages.
DB Alert also supports network messages. Network messages like email messages can be sent to individual
people or to a group of people specified by the group name. This communication method uses the NET
command to send messages. Run "NET HELP SEND" from the command prompt for help with the NET
command.
If your company supports an email-to-pager service you can also configure DB Alert to page messages to
alphanumeric pagers and cell phones by sending such messages to certain email addresses. In many
instances cell phone or pager's email addresses have simple < phone-number>@<phone-company.com>
format.
Important notes:
•
MAPI and SMTP interfaces enable DB Alert to interact with multiple messaging systems across a
variety of software and hardware platforms whereas Lotus Notes interface works with the following
configurations only:
1) Lotus Notes workstation v4.5 and above running on Windows NT workstation or server (Intel
platforms only). There is no limitation on the Lotus Notes server version and platform.
2) Lotus Notes server v4.5 and above running on Windows NT server (Intel platform only).
•
If you have installed Lotus Notes MAPI extensions, you can still use MAPI interface to send and
receive email via Lotus Notes. We highly recommend using MAPI interface whenever possible,
because (due to nature of Lotus Notes API) we cannot guarantee that Lotus Notes interface will be
compatible with the future versions of Lotus Notes. However, we will try to release updated
versions of Lotus Notes interface after new versions of Lotus Notes become available.
•
DB Alert Lotus Notes interface consists of two parts:
o
Notes email interface library
o Notes extension manager
DB Alert email interface library for Lotus Notes always uses default Notes mail database and mail server.
Default settings are taken from Notes environment variables.
-245-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Warning: DB Alert installs Notes extension manager program that intercepts the Notes password
prompt, and supplies the password that you specified for an email in the DB Alert. The extension manager
allows sending email messages via Notes without user intervention when Notes normally requires a
password. The extension manager program is built as a set of dynamic link libraries (DLLs). These DLLs are
loaded by Lotus Notes on startup, and they behave as if they are part of the Lotus Notes software. While DB
Alert email operation is in progress, your Lotus Notes is exposed to other users and programs because no
password is required at that moment to interact with the Lotus Notes software. Before selecting Lotus Notes
interface, make sure you don't have another Notes extension manager already installed on your system. To
verify this, make sure you don't have EXTMGR_ADDINS key in the NOTES.INI file or that key is not
initialized.
Alert Actions
DB Alert supports three different action types:
•
ERROR
•
WARNING
• INFO
You specify action type as a parameter to DB_ALERT or similar function when send alerts from within your
database. To create this function you can use the graphical Database Setup utility provided with DB Tools or
code your own method. See the DB Alert Overview topic for details and examples for coding and using such
functions.
By default all alerts for all action types are logged to the screen and can be optionally printed. For every
message type you can optionally specify whether you want messages of that type to be send to one or more
recipients using the selected communication method.
For email interfaces use comma to separate multiple recipients. You can also specify valid email user
groups. Different recipients can be specified for different message types, for example, you can include all
users for errors, and include only DBAs for information messages.
Like email messages described above, network messages can be sent to individual people or to a group of
people specified by the group name. Such messages are sent using the NET command. Run "NET HELP
SEND" from the command prompt for help with the NET command.
-246-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Log Monitor Options
This area is used to configure Log Monitor options.
To configure the required database:
1.
Make sure the database profile is complete on the Databases tab page
2.
Select the profile name from the Database drop-down box
3.
Enter names of files that you want to monitor. Use Delete and Insert buttons to add and delete lines
in the Files box.
4.
Enter complete strings or search masks to be searched in the specified files. To specify a search
mask you can use standard Oracle % methods for character substitution. Use Delete and Insert
buttons to add and delete search lines to the Search Strings box.
Tip: Messages may have different severity. Please note that the Severity option is used not to
indicate how important the message is to you, but to indicate which action to perform when such
message is found. Actions to be performed you actions on the Actions tab.
5.
If necessary, select another database profile and repeat steps 2 to 4.
Space Monitor Options
This area is used to configure Space Monitor options.
-247-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To configure the required database:
1.
Make sure the database profile is complete on the Databases tab page
2.
Select the profile name from the Database drop-down box
3.
Specify required free space threshold as a percent of free space.
4.
If necessary, select another database profile and repeat step 3.
Database Error Monitor Options
This area is used to configure Log Monitor options.
-248-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To configure the required database:
1.
Make sure the database profile is complete on the Databases tab page
2.
Select the profile name from the Database drop-down box
3.
Enter comma-separated list of database errors for which you want to be notified by DB Alert. To
monitor all database errors enter percent sign into the Errors field.
4.
If necessary, select another database profile and repeat step 3.
Starting DB Alert on Computer Startup
To start DB Alert each time Windows starts:
1.
Click the Windows Start button, and then click the Settings menu.
2.
Click Taskbar, and then click the Start Menu Programs tab.
3.
Click Add, and then click Browse.
4.
Locate DB_TOOLS.EXE file in the DB Tools installation directory and double-click it.
5.
Click the Next button and then double-click the StartUp folder.
6.
Type the name DB Alert, which you will later see in the StartUp menu, and then click Finish.
Windows will create a shortcut that will be placed to the SratUp folder.
7.
Repeat steps 1 and 2. Click Advanced, and then locate the newly created shortcut.
8.
Right-click the shortcut, and then click Properties
9.
Add "/ALERT" command line parameter for the DB_TOOLS.EXE. The complete command line
should look like the following:
-249-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
"C:\Program Files\DB Tools 5\db_tools.exe" /ALERT
10. For the startup window property select Run Minimized, and then click OK
When DB Alert will start on next Windows start, it will appear as an icon
To show DB Alert console, simply double-click on the icon.
in the Windows System Tray.
Monitoring Alert Log Files and Trace Files
The Log Monitor package can be used to monitor the Oracle alert log and other text files for error
messages and raise the alert whenever a new message is found.
The importance of automated alert log monitoring is very high. The alert log file lists significant things that
happen to your database. It alert log also records errors that you might not notice for a while, like ORA01631: max # extents reached in table/cluster XXX or ORA-00600, block corruption error.
Many DBAs examine the log every day and read logs on the screen or use some scripts to scan it for error
messages. If you are responsible for a number of nodes and a number of instances, this can be a tedious
exercise. Another issue with this approach is that if you run a script, it is not enough for the script to simply
check the alert file for errors. The script needs to know if errors were written to the alert file between the
times that it last checked and now. To accomplish this, the script must somehow remember what the
previous version of the alert file looked like. All this is done in the Log Monitor package provided with DB
Tools. The Log Monitor package uses DB Alert send_message function to notify personal about found
problems.
To install and configure Log Monitor:
1.
2.
Use DB Tools Database Setup utility to install the package and schedule log monitoring job.
Use DB Alert Expert console options (File/Options menu) to specify files and message you want to
monitor. Please see DB Alert Configuration topic for details.
Tip: The installation routine by default creates new job that executes Log Monitor analysis function
every 15 minutes. You can adjust job settings or completely disable this job using DB Job Expert.
Monitoring Free Space in Tablespaces
Amount of free space in tablespaces is one of the Oracle database essential measurements that every DBA
should monitor. Oracle returns an error when a tablespace does not contain enough free space for Oracle to
dynamically allocate an extent to a requesting table or index (ORA-1547 Cannot allocate new extent in XXX
and ORA-1631: max # extents reached in table/cluster). For example, if a tablespace contains 10M of free
space but a table or index in that tablespace requests an extent with the size greater than 10M, Oracle will
return an error to the session attempting to insert a row into that table. The DBA may easily avoid such
errors if the DBA monitors tablespace free space on a regular basis. The Space Monitor package is
designed specifically for this purpose. It can be used to monitor free space and raise an alert whenever the
amount of free space falls below the predefined threshold.
The Space Monitor package uses DB Alert send_message function to notify personal about found
problems.
To install and configure Space Monitor:
1.
Use DB Tools Database Setup utility to install the package and schedule space-monitoring job.
-250-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2.
User's Guide
Use DB Alert Expert console options (File/Options menu) to specify files and message you want to
monitor. Please see DB Alert Configuration topic for details.
Tip: The installation routine by default creates new job that executes Space Monitor analysis function
every 30 minutes. You can adjust job settings or completely disable this job using DB Job Expert.
Monitoring Database Errors
The Monitor Database Errors option can be used to monitor all kinds of database errors and raise
automatic whenever new errors occur.
This option is only available in Oracle 8i and later. In Oracle versions 8i and later DB Alert can take
advantage of Oracle system-level triggers to capture Oracle server errors. DB Alert can audit all or specific
Oracle server errors. Detected errors can be then automatically emailed to you.
To install and configure Error Monitoring use either of the following:
1. Use DB Alert Expert console options (File/Options menu) to specify errors you want to monitor.
Click the OK button. DB Alert will prompt for your permissions to you to install the required objects.
Click YES button to confirm.
2. Use DB Tools Database Setup utility to install the necessary DB alert procedures and system
triggers.
Tip: The installation routine creates ORA_MONITOR.ALERT_TR_ERRORS trigger ON DATABASE
ERROR event. You must have CREATE ANY TRIGGER privileges in order for this operation to complete
successfully.
Please see DB Alert Configuration topic for details on how to configure Database Error Monitoring options.
-251-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Audit Expert
Overview
DB Audit Expert combines two sets of auditing tools: tools for the system usage auditing and tools for the
data change auditing. First set of tools provides you with easily navigated graphical interface to the powerful
Oracle system auditing features where second set of tools allows you to setup data auditing which is not
supported by Oracle database software directly. DB Audit Expert also provides you with several pre-built
auditing reports.
See also:
•
System Auditing
•
Data Change Auditing
System Auditing
DB Audit Expert provides a rich graphical interface for Oracle system audit management and audit data
analysis. All Oracle database systems support three standard types of auditing: namely SQL statementlevel, privilege-level, and object-level auditing. Audit records can be written to the standard Oracle audit
table SYS.AUD$ or to an external file. The three basic types of auditing can be performed by user,
successful or unsuccessful attempts, and by session or access time intervals. The standard system auditing
does not include data-change auditing at the record or column level. DB Audit provides this missing
functionality using advanced data-change audit methods and tools that work at the record and column
levels. To learn more about data-change auditing in Oracle see Data Change Auditing topic.
Through the use of the standard auditing capabilities it is possible to audit virtually any system-event such
as:
•
User logon/logoff times and activity
•
Execution of a specific SQL statement, such as auditing table manipulation operations
•
Use of system privilege(s), there are over 100 privileges such as CREATE VIEW, SELECT ANY
TABLE, etc.
•
Audit by object, to see what was done to an object (tables, views, indexes, etc.).
•
Audit specific user(s).
•
Audit middle tier applications, such as access by another database
•
Audit successful and/or unsuccessful events, including unsuccessful logons and object access.
Notes:
•
The system-level database auditing is performed entirely on the server. DB Audit Expert uses
Oracle DBMS SQL commands to access the system audit trail information and manage system
audit configuration and settings. To enable auditing at any level, you will need to set the
AUDIT_TRAIL=DB parameter in the instance parameters INIT.ORA file and then restart the
instance: this is not settable dynamically. On UNIX based systems this file is normally located in the
‘dbs’ subdirectory under the ORACLE_HOME directory. On Windows based systems this file is
named INITORCL.ORA and it is normally located in the ‘Database’ subdirectory under the
ORACLE_HOME directory.
•
You must have AUDIT ANY and CREATE TABLE privileges.
System Auditing Considerations
Although system auditing is relatively inexpensive, limit the number of audited events as much as possible.
This will minimize the performance impact on the execution of statements that are audited, and minimize the
size of the audit trail. Consider the following two general guidelines when devising an auditing strategy:
1.
Evaluate your purpose for auditing. Once you have a clear understanding of the reasons for auditing,
you can devise an appropriate auditing strategy and avoid unnecessary auditing. For example, suppose
you are auditing to investigate suspicious database activity. This information by itself is not specific
-252-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
enough. What types of suspicious database activity do you suspect or have you noticed? A more
focused auditing purpose might be to audit unauthorized deletions from arbitrary tables in the database.
This purpose narrows the type of action being audited and the type of object being affected by the
suspicious activity.
2.
Audit knowledgeably. Audit the minimum number of statements, users, or objects required to get the
targeted information. This prevents unnecessary audit information from cluttering the meaningful
information and consuming valuable space in the SYSTEM tablespace. Balance your need to gather
sufficient security information with your ability to store and process it. For example, if you are auditing to
gather information about database activity, determine exactly what types of activities you are tracking,
audit only the activities of interest, and audit only for the amount of time necessary to gather the
information you desire. Do not audit objects if you are only interested in each session’s logical I/O
information.
Because volume of audit trail information usually grows very fast you should regularly archive audit records
and purge the audit trail.
Once you have collected the required information, archive the audit records of interest and purge the audit
trail of this information.
Before You Begin System Auditing
You must have AUDIT ANY, CREATE TABLE privileges.
Archiving system audit trail to a table
1.
Select Audit/System Audit Trail/Archive to Table command from the DB Audit Expert menu.
2.
The select destination table dialog appears. Specify either name of an existing table to which you
archived before using DB Audit Expert or enter the name of a new table. DB Audit Expert
automatically creates the destination table if it does not exist. If you select an existing table, then
DB Audit Expert appends data from the system audit trail to that table archived. Note that if have
not purged the system audit trail since last archiving operation, you will get the same audit trail
records archived twice
Archiving system audit trail to a file
1.
Select Audit/System Audit Trail/Export to File command from the DB Audit Expert menu.
2.
The select export file dialog appears. Specify name of the file to which you want to archive the
system audit trail. If you select an existing file, DB Audit Expert will overwrite this file.
Purging system audit trail
1.
Select Audit/System Audit Trail/Purge command from the DB Audit Expert menu.
System Audit Options
•
Depending on the auditing options set, audit records can contain different types of information.
However, all auditing options generate the following information:
•
The user that executed the audited statement
•
The action code (a number) that indicates the audited statement executed by the user
-253-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
•
The object or objects referenced in the audited statement
•
The date and time that the audited statement was executed
User's Guide
To select statements, objects, and users for auditing, use Audit/System Audit Trail/Set Audit Options
command from the DB Audit Expert menu. Follow instructions provided by the System Audit Options
Wizard.
For more information on the system audit trail and system audit options see your Oracle documentation.
Advanced System Auditing Options
Automatic Audit Trail Space Management
Moving Oracle native system audit trail table out of the SYSTEM tablespace.
The amount of output generated by Oracle system audit can be quite large. All system audit data is stored in
a single table SYS.AUD$ stored as all Oracle SYS tables in the database SYSTEM tablespace.
Uncontrolled growth of SYS.AUD$ table may cause the SYSTEM tablespace to run out of space, which in
turn may cause severe problems for the entire database - the database would hang if all the free space in
the SYSTEM tablespace were to be used up by audit records, that's why it is important to move the audit
table SYS.AUD$ from the SYSTEM tablespace.
Periodically deleting old data from the SYS.AUD$ table is not a very good solution to the space problem
because it leads to fragmentation of the SYSTEM tablespace affecting the overall database performance.
Oracle is somewhat unclear whether the SYS.AUD$ table should be moved out of the SYSTEM tablespace.
In the system administrators manual it says explicitly that Oracle does not recommend moving the
SYS.AUD$ table out of the SYSTEM tablespace because the Oracle code makes implicit assumptions about
the data dictionary tables, such as SYS.AUD$, which could cause problems with future upgrades. However
in published Oracle DBA courses and technical support bulletins it recommends moving the table and event
provides instructions on how to do that.
DB Audit provides a graphical interface for moving SYS.AUD$ table with just a few mouse clicks. At any
time later the table can be easily moved back to the SYSTEM tablespace if you wish so.
-254-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To move the SYS.AUD$ table to a different tablespace:
1. Start DB Audit GUI console and connect to the database.
2. Click Audit menu then click System Audit Trail menu then click Advanced Options menu.
The Advanced Options dialog will be displayed.
3. Click the Move button. The Select the tablespace dialog will appear.
4.
Choose same or different tablespace for SYS.AUD$ table and its indexes and then click the
Continue button.
-255-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Notes:
In Oracle 8.0 and later DB Audit uses ALTER TABLE and ALTER INDEX commands to move
the table and indexes. In Oracle 7.x it creates a new AUD$_NEW table, transfers the data,
renames the current SYS.AUD$ table to AUD$_OLD and then renames AUD$_NEW to AUD$.
In all versions the existing system audit trail data is preserved.
It is important that you perform the move operation either when the auditing is turned
off or nobody else is connected to the database.
Audit Method and Storage
DB Audit supports 2 methods for working with the Oracle system audit trail. It can use either native Oracle
data dictionary tables and views (SYS.AUD$ and DBA_AUDIT_…) normally stored in the SYSTEM
tablespace or it can use alternative set of tables and views created in ORA_MONITOR schema and stored
in a tablespace chosen by the user.
To install and switch to the alternative set of audit objects:
1.
2.
3.
Start DB Audit GUI console and connect to the database.
Click System Audit menu then click Advanced Options menu. The Advanced Options
dialog will be displayed.
Activate the Audit Method tab page.
-256-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
4.
5.
6.
User's Guide
Click the Install button. This will install all the required objects in the ORA_MONITOR
schema. All objects are installed in the default tablespace chosen for ORA_MONITOR
database user. In case if ORA_MONITOR schema and user don't exist yet DB Audit will
prompt to select default tablespace and options and it will then create the required user.
Choose scheduling options for system audit data transfer job. This job will periodically move
data from the system audit trail table SYS.AUD$ to the alternative ORA_MONITOR.AUD$
audit trail table.
Click the Schedule button to install the data transfer job
Notes:
Using alternative audit trail objects solves the space usage problem in the SYSTEM
tablespace. However, this method may lead to high fragmentation of the SYSTEM tablespace
if the amount of the generated audit data is quite large. For additional information about this
issue read Moving Oracle native system audit trail table out of the SYSTEM tablespace
section.
During the installation step your existing system audit trail data is automatically
transferred to the alternative tables.
To uninstall the alternative objects click the Uninstall button and then remove the data transfer
job. All existing audit trail data in the alternative tables will be lost when the objects are
uninstalled.
Auditing Privileged Users connected as SYSDBA or SYSOPER
Although Oracle's audit facilities are very sophisticated they by default don't cover all user activities. For
example, it is not possible to audit the actions of privileged users such as SYS and users connecting "as
sysdba" until Oracle 9iR2.
When a user with SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges connects to the database, the action is expected to be
for administrative reasons only, such as database shutdown, startup, configuration changes, etc. These
actions are not intended for auditing and therefore the Oracle auditing mechanism does not pick them up.
Starting with Oracle release 9iR2, the database provides the full audit ability of the SYS account. In all
versions prior to 9iR2 the only limited auditing option available is the small audit file that Oracle creates by
default in the directory $ORACLE_HOME/RDBMS/audit (in a Unix environment) or as a brief audit record
written to the Windows NT application Event Log in Windows environments. This file is created every time a
user attempts to connect internal through server manager (svrmgrl), or the now current method of connect
as SYSDBA or SYSOPER. A separate file is written for every connection making it really hard to analyze
the audit trail data and monitor security breaches.
In case if you want to audit both connections and activities and you run Oracle 9iR2 (or later) add the
following line to your database initialization parameters file [INIT.ORA] and then restart the database.
AUDIT_SYS_OPERATIONS = TRUE
DB Audit provides methods for monitoring Oracle audit files and loading them into a database table. This
somewhat fulfills the gap for Oracle database version prior to version 9iR2. The data is loaded into
ORA_MONITOR.SYSFILE_AUD$ table. This table can be queried using DB Tools' SQL Editor or any other
reporting tool of your choice. You can also use the Report Designer tool available in DB Monitor Expert (see
Custom Reports topic) to design a report that you can run later at any time with a click of a mouse.
-257-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To install audit of SYS-type operations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start DB Audit GUI console and connect to the database.
Click Audit menu then click System Audit Trail menu and then click Advanced Options
menu. The Advanced Options dialog will be displayed.
Activate the Audit SYS Operations tab page.
Specify location of an operating system directory into which the audit trail is written. You must
specify absolute directory name and cannot use system environment variables pointing to
Oracle home. Do not use trailing slash in the directory name.
Notes:
In Unix environments the directory name is case-sensitive. Make sure to enter it exactly.
Important: The specified audit directory must be listed in the initialization parameter
UTL_FILE_DIR. Please add it to your database initialization parameters file [INIT.ORA], restart
the database and then install Audit SYS Operations procedures. Here is an example line from
[INIT.ORA] file:
util_file_dir = c:\oracle\mydb\rdbms\audit
In case if you already have UTIL_FILE_DIR parameter in your [INIT.ORA] parameters file
referencing some other directory you can add more lines. To specify multiple directories have
-258-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
5.
6.
User's Guide
a separate UTL_FILE_DIR line for each directory, but make sure these are on consecutive
lines otherwise only the last directory will be accessible.
Click the Install button. This will install all the required objects in the ORA_MONITOR
schema. All objects are installed in the default tablespace chosen for ORA_MONITOR
database user. In case if ORA_MONITOR schema and user don't exist yet DB Audit will
prompt to select default tablespace and options and it will then create the required user.
If your Oracle database runs on a Windows server install DB Audit Event Log Monitoring
service. The Event Log Monitoring service copies Oracle audit records from the Windows
Application Event Log to audit trail files in the format compatible with Unix versions.
Important: The service must be installed on the computer running your Oracle
server, not the computer running DB Audit GUI. You must install DB Audit console on
the server computer in order to install the Event Log Monitoring service.
Note: The audit trail data is loaded into ORA_MONITOR.SYSFILE_AUD$ table. This table
can be queried using DB Tools' SQL Editor or any other reporting tool of your choice. You can also
use the Report Designer tool available in DB Monitor Expert (see Custom Reports topic) to design
a report that you can run later at any time with a click of a mouse.
Auditing Oracle Database Errors
In Oracle versions 8i and later DB Audit can take advantage of Oracle system-level triggers to audit Oracle
server errors. DB Audit can audit all or specific Oracle server errors. Detected errors can be logged to a
database table and optionally email alerts can be sent to the personnel.
-259-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To install procedures for automatic capturing of database errors:
1. Make sure DB Alert Expert procedures are installed in the database.
2. Start DB Audit GUI console and connect to the database.
3. Click Audit menu then click System Audit menu then click Advanced Options menu. The
Advanced Options dialog will be displayed.
4. Activate the Audit Server Error tab page.
5. In case if you want to audit specific Oracle errors enter Oracle error numbers as commaseparated list, otherwise enter % (percent sign) to capture and audit all errors.
6. If you want to implement email alerts specify email alert recipients, if none is specified no email
will be sent.
7.
Important: The DB Alert procedure and console must be installed and configured
prior to installing database error auditing. For more information see Configuring DB Alert
topic.
Click the Install button. This will install all the required objects in the ORA_MONITOR
schema. All objects are installed in the default tablespace chosen for ORA_MONITOR
database user. In case if ORA_MONITOR schema and user don't exist yet DB Audit will
prompt to select default tablespace and options and it will then create the required user.
Note:
The audit trail data for database errors is loaded into ORA_MONITOR.SERVER_ERROS
table. This table can be queried using DB Tools' SQL Editor or any other reporting tool of your
-260-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
choice. You can also use the Report Designer tool available in DB Monitor Expert (see Custom
Reports topic) to design a report that you can run later at any time with a click of a mouse.
Data Change Auditing
DB Audit Expert enables the tracking of data changes made to a database. DB Audit Expert can record what
changes were made and who, when, and from where they were made. Any number of tables or columns
may be selected for auditing. Different types of auditing can be specified for different tables. For instance,
you can track only inserts on one table and monitor all kinds of changes on another table.
As indicated before, the actual auditing of the database is implemented by installing audit triggers on each
table selected for auditing and also creating audit trail tables to store data from the changed records. The
installed data-change auditing is completely transparent to both the existing as well as new applications. All
supported database systems allow multiple triggers defined on a table. Hence, even if you already have
some existing application triggers or add new triggers later both the application and audit triggers will work
simultaneously. In short, the audit triggers will not impact or affect existing triggers.
For each audited table DB Audit generates an "audit" trigger and a "mirror" table the ORA_MONITOR
schema. If this schema does not exist, DB Audit Expert asks your permissions to create it whenever you
select the very first table to be audited. DB Audit Expert generates both the "audit" trigger and the "mirror"
table automatically. The "mirror" table is used as a data audit trail table for storing data changed in the
audited table. This history table stores one auditing record for every deleted or newly inserted record and
two records for every updated record. In case of updates, the first record always stores old value and
second record stores updated value.
The data audit trail table has the same structure as the audited table. It also includes columns to store
additional information about made changes such information as the user name who changed the data,
terminal from where the "change" operation was initiated and the timestamp that indicates exact time of the
change.
If the table being audited includes at least one unique column, then you can also use data from the data
audit trail to recover the audited table in cases of data loss.
Note that DB Audit Expert is capable to generate multiple triggers on multiple selected tables
simultaneously, meaning that you can perform data change auditing on virtually unlimited number of tables
simultaneously
Because volume of audit trail information can grow very fast you should regularly archive audit records and
purge the audit trail.
Once you have collected the required information, archive the audit records of interest and purge the audit
trail.
Before You Begin Data Auditing
You must have SELECT ANY TABLE, CREATE TABLE, CREATE TRIGGER, REFERENCE ANY privileges.
Privileges required
The table below describes default privileges that must be granted to the ORA_MONITOR user.
Oracle 7.3, 8.0 and 8i
SELECT ANY TABLE
EXECUTE ANY PROCEDURE
Oracle 9i and 10g requires explicit grants given by
SYS
SELECT ON sys.v_$session
SELECT ON sys.v_$mystat
EXECUTE ON sys.dbms_lob
EXECUTE ON sys.dbms_output
EXECUTE ON sys.dbms_job
EXECUTE ON sys.dbms_util
SELECT, DELETE ON sys.audit$
-261-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Archiving data audit trail to a table
1.
Select File/Data Audit Trail/Archive to Table command from the DB Audit Expert menu.
2.
The select source and destination table dialog appears. Select name of the existing audited table
from the source table list.
3.
Specify either name of an existing table to which you archived before using DB Audit Expert or
enter the name of a new table. DB Audit Expert automatically creates the destination table if it does
not exist. Note that if have not purged the data audit trail since last archiving operation, you will get
the same audit trail records archived twice.
4.
If necessary, repeat described steps for another table being audited.
Archiving data trail to a file
1.
Select File/Data Audit Trail/Export to File command from the DB Audit Expert menu.
2.
The select export file dialog appears. Specify name of the file to which you want to archive the data
audit trail. If you select an existing file, DB Audit Expert will overwrite this file.
3.
The select table dialog appears. Select name of the table for which you want to archive the data
audit trail.
4.
If necessary, repeat described steps for another table being audited.
Purging data audit trail:
1.
Select File/Data Audit Trail/Purge command from the DB Audit Expert menu.
2.
The select audited table dialog appears. Select name of the table for which you want to purge the
data audit trail.
3.
If necessary, repeat described steps for another table being audited.
Enabling Data Change Auditing
1.
To select tables for auditing, use Audit/Data Audit Trail/Generate| Remove Triggers command
from the DB Audit Expert menu. The Set Data Audit options dialog will appear.
-262-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2.
User's Guide
Check all tables that you want to audit. When ready click the Proceed button.
Disabling Data Change Auditing
1.
2.
3.
To remove previously configured audit triggers use Audit/Data Audit Trail/Generate| Remove
Triggers command from the DB Audit Expert menu.
The Set Data Audit options dialog will appear.
Uncheck all tables that you don't want to audit anymore. When ready click the Proceed button.
-263-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Patch Expert
Overview
DB Patch Expert provides graphical interface and reporting tools for the web-based Patch Monitoring and
Management Service. The Patch Monitoring and Management Service is responsible for monitoring and
collecting information about new database patches and upgrades. It can also help you with prioritization and
scheduling of your database updates, ensuring that patches with critical security and functionality fixes are
installed in a timely fashion. The Patch Monitoring and Management Service can be optionally configured to
handle general patch management tasks such as keeping track of patch testing and installation history,
correlating new security threats and patch availability, as well as performing other important patch
management tasks.
Note about the Patch Monitoring and Management Service: SoftTree Technologies, Inc runs one of
the largest archives of database patch information. The archive is self-updating and always up to date.
SoftTree servers perform automated monitoring of new patch releases for all major database types,
including Oracle, SQL Server, Sybase, DB2 and MySQL and automatically add them to the archive.
For licensed users, the Patch Monitoring and Management Service provides additional services such as
storing and managing history of patch installations and system upgrades, automatic alerting and reporting
on new patch releases, analytical and compliance reporting.
The Patch Monitoring and Management Service requires each user to register with the service. All basic
services are free for 30-days for all registered users. After the initial 30-day period, users are required to
subscribe to the service and renew their registration annually in order to continue using the service and
continue receiving new patch notifications. Users can unsubscribe at any time or simply delete registration
records associated with their database systems.
Patch Analysis and Reporting
Patch Summary Report
This reports analyzes your current database settings and display summary statistic for patches released
and applicable to your database system. It reports totals numbers of all available patches, patches that
are already installed on the system or included in your version, and patches that could be installed with
a summary breakdown by patch severity. Summary report for an Oracle server version 9.0.1.1 running
on Windows system may look like the following example:
Summary Statistics
for Oracle v9.0.1.1 for Windows 32-bit platform
Statistic
Total
Number of patches and upgrades since release 9.0.1.1 (including new
3229
major versions)
Installed patches and upgrades for release 9
New patches and upgrades (NOT including new major versions)
61
1280
-264-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Patches and Upgrades Released
Since Oracle v9.0.1.1 for Windows 32-bit platform
Patch Severity
Total
Critical
9
High
0
Medium
1271
Low
0
Unknown and not classified
0
Grand Total
1280
To access this report, use Patches menu in the DB Patch Expert.
Installed Patches Report
This reports analyzes your current database settings and display detailed information about patches
that are already installed on the system or included in your version. The displayed information includes
patch issue date, type, platform, dependencies, summary information and installation details and
instructions, as well as the path download link.
To access this report, use Patches menu in the DB Patch Expert.
Missing Critical Patches Report
This reports analyzes your current database settings and display detailed information about patches
with known critical severity that should be installed on your Oracle server, but not yet installed. The
displayed information includes patch issue date, type, platform, dependencies, summary information
and installation details and instructions, as well as the path download link.
To access this report, use Patches menu in the DB Patch Expert.
Missing Critical and High Severity Patches Report
This reports analyzes your current database settings and display detailed information about patches
with known critical and high severity that should be installed on your Oracle server, but not yet installed.
The displayed information includes patch issue date, type, platform, dependencies, summary
information and installation details and instructions, as well as the path download link.
Note that "Missing Critical Patches Report" report returns a subset of records returned by this report.
To access this report, use Patches menu in the DB Patch Expert.
-265-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Missing Critical, High, and Medium Severity Patches
This reports analyzes your current database settings and display detailed information about patches
with known critical, high, and medium severity that are available for your Oracle server, but not yet
installed. The displayed information includes patch issue date, type, platform, dependencies, summary
information and installation details and instructions, as well as the path download link.
Note that "Missing Critical and High Severity Patches Report" report returns a subset of records
returned by this report.
To access this report, use Patches menu in the DB Patch Expert.
All Missing Patches
This reports analyzes your current database settings and display detailed information about all patches
available for your Oracle server, but not yet installed. The displayed information includes patch issue
date, type, platform, dependencies, summary information and installation details and instructions, as
well as the path download link.
Note that "Missing Critical, High, and Medium Severity Patches Report" report returns a subset of
records returned by this report.
To access this report, use Patches menu in the DB Patch Expert.
Automated Alerts and Notifications
The Patch Monitoring and Management Service can automatically notify you whenever new patches and
upgrades are released for your database systems. In order to use this feature you first configure the service
and enter versions and types of databases for which you want to get notifications and configure when and
how you want to be notified. At the time of DB Tools 6.0 release, the Patch Monitoring and Management
Service supported the following 3 notification frequencies and formats:
•
Instant notification – this type of notification enables the service to send you email alerts for
each database system you registered with the service as soon as new patches and upgrades
become available for that system. The email alerts include patch details including download
links and installation instructions (if available). Typically, such email alerts are sent next day
after new patches become [publicly available.
•
Weekly notification – this type of notification enables the service to send you consolidated
email reports for all patches that become available during the previous week for all database
systems you registered with the service. The report includes basic patch information and
reference links to the patch service web site where you can find more information about
referenced patches. Note that the report is not sent if no new patches and upgrades are
released during the previous week.
•
Monthly notification – this type of notification enables the service to send you consolidated
email reports for all patches that become available during the previous month for all database
systems you registered with the service. The report includes basic patch information and
reference links to the patch service web site where you can find more information about
referenced patches. Note that the report is not sent if no new patches and upgrades are
released during the previous month.
Important Notes On one hand, weekly and monthly notifications provide more convenience to users
running multiple database servers. On the other hand, these reports are sent only periodically and they may
come too late, leaving your database systems vulnerable to new security threats. If you are not sure why this
is important, read in Wikipedia – the free on-line encyclopedia about the Slammer virus, which has spread
very rapidly infecting tens of thousands of database servers in the first day alone.
-266-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To subscribe to automated patch notifications, use Patches/New Patch Alerts menu in DB Patch Expert.
You would need to use that menu for database system for which you want to receive the notifications. The
data is pre-filled automatically by DB Patch Expert. You should verify this data for accuracy, enter the email
address of notification recipient and click the Submit button.
Note: To have notifications sent to a group of people, for example, to all DBAs in your team, enter email
address of your team email distribution group.
Patch Management Tasks
The Patch Monitoring and Management Service can help you to manage patch prioritization, scheduling,
testing and deployment processes. It can keep track of installed patches and related activities. It also allows
you use to analyze patch issuance and deployment history and improve the database change management
process which is vital to every stage of the patch management.
Use Patches/Patch and Upgrade Installation Tracker menu in DB Patch Expert to access tools available
for the patch history recording and analysis.
Note that when you access the tracker, it automatically reconciles the data stored in the Patch Management
service database and versions of your database and in case of discrepancies it automatically adds new
records to the patch installation log.
To add a new record to the patch tracker:
1.
Connect to the database system whose records you want to view or modify.
2.
Click Patches/Patch and Upgrade Installation Tracker menu
3.
Click
4.
Fill in available fields in the new record following on the screen instructions.
5.
Click the Save button.
icon or click Add new record hyperlink.
To delete an existing record:
1.
Connect to the database system whose records you want to view or modify.
2.
Click Patches/Patch and Upgrade Installation Tracker menu.
3.
Click
4.
When prompted to confirm the operation, click the Yes button.
icon displayed in the left most column of the record you want to delete.
To modify an existing record to the patch tracker:
1.
Connect to the database system whose records you want to view or modify.
2.
Click Patches/Patch and Upgrade Installation Tracker menu
3.
Click
4.
Modify this record data as required.
5.
Click the Save button.
icon displayed in the left most column of the record you want to modify.
-267-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Job Expert
Overview
DB Job Expert contains all tools required for creating database jobs, scheduling, launching, and monitoring,
reporting and troubleshooting of jobs.
The graphical interface of DB Job Expert provides an enterprise view for quick, clear inspections and
maintenance of all scheduled jobs, their analysis and troubleshooting. The back-end job monitoring and
profiling package instantly monitors running jobs and collects their performance statistics. The collected
statistics are used in a variety of DB Job Expert reports that vary by functionality from Job Forecasting to
Server Load Balancing.
The DB Job Expert also includes Job Monitor package and a set of jobs that must be installed in the
database in order to use advanced DB Job Expert features such as Job Profiler and job performance
reports. The Job Monitor package is used to monitor scheduled jobs and collect job performance statistics.
The Job Profiler uses collected job performance data in most DB Job Expert Reports. The collected data
can be also used as a complete job audit log.
DB Job Expert is built around Oracle scheduling API provided in the standard DBMS_JOB package. In
certain cases, DB Job Expert can use functions from the system undocumented DBMS_IJOB package.
These functions allow SYS user to modify, disable, drop and run jobs that belong to other database users.
Before you start using scheduling functions, make sure you have properly configured your Oracle job
queues and SNP background processes that actually run jobs. You must have at least one SNP process
running to execute your scheduled and queued jobs. Note that SNP processes will not execute job queues if
the database is in restricted mode. An instance can have up to 36 SNP background processes.
In order to use job queues you will need to set the following two INIT.ORA parameters:
1. JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES = n
Here n is how many SNP background processes you want to be running.
Default: 10
Valid range of values: 0…36
2. JOB_QUEUE_INTERVAL = n
Here n is the interval between wake-ups, in seconds, for the SNP background processes.
Default: 60
Valid Range of values: 0…3600
Please be aware that if either JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES = 0 or JOB_QUEUE_INTERVAL = 0,
scheduled jobs will not run
See the following topics for more information on DB Job Expert
Job Scheduler Console
Job Monitor Installation
Job Performance Statistics and Job Monitor Options
Job Profiler
Job Reports
-268-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Job Scheduler Console
The Job Scheduler Console is a visual configuration tool you can use to inspect already scheduled jobs,
create new and modify/delete existing jobs, start jobs manually and forcibly terminate unrequired jobs
The Job Scheduler Console is automatically started when DB Job Expert GUI is started.
Navigation techniques
The Job Scheduling Console allows two different ways of viewing and modifying currently scheduled jobs:
•
The tree-view on the left-hand of the console window presents jobs grouped by job owners.
•
The grid-view displays all job details including job id, last job run-time, next job run-time recursion
interval, job schema, job privileges and job SQL.
You may access controls for a job through the main menus, at the top of the Job Scheduler Console
window; through the toolbar, which allows you to manipulate a selected job in the tree-view; or through the
context-sensitive menu that appears when you right-click a job item in the tree-view or in the grid-view. All
methods allow you to choose whether to edit, change, delete, run or stop a job.
Remember that while the main menu contains almost all controls and functions available in DB Job Expert,
only the context-sensitive menus allow performing context operations such as Print and Print Preview. In
other words, if you right-click the tree-view and then select the Print command from the popup context
menu, this will print the contents of the tree-view, but If you right-click the grid-view and then select the
Print command from the popup context menu, this will print the contents of the grid view.
Creating a new job
1.
Click Jobs/New menu or click
(see sample image below)
toolbar button. The <New Job> Properties dialog will appear
2.
Choose job first start date and time
-269-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
3.
Choose required job schedule. You can select one of the predefined common job schedules or
enter your own job recursion formula into Custom recursion interval field. The formula must
calculate the next time to run the job. The returned value must evaluate to either a future point in
time or NULL. In this formula you can use standard Oracle date functions or your own SQL
functions (Oracle 8i and later).
4.
Enter SQL statements to be executed, you can type them in the To Do box or use the Browse
button to paste text from a file. The SQL in To Do box must be either a single valid SQL
statement such as name of stored procedure or an Oracle anonymous PL/SQL block beginning
with DECLARE or BEGIN keyword and containing one or more valid PL/SQL statements.
5.
Click the OK button to create the new job.
Modifying properties of an existing job
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the required job in the tree-view or grid-view
Click Jobs/Modify menu or click
toolbar button. The Modify Job Properties dialog will appear
If necessary, change job next start date and time
If necessary, change job schedule. You can select one of the predefined common job schedules or
enter your own job recursion formula into Custom recursion interval field. The formula must
calculate the next time to run the job. The returned value must evaluate to either a future point in
time or NULL. In this formula you can use standard Oracle date functions or your own SQL
functions (Oracle 8i and later).
If necessary, change SQL to be executed next time the job runs, you can type them in the To Do
box or use the Browse
button to paste text from a file. The SQL in To Do box must be either
-270-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
6.
User's Guide
a single valid SQL statement such as name of stored procedure or an Oracle anonymous PL/SQL
block beginning with DECLARE or BEGIN keyword and containing one or more valid PL/SQL
statements.
Click the OK button to modify the new job.
Important Note: You can modify your own jobs without any restrictions, however you must use SYS
logon if you need to modify a job that was created by another user.
Toggling job disabled/enable state
1.
Select the required job in the tree-view or grid-view
2.
toolbar button. The job state will be toggled. If the
Click Jobs/Disable/Enable menu or click the
job new state is disabled the job will never run until it is re-enabled.
Tip: Disabled jobs can run only if they are invoked manually or from other jobs.
Important Note: You can disable and enable your own jobs without any restrictions, however you must
use SYS logon if you need to disable or re-enable a job that was created by another user.
Changing job privileges
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the required job in the tree-view or grid-view
toolbar button. The job permissions dialog
Click Jobs/Change Job Privileges menu or click
will appear (see sample image below)
Choose name of the user whose privileges are required to run the job.
Choose name of the user who owns the objects specified in the job SQL (see To Do properties in
the Modify Job subtopic)
Click the OK button.
Important Note: You must use SYS logon in order to be able to change job privileges.
-271-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Removing an existing job
1.
Select the required job in the tree-view or grid-view
2.
Click Jobs/Drop menu or click the
toolbar button. The confirmation dialog will appear and the
job will be removed if you confirm the operation.
Tip: Removing job definition from the job queue does not stop a running job. To kill a running job use
Jobs/Kill Job command. For more details see the Kill Running Job subtopic below.
Important Note: You can remove your own jobs without any restrictions, however you must use SYS
logon if you need to remove a job that was created by another user.
Running a job on demand
1.
2.
Select the required job in the tree-view or grid-view
toolbar button. The job will begin executing in the
Click Jobs/Run Now menu or click the
foreground and the Job Status window will appear.
Tips:
•
Remember that a manual job run may affect job schedule if the job recursion interval is defined as
a straight function of SYSDATE, for example SYSDATE + 1.
•
To interrupt the manually started job, click the Kill Session button on the Job Status window, this
will kill the DB Job session running the job. You will need to reconnect DB Job Expert to the
database in order to continue working with jobs.
•
To run the job in background, copy job definition to a new job and choose SYSDATE for the first
start time and NULL for the recursion interval.
Important Note: You can run your own jobs without any restrictions, however you must use SYS or
other administrative logon if you need to run a job that was created by another user.
Stopping a running job
1.
2.
Select the required job in the tree-view or grid-view
toolbar button. This will kill the session that is associated with
Click Jobs/Kill Job menu or click
the job and the job will stop.
Important Note: You must have sufficient privileges to terminate database sessions.
Retrieving job log and statistics
1.
Select the required job in the tree-view or grid-view
2.
Click Jobs/Profiler Statistics menu or click
displayed for the selected job.
toolbar button. The Job Profiler Report will be
Important Note: The DB Tools Job Monitor package must be installed and running on the database in
order to be able to get job logs and performance statistics. For more information see Job Monitor Installation
topic.
-272-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Job Monitor Installation
To install Job Monitor use the graphical DB Tools Database Setup utility. Follow instructions provided by the
Setup Wizard.
DB Job Expert is built around Oracle scheduling API provided in the standard DBMS_JOB package. In
certain cases, DB Job Expert can use functions from the system undocumented DBMS_IJOB package.
These functions allow SYS user to modify, disable, drop and run jobs that belong to other database users.
Before you start using scheduling functions, make sure you have properly configured your Oracle job
queues and SNP background processes that actually run jobs. You must have at least one SNP process
running to execute your scheduled and queued jobs. Note that SNP processes will not execute job queues if
the database is in restricted mode. An instance can have up to 36 SNP background processes.
In order to use job queues you will need to set the following two INIT.ORA parameters:
1. JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES = n
Where n is how many SNP background processes you want running.
Default:
Range of values: 0…36
2. JOB_QUEUE_INTERVAL = n
Where n is the interval between wake-ups, in seconds, for the SNP background processes.
Default: 60
Range of values: 0…3600
Please be aware that if either JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES = 0 or JOB_QUEUE_INTERVAL = 0,
scheduled jobs will not run
See also:
Job Performance Statistics and Job Monitor Options
Job Performance Statistics and Job Monitor Options
Job Performance Statistics
Job Monitor collects statistics for every running job. It optionally collects overall system statistics during job
runs and during periods of time when no job is running. The job statistics are collected in the following
events:
•
Immediately after job start
•
One or more times during job run (the actual number of collection and their intervals depend on the
number of other simultaneously running jobs.
•
Immediately after job finish
The collected job statistics are used in a variety of DB Job Expert reports. Collected system statistics can be
used in custom build reports (you can use the Performance Library tools) to find windows in server heavy
processing so you can better balance database load created by jobs and other processes.
All collected statistics are written into the ORA_MONITOR.JOB_STAT table.
Not all statistics are available by default. Statistics such as CPU usage are available only when Oracle
TIMED_STATISTICS option is turned on. If you want to collect CPU and other timed statistics you must turn
on TIMED_STATISTICS option in INIT.ORA or each time the system starts turn them on using the following
command
ALTER SYSTEM SET timed_statistics=TRUE;
-273-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Job Monitor Options
To change Job Monitor parameters use Tools/Job Monitor Options menu in the DB Job Expert GUI
The following parameters can be changed.
1.
2.
3.
Job Check Interval -- This parameter defines job status check interval in seconds. High values may
result in poor statistics accuracy but lead to less CPU consumption. Cost of job status check
operation is roughly equivalent to the cost of select * from v$lock where type = 'JQ' query.
Recommended value is half of the average job duration.
Max Record Interval -- This parameter defines in seconds maximum period of time to collect and
record all jobs & system statistics to the repository table JOB_STAT. It is also maximum period of
time for the monitor job to be inactive in the job queue. High values result in lazy detection of new
jobs. Low values result in extra CPU usage and increased size of the repository table.
Record System Statistics (Yes/No) -- This parameter controls whether the job monitor should also
record system statistics between and during job runs. This information can be used in finding
windows for job runs and other job performance analyses.
Important Note: The statistics collected by the Job Monitor are as accurate as accurate are settings for
the Job Monitor job (see job_monitor.start_monitor job on the following picture). If the Job Monitor settings
are incorrect it may lead to a situation when the Job Monitor will miss important jobs.
Job Profiler
The Job Profiler is the tool within DB Job Expert that is capable to retrieve, display and analyze job
performance statistics collected by the Job Monitor.
-274-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Navigation Techniques
The Job Profiler GUI consists of two parts:
•
The tree-view on the left-hand of the Job Profiler window presents jobs grouped by job owners.
•
The grid-view displays collected job performance statistics for a job if a job is selected in the treeview or it displays complete statistics for all jobs if the very first item [All jobs] is selected in the
tree-view.
If in your database you have many frequently running jobs, there could be a lot of the job performance data
collected. To reduce the number of rows retrieved to the screen use the Start Date filed displayed on the top
of the Job Profiler window to set a filter for the output.
Remember that while the main menu contains almost all controls and functions available in DB Job Expert,
only the context-sensitive menus allow performing context operations such as Print and Print Preview. In
other words, if you right-click the tree-view and then select the Print command from the popup context
menu, this will print the contents of the tree-view, but If you right-click the grid-view and then select the
Print command from the popup context menu, this will print the contents of the grid view.
Job Reports
DB Job Expert currently supports 10 different job forecasting, job performance and job troubleshooting
reports. Each report can be viewed and printed from the Report window. Most of these reports are based on
the job performance statistics collected by the Job Monitor package.
The following reports are available:
Job Forecast
Job Resource Consumption
-275-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Job Performance & Trends
Job Timing and Conflicts
Database Load Balancing (Job Distribution)
Database Load Balancing (CPU Load)
Top 10 Job by CPU Usage
Top 10 Job by Memory Usage
Top 10 Job by Sorts
Top 10 Job by Disk I/O
You can use them to forecast jobs, spot job trends, tune and troubleshoot jobs, and provide others with
information through printing. Click on a report name in the list above for more information.
Tips:
•
Most reports use job performance data for job processing analysis. This data is not available
automatically. To allow job performance data collection you must install the back-end Job Monitor
package and jobs. Do not run repots immediately after you install these objects. Wait as long as
necessary for each job to run at least 4-5 times. This will allow the Job Monitor to gather sufficient
volume of job performance data for an accurate job analysis. Do not force/trigger jobs manually for the
purpose of performance data collection, as it will lead to inaccurate reports. The accuracy of job reports
is proportional to the volume of gathered data. Longer you wait, more jobs run, and more valuable job
performance data can be gathered.
•
Job performance data is stored in the ORA_MONITOR.JOB_STAT table. If for some reasons you
cannot find a pre-built job report that fits your needs, feel free to create your own reports using the
Performance Library tools. For description and usage of JOB_STAT table see source code for the Job
Monitor package provided with DB Tools.
Viewing reports:
1
In the Report menu, choose the type of report you want. The report window will appear.
2
If the selected report analyses historical job performance data, you will be prompted to choose time
interval for the analysis. Select the required interval from the drop-down list and click OK.
3
You can use the Zoom feature to zoom in and out. You can either select one of the predefined
values in the zoom drop-down box or type in the value you want then press the Enter key.
Printing reports:
1
Run report as described above.
2
When the report is ready, click the Print
main menu
toolbar button or select File/Print command from the
-276-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Refreshing reports data:
1
Click the Refresh
toolbar button or select View/Refresh command from the main menu.
2
If the selected report analyses job performance data, you will be prompted to choose time interval
for the analysis. Select the required interval from the drop-down list and click OK.
Job Forecast Report
This report calculates 7-day job forecast for all enabled job. This report can help you identify jobs you can
expect to run during the forecast period.
Frequently running jobs with less than 15 minutes recursion interval are not shown on this report in order to
improve the report's readability. You would know about these jobs anyway.
The report presents calculated data by day of week, sorted by job forecasted start time
Job Resource Consumption Report
This report is based on statistical analysis of job performance data collected by the Job Monitor.
This report shows trend chart for the total system load created by all background jobs that ran during the
selected report period and also shows the system load created by individual jobs. You can use this report for
the following purposes:
1
To identify jobs consuming lots of system resources.
2
To evenly distribute your system load between different jobs and applications so that the resource
intensive applications do not run at the same time. This information can help you in improving the
overall system performance, improving application response times and meeting required service levels.
The chart is scaled to fit the selected report period. You can try different report periods to see how the
system is loaded over different periods of time. Be aware that selecting longer report periods allows
more job runs to be analyzed and thus it improves the report accuracy, but it can also increase the
report calculation time.
The following columns and values are displayed on the report
CPU Usage (chart) – Total CPU time spent for executing jobs
Time (chart) – System time
Job ID – Unique job ID in the database
Job SQL – The job To-Do
Schema – The name of the schema containing major job object
Total Executions – Number of times the job was executed during the selected report period
Average CPU Time – The average CPU time spent per job run during the selected report period
Total CPU Time - Total CPU time spent for all job runs during the selected report period
Tips:
It is a good idea to run Job Timing and Conflicts and Server Load Balancing reports that together with Job
Resource Consumption Report will provide you with a complete picture of the system load and thus allow
you to figure out how to use your system more efficiently.
Note:
Failed jobs and jobs whose execution took less than 1 second of CPU time are NOT included in this report
-277-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Job Performance and Trends Reports
This report calculates charts for top 20 jobs whose run-time duration have changed during the selected
report period. This report is based on statistical analysis of job performance data collected by the Job
Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
Identifying jobs whose run-time duration significantly changed from run-to-run during the chosen report
period.
2
Identifying job duration trends (i.e., how quickly the duration changes over time) and thus you can use
this information to forecast future durations.
You should choose a meaningful time interval for the report to allow the analyzed jobs to run for at least 4-5
times. Keep in mind that the trend-chart accuracy for each job highly depends on the number of successful
job runs during the chosen report period.
Jobs with less than 3 executions during the chosen report period are ignored when the report is built.
The chart is scaled to fit the selected report period. You can try different report periods. Be aware that
selecting longer report periods allows more job runs to be analyzed and thus it improves the report
accuracy, but it can also increase the report calculation time.
The following values are displayed on the report
Duration – Job duration in seconds
Time – System time
Legend – Chart legend that shows up to 20 jobs presented on the chart. Each legend label contains both
job ID and job SQL.
Colored solid lines on the chart indicate actual job durations over time. Colored dashed lines on the chart
indicate job duration trends. Job trend lines are built using simple linear regression model. Both actual and
trend lines are drawn using the same unique color assigned to each job.
Job Timing and Conflicts Report
This report calculates Gantt chart for all jobs that ran during the selected report period. This report is based
on statistical analysis of job performance data collected by the Job Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
To identify concurrent or conflicting jobs, those that happen to run at the same time or delay other jobs.
This information can help you in job troubleshooting.
2
To determine time windows when the system is not busy executing jobs or executing too many jobs
simultaneously. You can use this information for the system load balancing.
3
This report also complements Job Resource Consumption report and both reports can be used to
identify jobs that cause high system load. However, keep in mind that the Job Timing and Conflicts
report charts job executing times, and NOT job CPU usage time. Long running jobs do not always take
a lot of system resources.
The chart is scaled to fit the selected report period. You can try different report periods. Be aware that
large report periods may prevent you from seeing jobs whose duration is very small as compared to
the chosen report period. If the chart appears empty try selecting smaller report period.
The following values are displayed on the report
Time – System time
Job ID – Unique job ID in the database
-278-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Legend – The chart legend describing the selected database server. Future versions of this report may
display side-by-side statistics from different servers.
Database Load Balancing Report (Job Distribution)
This report is based on statistical analysis of job performance data collected by the Job Monitor. This report
can be helpful if you have numerous database jobs running on your server. The Database Load Balancing
Report can help you identify time windows with low server utilization and schedule new or modify existing
jobs to run during these times.
The report contains two types of load charts: the "load by day of week" chart and the "load by time of day"
chart. Both charts display database utilization as a percent of all jobs executed during the chosen report
period.
Each chart is calculated using job performance data for the chosen report period. You can try different report
periods. Be aware that selecting longer report periods allows more job runs to be analyzed and thus
it improves the report accuracy, but it can also increase the report calculation time.
The following values are displayed on the report
Time – Time of day (1 day scale, 24 hours)
% of All Jobs – The relative number of concurrent jobs running at a given point of time. This is calculated
as a percent value using the following formula:
1 – number of concurrent jobs over total number of jobs that were run during the chosen report period
•
On the "load by time of day" chart this percent value is shown as a function of time of day (chart X axis
scale: 24 hours; chart Y axis scale: 0 – 100%).
•
On the "load by day of week" chart this percent value is shown as a function of day of week time of day
(chart X axis scale: 178 hours which is 7 days * 24 hours in each day; chart Y axis scale: 0 – 100%).
Database Load Balancing Report (CPU Load)
This report is based on statistical analysis of job performance data collected by the Job Monitor. This report
can be helpful if you have numerous database jobs running on your server. The Database Load Balancing
Report can help you identify time windows with low server utilization and schedule new or modify existing
jobs to run during these times.
The report contains two types of load charts: the "load by day of week" chart and the "load by time of day"
chart. Both charts display database utilization as a percent of all jobs executed during the chosen report
period.
Each chart is calculated using job performance data for the chosen report period. You can try different report
periods. Be aware that selecting longer report periods allows more job runs to be analyzed and thus
it improves the report accuracy, but it can also increase the report calculation time.
The following values are displayed on the report
Time – Time of Week (7 days, 24 hours in each day)
CPU Load – The CPU usage by all running jobs at a given point of time. The CPU Load is calculated as a
percent of machine CPU time allocated for processing of active jobs over duration of these job runs.
•
On the "load by time of day" chart the CPU Load value is shown as a function of time of day (chart X
axis scale: 24 hours; chart Y axis scale: 0 – 100%, where 0 value means no job processing occurs and
100% means maximum job processing, in other words all CPU time is completely dedicated to the job
processing and nothing is left for other processes).
•
On the "load by day of week" chart the CPU Load value is shown as a function of day of week time of
-279-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
day (chart X axis scale: 178 hours which is 7 days * 24 hours in each day; chart Y axis scale: 0 – 100%,
where 0 value means no job processing occurs and 100% means maximum job processing, in other
words all CPU time is completely dedicated to the job processing and nothing is left for other
processes).
Important Notes:
•
If the Record System Statistics option is not enabled, the Database Load Balancing Report does
not take into account system statistics that could be collected by the Job Monitor. Both charts
display only one CPU Load series for jobs statistics only, not including any other processing. You
can compare this report against Database Load Balancing Report for applications, which is a part
of the DB Application Expert to get the complete picture of your server load.
•
If the Record System Statistics option is enabled, Both charts display 2 series – one series for the
CPU load caused by jobs only and another series is for the overall database load including jobs
and all other processing.
Top 10 Jobs by CPU Usage
This report presents several CPU usage charts. This report is based on statistical analysis of job
performance data collected by the Job Monitor.
Important Note: This reports requires that TIMED_STATISTICS option was enabled in the database
during the selected report period
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
To identify top 10 CPU consuming jobs. This information can help you in job troubleshooting.
2
This report also complements Job Resource Consumption report and both reports can be used to
identify jobs that cause high system load. However, keep in mind that the Job Timing and Conflicts
report charts job executing times, and NOT job CPU usage time. Long running jobs do not always take
a lot of system resources.
The Total CPU Usage chart displays CPU usage (CPU time allocated) during the selected report period by
all top 10 jobs.
The Average CPU Load chart displays average CPU usage during the selected report period for all top 10
jobs. The load is calculated as a ratio of job CPU time over job duration.
The Average CPU Usage per Run chart displays average CPU usage (CPU time allocated) during the
selected report period for all top 10 jobs.
The Maximum CPU Usage chart displays high water mark for CPU usage (CPU time allocated) during the
selected report period for all top 10 jobs.
The following values are displayed on the report
CPU Usage – seconds
CPU Load – as percent of job CPU time over job duration
Job ID – Unique job ID in the database
Legend – The chart legend describes job ID and job SQL.
Top 10 Jobs by Memory Usage
This report presents memory usage chart for jobs that ran during the selected report period. This report is
based on statistical analysis of job performance data collected by the Job Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
-280-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
1
To identify top 10 memory consuming jobs. This information can help you in job troubleshooting.
2
This report also complements Job Resource Consumption report and other Top 10 Jobs reports.
The following values are displayed on the report
Memory Load – The peak amount of memory allocated for the job session during job run. This includes
both PGA and UGA memory.
Job ID – Unique job ID in the database
Legend – The chart legend describes job ID and job SQL.
Top 10 Jobs by Sorts
This report calculates 2 charts for jobs that ran during the selected report period. This report is based on
statistical analysis of job performance data collected by the Job Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
To identify top 10 resource consuming jobs. This information can help you in job troubleshooting.
2
This report also complements Job Resource Consumption report and other Top 10 Jobs reports.
The Top 10 Jobs by Number of Sorted Rows chart displays number or sorted rows by job during the
selected report period for top 10 jobs.
The Sorts Detail chart displays for every top job breakdown by sorts in memory vs. sorts on disk for top 10
jobs.
The following values are displayed on the report
Rows Sorted – The number of sorted rows.
Sorts (disk/memory) – The number of sort operations.
Job ID – Unique job ID in the database
Legend – The chart legend describes job ID and job SQL.
Top 10 Jobs by Disk I/O (Input/Output)
This report calculates 2 charts for jobs that ran during the selected report period. This report is based on
statistical analysis of job performance data collected by the Job Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
3
To identify top 10 resource consuming jobs. This information can help you in job troubleshooting.
4
This report also complements Job Resource Consumption report and other Top 10 Jobs reports.
The Top 10 Jobs by Disk I/O chart displays top 10 jobs that caused most input output operations during the
selected report period.
The Job I/O Detail chart displays for every top job breakdown by Logical I/O vs. Physical I/O that required
disk access.
The following values are displayed on the report
I/O – The number of logical and physical input/output operations in thousands
Job ID – Unique job ID in the database
Legend – The chart legend describes job ID and job SQL.
-281-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Application Expert
Overview
DB Application Expert is an advanced database application monitoring and profiling tool. DB Application
Expert is best used for monitoring front-end applications connected to Oracle databases. This tool
compliments DB Job Expert that can be used to monitor Oracle back-end applications.
The graphical interface of DB Application Expert provides an enterprise view for quick, clear inspections of
•
Applications working with the database
•
Users who run these applications
•
Computers that connect to the database server
•
SQL executed by monitored applications
•
Locks created by these applications and their impact on other applications
•
Objects accessible by these applications
•
Database performance and load analysis from an application point of view
•
Many other application-level performance statistics that can be used for application analysis and
troubleshooting
The back-end Application Monitor - monitoring and profiling package instantly monitors running applications
and collects their performance statistics, resource usage, object access, SQL, locks and so on. The
collected statistics are used in a variety of DB Application Expert reports that range from Application Locks
and Conflicts to Top 10 Applications by CPU Usage and so on.
In addition to the Application Monitor package the DB Application Expert provides a set of back-end jobs that
must be installed in the database in order to use advanced DB Application Expert features such as
Application Profiler and application performance reports. The Application Monitor package is used to monitor
active applications and collect application performance statistics. The Application Profiler uses collected
application performance data in most DB Application Expert Reports. The collected data can be also used
as a complete application audit log.
DB Application Expert is built around Oracle scheduling API provided in the standard DBMS_JOB package.
Before you start using DB Application Expert back-end components and jobs, make sure you have properly
configured your Oracle job queues and SNP background processes that actually run jobs. You must have at
least one SNP process running to execute your scheduled and queued jobs. Note that SNP processes will
not execute job queues if the database is in restricted mode. An instance can have up to 36 SNP
background processes.
In order to use job queues you will need to set the following two INIT.ORA parameters:
1. JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES = n
Here n is how many SNP background processes you want running.
Default: 10
Valid range of values: 0…36
2. JOB_QUEUE_INTERVAL = n
Where n is the interval between wake-ups, in seconds, for the SNP background processes.
Default: 60
Valid range of values: 0…3600
Please be aware that if either JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES = 0 or JOB_QUEUE_INTERVAL = 0,
scheduled Application Monitor jobs will not run
See the following topics for more information on DB Application Expert
Application Monitor Console
Application Monitor Installation
-282-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Application performance statistics and Application Monitor Options
Application Performance Reports
Application Monitor Console
The Application Monitor Console is a visual monitoring tool you can use to inspect currently active
applications and historical statistics collected by the back-end Application Monitor package.
The Application Monitor Console is automatically started when DB Application Expert GUI is started.
Navigation Techniques
The Application Monitor Console allows two different ways of viewing and application statistics:
The tree-view on the left-hand of the console window presents applications grouped by the entry-point
application executable file name.
The grid-view displays various applications statistics. The right-pane has two tab pages: Now – statistics for
currently active applications and History – historical statistics for all applications that have run in the
database since the Application Monitor back-end job was installed and activated or since the last time
Application Monitor repository tables were reset whatever was last. To view various groups of statistics
select the appropriate statistics group on the left pane.
Tips:
Select [All Applications] item on the left pane and then switch to the History tab on the right pane to view
averages and totals of various application performance parameters for all database applications. This view
can help you see which application(s) are most common and how they affect your database performance.
Select the required application name on the left pane and then switch to the History tab on the right pane to
view detailed statistics for each run of the selected application
Select the required group of statistics (such as Locks, Users, etc…) for the required application on the left
pane and then switch to the History tab on the right pane to view detailed information for the selected
category.
You may access navigation controls through the main menus, at the top of the Application Monitor Console
window; through the toolbar, which allows you to manipulate applications in the tree-view; or through the
context-sensitive menu that appears when you right-click an item in the tree-view or in the grid-view. All
-283-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
methods allow you to choose such functions as print, zoom, expand, refresh, filter or sort, and other. The set
of enabled functions depends on the type of selected item and may differ for different items.
Remember that while the main menu contains almost all controls and functions available in DB Application
Expert, only the context-sensitive menus allow performing context operations such as Print and Print
Preview. In other words, if you right-click the tree-view and then select the Print command from the popup
context menu, this will print the contents of the tree-view, but If you right-click the grid-view and then select
the Print command from the popup context menu, this will print the contents of the grid view.
Application Monitor Installation
To install Application Monitor use the graphical DB Tools Database Setup utility. Follow instructions provided
by the Setup Wizard.
Application Monitor is built around Oracle scheduling API provided in the standard DBMS_JOB package.
Before you start using DB Application Expert back-end components and jobs, make sure you have properly
configured your Oracle job queues and SNP background processes that actually run jobs. You must have at
least one SNP process running to execute your scheduled and queued jobs. Note that SNP processes will
not execute job queues if the database is in restricted mode. An instance can have up to 36 SNP
background processes.
In order to use job queues you will need to set the following two INIT.ORA parameters:
1. JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES = n
Here n is how many SNP background processes you want running.
Default: 10
Valid range of values: 0…36
2. JOB_QUEUE_INTERVAL = n
Here n is the interval between wake-ups, in seconds, for the SNP background processes.
Default: 60
Valid range of values: 0…3600
Please be aware that if either JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES = 0 or JOB_QUEUE_INTERVAL = 0,
scheduled Application Monitor jobs will not run
See also: Application performance statistics and Application Monitor Options topic.
Application Performance Statistics and Application
Monitor Options
Application Performance Statistics
Application Monitor collects statistics for every running application that has duration less or equal to restart
interval of the app_monitor.start_monitor job scheduled to run in the database. By default the job restart
interval is 10 seconds, which should suite in most environment, does not cause any significant load on the
database and be short enough for monitoring any significant application. You can change this job restart
interval using the DB Job Expert. High values may result in poor statistics accuracy but cause insignificant
CPU consumption, on the other hand low values may result in good statistics accuracy but cause significant
CPU consumption. There is no recommended value for the restart value because the optimal value of this
-284-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
parameter is highly depended on your database system usage, hardware and software platform and many
other factors. Use the DB Job Monitor to determine whether the application monitor job creates too much
load on the database then you can anticipate. Try to keep this value as small as possible without causing
much load.
The Application Monitor can also optionally collect overall system statistics during application runs and
during periods of time when no application is running.
You can choose and pick which application performance statistics you want to collect using the Application
Monitor Options (Tools/Application Monitor Options menu).
The collected statistics are used in a variety of DB Application Expert reports. Collected system statistics
can be used in custom build reports (you can use the Performance Library tools) to find windows in server
heavy processing so you can better balance database load created by these application, back-end database
jobs and other processes.
All collected statistics are written into the following Application Monitor repository tables:
ORA_MONITOR.APP_STATS
ORA_MONITOR.APP_NAMES
ORA_MONITOR.APP_LOCKS
ORA_MONITOR.APP_LOCK_WAITS
ORA_MONITOR.APP_OBJECTS
ORA_MONITOR.APP_SQL
ORA_MONITOR.APP_STATS_CONFIG
Not all statistics are available by default. Statistics such as CPU usage are available only when Oracle
TIMED_STATISTICS option is turned on. If you want to collect CPU and other timed statistics you must turn
on TIMED_STATISTICS option in INIT.ORA or each time the system starts turn them on using the following
command
ALTER SYSTEM SET timed_statistics=TRUE;
Application Monitor Options
To change Application Monitor parameters use Tools/Application Monitor Options menu in the DB
Application Expert GUI
The following parameters can be changed.
Record Performance Statistics (Yes/No) -- This parameter controls whether you want to collect general
application performance statistics such as CPU and memory usage, run-times, number of performed sorts,
number of created logical and physical I/O operations and other similar statistics.
Record Users (Yes/No) -- This parameter controls whether you want to collect name of database and
operating system users who run database applications and also names of computers where these front-end
application are installed and run.
Record Objects (Yes/No) -- This parameter controls whether you want to collect names and types of
database objects accessible by applications
Record Locks (Yes/No) -- This parameter controls whether you want to monitor and collect locks created by
database applications including how these locks affect other applications and processes.
Record Users (Yes/No) -- This parameter controls whether you want to collect name of database and
operating system users who run database applications and also names of computers where these front-end
application are installed and run.
Record SQL (Yes/No) -- This parameter controls whether you want to collect application SQL statements.
Record System Statistics (Yes/No) -- This parameter controls whether the Application Monitor should also
record system statistics between and during application runs. This information can be used in finding
windows for application runs and other application performance analyses.
Important Note: The statistics collected by the Application Monitor are as accurate as accurate are
settings for the Application Monitor job (see app_monitor.start_monitor job on the following picture). If the
job settings are incorrect it may lead to a situation when the Application Monitor will miss important
applications, application statistics and/or SQL statements executed by these applications.
-285-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Application Performance Reports
DB Application Expert currently supports 11 different application performance and application
troubleshooting reports. Each report can be viewed and printed from the Report window. These reports are
based on the application performance statistics collected by the Application Monitor package.
The following reports are available:
Application Profiler Statistics (by Application)
Application Profiler Statistics (by User)
Application Profiler Statistics (by Terminal / Workstation)
Application Resource Consumption
Application Performance & Trends
Application Locks and Conflicts
Database Load Balancing
Top 10 Applications by CPU Usage
Top 10 Applications by Memory Usage
Top 10 Applications by Sorts
Top 10 Applications by Disk I/O
You can use them to monitor applications and users, spot application trends, tune and troubleshoot
applications, troubleshot database locks and resource usage, and provide others with information through
printing. Click on a report name in the list above for more information.
Tips:
•
Most reports use application performance data for application processing analysis. This data is not
available automatically. To allow application performance data collection you must install the back-end
Application Monitor package and job. Do not run repots immediately after you install these back-end
components. Wait as long as necessary for each application to run at least 4-5 times. This will allow the
Application Monitor to gather sufficient volume of application performance data for an accurate
application analysis. Do not force/trigger applications manually for the purpose of performance data
collection, as it will lead to inaccurate reports. The accuracy of reports is proportional to the volume of
gathered data. Longer you wait, more applications run, and more valuable application performance data
can be gathered.
•
Application performance data is stored in the ORA_MONITOR.APP_STAT table. If for some reasons
you cannot find a pre-built application report that fits your needs, feel free to create your own reports
using the Performance Library tools. For description and usage of Application Monitor repository tables
see source code for the Application Monitor package provided with DB Tools.
-286-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Viewing reports:
4
From the Report menu, choose the type of report you want. The report window will appear.
5
If the selected report analyses historical application performance data, you will be prompted to
choose time interval for the analysis. Select the required interval from the drop-down list and click
OK.
6
You can use the Zoom feature to zoom in and out. You can either select one of the predefined
values in the zoom drop-down box or type in the value you want then press the Enter key.
Printing reports:
3
Run report as described above.
4
When the report is ready, click the Print
main menu
toolbar button or select File/Print command from the
Refreshing reports data:
1
Click the Refresh
2
If the selected report analyses application performance data, you will be prompted to choose time
interval for the analysis. Select the required interval from the drop-down list and click OK.
toolbar button or select View/Refresh command from the main menu.
Application Resource Consumption Report
This report is based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application
Monitor.
This report shows trend chart for the total system load created by all applications that ran during the
selected report period and also shows the system load created by individual applications. You can use this
report for the following purposes:
3
To identify applications consuming lots of system resources.
4
To evenly distribute your system load between different applications so that the resource intensive
applications do not run at the same time. This information can help you in improving the overall system
performance, improving application response times and meeting required service levels.
The chart is scaled to fit the selected report period. You can try different report periods to see how the
system is loaded over different periods of time. Be aware that selecting longer report periods allows
more application runs to be analyzed and thus it improves the report accuracy, but it can also
increase the report calculation time.
-287-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The following columns and values are displayed on the report
CPU Usage (chart) – Total CPU time spent for executing applications
Time (chart) – System time
Application ID – The unique pseudo ID of a monitored application
Program Name – The name of the main application program module (as reported buy Oracle)
Total Executions – Number of times the application was executed during the selected report period
Average CPU Time – The average CPU time spent per application run during the selected report period
Total CPU Time - Total CPU time spent for all application runs during the selected report period
Tips:
It is a good idea to run Application Locks and Conflicts, which together with Job Resource Consumption
Report will provide you with a complete picture of the system load and thus allow you to efficiently allocate
system's CPU time and other resources.
Note:
Applications whose execution took less than 1 second of CPU time are NOT included in this report
Application Performance and Trends Reports
This report presents trend-line charts for top 20 applications whose average run-time duration have changed
during the selected report period. This report is based on statistical analysis of application performance data
collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
3
Identifying applications whose run-time duration significantly changed from run-to-run during the chosen
report period.
4
Identifying application duration trends (i.e., how quickly the duration changes over time) and thus you
can use this information to forecast future durations.
You should choose a meaningful time interval for the report to allow the analyzed applications to run for at
least 4-5 times. Keep in mind that the trend-chart accuracy for each application highly depends on the
number of successful application runs during the chosen report period.
Applications with less than 3 executions during the chosen report period are ignored when the report is built.
The chart is scaled to fit the selected report period. You can try different report periods. Be aware that
selecting longer report periods allows more application runs to be analyzed and thus it improves the
report accuracy, but it can also increase the report calculation time.
The following values are displayed on the report
Duration – Application duration in seconds
Time – System time
Legend – Chart legend that shows up to 20 applications presented on the chart. Each legend label contains
name of the main application executable module (as reported by Oracle).
Colored solid lines on the chart indicate actual application durations over time. Colored dashed lines on the
chart indicate application duration trends. Application trend lines are built using simple linear regression
model. Both actual and trend lines are drawn using the same unique color assigned to each application.
Application Locks and Conflicts Report
This report presents all locks that cause other processes to wait. The report includes only locks recorded
during the chosen report period. This report is based on statistical analysis of application performance data
collected by the Application Monitor.
-288-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
To identify concurrent or conflicting applications, those that happen to run at the same time or delay
other processes. This information can help you in application troubleshooting.
2
This report also complements Application Resource Consumption report and both reports can be used
to identify applications that cause high system load and affect other processing. However, keep in mind
that the Application Locks and Conflicts report shows lock times and durations. Long running
applications and long locks do not always take a lot of system resources and/or affect other
applications.
The following values are displayed on the report
Locking Program – The name of the main application executable program (as reported by Oracle) that
creates locks holding other processes.
Program – The name of the main application executable program (as reported by Oracle) that was waiting
to gain access to object locked by the Locking Program.
Start Time – The start time when the Program begin waiting to acquire access to the locked object(s).
End Time – The start time when the lock was released and the Program stopped waiting to acquire access
to the locked object(s).
Duration – The duration of the wait.
Object Type – The type of the object being locked by the Locking Program.
Object Name – The full name of the object being locked by the Locking Program.
Database Load Balancing Report
The Database Load Balancing Report can help you identify time windows of high and low server utilization
and setup new or modify existing applications to run during low utilization times. This report is based on
statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
The report contains two system load charts: the "load by day of week" chart and the "load by time of day"
chart. Both charts display summary database utilization (% of CPU time) for all applications executed during
the chosen report period.
Each chart is calculated using application performance data for the chosen report period. You can try
different report periods. Be aware that selecting longer report periods allows more application runs to
be analyzed and thus it improves the report accuracy, but it can also increase the report calculation
time.
The following values are displayed on the report
Time – Time of day (1 day scale, 24 hours)
CPU Load – The CPU usage by all running applications at a given point of time. The CPU Load is calculated
as a percent of machine CPU time allocated for processing of active applications over duration of these
application runs.
•
On the "load by time of day" chart the CPU Load value is shown as a function of time of day (chart X
axis scale: 24 hours; chart Y axis scale: 0 – 100%, where 0 value means no application processing
performed by the database and 100% means the maximum theoretical value for the CUP usage, in
other words all CPU time is completely dedicated to the application processing and nothing is left for
other processes).
•
On the "load by day of week" chart the CPU Load value is shown as a function of day of week time of
day (chart X axis scale: 178 hours which is 7 days * 24 hours in each day; chart Y axis scale: 0 – 100%,
where 0 value means no application processing occurs and 100% means maximum application
processing, in other words all CPU time is completely dedicated to the application processing and
nothing is left for other processes).
-289-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Important Note:
•
If the Record System Statistics option is not enabled, the Database Load Balancing Report does
not take into account system statistics that could be collected by the Application Monitor. Both
charts display only one CPU Load series for application statistics only, not including any other
processing. Compare this report against Database Load Balancing Report (CPU Load) for jobs,
which is a part of the DB Job Expert to get the complete picture of your server load.
•
If the Record System Statistics option is enabled, Both charts display 2 series – one series for the
CPU load caused by applications only and another series is for the overall database load including
applications and all other processing.
Top 10 Applications by CPU Usage
This report provides several different views focusing on top 10 applications that have consumed most CPU
during the chosen report period. This report is based on statistical analysis of application performance data
collected by the Application Monitor.
Important Note: This reports requires that TIMED_STATISTICS option was enabled in the database
during the analyzed report period
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
To identify top 10 CPU consuming applications. This information can help you in application
troubleshooting.
2
Together with the Application Resource Consumption report it can be used to identify applications
causing high system loads. However, keep in mind that the Application Resource Consumption report
charts application executing times, and NOT application CPU usage time. Long running applications do
not always take a lot of system resources.
The Total CPU Usage chart displays CPU usage (CPU time allocated) during the selected report period by
all top 10 applications.
The Average CPU Load chart displays average CPU usage during the selected report period for all top 10
applications. The load is calculated as a ratio of application CPU time over application duration.
The Average CPU Usage per Run chart displays average CPU usage (CPU time allocated) during the
selected report period for all top 10 applications.
The Maximum CPU Usage chart displays high water mark for CPU usage (CPU time allocated) during the
selected report period for all top 10 applications.
The following values are displayed on the report
CPU Usage – seconds
CPU Load – as percent of application CPU time over application duration
Program – The first 10 characters of name of the main application executable program (as reported by
Oracle).
Legend – The chart legend describes full program names.
Top 10 Applications by Memory Usage
This report calculates memory usage chart for applications that ran during the chosen report period. This
report is based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
To identify top 10 memory consuming applications. This information can help you in application
troubleshooting.
2
This report also complements Application Resource Consumption report and other Top 10 Applications
-290-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
reports.
The following values are displayed on the report
Memory Load – The peak amount of memory allocated for the application session during application run.
This includes both PGA and UGA memory.
Program – The first 10 characters of name of the main application executable program (as reported by
Oracle).
Legend – The name of the main application executable program (as reported by Oracle)
Top 10 Applications by Sorts
This report calculates 2 charts for applications that have run during the chosen report period. This report is
based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
To identify top 10 resource consuming applications. This information can help you in application
troubleshooting.
2
This report also complements Application Resource Consumption report and other Top 10 Applications
reports.
The Top 10 Applications by Number of Sorted Rows chart displays number or sorted rows by application
during the selected report period for top 10 applications.
The Sorts Detail chart displays for every top application breakdown by sorts in memory vs. sorts on disk for
top 10 applications.
The following values are displayed on the report
Rows Sorted – The number of sorted rows.
Sorts (disk/memory) – The number of sort operations.
Program – The first 10 characters of name of the main application executable program (as reported by
Oracle).
Legend – The name of the main application executable program (as reported by Oracle)
Top 10 Applications by Disk I/O (Input/Output)
This report calculates 2 charts for applications that have run during the chosen report period. This report is
based on statistical analysis of application performance data collected by the Application Monitor.
You can use this report for the following purposes:
1
To identify top 10 resource consuming applications. This information can help you in application
troubleshooting.
2
This report also complements Job Resource Consumption report and other Top 10 Applications reports.
The Top 10 Applications by Disk I/O chart displays top 10 applications that caused most input output
operations during the selected report period.
The Job I/O Detail chart displays for every top application breakdown by Logical I/O vs. Physical I/O that
required disk access.
The following values are displayed on the report
I/O – The number of logical and physical input/output operations in thousands
Program – The first 10 characters of name of the main application executable program (as reported by
Oracle).
Legend – The name of the main application executable program (as reported by Oracle)
-291-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Application Profiler Statistics (by Application)
This report shows application run statistics collected by the Application Monitor and Profiler. The statistics
are grouped by application program names. Each group includes program start time, run duration, name of
the database user, name of the operation system user running the application, terminal and/or workstation
name and other important performance parameters obtained from the V$SESSION dynamic performance
view for each reported application run. For more information on the performance parameters please refer to
your Oracle Database Administration Guide.
See also:
Application Profiler Statistics (by User)
Application Profiler Statistics (by Terminal / Workstation)
Application Profiler Statistics (by User)
This report shows application run statistics collected by the Application Monitor and Profiler. The statistics
are grouped by database user names. Each group includes program start time, run duration, name of the
database user, name of the operation system user running the application, terminal and/or workstation name
and other important performance parameters obtained from the V$SESSION dynamic performance view for
each reported application run. For more information on the performance parameters please refer to your
Oracle Database Administration Guide.
See also:
Application Profiler Statistics (by Application)
Application Profiler Statistics (by Terminal / Workstation)
Application Profiler Statistics (by Terminal / Workstation)
This report shows application run statistics collected by the Application Monitor and Profiler. The statistics
are grouped by names of terminals and workstations on which users run their database applications. Each
group includes program start time, run duration, name of the database user, name of the operation system
user running the application, terminal and/or workstation name and other important performance parameters
obtained from the V$SESSION dynamic performance view for each reported application run. For more
information on the performance parameters please refer to your Oracle Database Administration Guide.
See also:
Application Profiler Statistics (by Application)
Application Profiler Statistics (by User)
-292-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Test Data Generator
Test Data Generator Overview
Test Data Generator is a perfect tool for creating large volumes of meaningful data for performance testing,
quality assurance testing, usability analysis, and many other purposes.
Test Data Generator is able to automatically detect primary and foreign keys and without user intervention
generate test data that match all referential integrity constraints rules.
Test Data Generator can generate test data for all standard Oracle data types. You can customize the
default data generation rules on per-table-column basis to fit your specific business requirements.
Test Data Generator comes with a large set of pre-built data libraries of the most commonly used data
values including meaningful addresses, names, phone numbers, company names, industries, financial
terms, healthcare data, drugs, auto-parts and more. It also gives you the flexibility to create and modify your
own data libraries, create custom data generation rules, and specify existing database tables with real
business information as "lookup" data values for the newly generated data.
See also:
Working with Test Data Generator
Choosing Data Generation Method
Working With Data Generator
Test Data Generator uses the concept of a "run" for populating a single database table with a test data. A
run involves running the data generation process and inserting data to the selected table. To simplify data
generation process for multi-table environments Test Data Generator provides support for projects. Data
Generator projects allow grouping of related tables and persistently storing project configuration and data
generation rules in the database along with the development comments.
Opening an Existing Project for Modifications
1.
2.
Select File/Open Project menu (CTRL O keyboard shortcut). The Open Project dialog will appear.
Only projects associated with your user id will be displayed in the project tree.
Select the project you want to open and then click the Open button. The Project Tables dialog will
appear. Continue as needed.
Creating a New Project
In case if the Open Project dialog is not displayed:
1. Select File/New Project menu (CTRL N keyboard shortcut). The New Project dialog will appear.
2. Enter project name and optional comments. Although it is not required but it is highly recommended
to use unique project name (project name should be unique for your user id). Click the OK button.
The Project Tables dialog will appear. Continue as needed.
In case if the Open Project dialog is displayed:
1. Click the New Project button The New Project dialog will appear.
2. Enter project name and optional comments. Although it is not required but it is highly recommended
to use unique project name (project name should be unique for your user id). Click the OK button.
The Project Tables dialog will appear. Continue as needed.
-293-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Open Project dialog window
New project settings and all consecutive changes will be saved in the Test Data Generator's repository
tables. If these tables do not exist at the time you create your first project Test Data Generator will prompt
your permissions to install them. The repository tables can be also installed at any time using DB Tools
Database Setup utility.
The following image contains screenshot of a sample Test Data Generator project
-294-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Deleting an Existing Project
1.
2.
Select File/Open Project menu (CTRL O keyboard shortcut) to open an existing project. The Open
Project dialog will appear.
Select the project you want to delete and then click the Delete button. The Please Confirm
message box will appear. Click the YES button to confirm the deletion. This will delete the project
and its settings from the Test Data Generator repository tables.
Adding Tables to a Project
1.
2.
3.
Select File/Open Project menu (CTRL O keyboard shortcut) to open an existing project. The Open
Project dialog will appear.
Select the project you want to modify and then click the Open button. The Project Tables dialog
will appear.
Click the Add Tables button to add one or more tables to the opened project. The Select Tables
dialog will appear. Select one or more tables in that dialog and then click the OK button. The dialog
will close and all selected tables will appear in the table list.
Removing Tables from a Project
1.
Select File/Open Project menu (CTRL O keyboard shortcut) to open an existing project. The Open
Project dialog will appear.
-295-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2.
3.
4.
5.
User's Guide
Select the project you want to modify and then click the Open button. The Project Tables dialog
will appear.
Click on the name of the table you want to remove from your project.
Click the Delete Table button.
If you want to remove
Important Note: Removing a table from Test Data Generator's project does not physically destroy table
or table data in the database. It simply deletes appropriate records from the Test Data Generators'
repository tables.
Running Data Generation and Loading Process
1.
2.
3.
Select File/Open Project menu (CTRL O keyboard shortcut) to open an existing project. The Open
Project dialog will appear.
Select the project you want to run
Click the Run Project button.
In case if you run or rerun just one table select
1. Select File/Open Project menu (CTRL O keyboard shortcut) to open an existing project. The Open
Project dialog will appear.
2. Select the project whose table you want to run and expand the project tree
3. Select the required table
4. Click the Run Table button.
Table and Project data generation process can be also started from the Project Tables screen.
Data Generation Methods and Options
Truncate Table
This table-level option instructs Test Data Generator to truncate table data before inserting new test data.
Disable Triggers
This table-level option instructs Test Data Generator to temporarily disable all table triggers before inserting
new test data. All triggers are enabled back after the data generation process is complete.
Disabling triggers can improve data generation process the performance as well as avoid applying
unnecessary business logic to the newly inserted fresh data if such logic is provided in the database triggers
Important Note: Disabling table triggers only affects the table being populated with the test data. It does
not affect other tables in the database and it does not disable Oracle triggers facility.
Number of rows
This option controls how many rows are inserted into the table during test data generation process.
Load method
This option controls how test data is generated and inserted in to the target table. Two methods are
presently supported:
-296-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
•
FAST SCRIPT – this method instructs Test Data Generator to create dynamic stored procedure for
every selected table whose purpose is to generate the test data according to selected rules and
insert it into the table.
•
DATA LOAD – this method instructs Test Data Generator to generate and write test data into a disk
file then load the resulting file into the table.
Note: Because the loading method is specified on the table level you can pick different methods for
different tables.
Considerations for choosing optimal loading method
FAST SCRIPT Pros:
1. FAST SCRIPT is the most efficient for generating large volumes of data. This method is lighting
fast; usually 100,000 records can be created and inserted in a matter of several seconds.
FAST SCRIPT Cons:
1. FAST SCRIPT requires Oracle's DBMS_RANDOM package that must be installed in the database.
The mentioned package is normally available in Oracle database versions 8i and up.
2. Data generation process using FAST SCRIPT method cannot be interrupted using the front-end
interface. The only way to stop the process is to find and kill the database session.
3. FAST SCRIPT method runs completely on the back-end and because of that it cannot access Test
Data Generator's data libraries stored in data files on the front-end side.
DATA LOAD Pros:
1. DATA LOAD supports any Oracle database versions starting with 7.0 and up
2. Data generation process can be interrupted at any time by clicking the Cancel button on the
Progress dialog.
3. Rich data libraries can be used to generate realistic test data.
DATA LOAD Cons:
1. DATA LOAD is not efficient as FAST SCRIPT and requires significantly more time to populate large
volume tables because the data is first written to temporary files and then these files are inserted
record-by-record into their target tables.
2. DATA LOAD can lead to significant network traffic when sending millions of test records over the
SQL*Net connection to the database.
Column-level Options
Column-level data generation options and method vary for different column types. The following table
describes supported options:
Option
Name
Value Type
Choices
GENERATED
CONSTANT
NULL
FOREIGN
KEY TABLE
DATA
LOOKUP
TABLE DATA
Numeric
Data
Types
String
Data
Types
Date/Time
Data
Types
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Comments
Value is generated randomly or sequentially using
random number /text generator
User-defined constant value inserted into all table rows
Insert NULL
Lookup values in the referenced table. Lookup is
based on the random selection by picking random row
ID in the referenced tabled.
Look values in the user-defined lookup table and
column. Lookup is based on the random selection by
picking random row ID in the specified tabled.
-297-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
LOOKUP
FILE DATA
**The choice
depends on
the selected
Value Type
√
√
√
√
√
√
Constant
Value
Min Value
(Number)
User-defined
√
√
√
User-defined
√
Max Value
(Number)
User-defined
√
Min Value
(Date)
User-defined
√
Max Value
(Date)
User-defined
√
Include
Time
Yes/No
√
Prefix Text
User-defined
√
Suffix Text
User-defined
√
Text Case
UPPER
LOWER
MIXED
User-defined
√
Data Source
Text Length
√
Lookup values in the user-picked Data Generator's
data library
• When Value Type is GENERATED you can pick
either RANDOM or SEQUENCE as value data
source. RANDOM guarantees that generated
values are randomly generated using uniform
distribution model. SEQUENCE as value type
guarantees that generated values are produced as
uninterruptible set of sequential numbers or dates
or text values (text values are ended with a
sequential numeric suffix).
• When Value Type is CONSTANT or NULL this
option is not used.
• When Value Type is FOREIGN KEY TABLE
DATA this option is fixed and cannot be changed.
The value is always retrieved from the referenced
table and columns whose names are displayed in
<schema>.<table>.<column> format.
• When Value Type is LOOKUP TABLE DATA you
can pick any existing table and column in the
database as a data source. The selected lookup
reference is displayed in
<schema>.<table>.<column> format.
• When Value Type is LOOKUP FILE DATA you
can pick a column in any appropriate Data
Generator's data library. The selected lookup
reference is displayed in <file>.<column> format.
User-defined constant value
You can use Min/Max values to define range of
generated values. This option is only valid when the
Value Type is GENERATED.
You can use Min/Max values to define range of
generated values. This option is only valid when the
Value Type is GENERATED and the Data Source is
RANDOM.
You can use Min/Max values to define range of
generated values. This option is only valid when the
Value Type is GENERATED.
You can use Min/Max values to define range of
generated values. This option is only valid when the
Value Type is GENERATED and the Data Source is
RANDOM.
Instructs Test Generator to add random time to
generate date values. This option is only valid when
the Value Type is GENERATED and the Data Source
is RANDOM.
User-defined fixed leading text for all generated
values. This option is only valid when the Value Type
is GENERATED.
User-defined fixed trailing text for all generated values.
This option is only valid when the Value Type is
GENERATED.
Controls text case for generated values. This option is
only valid when the Value Type is GENERATED.
Overrides maximum length of the data value (as
compared to the column size). When generating test
data the Data Generator ensures that produced text
values are within the specified length limit. This option
is only valid when the Value Type is GENERATED.
-298-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Format
User-defined
√
Space
Padding
LEFT
NONE
RIGHT
√
Percent of
Nulls
0…100
√
√
√
Controls formatting applied to the generated number
before it is inserted into the database. If formatting
mask includes at least one # symbol Data Generator
applies the specified format mask to randomly or
sequentially generated values. # symbols are used for
numeric values, @ symbols are used for alpha values.
For example, to generate telephone numbers in (nnn)
nnn-nnnn format specify format mask as (###) #######. To generate product codes in 12ABC-XYZ
format specify 12 for the Prefix Text option, UPPER
for the Text Case option and finally specify @@@@@@ for the Format mask option.
This option is only valid when the Value Type is
GENERATED.
Controls space padding. If this option is not "NONE"
and the length of the generated value is less then the
number in Text Length column then DB Tools
automatically appends or prefixes additional spaces to
the generated value in order to make it long enough
This option is only valid when the Value Type is
GENERATED.
Instructs Data Generator to produce certain percent of
NULL values. By default Data Generator always
produces not NULL values. This option is not valid is
the column features NOT NULL check constraint.
Note: The amount of inserted NULL values is not
guaranteed to exactly match user-defined Percent of
Nulls
Data Libraries
Data Libraries are table-like files containing sets of commonly used values that you can use as data sources
during the generation process.
Test Data Generator allows you to pick any data column from any library as a data source for the value in a
column of the target table. In other words the set of columns in a library file does not need to match columns
in the target table because you specify value source for each column separately. Because of that a library
file containing 4 columns and 200 unique records can be used to produce 1552438800 data records from
the. Throwing in other columns with random or sequential values in the target table allows Test Data
Generator to produce virtually infinite number or records in any table. The real limitations here are really only
data type size constraints and business rules enforced by relational table constrains. For example if a
column in a single column table has data type NUMBER(3) and there is a unique constraint, index or
primary key defined on the table then only 999 unique rows can be inserted into the table (if not taking into
account rows with 0 and negative values).
The following data libraries are included in the software distribution package:
1.
Airport Data (total 267 unique records):
• Airport Name
• Airport Code
• Country Name
• Country Code
2.
Auto parts (total 171 unique records)
• Part Name
3.
Books – Oracle related (total 157 unique records)
-299-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
•
•
•
•
4.
User's Guide
Author Name(s)
Book Name
Cover Type
ISBN Number
Books by William Shakespeare (total 199 unique records)
Author Name(s)
Book Name
Cover Type
ISBN Number
•
•
•
•
5.
Fortune 500 Company Names (total 500 unique records)
• Company Name
6.
Computer Science Magazines (total 154 unique records)
• Publication Name
7.
Countries (total 240 unique records)
2-character Country Code
Country Name
•
•
8.
Denmark Cities (total 82 unique records)
• City Name
9.
Denmark States (total 16 unique records)
• State Name
10. European Colleges (total 1283 unique records)
• College Name
11. FDA Drugs and Components (total 3000 unique records)
• Application #
• Product #
• Form
• Dosage
• Product Marketing Status
• TE Code
• Reference Drug
• Drug Name
• Active Ingredient
12. French Postal Codes (total 44 unique records)
• City Name
• Postal Code
13. Medical Procedures (total 248 unique records)
• Procedure Code
• Procedure Description
14. Microprocessors (total 567 unique records)
• Processor Name
15. New York Streets (total 794 unique records)
• Street Name
16. People's Names - First and Last Name separately (total 500 unique records)
• First Name
-300-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
•
User's Guide
Last Name
17. People's Names – Full Name (total 500 unique records)
• Full Name
18. Periodic Table of Chemical Elements (total 109 unique records)
• Symbol
• Element Name
19. Sample Customers (total 99 unique records)
• Customer ID
• Company Name
• Contact Name
• Contact Title
• Address
• City
• Region
• Postal Code
• Country
• Phone
• Fax
20. Sample Orders (total 878 unique records)
• Order ID
• Customer
• Order Date
• Required Date
• Shipped Date
• Ship Via
• Freight
• Ship Name
• Ship Address
• Ship City
• Ship Region
• Ship Postal Code
• Ship Country
21. Sample Products (total 109 unique records)
• Product ID
• Product Name
• Supplier
• Category
• Quantity Per Unit
• Unit Price
• Units In Stock
• Units On Order
• Reorder Level
• Discontinued
22. Sample Suppliers (total 38 unique records)
• Company Name
• Contact Name
• Contact Title
• Address
• City
-301-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
•
•
•
•
•
•
User's Guide
Region
Postal Code
Country
Phone
Fax
Home Page
23. SIC Codes and Industry Names (total 443 unique records)
• SIC
• Industry Name
24. Stock Quotes – S&P 500 (total 500 unique records)
• Symbol
• Company
• Country
• GICS
• Sector
• Price
25. United Kingdom Cities (total 66 unique records)
• City Name
26. USA Counties (total 3092 unique records)
• County Name
• State Name
27. USA Holidays by Year (total 78 unique records)
• Date
• Holiday
28. USA Social Security Numbers (total 500 unique records, not in use SSN)
• SSN
29. USA States (total 500 unique records)
• 2-character State Code
• State Name
30. USA Zip Codes (total 3000 unique records)
• Zip
• State Code
• City Name
31. World Currencies (total 3007 unique records)
• 3-character Currency Code
• Country Name
• Currency Name
How Random Are Generated Random Values?
To ensure that generated random values are not pseudo-random and do not repeat every time you run the
load process DB Tools uses time functions to generate initial seed values for the random number
generators. The same method is used for both the back-end random number generator when using FAST
SCRIPT loading method and the front-end random number generator when using DATA LOAD loading
method.
-302-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Note: All mentioned methods use UNIFORM value distribution.
For your information: NORMAL distribution means that the outputs are distributed over a bell-shaped curve.
It usually has a zero average and a standard deviation of 1. NORMAL distribution is a good way of
describing the distribution of measurement errors. For example, if 0.5L bottles are filed with water with an
error of 0.01L (standard deviation) it can be seen that on average 68% of the bottles are within the margin of
error. Distribution is said to be UNIFORM if the probability of generating one value rather than another is the
same. This is what happens when throwing a dice. The probability of getting number 2 is the same as for
number 6.
-303-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Benchmark Expert
Overview
DB Benchmark Expert enables you to setup a benchmark test that you can use to measure performance of
your database doing on-line transaction processing work. This database benchmark test simulates a real
workload by allowing you to establish large number of concurrent connections performing user-defined
transactions simultaneously. This way you can simulate real database users running various database
transactions at a high rate performance. The benchmark rules do not necessary reflect your database realworld operations, however the benchmark takes into account real transactions made by other users while
the test is being performed. DB Benchmark Expert provides you with an option to customize transaction
involved in the test. Even if you use default settings, you can still use benchmark results for the performance
bottlenecks analysis and other feature-performance considerations.
Because of the number of various interrelated factors the benchmark results for your database may vary at
different times. Note that the following factors can significantly affect the results:
1. Server hardware configuration
2. Server Operation System configuration
3. Effective values of database instance parameters.
4. Real-world database workload at the time the benchmark is conducted.
5. Types of transactions and transaction specifics.
6. Number of concurrent connections.
7. Client workstation (benchmark host) performance.
8. Network traffic at the time the benchmark is conducted.
Running DB Benchmark Expert
The DB Benchmark Expert opens one or more simultaneous connections to the database. Each connection
is created in a separate thread. You specify number of connections, transaction types, and test interval on
the "step 2". All opened connections are used to run simultaneously the specified transactions. The order of
transactions is random. You can modify the SQL that will be used for transactions on the "step 3". Make
sure you specify valid SQL statements to achieve the correct results. The default benchmark settings and
phases are:
1. Create and populate transaction table OM_BENCH.
2. Open 10 connections then use all connections to run simultaneously transactions of SELECT,
INSERT, DELETE, and UPDATE types involving transaction table. This phase lasts 60 second.
3. Terminate all previously opened connections then drop transaction table.
4. Evaluate results and build TPS (transactions per second) graph.
Tip: To postpone the benchmark start until later time you can specify the required start time in the "step
2". This allows you to prepare several client computers to start benchmarking at the same time, spread the
load and therefore achieve better benchmark test quality eliminating the performance dependency related to
the performance of your computer from which you launch the test.
Before You Begin
You must have SELECT privileges on the following two dynamic performance tables: V$VERSION,
V$SYSSTAT. You must also have CREATE TABLE and DROP TABLE privileges. If you do not have
sufficient authority, ask your database administrator to grant you privileges mentioned before.
-304-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Before You Run DB Benchmark Expert
Choose SQL statements that you want to use for benchmarking. Best SQL statements for
benchmarking are these that generate more transactions rather then return or update more records. Queries
from your real applications are good candidates for using in performance testing, especially typical SQL
statements that run frequently and generate a moderate amount of logical I/O. Ideally you should run DB
Benchmark Expert with these queries periodically, perhaps, every week to monitor and compare changes in
your application performance and response times.
After You Ran DB Benchmark Expert
Do not rush to tune your database to improve benchmark results. Tuning a database is sometimes like
squeezing a balloon - reducing response time for one query often results in the increase of another.
Carefully consider your database goal and utilization before making any changes.
Supported Benchmark Types
The following types of benchmarking and load simulation are supported:
• Server relative performance (TPS) - you can use this benchmark type to measure your Oracle
database server relative performance and then use it as a benchmark for other Oracle servers. You
can use either pre-defined SQL queries to run this type of test of use your own. At the end of the
test, DB Benchmark Expert generates bar graph indicating the achieved TPS (transactions per
second) rate. Faster servers typically process more transactions and generate higher TPS
numbers.
• Server performance / load dependency - you can use this benchmark type to measure your
Oracle database server performance dependency for different numbers of concurrent user
sessions. Up to 4 pre-defined or user-supplied SQL queries can be used to run this type of test . At
the end of the test, DB Benchmark Expert generates line graph indicating the achieved TPS
(transactions per second) rate for different number of sessions. The graph can be also used to find
out your server optimal throughout.
• Application performance / load dependency - you can use this benchmark type to measure
your Oracle database server performance dependency for different numbers of concurrent user
sessions. This type is similar to the previous type, except that it allows you to specify virtually any
number of different queries that you want to use for the testing. It is your responsibility to provide
valid queries. At the end of the test, DB Benchmark Expert generates line graph indicating the
achieved TPS (transactions per second) rate for different number of sessions. The graph can be
also used to find out your server optimal throughout.
• Application load simulator – you can use this type for simulation your application running by
multiple concurrent user sessions and testing how your database server can deal with multiple
users. In other words, you can use this type of testing to make your Oracle server busy running
application queries and measure your server average response and transaction processing times.
This type also allows you to identify the slowest parts of the application code when running under
heavy load and multiple sessions. See the following section for more details
Using DB Benchmark as Application Load Simulation
Tool
In order to use DB Benchmark as an Application Load Simulation too, you should first prepare the
application queries to be used for simulation. In case you have access to the application source code, you
can copy most important queries from the source. If you don't have access to the source code, you can use
a variety of methods to obtain the SQL code. For example, you use the DB Application Expert module to
monitor your applications and to collect their SQL queries. You can then copy and paste these queries to DB
Benchmark.
-305-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Application Load Simulation is a simple and effective method that can provide meaningful answers to
complex questions about your system capacity, multi-user access, application locking and concurrency, and
other similar questions:
Typical questions that can be answered with the help of DB Benchmark's Application Load Simulation tool
include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
If transaction volume doubles or triples, can our system handle them?
How concurrent user sessions affect our application response time?
Can we safely add 50 more users to an existing server?
Will the application that we're thinking of acquiring work well for our company?
A locking problem reported in production environment cannot be easily reproduced in test
environment in which a single tester runs the application.
Which parts of our application perform worse in a multi-user environment and can cause
application locking.
Profiling Application Code in Load Simulation Mode
In Application Load Simulation mode, DB Benchmark can internally invoke PL/SQL Profiler for all launched
user sessions, and then analyze and aggregate the results.
In order to use the profiler option, you must first setup DB Tools SQL Profiler module. If you haven't done
this already, start the SQL Profiler and following the prompts.
To turn on the PL/SQL profiler in the Application Load Simulation mode, tick "Enable SQL profiling"
checkbox in the load test options.
At the end of the test run, the aggregated profile report will be displayed automatically within DB Benchmark
main window. The report will indicate top 20 code lines (in other words, operations) by their average
execution time. To get more or less meaningful results, it is recommended to use code units for the test that
involve execution of named units in the database, such as stored procedure or package calls, trigger
invocation, user-defined functions and other user-defined code-based units.
Tip: To review past Load Simulation results and to do detailed and comparative analysis, you can use
the DB Tools SQL Profiler module. DB Benchmark's generated Application Load Simulation tests are saved
automatically as SQL Profiler projects having names in the following format.
DB Benchmark Load Simulation [test start date and time]
Such names can be easily recognized in the list of SQL Profiler projects. Each user session used for the test
is saved as a separate run with the project. You can analyze individual sessions as well as compare their
performance and dependencies at the code unit and code line levels.
-306-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Zip/Unzip Expert
Overview
Have you ever used ZIP files? If so, you've probably encountered some Zip/Unzip utilities that provide easyto-use interface to handle these archived ZIP files. However, these utilities cannot handle data stored inside
databases. DB Zip/Unzip brings the convenience of these utilities to the world of Oracle databases. DB
Zip/Unzip is also a quick and easy way to migrate and backup data stored in your Oracle databases. With a
few mouse clicks you can now zip tables, schemas or even entire Oracle databases.
DB Zip/Unzip Expert also complements DB Copy Expert utility. While DB Copy Expert can be used to copy
data between 2 on-line Oracle databases, it cannot be used to unload the data into files, save them on some
media and then later restore it to the same or different database. As opposite to DB Copy Expert, DB
Zip/Unzip can be used for off-line data unloading and loading as well as for data archival purposes.
DB Zip features include:
•
DB Zip captures full table DDL including columns, storage options, constraints, indexes, triggers, grants,
and even table and column comments.
•
DB Zip is lighting fast, an average 100,000 rows table can be zipped on a Pentium II class computer in
just 2 minutes.
•
High compression level: many small and medium size schemas can fit on a single floppy disk.
•
DB Zip creates industry standard zip files that are compatible with most zip/unzip utilities.
•
Zip files containing compressed data allocate much less space than their tables of origin.
•
Zipped file can be copied or transferred using FTP or simply emailed to another office.
DB Unzip can be used to restore compressed tables and data. DB Unzip features include:
•
Compressed tables can be optionally unzipped to
1.
Another database
or
2.
Recreated in the same schema of the origin database
or
3.
•
Recreated in another schema of the origin database
Data from the zipped tables can be optionally
4.
Appended to already existing tables
or
5.
Used to replace contents of existing tables
or
6.
Inserted to existing tables having the same or different columns
•
Unzipping is as simple as zipping and can be performed with just a few mouse clicks.
•
All operations are completely logged.
-307-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Zipping Tables
Use the following steps to zip one or more database tables:
1.
Choose File/Zip-Unzip Wizard menu (Shortcut CTRL E). The DB Zip Wizard dialog will appear
2.
Click the Next button to advance to the next step.
3.
Enter Destination Zip File name. Type name of a new file or select an existing file.
Note: If you select an existing file this file will be overwritten.
4.
Specify source database connection parameters and then click the Next button. The Wizard will
display list of all database schemas.
5.
Select one or more schemas containing tables that you want to zip and then click the Next button
again.
6.
Select one or more tables that want to zip. To select multiple tables use common DB Tools
keyboard shortcuts involving SHIFT and CTRL keys. Click the Next button again
7.
Select appropriate zip method and additional zip options such as what parts of the table reverseengineered DDL script you want to add to the zip file. This DDL can be later used by DB Unzip
Wizard to restore the selected tables in the same or another Oracle database. Click the Next
button again.
-308-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Important Notes: DB Zip supports 2 different zip methods:
•
•
8.
"Fast" method uses tab-separated data format. This method is very fast, but it cannot be used
for tables containing binary data in text-like columns. If you pick "Fast" method for such tables
you will not be able later to unzip the resulting file and restore the original data completely.
"Slow" method uses binary data conversion and because of that it can be used to zip any data,
but it is generally takes more time for data compression and decompression.
Select data processing scope options and then click the Finish button. For more information about
these options see Using DB Zip/Unzip for Quality Assurance and Development topic.
After this step DB Zip will begin to zip selected tables.
Unzipping Tables
Use the following steps to unzip one or more database tables from a zip file previously created using DB Zip
Wizard:
1.
Choose File/Zip-Unzip Wizard menu (Shortcut CTRL E). The DB Zip Wizard dialog will appear.
2.
Select the Unzip option and click the Next button to advance to the next step.
9.
Enter Source Zip File name. Type name of an existing file or select an existing file previously
created using DB Zip Expert and then click the Next button to advance to the next step.
3.
Specify source database connection parameters and then click the Next button again.
4.
Select one or more tables that you want to unzip. If necessary correct their names as you want
them to appear in the target database. Click the Next button again.
Important Note: Target tables can have names and schemas different from their tables of
origin.
5.
Select any additional unzip options such as parts of table DDL you want recreate and how you
want to deal with existing tables that have the same name as tables being unzipped.
6.
Click the Next button again. After this step, DB Unzip will begin to unzip selected tables.
-309-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Using DB Zip/Unzip for Quality Assurance and
Development
DB Zip/Unzip is a very handy tool in Quality Assurance (QA) and Development environments because it
allows partial data export based on the user specified criteria and also because it can process entire
schemas at once. Here is why it is an essential to for all QA and developers:
•
Using DB Zip/Unzip Expert you can bring small subset of your production data (from your
Production database) to your QA or development environment in a matter of minutes.
•
Using DB Zip/Unzip Expert you can archive different sets of test and QA data to files and quickly
restore them whenever you need to test a different case or review a different scenario.
•
Using DB Zip/Unzip Expert you can temporarily archive data to files, then run your development
scripts to rebuild your database tables and after that use DB Zip/Unzip Expert again to restore the
data lost during table rebuilds or reorganizations.
The following screenshot demonstrates how to use advanced DB Zip options to archive data samples.
-310-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Copy Expert
Overview
DB Copy Expert is a must-have tool for every Oracle DBA and developer who works with multiple Oracle
databases. DB Copy Expert can be used in the following scenarios:
•
•
•
•
•
Copy one or multiple objects (Views, Procedures, Triggers, Indexes, etc…) from one database to
another.
Copy tables with and without data from one database to another.
Copy data samples – best for copying samples of production data to development or QA
environment.
Copy entire schema from one database to another. DB Copy Expert intelligently resolves schema
object dependencies and referential constrains and ensures that schema objects are copied in the
proper order.
Copy objects between different database versions. Copied objects are automatically downgraded
or upgraded depending on the version of the target database.
Best of all DB Copy Expert features intuitive graphical interface allowing to copy objects between databases
using convenient drag-and-drop methods that make copying objects and data between databases as simple
as copying files between folders using Windows Explorer.
Important Notes:
• In order to copy objects and data you must have sufficient privileges in both databases.
• Code-based objects (such as procedures, triggers, etc…) copied to another schema get compiled
in the target database using privileges of the user performing the copy process rather the target
schema owner.
• The copy operation will completely fail if you choose "copy storage settings" option for database
tables and the target tablespace does not exist or the owner of the target schema does not have
sufficient space quote for the target tablespace.
• You must have GRANT ANY privilege in order to copy object grants for objects in other database
schemas. Please note that by default this privilege is not given to anybody even not to the DBA
role. To obtain this privilege login to the database using the SYS user and grant this privilege to
yourself. You can use DB Consumer Expert or DB Security Expert to modify user privileges
graphically or you can simply execute GRANT GRANT ANY TO <user>; command in DB Tools
SQL Editor and Debugger.
• When copying database schemas DB Copy Expert attempts to resolve schema object
dependencies and referential constrains and copy objects in the proper order. However the copy
operation may fail if any object being copied references objects in some other schemas or has
circular dependencies.
Copying Objects and Schemas
Getting started
The first thing you should do after starting DB Copy Expert is to connect to the source and target database
systems. Until you connect to at least one database nothing is enabled in the DB Copy Expert graphical
interface.
On startup DB Copy Expert automatically opens the Database Object Navigator window. This window
features 2 panes - one for each database. It does not matter which pane you use for the source database
and which pane you use for target database. Objects can be copied both from left to right and from right to
left. Use the Connect
button displayed on top of each pane to connect to your database system.
Clicking on that button brings up DB Tools standard Connect To Database dialog. Pick different databases
-311-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
for each pane connection. If connection is successful DB Tools populates the active pane with name of
database schemas and their objects.
Sample Database Object Navigator screen follows.
Tip: Clicking on any schema or object in the left or right pane makes that pane and the associated
database connection "active". The name of the database server for the active connection is always
displayed in the DB Copy Expert title bar. All reports and tools you run using DB Copy Expert menus utilize
the active connection as their data source.
Copying database tables
1.
Open Database Object Navigator screen if it is not opened already.
2.
buttons. For example, use the left side of the screen
Connect to your databases using the Connect
to connect to your "source" database and right side of the screen to connect to your "target" database.
3.
On the left side of the screen ("source") locate the required schema in the database tree-view and
expand that schema folder
4.
If you are copying objects to an existing schema in the target database then you must select that
schema on the right side ("target") of the screen. If you are copying objects belonging to a schema,
which does not exist in the target database, and you want DB Tools to create that schema for you then
on the right side of the screen you must select the top item in the tree
database server name.
. This top item with the
5.
On the left side of the screen expand the TABLE folder and select the table you want to copy.
6.
Use either drag-and-drop or click the "copy to right" >> button to copy the selected table from the left
side of the screen to the selected schema (or database) on the right side of the screen. In response to
this action the DB Copy Wizard dialog will appear.
-312-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
7.
Confirm the copy operation by clicking the Next button. Check all options that you want to copy with the
table and then click the Next button again to advance to the next step.
8.
Select data processing options and method. If you don't want to copy table data check Do not copy
data option. When ready click the Next button again to advance to the next step.
Tip: DB Copy Expert supports 2 different copy methods:
•
INSERT/SELECT using temp database link – If this method is chosen DB Copy Expert will
create a temporary database link in the source database and then use that link to run INSERT
INTO <target table>@<link name> SELECT * FROM <source table> command in the source
database. This method that it can be used for both regular tables and object tables. The
disadvantage of this method is that it requires a temporary database link created for the
duration of the copy operation. This temporary link is not a "temporary" object from a
database point of view and during the copy operation other people can potentially use it
and gain temporary access to the target database. The link is automatically dropped after
the copy operation is complete.
-313-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
•
User's Guide
Export/import using external file – If this method is chosen DB Copy Expert internally uses
DB Zip Expert to export source table data to a temporary file and then import it to the target
table. This method can be used for regular tables only. The disadvantage of this method is
that it requires an temporary work-file created on your local disk for the data
export/import operation. If you are copying a lot of data using this method, make sure
you have sufficient free disk space to store the file. The file is automatically deleted after
the copy operation is complete.
Tip: For more information about supported data copy methods using export/import option
and details on copying data samplings, see Using DB Zip/Unzip for Quality Assurance and
Development topic.
9.
Specify appropriate error handling options and click the Next button to begin the copy process.
Important Notes:
If while copying a partitioned table you don't select the Copy partitions and subpartitions option DB Copy
Expert will then create the target table as a non-partitioned table and then attempt to copy data from all
partitions and subpartitions of the source table.
Also note that with partitioned tables you should not use the data sampling options for copying "First" and
"Last" records because these options will not work correctly as there are different sets of first and last
records for each partition and subpartition and the data copy operation is applied to the entire table.
Copying other objects
1.
Open Database Object Navigator screen if it is not opened already.
2.
Connect to your databases using the Connect
buttons. For example, use the left side of the screen
to connect to your "source" database and right side of the screen to connect to your "target" database.
3.
On the left side of the screen ("source") locate the required schema in the database tree-view and
expand that schema folder
4.
If you are copying objects to an existing schema in the target database then you must select that
schema on the right side ("target") of the screen. If you are copying objects belonging to a schema,
which does not exist in the target database, and you want DB Tools to create that schema for you then
on the right side of the screen you must select the top item in the tree
database server name.
. This top item with the
5.
On the left side of the screen expand the appropriate folder and select the object you want to copy.
6.
Use either drag-and-drop or click the "copy to right" >> button to copy the selected object from the left
side of the screen to the selected schema (or database) on the right side of the screen. In response to
this action the DB Copy Wizard dialog will appear.
7.
Confirm the copy operation by clicking the Next button. Check all options that you want to copy with the
selected object and then click the Next button again to advance to the next step.
8.
Specify appropriate error handling options and click the Next button to begin the copy process.
Copying groups of objects
DB Copy Expert can copy multiple objects of the same type in a single copy operation. Essentially the
processing in this case is the same as for a single object and requires exactly the same steps, which are
described in detail in the Copying database tables topic. The only difference is the step 5. On this step you
must select the entire folder for the object group (for example, TABLE folder or PROCEDURE folder) rather
then an individual object.
-314-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Tip: When copying groups of database objects DB Copy Expert attempts to resolve object
dependencies and referential constrains and copy objects in the proper order. However the copy operation
may fail if any object being copied references other objects that do not exist in the target database or has
circular dependencies.
Copying entire schemas
DB Copy Expert can copy an entire schema at once. Essentially the processing in this case is the same as
for a single object and requires exactly the same steps, which are described in detail in the Copying
database tables topic. The only difference is the step 5, which is not required when copying entire schemas.
Tip: When copying entire schemas DB Copy Expert attempts to resolve object dependencies and
referential constrains and copy objects in the proper order. However the copy operation may fail if any object
being copied references other objects in other schemas that do not exist in the target database or has
circular dependencies.
Reports
For your convenience DB Copy Expert provides a number of object summary and detail reports organized
by object type. Before running a report make sure to activate proper pane in the Database Object Navigator.
Depending on your selection DB Copy Expert will run reports using either "source" or "target" database
connection. The name of the database server associated with currently active connection is displayed in the
title bar of the main DB Copy Expert frame window.
Besides simple report viewing and printing, you can export report data to numerous file formats as well as
select and copy report data to the Windows clipboard for sharing with other applications. See Working with
data and export topic for help on how to export, copy, filter and sort report data. You can also right -click on
any report to get some additional features accessible from a popup menu that appears in response to the
click.
For most reports, DB Monitor Expert displays Select Schema dialog before retrieving the report. You can
check either Report All checkbox for all schemas, or select one or more schemas you want to add to the
chosen reports.
The following reports are available:
Objects Report
Reports summary data for different types of database objects.
Tables Report
Reports detailed information about all database tables. This report queries database repository table SYS.DBA_TABLES. Oracle updates table statistic in the repository when you analyze tables. To refresh
table statistic use DB Monitor Expert component. Select Tools/Table Analyzer in that component and
perform analyzes for tables that haven't been analyzed for a while.
Indexes Report
Reports detailed information about all database indexes. This report queries database repository table SYS.DBA_INDEXES. Oracle updates table statistic in the repository when you analyze indexes. To refresh
index statistic use DB Monitor Expert component. Select Tools/Index Analyzer menu in that component
and perform analyzes for indexes that haven't been analyzed for a while. Alternatively, you can analyze
tables and/or clusters with cascade indexes option on.
-315-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Clusters Report
Reports detailed information about all database clusters. This report queries database repository table SYS.DBA_CLUSTERS. Oracle updates cluster statistic in the repository when you analyze cluster. To
refresh cluster statistic use DB Monitor Expert component. Select Tools/Cluster Analyzer in that
component and perform analyzes for clusters that haven't been analyzed for a while.
Tablespaces Report
Reports space allocation information for tablespaces; displays free space in red for tablespaces that have
less that 10% of free space. A bar graph is provided for easy comparison of free and allocated space.
Database Files Report
Reports database files, their sizes and statuses; for each file reports tablespaces, it consists of, as well as
tablespace sizes and statuses.
Sequences Report
Reports detailed information about all database sequences.
Snapshots Report
Reports detailed information about all database snapshots, including query text for each snapshot.
Synonyms Report
Reports detailed information about all database synonyms.
Database Links Report
Reports detailed information about all database links.
Users Report
Reports detailed information about all database users, including encrypted password. This allows DBA and
application developers temporarily replace passwords for certain accounts, in order to test functionality of
the database applications.
Table Privileges Report
Reports all granted table privileges. For your convenience, the report is broken on four groups:
•
Group by grantor
•
Subgroup by grantee
•
Subgroup by scheme
•
Subgroup by object
Triggers Report
Reports detailed information about all database triggers, including trigger definitions.
Procedures, Functions And Packages Report
Reports detailed information about all database function and packages, including their code.
Views Report
Reports detailed information about all database views, including view definitions.
-316-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Parameters Report
Reports parameters of the running Oracle instance.
Version Report
Reports versions of the running Oracle server modules.
Custom Reports
See Custom Reports topic in DB Monitor Expert chapter for more information oh how to create user-defined
reports.
Additional Tools
Analyzing object dependencies
For your convenience DB Copy Expert provides direct link to the Object Dependencies Analyzer utility,
which is also available in DB Monitor Expert component. To access this utility click
Tools/Analyzers/Dependencies Analyzer menu or click the Dependencies Analyzer
application toolbar.
button on the
See Dependencies Analyzer topic in DB Monitor Expert chapter for detailed description of this utility and
usage instructions.
Searching objects in the database
For your convenience DB Copy Expert provides direct link to the Database Object Finder utility, which is
also available in DB Tools SQL Editor and Debugger and DB Monitor components. To access this utility click
button on the application toolbar.
Tools/Find in Database menu or click the DB Find
See Database Object Finder topic in SQL Editor and Debugger chapter for detailed description of this utility
and usage instructions.
Finding invalid objects
For your convenience DB Copy Expert provides direct link to the Status Analyzer utility, which is also
available in DB Monitor Expert component. To access this utility click Tools/Analyzers/Status Analyzer
button on the application toolbar.
menu or click the Status Analyzer
See Status Analyzer topic in DB Monitor Expert chapter for detailed description of this utility and usage
instructions.
Recompiling invalid objects
DB Copy Expert supports 2 different methods for recompiling invalid objects:
Recompile invalid objects using Database Object Navigator screen
1.
Select invalid object in the source or target databases tree-view
-317-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2.
User's Guide
Right-click the selected object name. In the popup context menu select Recompile/Selected
Object command
or
Select File/Recompile/Invalid Object command in the DB Copy Expert main menu.
To recompile all invalid objects in the same folder or recompile everything in the same folder use
the same two step procedure but select either All Invalid Object or All Objects command in the popup
or main menus.
Recompile invalid objects using Status Analyzer utility
1.
2.
Start the Status Analyzer utility and let it find all invalid objects in the database.
Use methods described in the previous topics to recompile invalid objects. For detailed description
of this utility and usage instructions see Status Analyzer topic in DB Monitor Expert chapter.
Tip: Using Status Analyzer utility method has an advantage over Database Object Navigator
method because the Status Analyzer can find all invalid objects in the database and present them all
together on a single screen while with Database Object Navigator you have to locate invalid objects
yourself and recompile them either one-by-one or group-by-group, schema-by-schema.
Schema reverse-engineering
For your convenience DB Copy Expert provides direct link to the Schema Reverse-Engineering utility, which
is also available in DB Tools SQL Editor and Debugger component. To access this utility click
Tools/Schema Reverse-engineer menu or click the Schema
button on the application toolbar.
See Schema Reverse-engineering topic in SQL Editor and Debugger chapter for detailed description of this
utility and usage instructions.
-318-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
SQL Editor and Debugger
Overview
Here in this topic and in the following topics DB Tools' SQL Editor and Debugger is called for simplify DBA
Notepad.
DBA Notepad is a full-featured SQL and PL/SQL editor, which you can use to control database access,
create and modify users and groups, create, import, paste, execute, test, debug and tune SQL statements
and PL/SQL blocks.
DBA Notepad can execute 4 different types of commands:
•
Oracle standard SQL commands
•
Oracle standard PL/SQL blocks
•
Many Oracle SQL*Plus® compatible commands, for commenting code, formatting query results and
setting editor's options
•
DB Tools SQL extensions such as CONNECT, DEFINE and other commands for controlling SQL script
execution flow
Creating new SQL script
To create a script select File/New command (shortcut: CTRL N) or simply click
icon on the program
toolbar.
This will open a new DBA Notepad window where you can start typing your SQL script.
Opening previously saved SQL script
You can open an existing script file into DBA Notepad window by doing any of the following:
Select File/Open command (shortcut: CTRL O) or click
icon on the program toolbar.
After you open a script file, you can start editing it by typing changes or immediately execute SQL
statements from it.
•
•
•
Tips:
You can also use last four items from the File menu to open four most recently edited files.
You can also double-click SQL file in the SQL Navigator to open that file in the DBA Notepad.
If you start DB Monitor Expert from the command line with the SQL file as a parameter, it will open the
specified file in the DBA Notepad
Using drag-and drop
You can also open files in DBA Notepad by dragging their icons from Windows Explorer and dropping them
onto SQL Editor/Debugger or DB Monitor Expert windows. DB Tools will automatically create a new DBA
Notepad window with the dragged file automatically opened in it.
-319-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Importing text of an existing database stored procedure,
function package, package body, type, type body or
trigger
To import an existing object definition into DBA Notepad:
1. Select Object/Import SQL command (shortcut: ALT O, I). DB Monitor Expert will retrieve and display
list of all stored procedures, functions, packages, and triggers.
2. Select an object name you wish to import into editor.
After you import SQL, you can start editing it by typing changes or immediately execute SQL statements
from it.
Comments
You can use comments to document your SQL scripts and prevent statements within a script from
executing. There are two methods.
1.
Double-dash -- method: Designate all text on the line to the right of the double-dash marker as a
comment. Such comments cannot extend to multiple lines.
Example:
Code – Comment on the same line
– Comment on a separate line
2.
Slash-and-asterisk /*...*/ method: Designate the text between the markers as a comment. Such
comments can extend over multiple lines (multi-line comments do not require a continuation
character)
Example:
Code /* Comment on the same line */
/* Comment on a separate line */
You also can use block comments with the plus sign to specify execution hints. For example: /*+ RULE */
For detailed information on the specific hints, consult the Oracle documentation.
Note: Comments can appear in any part of the SQL script. However, when parsing and sending SQL to the
database, DB Notepad skips comments outside of SQL statements and PL/SQL blocks. Comments that
appear inside SQL statements and PL/SQL blocks are sent to the database as part of the statement.
1
Variables
DBA Notepad supports substitution variables. A substitution variable is a user-defined variable preceded by
the ampersand (&) symbol. When DBA Notepad encounters a substitution variable in a command, DBA
Notepad executes the command as though it contained the value of the substitution variable, rather than the
variable itself. You use DEFINE statement to declare, set initial values and change existing variables. You
can also use View/Show Variables command to enter and modify substitution variables. You can use
UNDEFINE statement to remove declaration of a previously defined variable.
DEFINE command syntax:
DEFINE <variable name> [value];
Value is an optional parameter. If a value is not specified, the specified variable will be removed from the
scope.
Substitution variables can hold any text including parts of SQL statements. Variable names are case
insensitive.
-320-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Examples:
DEFINE Schema
'DEMO';
DEFINE WhereClause owner = 'DEMO' AND table_name like 'A%';
SELECT count(*) FROM all_tables WHERE owner = &Schema AND table_name like 'A%';
SELECT count(*) FROM all_tables WHERE &WhereClause;
Edit commands, search and replace commands, go to
commands
As a full-featured editor, DBA Notepad provides all the common methods for text editing. All these methods
are standard for Windows application. For supported hot keys see hot keys topic.
Supported SQL*Plus commands
The following table describes which SQL*Plus commands and their shortcuts which are currently supported
by DBA Notepad.
Command
DOC
DOCUMENT
REM
REMARK
DEFINE
UNDEFINE
EXECUTE
CALL
PAUSE
TIMING
SHOW ERRORS
SHOW ERR
CONNECT
Description
Begins a comment in a command file.
Specifies a substitution variable and assigns it a value. If the variable is already
defined this command updates variable's value.
Removes previous defined substitution variable
Executes a stored procedure. The procedure name and parameters must be
specified on the same line.
Executes a stored procedure. The procedure name and parameters could spawn
multiple lines.
Pauses script executions and display interactive Continue or Abort message
prompt. Clicking the Continue button causes the paused script to resume. Clicking
the Abort button aborts the execution.
Shows/hides SQL trace window containing timing stats for executing SQL
commands.
Displays compilation errors pane. The command is ignored if the Errors pane is
already displayed.
Connects a given username to the database. The command must be followed by
one of the following:
•
<username>/<password> – reconnect to the last connected database
with a different user name and password.
•
<username>/<password>@<profile name> – reconnect to the database
specified in the profile value.
DISCONNECT
Note: This command is especially handy after receiving ORA-03113: end-of-file
on communication channel error when the Oracle client to server communication
breaks on the server side. Executing this command restores the connection without
resetting open screens and dialogs.
Closes active database connection.
DES
DESC
DESCRIBE
It is not necessary to call DISCONNECT before CONNECT. The CONNECT
command automatically closes active connection before attempting to reconnect to
the database.
Describes definition of a table, view, stored procedure, function, package, type or
synonym and copies that text to the system clipboard. The copied text can be then
pasted to the same Editor window or anywhere else.
This command is an extended version of its SQL*Plus sister.
-321-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DESCRIBE uses the following search order when evaluating names specified on
the command line:
1. Objects in your schema
2. Synonyms in your schema
3. Public synonyms
4. Objects in the SYS schema
5. Objects in the SYSTEM schema
For example, executing DESC employees command while connected as DEMO
user will copy column definitions of the DEMO.EMPLOYEE.
Executing DESC all_tables command will copy definition of columns in the
SYS.ALL_TABLES system view.
Executing DESC dbms_output command will copy names of public procedures and
their parameters in the SYS.DBMS_OUTPUT package.
Formatting commands
Use Format/Comment and Format/Uncomment to quickly comment and uncomment the selected text.
Alternatively, you can click
and
icons on the program toolbar. If no text is selected then the
current line is processed. The comment function comments the selected block of text by adding "--"
symbols before each line. The uncomment function uncomments the selected block of text by removing "--"
symbols from the beginning of each line.
1
Use Format/Upper Case and Format/Lower Case to change case of the selected text. Alternatively,
you can click
2
icons on the program toolbar.
Use Format/Indent and Format/Unindent to change indenting of the selected text. When you increase
or decrease indenting, you change the distance of the text from the margins. Alternatively, you can click
and
3
and
icons on the program toolbar.
Use the Format/AutoFormat command to let DB Monitor Expert reformat your script. DB Monitor
Expert will find and convert all Oracle reserved words (displayed in blue) to upper case, all other text
(displayed in black) will be converted to lower case. DB Monitor Expert will not change strings enclosed
in single quotes and comments (displayed in green). Alternatively, you can click
icon on the
program toolbar.
Entering SQL
You can enter SQL statements using 5 different ways:
•
Pasting statements from the clipboard
•
Typing statements in the editor's workspace
•
Opening a file containing the SQL using File/Open command
•
Opening file from SQL File Navigator using File/Open in DBA Notepad command
•
Importing source of existing code object using View/Import SQL command
Statement terminator
SQL Editor uses the semicolon as the SQL statement terminator. SQL Editor automatically recognizes
PL/SQL blocks that can include semicolons within the block.
-322-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
PL/SQL blocks support
SQL Editor parses and automatically recognizes individual SQL statements and PL/SQL blocks containing
multiple PL/SQL statements so that no special coding is needed to separate individual statements and
PL/SQL blocks. However, for compatibility with previous versions of DB Tools and interoperability with
SQL*Plus it also supports using optional braces {} and forward-slash ( / ) characters for designating multistatement blocks and executing SQL batches.
To declare a stored procedure, function, other PL/SQL objects or simply execute generic
DECLARE...BEGIN...END block, optionally enclose group of related SQL statements in braces {} . Braces
designate beginning and ending of a multi-statement PL/SQL, and ensure it is sent to the database as a
single executable command. Please note that a PL/SQL block cannot produce a result set. Use this syntax
mostly to execute various forms of Data Definition Language (DDL).
Example:
{
CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION db_alert( severity VARCHAR2, message VARCHAR2
)
return NUMBER
IS
-- severity must be one of the following: 'INFO', 'WARNING', 'ERROR'
-- message can be any string up to 2000 characters long
-- return code is the value returned by dbms_pipe.send_message() function
-- for suppoted return codes please see Oracle PL/SQL Guide for
send_message
BEGIN
dbms_pipe.pack_message(severity);
dbms_pipe.pack_message(message);
RETURN dbms_pipe.send_message('DB_ALERT');
END;
}
Visual Explain Plan
Sometimes there is more than one way to code SQL statements to obtain the required results. When this is
the case, you can use Explain Plan on the File menu to help you select the most efficient method.
Enhanced Explain SQL window displays information about the path that the database will use to execute the
statements. This is most useful when you are retrieving or updating data in an indexed column or using
multiple tables and you want tune offending statements. Type SQL statement for which you want to get
explanation of the execution strategy and select File/Explain Plan command or simply click Plan button on
the toolbar.
Notes:
•
The Explain Plan window automatically generates plans for your original SQL query and for alternative
variants of your SQL query, thus saving your time and presenting you with a choice of execution plans.
If you would like to compare generated plans and produced execution characteristics, switch to the
Compare tab page the click there the Execute and Compare button
•
In case if you don't want automatic alternative plan generation and collection of extended statistics for
objects that are referenced in the plan, you can turn corresponding options in the Tools/Options.
Executing SQL
When you have the SQL statements you want in the workspace, you can submit them to the database.
-323-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
•
To execute all statements in the workspace, use File/Execute SQL/Execute All command from the
menu (shortcut: CTRL R). DBA Notepad parses SQL in the workspace and sends it to the database
statement by statement in the order as it is entered in the workspace.
•
To execute highlighted statement(s), use File/Execute SQL/Execute Selection command (shortcut:
CTRL SHIFT+R)
•
To execute all statement bellow the cursor use File/Execute SQL/Execute After Cursor command
•
To execute the current statement where the cursor is positioned, use File/Execute SQL/Execute
statement bellow the cursor use File/Execute SQL/Execute Current Statement command (shortcut:
CTRL J) or press this button
You can also use toolbar buttons that provide quick access to all supported Execute commands.
If the SQL retrieves data, the data appears in a window identical to a grid Data Manipulation view.
For the description of supported data-manipulation and import/export features, see data-manipulation and
data export topic.
If a database error occurs while the SQL is executed, DBA Notepad displays an error message box
describing the problem. If the executed SQL contains one or more DDL statements for creating or altering
various code objects and Oracle returns compilation errors, such error messages are displayed in the
scrollable box on the bottom of the DBA Notepad window. The error message text is displayed along with
the line and column of the workspace where the error is detected. If you click on the error message, DBA
Notepads automatically moves the cursor to the specified line and column.
1 Use File/Execute
SQL Editor parses SQL in the workspace and submits it to the database statement by statement
Choose Execute SQL from Caret command (under the File menu) to execute only SQL statements
appearing below the editor's caret.
You can also use at ( @ ) command to run the specified command file as a single PL/SQL block.
Syntax: @ file_name
DBA Notepad first will search for the specified file in the current directory. If the file cannot be found in the
current directory, DBA Notepad will search a system-dependent path to find the file. If the specified file
contains one or more SELECT commands DBA Notepad will execute them but the returned result will be
ignored.
Tracing SQL and collecting performance statistics
To start collecting performance statistics for queries executed in the DBA Notepad:
1
Click the View menu then click the SQL Trace command. The SQL Trace window appears
-324-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
2
Execute one or more required queries in the DBA Notepad. SQL Trace captures all executed queries
and collects Oracle performance statistics for each query. Statistics for any new queries executed in
DBA Notepad are added at the end of SQL Trace window. Use window scrollbars to review all captured
SQL.
3
Use Print, Filter, Export, Sort menus to print, export, and sort statistics in the SQL Trace window
Debugging SQL
Both SQL Editor and DB Monitor Expert support two debugging methods:
•
Debugging using DBMS_OUTPUT package
•
Debugging using built-in PL/SQL Debugger, which provides easy-to-use graphical interface to the
Oracle database Probe API.
Database Object Navigator
DB Tools' Database Object Navigator is a comprehensive utility for exploring Oracle databases. Using that
utility, you can browse all database schema objects and their properties. You can also browse database
tablespaces, redo logs, rollback segments, users, profiles and many other objects and categories.
The Object Navigator window is divided into two parts:
•
The "Navigator" - left pane
•
The "Object Properties" - right pane
You can change the size of the panes. When you make any pane larger, the adjacent pane becomes
smaller. To resize panes:
3.
Move the mouse pointer in between of the panes until you see a black line with two arrows.
4.
Drag the edge of the pane until the pane is the size you want.
-325-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Views
Database Object Navigator provides four different views of your database:
•
View Objects by Owner
•
View Objects by Object Type
•
View All Objects
•
View Database Structure
Use the View drop-down list box to select the view you want to use for the database browsing.
Navigating
To navigate the Database Object Navigator use standard tree-view navigation techniques that you use when
working with Windows Explorer and other applications. For quick expanding or collapsing of multiple items
use right mouse button clicks to invoke the popup menu. Use the following commands available in the
popup menu to quickly expand or collapse multiple items:
•
Expand Branch
•
Collapse Branch
•
Expand All
•
Collapse All
Which items are displayed?
Object Navigator displays only context sensitive items. For example, if there is at least one stored procedure
in the expanding schema then Object Navigator will display PROCEDURE folder. On expanding of the
PROCEDURE folder, Object Navigator will display all stored procedures for the selected schema.
Which items are not displayed?
Object Navigator displays only context sensitive items. For example if the expanding schema has no stored
procedures, then Object Navigator will not display the PROCEDURE folder.
How to select another schema?
Click on the Owner drop-down list on top of the Object Navigator then select the required schema.
How to select another object type?
Click on the Type drop-down list on top of the Object Navigator then select the required object type.
How to get generate-common SQL commands for selected database object?
Right-click the object then select Generate and Copy SQL form the popup menu and then select the
required command. The Navigator will generate script template for the selected command and paste the
generated script into the system clipboard. You can then paste that text into DBA Notepad or other editor.
-326-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
How to reverse-engineer scripts for selected database object?
Click on the Code tab of the Object Properties pane.
How to edit procedure, function, package, and table definition code?
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the Code tab on the Object Properties pane.
Right-click the Code Editor. DB Monitor Expert will display editor's popup menu.
Choose Select All command then Copy command from the menu. DB Monitor Expert will copy
selected source code to the system clipboard.
Paste clipboard contents into DBA Notepad or your favorite SQL Editor.
-327-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Brief description of Tab Pages available on the Object Properties pane
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
General - general information about selected object or object type.
Definition - object definition presented in a tabular format.
Code - reverse-engineering script for the selected object.
Interface - list of functions and procedures in the selected package. This tab is available only
connected to Oracle8
Navigator – table/view definition presented in easy-to-view tree-view format. This definition also
includes available columns, indexes, constraints, triggers as well as table and index storage options and
partitions.
Data - data retrieved from selected table, view or synonym. Note that DB Monitor Expert retrieves as
many rows as needed to fill visible tab area. Additional rows are "retrieved as needed" when the user
scrolls down to view rows that have not been viewed yet.
Security - grants made on the selected object.
Dependencies - object dependencies for the selected object.
Indexes - list of indexes and their definitions in a tabular format for the selected table.
Constraints - list of constraints and their definitions in a tabular format for the selected table.
Triggers - list of triggers and their definitions in a tabular format for the selected table.
View Database Structure Mode
In this view, Object Navigator displays complete information about logical and physical structure of your
database. When viewing Instance parameters, Object Navigator creates General tab page differently. The
page is divided into two parts:
•
The "Parameters" - upper pane
•
The "Parameter Description" - lower pane
You can change the size of the panes. When you make any pane larger, the adjacent pane becomes
smaller. To resize panes:
1.
Move the mouse pointer in between of the panes until you see a black line with two arrows.
2.
Drag the edge of the pane until the pane is the size you want.
-328-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Click on the required parameter to view its description on the lower pane.
DBMS Output
DBMS Output window performs periodical polling of the Oracle DBMS Output buffer. To change polling rate
click properties button
on the program toolbar. The default rate is 5 seconds. DBMS Output window is
capable to buffer and display up to 999 lines of DBMS Output. If new lines come from the DBMS Output
buffer and there is already 999 line in the window then DB Monitor Expert discards as many existing lines as
needed for adding new lines. To output some text into DBMS Output buffer you can use Oracle
DBMS_OUTPUT package. The DBMS Output window, when used with the DBA Notepad is an effective
combination for developing and debugging stored procedure code.
Note: DBMS Output window must be opened before you send something to the DBMS_OUTPUT buffer.
It is a good idea to open this window before you start debugging your procedure code. You should execute
your procedure in the same session in order to see the results.. You can use DBA Notepad for this purpose.
For more details on DBMS_OUPUT package and features see your Oracle documentation.
Schema Reverse-engineering
To reverse-engineer SQL of all schema objects for a particular schema:
1. Select Tools menu then Schema Extract.
2. Highlight the required schema
3. Enter name of the output file
4. Click OK to start the extraction process.
-329-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
SQL Navigator
SQL Navigator is a handy tool that you use to browse SQL files on your computer.
The SQL Navigator window is divided into two parts:
•
The "File Explorer" - left pane
•
The "File Viewer" - right pane
You can change the size of the panes. When you make any pane larger, the adjacent pane becomes
smaller. To resize panes:
•
•
•
1.
Move the mouse pointer in between of the panes until you see a black line with two arrows.
2.
Drag the edge of the pane until the pane is the size you want.
Tips:
To open a file for editing double-click file name on the left pane.
Use right-click the File Explorer pane to display context menu. That menu will provide you with
additional navigation and file search commands.
Use right-click the File Viewer pane to display context menu. That menu will provide you with additional
commands for text searching and editing.
PL/SQL Debugger
PL/SQL Debugger is an utility that can help you locate the source of logic errors (bugs) in your executable
back-end code. It can be used with:
-330-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
•
•
•
User's Guide
Oracle server version 7.33 and later
PL/SQL version 2.3 and later
Package, Procedure, Function, and Trigger objects
PL/SQL Debugger allows you to debug your back-end code by transferring control of the execution to you.
You can stop the execution at any point, execute the code one line at a time, watch how variable values
change after a particular statement is executed, find out the order in which statements are called, and see
what happens when you change the value of a particular variable. See Debugger Features topic for
additional on what is supported and what is not in different Oracle versions.
PL/SQL Debugger functions
PL/SQL Debugger provides the following functionality to help you debug your code:
• Suspending Execution -- You can suspend code execution before a specific statement is executed in
order to examine the state of the object at the point of execution or step through parts of code. This can
be achieved by inserting a breakpoint at that line of code containing the statement.
•
Stepping Through Code -- Once the code execution is suspended, you can step through the code lineby-line in order to identify the exact location of the problem. This is done by using Step In, Step Over,
Step Out, and Run to Cursor procedures to execute required portions of the code.
•
Watching for Values of Variables -- You can observe values of specified variables when an execution is
broken. This can be achieved by adding variable names to the Watch tab page. Using this tab page,
you can also assign a certain value to a variable in order to observe how it will affect execution results.
•
Monitoring Execution Flow -- You can monitor execution flow by examining the order of executed
statements displayed in the Call Stack tab page.
Using the Debugger
Before starting a debugging session, you should compile your objects with debugging information.
To use the debugger:
1. Open DBA Notepad, and enter the appropriate SQL code invoking the procedure or function that you
want to debug.
Example:
BEGIN
SCOTT.RAISE_SALARY(10);
END;
2.
Select File/Debug/Start command from the menu (or press CTRL-F5 keys). The debugger will start
separate debugging session and start executing the script. After the debugging session is started, the
script execution will pause before the first statement. From this point you can choose the appropriate
debugger command from the File/Debug menu to continue the script execution. You can also use this
pause to setup breakpoints. When the script stops at a breakpoint, you can examine the values of
variables and see the call stack. The debugger also lets you change script variables.
Breakpoints
Breakpoint is a line of PL/SQL code in a script at which debugger automatically suspends execution.
-331-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To make Debugger pause execution of your code, you can set a breakpoint:
•
•
In the DBA Notepad text pane, double-click on the required line of code that isn't already a breakpoint or
Move the caret to the required line then either press CTRL B key or select File/Debug/Toggle
Breakpoint command from the menu.
To remove a breakpoint:
•
•
Double-click the line of code on which the breakpoint has been set
or
Move the caret to the breakpoint line then either press CTRL B key or select Toggle Breakpoint
command from the Debug menu.
A breakpoint can be only set on a line that contains an executable statement
Debugger Views
The debugger has two panes, which you can resize at any time.
Top pane shows the full text of a currently executed script. In that pane, you can go to a specific line in a
script, find a string, print the displayed script, and manage breakpoints.
Bottom pane contains 4 tab pages:
Variables Watch - A list of specified variables and their values. The values in the Variables Watch tab page
are updated each time the debugger pauses. You can double-click on any variable to manually change the
value of a variable whenever script execution is suspended.
Call Stack The sequence of PL/SQL statement calls leading up to the script that was executing at the
time of the breakpoint. The call stack view is automatically refreshed each time the debuggers pauses.
Breakpoints - A list of all breakpoints.
Immediate A part of the Debugger window in which you can run individual lines of SQL code, usually
for the purpose of debugging. The Immediate pane is a kind of scratch pad window in which statements and
variables are evaluated immediately. In the Immediate page you can type a statement then select
File/Debug/Execute Immediate command from the menu to execute this statement. You can also use the
context popup menu to execute this command as well as copy, paste text and run other common editing
commands
Stepping Through Code
Stepping through your script can help you identify where an error is occurring. You can see whether each
line of code produces the results you expect. To step through the code after you have it opened in the
Debugger, do one of the following:
•
•
•
To step through each line of script and into the code in a statement called by the active script, select
File/Debug/Step In command from the menu, or alternatively you can press CTRL F6 keys
To run the code that precedes the required line of code, and then break so you can step through each
line of code, set a breakpoint on that line then select Start or Continue command from the File/Debug
menu. The Debugger will suspend execution at the breakpoint line. Use File/Debug/Step In command
to continue line by line (see previous paragraph for details).
To run the rest of the current script, select Continue command from the File/Debug menu. The
Debugger will continue executing script until it reaches a breakpoint or an end of script, whatever is first.
The type of stepping you do depends on which portions of code you want to analyze.
-332-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Evaluating/Modifying Variables
PL/SQL debugger supports several alternative methods for evaluating values of script variables:
1. You can add variables to the Variables Watch tab. The values in the Variables Watch tab page are
updated each time the debugger pauses.
or
2. You can move mouse pointer over variable name in the debugged script displayed on the screen
and rest it there for a couple of seconds. The debugger will display balloon help over the variable
name with the evaluated value.
or
3. You can right-click a variable in the debugged script displayed on the screen and then select
Evaluate/Modify Variable item in the popup menu.
To modify a variable either of the following methods:
1. Add the variable to the Variables Watch tab. Enter new value in the Value field and press the
enter key.
or
2. Right-click on a variable in the debugged script displayed on the screen and then select
Evaluate/Modify Variable item in the popup menu. Enter the new value and click the OK button to
close the Evaluate/Modify Variable dialog.
Stopping the Debugger
At any time during a debugging session, you can end the execution by clicking the File/Debug/Stop
command in the menu button. This will end the PL/SQL Debugger session.
The faster navigation in the debugger you can use hotkeys and also use the debugger's toolbar buttons
displayed and commented on the image below
Hot Keys
CTRL F5
F5
CTRL F6
F6
CTRL B
-- Start/stop debugger
-- Continue script execution until next breakpoint or end-of script is reached
-- Step into procedure/function call
-- Step over procedure/function call
-- Toggle breakpoint on/off on the line having the caret.
-333-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Compiling Objects for Debugging
In order to be able to view/modify variable values during a debugging session, you must compile all required
objects with debugging information.
In the Database Object Navigator select the required object then use File/Debug/ Compile for Debugging
command from the menu (shortcut ALT+F5). The selected object will be compiled with debugging
information included. The Compile for Debugging dialog box opens. This dialog box will allow you to search
for other objects that are called within the select object. You can also right-click the required object and
select Compile for Debugging command from the popup menu.
-334-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Version Specific Debugger Features
The DB Tools Debugger uses Oracle Probe API to implement debugging. Therefore, the Debugger is limited
by the version of Oracle’s Probe API you are using. In addition, some problems in the debugger could be
platform and version specific.
-335-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Using drag-and drop and quick schema browser
You can use the quick schema browser available in each DBA Notepad window to enter schema, object,
and column names using standard drag-and-drop feature. Using this feature you can avoid many typo
errors.
1.
To show or hide the schema browser click View/Show Schema Browser menu or click
the application toolbar.
2.
Navigate to the object such as a table whose columns you want to enter to your script.
3.
Drag-and-drop this object to the place in the editor where you want to enter that name.
button on
Below is a sample screenshot demonstrating how to use this feature.
-336-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Comparing contents of SQL, TXT and other flat files
To compare 2 text files in SQL Editor:
button displayed on the SQL Editor toolbar. The
1
Click Tools/Compare Files menu or click
Select Files dialog will appear.
2
Type in or use Browse buttons to select 2 files and then click the Compare Files button at the
bottom of the dialog window.
3
DB Tools will compare selected files and display Comparison Results window. Found differences
will be highlighted in blue. Total number of found differences will be displayed under each file. If
you compare large files use the scroll bar to scroll the Comparison Results window.
Customizing DBA Notepad
To change font used to display text in the editor, select Tools/Options command. An options dialog will
appear. Click the Editor tab and make necessary changes.
-337-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Table Relationships
The Table Relationships screen can be used for many purposes. For example it can be used for any of the
following:
•
Explore design of database tables and views
•
Explore and print referential integrity of the database schemas and objects.
•
Explore table indexes and their relation to referential constraints.
•
Graphically build queries for database tables and view.
•
Export data from tables and view to operation system files in a variety of formats.
•
Import data from operation system files back to database tables.
•
Launch table/view design assistants directly from the Table Relationship workspace.
Below is sample screenshot of the Table Relationships screen with additional comments.
Table Size Estimator
Overview
Table Size Estimator is a utility that estimates the space requirements for a table and its indexes based on
the projected row count. Table Size Estimator gathers current statistic for the table and its indexes and uses
it for approximation of the new total space based on results of the current table data analysis and storage
parameters. If the table has been previously analyzed, DB Monitor Expert uses statistics from the Oracle
-338-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
data dictionary tables. Otherwise, it performs alternative analyzes of existing data from this table. You can
use the Table Analyzer and the Index Analyzer to analyze tables and their indexes.
Warning: Before you use Table Size Estimator to project new table size, make sure that the table has
enough typical data that DB Monitor Expert can use for the analysis.
Space Estimation
5.
Select Tools/Table Size Estimator command (shortcut: ALT T, E). The Select Table dialog will
appear.
6.
Select schema from the drop-down Owner list. DB Monitor Expert will populate list of tables for this
schema.
7.
Select table name from the list.
8.
Enter projected row count in the Number of Rows to Estimate field.
9.
Click the OK button. DB Monitor Expert will perform table analysis and space estimation. After that,
a message box will appear where you will see space estimation results for the table data and each
index separately as well as the total amount of estimated space.
10. Click the OK button to close this result message. You can run the estimate again for a different
number of rows or estimate some space requirements for another table.
Database Object Finder
To help you navigate large databases with many objects, DB Monitor Expert includes a Database Object
Finder that can quickly search for the database objects that contain a search string in their name.
To Find a Database Object
1.
Select Object/Find Database Object command from the program menu. The Select Schema
dialog will open.
2.
In the Find What box, enter the text you want to search for.
3.
Select schemas in which search has to be performed.
4.
Choose appropriate search options.
5.
Click the OK button to initiate the search.
Note: To cancel the search operation while it is in progress, click the Cancel
toolbar.
button on the program
-339-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Browse Search Results
The search results window is divided into two parts:
•
"Contents" - left pane
•
"Details" - right pane
You can change the size of the panes. When you make any pane larger, the adjacent pane becomes
smaller. To resize panes:
1.Move the mouse pointer in between of the panes until you see a black line with two arrows.
2.Drag the edge of the pane until the pane is the size you want.
Use "Contents" pane to navigate search results.
Note: DB Monitor Expert automatically applies filter for selected contents item, so that you see only
appropriate items on the "Detail" pane. To see all items, select very first item on the left pane. That item
represents all objects in your database.
Note: You can change default filter and sort order for displaying search results. See Working with data
and data export topic for details.
-340-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
SQL Profiler
Overview
DB Tools PL/SQL Profiler provides graphical interface to the Oracle's Probe Profiler API, which is available
in Oracle8i and later. PL/SQL Profiler provides a way to profile existing PL/SQL applications and to identify
performance bottlenecks. You can use the collected profiler (performance) data for performance
improvement or for determining code coverage for PL/SQL applications. Application developers can use
code coverage data to focus their incremental testing efforts.
Improving application performance is an iterative process. Each iteration involves the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
Running the application functions with one or more benchmark tests with profiler data collection
enabled.
Analyzing the profiler data and identifying performance problems.
Fixing the problems.
The PL/SQL Profiler supports this process using the concept of a "run". A run involves running the
application through benchmark tests with profiler data collection enabled. The profiler writes the collected
data for the run into database tables
Because tuning the application is an iterative and a time consuming process, you may need to make
incremental changes in your application code and re-run the tests, which can potentially take a long time.
To simplify the tuning process DB Tools PL/SQL Profiler provides support for profiler projects. Profiler
projects allow grouping of related runs and persistently storing them in the database along with development
and tuning comments and PL/SQL code used in each run to invoke the main application code. The projects
also store additional performance statistics not available in the Probe API.
-341-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
PL/SQL Profiler includes several reports that compare performance of individual executed lines of code,
performance of callable subprograms and entire runs.
See also:
Setting up the PL/SQL Profiler
Working with PL/SQL Profiler projects
Profiling applications and analyzing results
Setting up PL/SQL Profiler
Requirements
•
Oracle 8i and later
•
DBMS_PROFILER package and profiling tables
Oracle DBMS_PROFILER package is not installed in the database by default. We recommend that you
install this package using PROFLOAD.SQL script that can be found in the [Oracle HOME]\RDBMS\ADMIN
directory. This script internally uses DBMSPBP.SQL, PROFTAB.SQL, and PRVTPDB.PLB files that must
also exist in the same directory. If you don't these files you can download them from the Oracle TechNet
web site http://technet.oracle.com.
The PROFLOAD.SQL script installs version of the profiler package and tables that can allow profiling across
all users of a system, for example, to profile all users of an application package, independent of who is using
it.
-342-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Important Note: Make sure to login as SYS user in order to install DBMS_PROFILER package.
First time you run PL/SQL Profiler it will also create PROFILER_DATA table in the ORA_MONITOR
schema. This table is used for storing project and profiling session information and also storing additional
profiler statistics not available in the Probe API.
Working with PL/SQL Profiler Projects
In DB Tools PL/SQL Profiler you are always working in the context of a project. Projects allow grouping of
related runs and persistently storing them in the database along with development and tuning comments
and PL/SQL code used in each run to invoke the main application code. When you create a project, you
must name it and optionally you can specify optional project description and project goals. Project
information is automatically saved in the database. You can add new runs to the project at any time,
however the project is saved only after at least one successful run is added. You can create multiple
projects for different applications or tuning goals.
Projects are stored in the database you work on. User who created the project is the owner of that project.
When you start PL/SQL Profiler the Open Project dialog appears.
The dialog shows only projects that belong to the current user and stored in the connected database. Using
this dialog you can select and existing project or create a new own.
To open a project
1.
Use File/Open Project menu to open the Open Project dialog
-343-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
2.
User's Guide
Locate the required project in the project tree-view and click Open Project button. The Run
Comparison screen will appear. From this screen you can start new runs and also launch other
profile reports.
To start a new project
There exist two alternative ways to create a new project. You can either use File/New Project menu or
create a new project from the Open Project dialog by clicking on the New Project button.
In both cases the New Project Properties dialog will appear.
To complete the dialog:
1.
Enter project name, this name should be unique and descriptive and can include any characters
including spaces.
2.
Enter optional project comments
3.
Click the OK button.
Important Note: The new project definition is saved in the database only after the first project run. If
no run was completed, the project definition will be lost when you exit PL/SQL Profiler.
To modify a project
1.
Use File/Open Project menu to open the Open Project dialog
2.
Locate the required project in the project tree-view and click Modify button. The project properties
dialog will appear.
3.
Correct the required properties and then click the OK button, or click Cancel to cancel the operation
To delete a project
1.
Use File/Open Project menu to open the Open Project dialog
2.
Locate the required project in the project tree-view and click Delete button
3.
The confirmation message will appear. To delete the project click OK, or click Cancel to cancel the
operation
-344-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
To start a new run
There exist two alternative ways to start a new run. You can either use Profiler/New Run menu or start a
new run from the Open Project dialog by clicking on the New Run button.
In both cases the New Run Properties dialog will appear.
To complete the dialog:
1.
Enter descriptive run name, this name descriptive enough to allow you later easily identify this run
in the project tree-view. This name can include any characters including spaces.
2.
Enter SQL code than will invoke the program that you want to profile.
3.
Click the OK button.
To delete a run from project
1.
Use File/Open Project menu to open the Open Project dialog
2.
Locate the required project in the project tree-view, expand it and then select the run that wish to
delete.
3.
Click Delete button. The confirmation message will appear. To delete the run click OK, or click
Cancel to cancel the operation
-345-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Profiling Applications and Analyzing Results
Using PL/SQL Profiler provides you can generate different kinds of profiling information:
•
Profiling information for runs, such total run duration, CPU used by the session, amount of memory
used, number of disk I/O operations, and so on.
•
Profiling information for all named library units that are executed in a session, such as number of times
a unit has been executed, the total amount of time that has been spent executing that unit, and the
minimum, maximum and average times that have been spent executing a particular object.
•
Profiling information for all code lines that are executed in a session, such as the total number of times
each line has been executed, the total amount of time that has been spent executing that line, and the
minimum and maximum times that have been spent on a particular execution of that line.
The collected statistics are analyzed and presented in easy-to-read profiler reports. Every profiler report
contains two views to the collected data: the data-grid view and the top statistics graph.
Important Note: Because of the security considerations, the profiler only gathers data for units for
which a user has CREATE privilege; you cannot profile programs for which EXECUTE ONLY access
has been granted. In general, if a user can debug a unit, the same user can profile it. However, a unit
can be profiled whether or not it has been compiled for debugging.
Tip: Oracle advises that modules that are being profiled should be compiled with debugging flag
turned on, since this provides additional information about the unit in the database. You can use the DB
Monitor Expert module to compile objects for debugging. See Compile For Debugging topic for "How
To" information.
Analyzing results
PL/SQL Profile features 3 different reports that can be used to analyze and compare profiler results. These
reports include:
•
Run Comparison
•
Object Execution Comparison
•
Line Execution Comparison
These reports provide 3 different view levels. By double clicking on the required report row or bar in the
report chart you can drilldown to the detail report for the activated item. From the Run Comparison report
you can drill-down to the Object Execution Report and from there you can drill-down to the Line Comparison
Report.
To navigate between these reports you can use double-clicks as mentioned above. You can also use the
Profile menu to run a detail report for the selected item.
Tips:
•
The top portion of each report shows all collected profiler data for the selected run/item. The
data is displayed in a tabular format. You can sort and filter data in this portion of the report
using View/Sort and View/Filter menu commands.
•
The bottom portion of each report shows "top 10" graph that includes only the top worst runs,
objects or lines. When a filter is set on the report, the graph is automatically rebuilt to reflect
the changes.
•
To quickly located a specific text on the report use Edit/Find Text and Edit/Find Next menu
commands
•
To print a report, use File/Print menu command
-346-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Java Editor
Overview
DB Tools Java Editor is a multi-functional multi-document Java development environment with a built-in file
explorer.
You can use this tool to edit regular Java files and also to install Java classes in Oracle databases
supporting Java objects such as Oracle 8i and later. The editor features Java syntax highlighting and
numerous productivity enhancements. It also provides integrated interface for Java class compilation and
direct loading of compiled classes and resources into Oracle databases.
Before you compile your Java classes in your Oracle database, make sure it has Oracle Java environment
and compiler installed. If you get ORA-29547 Java system class not available: oracle/aurora/rdbms/Compiler
or a similar error, it means that the Java system classes are not installed. Login as SYS or SYSTEM user
and run "CREATE OR REPLACE JAVA SYSTEM" command from DBA Notepad of from SQL*Plus. This
command will take awhile to run, but it should fix your problem.
See also:
Java Editor Functions
Compiling and Loading Java Objects Into Database
Java Editor Interface
The Java Editor window is divided into two parts:
•
The "Java/JSP File Explorer" - left pane
•
The "Workspace" - right pane
You can change the size of the panes. When you make any pane larger, the adjacent pane becomes
smaller. To resize panes:
-347-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
•
•
•
User's Guide
3.
Move the mouse pointer in between of the panes until you see a black line with two arrows.
4.
Drag the edge of the pane until the pane is the size you want.
Tips:
To open a file for editing double-click file name on the left pane.
Use right-click the Java/JSP File Explorer pane to display context menu. That menu will provide you
with additional navigation and file search commands.
Use right-click the Workspace pane to display context menu. That menu will provide you with additional
commands for text searching and editing.
Java Editor Functions
Java Editor functions are pretty much the same as the SQL Editor functions. For the command reference
see Editing and Formatting Commands topic for DBA Notepad. For keyboard shortcuts reference see Hot
Keys topic.
Compiling and Loading Java Objects Into Database
Compiling Java class on the Oracle server from a Java a source
code
1.
Open a file containing required Java sources code classes or enter Java code into the Java Editor
2.
Use File/Compile Java Class menu or click the
dialog will appear.
3.
If necessary, correct default compile options and click the OK button to start the compilation.
button on the toolbar. The Compile Options
Load a Java class already compiled on the client
1.
Click File/Load Class File into Database menu or click
Open File dialog will appear.
button on the toolbar. The standard
4.
Locate the required Java class file or a file containing Java classes such as JAR or ZIP file and
press the OK button. The Compile Options dialog will appear.
5.
If necessary, correct default compile options and click the OK button to start the compilation.
-348-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
File Loader
Overview
File Loader is a simply utility that allows loading files into existing and new database tables. This utility
complements several other file loading methods available in SQL Editor and DB Monitor Expert
components.
While SQL Editor's and DB Monitor Expert's file import facilities can be used to import file data into existing
tables only the File Loader utility supports both loading files into new and existing tables. New tables can be
created dynamically during file load process.
The following file types are currently supported:
•
XLS - Microsoft Excel files.
•
TXT – Tab separated text files.
•
CSV – Coma-separated text files.
For details on how to use File Loader utility see Loading Files into Database topic.
Loading Files Into Database
Loading files into existing tables
To load files into existing database tables use one of the following methods:
Using SQL Editor
1.
Execute SELECT * FROM <table> command to open a new datasheet. If you do not want to
retrieve existing data you can execute SELECT * FROM <table> WHERE 0 = 1 command to
create an empty datasheet.
Note: If the import file does not contain all table columns select only columns contained in the
file. Make sure you include all not nullable columns; otherwise an error will occur when you attempt
to save the imported data.
2.
Click File/Import menu to select an import file. Choose the required file name and type and then
click OK.
3.
After the import is complete verify imported data and then click File/Save menu to send the
imported data into database.
Note: This method is the fastest method in DB Tools to load small and medium size files. Do not
use this method for large files as the file is loaded entirely into the computer memory first and only then
it is sent to the database.
Using DBA Notepad in DB Monitor Expert
Follow the same steps as described above for the SQL Editor.
-349-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Using Table Painter tool in DB Monitor Expert
Using Table Painter tool you can load data files directly into database tables without using datasheets
and SELECT commands. To load a file:
1.
Open Table Painter tool.
2.
Select target tables. If you select multiple tables, after these tables are painted click on the table
into which you want to import your first file.
3.
Click File/Import menu to select a file. Choose the required file name and type and then click OK.
4.
Repeat steps 3 as needed for other tables and files.
Note: This method has no limitation on the file size
Using File Loader utility
1.
Start File Loader utility.
2.
Type in or use the Browse button to enter the source data file.
3.
Click Load into existing table option.
4.
Select target schema and table.
5.
Click Load File button to start the processing.
Note: This method has no limitation on the file size. This method also allows users to interrupt file
load process at any time. Click the Cancel button to interrupt the load process at any time.
Note: In order to load Excel files you must have Microsoft Excel version 97 or better installed on
your computer.
Loading files into new tables:
1.
Start File Loader utility.
2.
Type in or use the Browse button to enter the source data file.
3.
Click Load into new table option. Enter target table name. Table name can optionally include
schema name in standard Oracle dot notation format. If you do not specify schema name new table
will be created in the schema of the user currently logged on.
4.
Click Load File button.
5.
The File Loader utility will analyze your source file and prompt you to verify and correct target table
definition. After correcting table definition click the OK button to create the new table and start the
file load process.
Note: This method has no limitation on the file size. This method also allows users to interrupt file
load process at any time. Click the Cancel button to interrupt the load process at any time.
Note: In order to load Excel files you must have Microsoft Excel version 97 or better installed on
your computer.
-350-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
LOB Viewer and Loader
Overview
LOB Viewer and Loader can be used for browsing and viewing various documents saved in database LOB
(Large Object) columns as well as for loading new documents into the database. LOB Viewer is especially
helpful to database developers because it enables them to view data stored in LOB columns which cannot
be done using regular database development tools such as SQL*Plus and most other. With LOB Viewer and
Loader you can now view, delete, update and insert almost any document or file directly without launching
the document's native application originally used to save the data in the database LOB!
LOB Viewer and Loader supports all types of LOB columns currently supported by Oracle including:
•
LONG
•
BLOB
•
CLOB
•
NCLOB
•
LONG RAW
•
BFILE
As long as you have any appropriate file viewing application installed on your client computer you can view
and edit values saved in such columns. For example you can view and edit text documents, HTML files, a
wide range of graphic files, if you simple have a web browser installed on your computer. You can even view
Microsoft Word and Excel documents without launching Word or Excel if you have Microsoft Office installed
on your computer.
LOB Viewer and Loader is a generic document management application. It is not programmed for specific
documents of file types. You select at the time of database browsing which document types you want to
view or edit and enter your choice into the list of options if the type is not listed or simply select a preconfigured type from the list. LOB Viewer and Loader internally uses COM automation available on your
Windows system to start the document handling application (such as web browser or Microsoft Word) inside
LOB Viewer window and then controls the started application.
Open LOB Table for Browsing
LOB Viewer and Loader provides very straight-forward interface for the table browsing. To open a table for
LOB browsing or editing do the following:
1.
Select File/New Viewer command (Shortcut CTRL O) from the LOB Viewer and Loader menu.
This will open the Select LOB Source Table dialog. Alternatively you can click the Open
on the application toolbar.
button
2.
Using the Schema drop-down box select table schema containing the required table with a LOB
column. The Table drop-down gets populated with the names of tables in the selected schema.
3.
Using the Table drop-down select the required table. The LOB Column drop-down gets populated
with the names of table columns having one of the supported LOB types.
4.
Using the LOB Column select the required column. Please note that available LOB columns are
displayed in <LOB Type> -> <Column Name> format that makes it easier for you to decide which
types of documents are stored in these columns.
5.
If the selected document type is available in the LOB Type drop-down list you can select it from the
list otherwise simply type the document type as if was a file extension. For example, if the
document type is XML document you would type XML in the LOB Type edit field.
-351-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
6.
Click the OK button to open the table datasheet and close the Select LOB Source Table dialog.
7.
Browse or modify data using available table datasheet functions. See Browsing and Modifying LOB
Tables topic for additional information
Browsing and Modifying LOB Tables
After you get your LOB table opened for browsing DB Tools will display LOB table datasheet with the table
data. The following is a sample screenshot containing 2 datasheets opened simultaneously for the same
table. Because LOB Viewer and Loader is an MDI (multi-document interface) application you can actually
open as many datasheets as needed. Multiple datasheets can be opened for the same or different LOB
tables.
-352-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
The datasheet window is divided into two parts:
•
The "Data Table" - left pane.
•
The "Viewer" - right pane
You can change the size of the panes. When you make any pane larger, the adjacent pane becomes
smaller. To resize panes:
1.
Move the mouse pointer in between of the panes until you see a black line with two arrows.
2.
Drag the edge of the pane until the pane is the size you want.
All non-LOB values are displayed on the left pane. LOB document from the chosen LOB column is displayed
on right pane. Immediately after datasheet opening the LOB from the first row is shown on the screen. To
view a different LOB change the current row on the left pane
Tips:
.
1.
The current row on the left pane always has arrow symbol displayed over the row header.
2.
Scrollbar on both panes disappear and appear automatically whenever the displayed LOB doesn't
fit in the pane visible area.
Inserting a new record into a LOB table
1.
Select Edit/Add menu (Shortcut CTL N) or click the Add
New LOB Record dialog will appear.
button on the application toolbar. The
-353-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
2.
In the top portion of the dialog fill in values for all non-LOB columns.
3.
In the bottom portion of the dialog enter name of the file containing the document you want to save
in the new record.
Important: If the LOB column type is non-BFILE the document must be available on your
computer or be accessible on a shared network drive. In that case use the Internal LOB Storage
tab page to specify the document file name. If the LOB column type is BFILE the document must
be available on the database server or be stored on a shared network drive that is accessible from
the database server computer. In that case use the Internal LOB Storage tab page to specify the
document file name using Oracle existing DIRECTORY objects. For your convenience DB Tools
provides in place New Directory button that can be used to create new DIRECTORY objects, as
you need them. You must have sufficient privileges to create both the DIRECTORY object and
access the referenced file path in order to insert new BFILE documents.
4.
Click the OK button to close the New LOB Record dialog and insert the new record to the
database. The inserted record will automatically appear on the datasheet.
Updating an existing record in a LOB table
1.
In the LOB table datasheet click on the record you want to update.
2.
button on the application
Select Edit/Update menu (Shortcut CTL U) or click the Update
toolbar. If the LOB column type is non-BFILE the standard Browse for Files dialog will appear,
otherwise the Select BFILE Properties dialog will appear.
3.
If you get the Browse for Files dialog
3.1
Use standard navigation techniques to locate and open the required file.
-354-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
or
If you get the Select BFILE Properties dialog:
3.1
Select the DIRECTORY object referencing to the directory on the server containing the
required document file.
3.2
Enter the new document file name into the File Name field.
4.
Click the OK button to close the dialog and update current record with the chosen document
Deleting an entire record from a LOB table
Important: Deleting an entire record cause all values from all columns in the selected record to
disappear from the database.
1.
In the LOB table datasheet click on the record you want to delete.
2.
Select Edit/Delete menu (Shortcut CTL D) or click the Delete
button on the application toolbar.
Deleting a document from a LOB table
Important: Deleting LOB document does not delete the record containing that document. It only
clears the value of the selected LOB column, which effectively removes the document from your database.
1.
2.
In the LOB table datasheet click on the record associated with the document you want to delete
from the database.
Select Edit/Clear menu (Shortcut CTL L).
Searching documents in a LOB table
You cannot search documents using document internal data because LOB columns contain only binary
representations of LOB documents. However you can search records associated with your documents using
other columns in the LOB table. The LOB Viewer and Loader provides standard set of search functions that
can be used for that purpose. For more information see the general Searching topic.
Sorting and filtering documents in a LOB table
You cannot use standard DB Tools Search and Filter options to control which records are displayed on a
LOB table datasheet.
Printing documents in a LOB table
1.
2.
In the LOB table datasheet click on the record associated with the document you want to print.
Choose File/Print menu (Shortcut CTL P) to print the active document or choose File/Print
Preview menu to see the document on the screen how it will look when printed.
-355-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
DB Tools Upgrade Assistant
When to Use Migration Assistant
The DB Tools Upgrade Assistant helps in converting existing libraries of user-defined objects created in
previous versions of the DB Tools or ORACLE Monitor Suite software to the current version. It can be also
used to copy objects between computers. For example if your colleague created a report or monitor that you
want to share you can use the Migration Assistant to copy objects from your colleague's system.
The DB Tools Upgrade Assistant also supports converting of the old DB Tools Active Desktop configuration.
Warning: Always backup files having LIB extensions prior to migrations and software upgrades.
Using the Migration Assistant:
1
2
3
4
Start DB Tools Upgrade Assistant
Type in or use the Browse button to select the library of user-defined objects. List of available
objects appears.
Highlight objects that you want to convert and copy to the current version.
Click Proceed.
Object Status
•
•
•
•
New - objects having this status do not exist in the default library CUSTOM.LIB.
Update - objects having this status do exist in the default library CUSTOM.LIB, but they either later
creation date or they have the same creation date but syntactically different.
Old - objects having this status exist in the default library CUSTOM.LIB and they have earlier
creation date.
<empty> - matching objects exist in the default library CUSTOM.LIB.
-356-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
Miscellaneous Information
Technical Support
Your questions, comments, and suggestions are welcome.
For technical support email to [email protected] or use the on-line support form at
http://www.SoftTreeTech.com/Support.htm.
Please use the Technical Support Request Form when contacting us by email or fax.
When reporting problems, please provide as much information as possible about your problem. Be sure to
include the following information:
1
Is the problem reproducible? If so, how?
2
What version of Windows are you running? For example, Windows XP, Vista 64-bit, etc.
3
What version of the DB Tools are you running?
4
If a dialog box with an error message was displayed, please include the full text of the dialog box,
including the text in the title bar.
5
If the problem involves an external program, provide as much information as possible on this program?
Also, make sure to include the serial number for your copy of the DB Tools. Use Help/About menu to look
up the correct numbers. Registered users have priority support.
For registration information, purchasing or other sales information, please contact our sales department:
[email protected]
For general information, software updates, the latest information on known problems, and answers to
frequently asked questions visit the DB Tools home page on the Web:
http://www.SoftTreeTech.com/dbtools/index.htm.
We’re happy to help in any way we can, but if you’re having problems please check the troubleshooting
section first to see if your question is answered there.
At SoftTree Technologies, we know that our success depends on how successful you are in your business.
Technical Support Request Form
EMAIL TO: [email protected]
Please include the following contact information:
Name________________________________________________________________________________
Company_____________________________________________________________________________
Address______________________________________________________________________________
City, State/Zip_________________________________________________________________________
Phone__________________________________________Fax__________________________________
CompuServe/Email_____________________________________________________________________
Best Time to Reach You_________________________________________________________________
Operating Systems Information:
Which operating system are you using: _____________________________
Description of the problem:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
-357-
DB Tools for Oracle 6.0
User's Guide
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Describe steps have you taken to try to solve it:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
-358-